Anda di halaman 1dari 378

Translation from Arabic

27.03.2014

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia


Ministry of Water & Electricity
Water Directorate of Ha'il
Technical affairs

(Form No.7)
Public Works Contract
issued by virtue of the Resolution of the Cabinet No. (136)
dated 16.6.1408 Hejra Calendar
modified by the
Code of Government Procurement & Competitions
Issued by virtue of the Royal Resolution no. (85/)
Dated 4.9.1427 Hejra Calendar
and
The Executive Regulation thereof
issued by virtue of the Resolution of the Finance Minister No.
(362)
dated 20.2.1428 Hejra Calendar

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia


Ministry of Water & Electricity
Water Directorate of Ha'il
Technical affairs

Documentations
of
THE PROJECT FOR SUPPORTING AND COMPLETING
(THE FIRST STAGE) OF THE COMPREHENSIVE VILLAGE
WATER PROJECT AT HA'IL REGION
Project No.
63/01/00/0169/12/00/4
63/01/00/0169/19/00/4
Contents:
First Section
Second Section
Third Section
Fourth Section
Fifth Section
Sixth Section
Seventh Section
Eighth Section

: Instructions to Bidders
: Contract Document
: General Conditions
: Contract Annex
: Special Conditions
: Bill of Quantities with Explanations
: Technical Specifications
: Technical Drawings

Contents
Instructions to Bidders ............................................................................................. 18
Item no. (1) Work Scope:......................................................................................... 18
Item no. (2) Tender Documents: .............................................................................. 18
Item no. (3) Tender Acceptance: ............................................................................. 18
Item no. (4) Tendering: ............................................................................................ 19
Item no. (5) Tender Validity: ................................................................................... 20
Item no. (6) Bid Bond .............................................................................................. 20
Item no. (7) The necessary conditions that the bidders should have: ...................... 21
Item no. (8) the responsibility of bidders to know the circumstances of working at
the workplace: .......................................................................................................... 22
Item no. (9) The provided information are not obligatory to the employer:............ 23
Item no. (10) The information accuracy of the tender document is unsecured: ...... 23
Item no. (11) Failure in getting accurate information: ............................................. 23
Item no. (12) No change in the prices for the provided information: ...................... 23
Item no. (13) Amounts and prices: .......................................................................... 24
Item no. (14) Systems and language: ....................................................................... 25
Item no. (15) Implementation method: .................................................................... 26
Item no. (16) Financial affairs: ................................................................................ 26
Item no. (17) Starting time, achieving period, maintenance and insurance period: 26
Item no. (18) Contract and insurances:- ................................................................... 27
Item no. (19) Similar works and services that have been implemented by bidders: 27
Item no. (21) Information that should be provided regarding the law status of the
bidders: ..................................................................................................................... 27
Item no. (22) Bidders address: ................................................................................ 28
Item no. (23) Inquiring about the tender documents: .............................................. 28
Item no. (24) Accepting the tender: ......................................................................... 28
Item no. (25) Expenditures of the tender preparation: ............................................. 28
Item no. (26) The property of the tender documents: .............................................. 29
Item no. (27) Subcontracting and Sub-waive: ......................................................... 29
Item no. (28) Tenders Evaluation: ........................................................................... 29
Item no. (29) Changing the tender documents: ........................................................ 29
Item no. (30) Import and Customs: .......................................................................... 29
Item no. (31) Attachments of the tender documents: ............................................... 29
Item no. (32) The Periods are provided for in the documents: ................................ 30
Item no. (33) Tender Devaluation and cancelation or partition: ............................. 30
Item no. (34) Tender cancelation: ............................................................................ 30
Item no. (35) The functions settlement: ................................................................... 30
Item no. (36) Period of implementing the works and services: ............................... 30
Item no. (37) The contract agreement: ..................................................................... 31
Item no. (38) Systems and Regulations: .................................................................. 31
Contract Samples: .................................................................................................... 32
1. Tender Sample: .................................................................................................... 32
2. Sample of primary insurance letter ...................................................................... 34
3. Sample of a final insurance letter......................................................................... 35
5. Form of Equipment List (Standard Sample) ........................................................ 36
6. Form of Sub-Contractor List ................................................................................ 39

7- Form of a table indicating the main activities and respective durations ............. 40
8- Form of Unit Price Analysis into Percentage ...................................................... 41
9. Summary of Bid Total Value ............................................................................... 42
(Technical Specifications) ....................................................................................... 47
Fourth Chapter ......................................................................................................... 47
Pipes Works ............................................................................................................. 47
4.1. General: ............................................................................................................. 47
4.1.1. Work Scope:................................................................................................... 47
4.1.2. Pipes Materials: .............................................................................................. 47
4.1.3. Pipes pressure rates: ....................................................................................... 47
4.2. Ductile iron pipes: ............................................................................................. 48
4.2.1. General: .......................................................................................................... 48
4.2.2. Pipes joints: .................................................................................................... 48
4.2.3. Joints are made of the ductile iron: ................................................................ 49
4.2.4. Pipes mechanical couplings: .......................................................................... 49
4.2.5. Lining with cement mortar for the ductile iron pipes: ................................... 50
4.2.6. The external covering of the ductile iron pipes and joints: ............................ 52
4.3. Steel pipes: ........................................................................................................ 53
4.3.1. General: .......................................................................................................... 53
4.3.2. Type and quality of the plates and slices: ...................................................... 53
4.3.3. Chemical and mechanical properties: ............................................................ 54
4.3.4. Manufacturing Method: ................................................................................. 54
4.3.5. Manufacturing competence report: ................................................................ 55
4.3.6. Test measurements:........................................................................................ 55
4.3.7. Tests: .............................................................................................................. 57
4.3.7.1. Procedural Tests:......................................................................................... 57
4.3.7.2. Production tests: .......................................................................................... 59
4.3.7.3. Production and test records: ........................................................................ 61
4.3.8. Approval standards: ....................................................................................... 62
4.3.8.1. Variance in dimensions: .............................................................................. 62
4.3.8.2. Optical examination: ................................................................................... 64
4.3.8.3. Non-destructive test: ................................................................................... 64
4.3.8.4. Technology mechanical tests: ..................................................................... 65
4.3.8.5. Frequent defects: ......................................................................................... 66
4.3.9. Defects Fixing: ............................................................................................... 66
4.3.9.1. Defects of the basic material: ...................................................................... 66
4.3.9.2. Welding the defects of the weld splice (seam): .......................................... 66
4.3.9.3. Welding the weld splice (seam) cracks:...................................................... 67
4.3.9.4. Fixing the weld and surface defects: ........................................................... 67
4.3.10. Putting the badges: ....................................................................................... 67
4.3.10.1. Plates and tapes: ........................................................................................ 67
4.3.10.2. Pipes: ......................................................................................................... 67
4.3.11. Covering (External protection) by Polyethylene: ........................................ 68
4.3.11.1. General: ..................................................................................................... 68
4.3.11.2. Polyethylene properties:............................................................................ 69
4.3.11.3. Putting the covering layer: ........................................................................ 70
4.3.11.4. Tests measures: ......................................................................................... 70
4.3.11.5. Tests: ......................................................................................................... 75
4.3.12. Lining with cement mortar: ......................................................................... 77
4.3.12.1. General: ..................................................................................................... 77

4.3.12.2. Service conditions: .................................................................................... 77


4.3.12.3. Materials Specifications: ........................................................................... 77
4.3.12.4. Lining manufacturing: .............................................................................. 78
4.3.12.5. Lining: ....................................................................................................... 79
4.3.12.6. Hardening and treatment requirements: .................................................... 80
4.3.12.7. Tests measurements: ................................................................................. 81
4.3.12.8. Tests: ......................................................................................................... 86
4.3.12.9. Approval standards: .................................................................................. 87
4.3.12.10. Defects maintenance ............................................................................... 88
4.3.13.1. Standardizations scope:............................................................................. 89
4.3.13.2. Materials specifications: ........................................................................... 89
4.3.13.3. Manufacturing: .......................................................................................... 89
4.3.13.4. Test measurements:................................................................................... 90
4.3.13.5. Tests: ......................................................................................................... 91
4.3.12.2. Service conditions: .................................................................................... 93
4.3.12.3. Materials Specifications: ........................................................................... 93
4.3.12.4. Lining manufacturing: .............................................................................. 94
4.3.12.5. Lining: ....................................................................................................... 95
4.3.12.6. Hardening and treatment requirements: .................................................... 95
4.4.8. Automatic Air Valves: ................................................................................... 97
4.4.9. Air Relief Valves: .......................................................................................... 98
4.4.10 Ball Valves .................................................................................................... 98
4.4.11. Check Valves ............................................................................................... 99
Check Valves of the Swing Type: ........................................................................... 99
4.4.12. Electric Control Valves: ............................................................................... 99
Materials: ............................................................................................................... 100
4.4.13. Machines that working through electric motor: ......................................... 100
4.4.14. Gears boxes: ............................................................................................... 101
4.4.14.1. Worm gears boxes: ................................................................................. 101
4.4.14.2. Barrel gears boxes: .................................................................................. 102
4.4.14.3. Chamfered gears boxes: .......................................................................... 102
4.6. Pipeline bed:.................................................................................................... 103
Components of the High-grade Sand: .................................................................... 104
Components of the High-grade Filling: ................................................................. 104
4.7. The Concrete Cover: ....................................................................................... 105
4.8. Blinding Concrete inside the Trenches: .......................................................... 106
4.9. Arranging and Lowering the Pipes According to the Path: ............................ 107
4.10. Length of the Uncovered Trench: ................................................................. 107
4.11. Pressure Pipelines Expansion: ...................................................................... 108
4.11.1. General: ...................................................................................................... 108
4.11.2. Expansion and Connection of the Steel Pipes: .......................................... 110
4.11.2.1. Handing the pipes and putting it in its places: ........................................ 110
4.11.2.2. Steel Pipes Connecting: .......................................................................... 110
4.11.2.3. Welding: .................................................................................................. 111
A. Preparation for Welding:................................................................................... 111
C. Tests: ................................................................................................................. 112
4.11.2.4. Lining and Covering the Joints in the Site:............................................. 112
4.11.2.5. Observing the Quality at the Site: ........................................................... 113
4.11.3. Pipelines Expansion: .................................................................................. 113

4.12. Expanding the Pipes nearer to each other and the current services network, etc.
................................................................................................................................ 114
4.13. Expanding the pipes under the fences, walls, near to the trees, etc. ............. 114
4.14. Expanding the pipes through the water supplies: ......................................... 114
4.15. Expanding the marshes areas: ....................................................................... 115
4.16. The external protection for the installation pieces (Joints): .......................... 116
4.17. Electricity Conduction Continuity: ............................................................... 116
4.18. Cathode Protection:....................................................................................... 117
4.19. Trenches Refilling:........................................................................................ 117
4.20. The Chosen Filling Material: ........................................................................ 118
4.21. Pipelines Test: ............................................................................................... 118
4.22. Valves installations: ...................................................................................... 119
4.23. Rooms Covers: .............................................................................................. 120
4.24. Guide poles: .................................................................................................. 120
4.25. Metallic rims and stairs: ................................................................................ 120
4.27. Flanges/Flanged joints: ................................................................................. 121
(The Technical Specifications) .............................................................................. 124
Chapter Five ........................................................................................................... 124
Returning the surface back to its original status .................................................... 124
(The Technical Specifications) .............................................................................. 125
Chapter Five ........................................................................................................... 125
Returning the surface back to its original status .................................................... 125
5.1. General: ........................................................................................................... 125
5.1.1. Work Scope:................................................................................................. 125
5.2. Maintenance the works of returning the surfaces back to its original status at
the roads: ................................................................................................................ 126
5.3. Asphalted/paved roads (Heavy endurance): ................................................... 126
5.3.1. Asphalted/paved roads (Average endurance): ............................................. 126
5.4. The paved footpaths (Asphalted): ................................................................... 127
5.5. Paved footpaths (Ingots or tiles): .................................................................... 127
5.6. Curbs, channels and edges: ............................................................................. 127
5.7. Returning the surfaces back to its original status at the gardens: ................... 128
(Technical Specifications) ..................................................................................... 129
Chapter Six............................................................................................................. 129
The concrete works and materials.......................................................................... 129
Concrete materials and works ................................................................................ 131
6.1. General: ........................................................................................................... 131
6.1.1. Work Scope:................................................................................................. 131
6.2. Concrete requirements: ................................................................................... 131
6.3. Aggregate/stones sources:............................................................................... 131
6.4. Aggregate/stones examination: ....................................................................... 131
6.5. The proportion of dust in the contents: ........................................................... 132
6.6. The soft aggregate: .......................................................................................... 132
A. Type .................................................................................................................. 132
C. Mortar Sand: ...................................................................................................... 133
6.7. Aggregate/stones storage: ............................................................................... 133
6.8. The rough aggregate: ...................................................................................... 133
6.13. The allowable maximum proportion of sulfate in the tough concrete of the
normal Portland cement: ........................................................................................ 135
6.14. Aggregate chemical reaction: ....................................................................... 135

6.15. Cement type: ................................................................................................. 135


6.16. The alternative cement types: ....................................................................... 136
6.17. The alkaline content in the cement: .............................................................. 136
6.18. Cement sources: ............................................................................................ 136
6.19. Cement freightage: ........................................................................................ 137
6.20. Cement loads:................................................................................................ 137
6.21. Cement dispatches: ....................................................................................... 138
6.22. Cement Storage: ............................................................................................ 138
6.23. Cement approval: .......................................................................................... 138
6.24. Guarantee the cement performance: ............................................................. 139
6.25. Water:............................................................................................................ 139
6.27. Mixer:............................................................................................................ 139
6.29. Materials measure: ........................................................................................ 141
A) Aggregate/Stone: .............................................................................................. 141
B) Cement .............................................................................................................. 141
C) Water: ................................................................................................................ 141
6.32. Mixing the concrete: ..................................................................................... 141
6.33. Sequence of the concrete certification: ......................................................... 142
6.34. Concrete of degree (C30): ............................................................................. 143
6.35. Experimental mixtures at the site:................................................................. 143
6.36. Requirements of the concrete mixture: ......................................................... 144
6.37. Taking samples and testing the concrete: ..................................................... 145
6.38. Concrete additives:........................................................................................ 145
6.39. Concrete transportation: ................................................................................ 146
6.40. Casting module. General:.............................................................................. 146
6.41. Casting moulds from the sawn plates: .......................................................... 147
6.42. Casting moulds of the soft surfaces: ............................................................. 147
6.43. Supplying and storing the materials of the reinforcement: ........................... 147
6.44. Reinforcement materials protection: ............................................................. 148
6.45. Cleaning the reinforcement materials: .......................................................... 148
6.46. Casting the concrete around the reinforcement materials: ............................ 148
6.47. Rebar: ............................................................................................................ 148
6.48. Wires of rebar: .............................................................................................. 148
6.49. Fixing/installing and supporting the reinforcement materials: ..................... 149
6.50. The concrete cover for the reinforcement bars: ............................................ 149
6.51. Bending the reinforcement materials: ........................................................... 150
6.52. Building and blocking the holes: .................................................................. 150
6.53. Structural separators: .................................................................................... 150
6.54. Joints of expansion and shrinkage: ............................................................... 151
6.55. Concrete casting: ........................................................................................... 152
6.56. Concrete casting in or under the water: ........................................................ 153
6.57. The concrete treatment and protection:......................................................... 153
6.58. Removing the casting moulds (tensile):........................................................ 155
6.59. Seats of the machines and cement injection: ................................................ 156
6.60. The items of the concrete: ............................................................................. 156
6.60.1. General: ...................................................................................................... 156
6.60.2. Hook retainers: ........................................................................................... 156
6.60.3. Steel ornaments: ......................................................................................... 157
6.60.4. Pipes: .......................................................................................................... 157
6.61. Finishing the surfaces: .................................................................................. 157

6.62. Concrete works under the hot temperature: .................................................. 159


6.63. Re-making the defective works: ................................................................... 160
6.64. Water sealing property: ................................................................................. 160
6.65. The liquid mortar that is used in injection: ................................................... 160
6.66. Mortar: .......................................................................................................... 161
6.67. Finishing the ground by granolithic concrete: .............................................. 161
Chapter VI.............................................................................................................. 164
Structural iron works.............................................................................................. 164
7-1 General............................................................................................................. 164
7-1-1 Scope of Work.............................................................................................. 164
7-3 Materials .......................................................................................................... 164
7-4 Metal surfaces .................................................................................................. 164
The eighth chapter.................................................................................................. 166
The roads and works of the site ............................................................................. 166
8-1 General: ........................................................................................................... 166
8-1-1 The work scope: ........................................................................................... 166
8-3 Roads establishment: ....................................................................................... 166
8-3-1 General: ........................................................................................................ 166
8-3-7 the water addition: ........................................................................................ 169
8-3-8 the flatting tests: ........................................................................................... 169
8-3-9 the trial squash:............................................................................................. 169
8-3-10 the available variance: ................................................................................ 169
8-3-11 the maintenance of the main layer: ............................................................ 170
8-3-12 the mixture of the asphalted cement for the main layer and the surface layer:
................................................................................................................................ 170
8-4 the beautifying works of the site: .................................................................... 172
8-5 the external cornice carmine flags: .................................................................. 172
8-6 the cultivation of the plants: ............................................................................ 172
8-7 the agriculture soil: .......................................................................................... 173
8-8 the gravel that is paved on the land: ................................................................ 173
8-9 the blackening fences/ the external fences: ..................................................... 173
Chapter nine ........................................................................................................... 174
The building works ................................................................................................ 174
9.1. General ............................................................................................................ 174
9.1.1. Work scope: ................................................................................................. 174
9.2. The walls of the concrete block: ..................................................................... 174
9.3. Mortar, coating and the thickness concrete: ................................................... 175
9.4. Finishing the external ornamental wall:.......................................................... 175
9.5.The walls tiles ................................................................................................. 175
9.6. The unpolished ceramic tiles for the floors: ................................................... 176
9.7. Terrazzo tile: ................................................................................................... 176
9.8. The extension joints in the floors tile:............................................................. 177
9.9. Fixing the ceramic tile directly on the concrete: ............................................. 177
9.10. Separation slices/tapes between the floors:................................................... 177
9.11. Finishing the floors by the chemicals-resistant epoxy: ................................. 177
9.12. Finishing the ceil, the concrete surface tile:.................................................. 177
19.3. Finishing the ceiling: The metal surface tile: ................................................ 178
9.14. Aluminum windows ...................................................................................... 179
9.15. Fixing the aluminum windows and its glass: ................................................ 180
9.16. The catcher of the grating sands: .................................................................. 180

9.17. The components of the suspended ceilings (Dropped): ................................ 181


9.18.Woods: ........................................................................................................... 181
9.19. The glued laminated timber (Plywood): ....................................................... 182
9.20. The plates of the collected wooden pieces and the plates of the laminated
grained wood pieces:.............................................................................................. 183
9.21. The fiber building plates: .............................................................................. 183
9.22. Doors:............................................................................................................ 183
9.23. The wooden frames for the doors: ................................................................ 183
9.24. The metal frames for the doors: .................................................................... 183
9.25. The aluminum frames for the doors:............................................................. 184
9.26. The wooden doors: ........................................................................................ 184
9.27. The adhesive material for the wood:............................................................. 185
9.28. Nails: ............................................................................................................. 185
9.29. Bolts: ............................................................................................................. 185
9.30. The metal doors: ........................................................................................... 185
9.31. The vitrified aluminum doors: ...................................................................... 185
9.32. Fixing the glass plates on the flat doors:....................................................... 185
9.33. The doors equipment: ................................................................................... 186
9.34. The doors beams: .......................................................................................... 186
9.35. The roller shutlers doors and the external rotational sloped doors:- ............. 186
9.36. Blocking the separators by insulating joints: ................................................ 186
9.37. Fixings of the interrupters walls heads: ........................................................ 187
9.38. Blocking the walls bores: .............................................................................. 187
9.39. The humidity-preventive insulating: ............................................................. 187
The tenth chapter.................................................................................................... 188
The paints ............................................................................................................... 188
10-1 general ........................................................................................................... 188
10-1-1 the work scope:........................................................................................... 188
10-2 the material: ................................................................................................... 188
10-3 the surrounding circumstances: ..................................................................... 188
10-5 the protection of the other surfaces: .............................................................. 189
10-6 The preparing of the concert filler and the works of the block, wood etc. 189
10-7 the preparing of the woof for the painting works: ......................................... 190
10-8 the preparing and using of the protecting decorating for the woods: ............ 190
10-9 the usage/put of the paint general: .............................................................. 191
10-10 the metallic surfaces- general: ..................................................................... 191
10-12 ...................................................................................................................... 193
Paint Usage (outer layer) ....................................................................................... 193
(10 -15)................................................................................................................... 194
Final Layers of enamel paint: ................................................................................ 194
The eleventh chapter .............................................................................................. 198
The metallic works................................................................................................. 198
11-1 general: .......................................................................................................... 198
11-1-1 the work scope:........................................................................................... 198
11-9 the molded and the hammered: ...................................................................... 201
11-10 The fixation units: ........................................................................................ 201
11-11 the welding: ................................................................................................. 201
11-12 the sliding gates: .......................................................................................... 201
The works of plumbing and public facilities ......................................................... 203
Chapter Twelve: ..................................................................................................... 204

Plumbing Works and Health Facilities .................................................................. 204


12.1. General: ......................................................................................................... 204
12.1.1. Work Scope:............................................................................................... 204
12.2 Hot and Cold Water Systems: ........................................................................ 204
12.2.1. General Requirements:............................................................................... 204
12.2.2. Materials: ................................................................................................... 204
12.2.3. Connecting and fixing the pipes: ............................................................... 206
12.2.11. The electrical Water Heater: .................................................................... 210
12.2.12 Water systems sterilization: ...................................................................... 211
12.2.3. Testing the water pipes and the storage means: ......................................... 211
12.2.14. Thermal insulation: .................................................................................. 211
12.3.1. General: ...................................................................................................... 213
12.3.2. The plastic pipes and the installation pieces above the ground: ................ 213
12.3.4. The drainage system by polypropylene pipes: ........................................... 215
12.3.5. The sanitary tools and its equipment: ........................................................ 215
12.3.6. Fixing units ................................................................................................ 216
12.3.7. Installing the sewage pipes and the waste water:....................................... 217
12.3.8. The protective covers on the sanitary tools: .............................................. 219
12.3.9. Test of sewage pipes installation: .............................................................. 219
12.4. Sewage under the ground: ............................................................................. 220
12.5. The cold water services:................................................................................ 220
The fourteenth chapter ........................................................................................... 220
The installation of the connecting cables (telemetry) ............................................ 220
14-1 general: .......................................................................................................... 220

Ministry of Post Telegraph & Telephone .... 226


The sixteenth chapter ............................................................................................. 266
The installation and electrical equipment .............................................................. 266
16-1 The general requires of the design and manufacture of electrical systems. .. 266
16-1-1 The work scope .......................................................................................... 266
16-1-2 The standards.............................................................................................. 266
16-1-3 the environmental circumstances: .............................................................. 266
16-1-4 The system specifications: ......................................................................... 267
16-1-5 the requirements of the design and implements: ........................................ 268
16-1-6 The work limits: ......................................................................................... 272
16-1-7 The paint:.................................................................................................... 272
16-1-8 to store once the arrival: ............................................................................. 273
16-1-9 The schemes and files: ............................................................................... 273
16-2 The electrical keys group with the medium voltage: ..................................... 274
16-2-1 The work scope: ......................................................................................... 274
16-2-2 the standards: .............................................................................................. 274
16-2-3 The work circumstances: ............................................................................ 274
16-2-4 The equipment specifications: .................................................................... 274
16-2-6 the test: ....................................................................................................... 280
16-3-7 the accessories: ........................................................................................... 284
16-4-1 the work scope:........................................................................................... 284
16-4-3 the specifications of the work: ................................................................... 284
16-4-4 the evaluative designed data:...................................................................... 284
16-4-5 the specifications of the system:................................................................. 285
16-4-6 the design and structure: ............................................................................. 285
16-4-6-1 the general design: .................................................................................. 285

16-4-7 the properties of the equipment: ................................................................. 289


16-4-8 the installation instructions......................................................................... 295
16-4-9 the test ........................................................................................................ 295
16-4-10 the accessories .......................................................................................... 296
16-5 the equipment of the continues current.......................................................... 296
16-5-1 the work scope ............................................................................................ 296
16-5-2 the standard ................................................................................................ 296
16-5-3 the operating circumstances ....................................................................... 296
16-5-4 the bases of the design ................................................................................ 297
16-5-6 the design and the structure: ....................................................................... 298
16-5-7 the fixation.................................................................................................. 301
16-5-8 the test: ....................................................................................................... 301
16-5-8-1 the examination and test in the factory ................................................... 301
16-5-8-2 the tests of the quality ............................................................................. 301
16-5-8-3 the testes in the site ................................................................................. 302
16-5-9 the accessories ............................................................................................ 302
16-6 the prevention system of the power cut. ........................................................ 302
16-6-1 the work scope ............................................................................................ 302
16-6-2 the standards: .............................................................................................. 303
16-6-3 the operating circumstances ....................................................................... 303
16-6-4 the evaluative data of the design: ............................................................... 303
16-6-5-1 the operating............................................................................................ 304
16.6.6. Designing and Manufacturing: .................................................................. 305
16.6.6.1. Transformer............................................................................................. 305
16.6.6.2. Voltage stabilizer .................................................................................... 306
16.6.6.3. Transformation device ............................................................................ 306
16.6.6.4. The distribution box of the current-interruption preventive ................... 306
16.6.7. Fixing ......................................................................................................... 306
16.6.8. Test............................................................................................................. 306
16.6.8.1. Examination and test at the factory ......................................................... 306
16.6.8.2. Quality tests ............................................................................................ 307
16.6.8.3. Tests at the site ........................................................................................ 307
16.6.9. Accessories ................................................................................................ 307
16.7. The electrical installations for the buildings ................................................. 307
16.7.1. Work Scope ................................................................................................ 307
16.7.2. Standards .................................................................................................... 308
16.7.3. Operation conditions .................................................................................. 308
16.7.4. Designing virtual data ................................................................................ 308
16.7.5. Work limit .................................................................................................. 308
16.7.6. Installations description ............................................................................. 308
16.7.7. Lightening levels ........................................................................................ 309
16.7.8. Lightening types......................................................................................... 310
16.7.9. Installations types....................................................................................... 311
16.7.10. Designing and the materials ..................................................................... 312
16.7.10.1. Cables and wires ................................................................................... 312
16.7.10.2. Pipes ...................................................................................................... 312
16.7.10.3. Jacks ...................................................................................................... 312
16.7.10.4. Switches, buttons, the terminal boxes ................................................... 312
16.7.10.5. Housing distributions ............................................................................ 312
16.7.10.6. Fire-resistant walls ................................................................................ 313

16.7.11. Protection systems ................................................................................... 313


16.7.12. Light protection ........................................................................................ 313
16.7.13. Telephone system..................................................................................... 313
16.7.14. The air system .......................................................................................... 314
16.7.5. Doors system.............................................................................................. 314
16.7.16. Group of the telephones tools .................................................................. 314
16.7.17. Test........................................................................................................... 314
16.7.18. Accessories .............................................................................................. 315
16.7.19. Specifying the installations ...................................................................... 315
16.8. The external lightening ................................................................................. 316
16.8.1. Field ........................................................................................................... 316
16.8.2. Standards .................................................................................................... 316
16.8.3. Operation Conditions ................................................................................. 316
16.8.4. Design rates data ........................................................................................ 317
16.8.5. Tasks and Building .................................................................................... 317
16.8.5.1. Lightening systems ................................................................................. 317
16.8.5.2. Lightening columns ................................................................................ 318
16.8.5.3. Lightening requirements ......................................................................... 318
16.8.5.4. Cables and the ground ............................................................................. 318
16.8.6. Installations and connection ....................................................................... 319
16.8.7. Test............................................................................................................. 319
16.8.8. Accessories ................................................................................................ 319
16.9. Cables and their expansion ........................................................................... 320
16.9.1. Field ........................................................................................................... 320
16.9.2. Standards .................................................................................................... 320
16.9.3. Conditions of expanding the cables ........................................................... 320
16.9.4. Designing requirements ............................................................................. 320
16.9.5. Preparation for the cables expansion ......................................................... 321
16.9.5.1. Transportation and discharge .................................................................. 321
16.9.5.2. General Requirements ............................................................................. 322
16.9.6. Cables trenches .......................................................................................... 322
16.9.6.1. The trench depth ..................................................................................... 322
16.9.6.2. Bed and Coverage ................................................................................... 322
16.9.6.3. Distances between the cables in the trench: ............................................ 323
16.9.7. The pipes path ............................................................................................ 323
16.9.7.1. Wall cross................................................................................................ 323
16.10.7.2. Another crossings.................................................................................. 324
16.9.8. Cables Fixing ............................................................................................. 324
16.9.8.1. Number and the individuals .................................................................... 324
16.9.8.2. Cables pulling ......................................................................................... 324
16.9.8.3. Extending the cables in the buildings: .................................................... 325
16.9.8.4. Cables and its marks ............................................................................... 326
16.9.8.5. Connection boxes:................................................................................... 326
16.9.8.6. Supports and installation ......................................................................... 326
16.9.9. Tests and examination................................................................................ 326
16.10. Grounding ................................................................................................... 327
16.10.1. Work scope .............................................................................................. 327
16.10.2. Standards .................................................................................................. 327
16.10.3. The soil conditions ................................................................................... 327
16.10.4. Designing requirements ........................................................................... 327

16.10.5. Materials and building ............................................................................. 328


16.10.5.1. The ground materials ............................................................................ 328
16.10.5.2. The ground network: ............................................................................. 328
16.10.5.3. Extending the ground network .............................................................. 328
16.10.5.4. The ground paths air .......................................................................... 329
16.10.5.5. The ground system of the substations complex: ................................... 329
16.10.5.6. The power expenditures ........................................................................ 329
16.10.5.7. The cables pipes and the cables .......................................................... 330
16.10.5.8. Transformers ......................................................................................... 330
16.10.5.9. Establishing the pipelines ..................................................................... 330
16.10.5.10. Buildings and the steel construction for the metal blocks. ................. 330
16.10.5.11. The lightening protection .................................................................... 330
16.10.5.12. Marks .................................................................................................. 330
16.10.5.13. The work achievement: ....................................................................... 330
16.10.6. Test........................................................................................................... 331
16.11. Fire alarm system ........................................................................................ 331
16.11.1. The work scope ........................................................................................ 331
16.11.2. The system description ............................................................................ 331
16.11.3. The building and design requirements ..................................................... 331
16.11.3.1. General requirements ............................................................................ 331
13.11.3.1.1. Codes and standards ........................................................................... 331
16.11.3.1.2. Installation.......................................................................................... 331
16.11.3.1.3. Electric power feeding ....................................................................... 332
16.11.4. The components description .................................................................... 332
16.11.4.1. Fire alarm board .................................................................................... 332
16.11.4.2. The observation sub-board .................................................................... 333
16.11.4.3. The smoke detectors ............................................................................. 333
16.11.4.3.1. Function ............................................................................................. 333
16.11.4.3.2. Construction ....................................................................................... 333
16.11.4.4. The control switches of the fire alarm .................................................. 333
16.11.4.5. The fire alarm horn ............................................................................... 334
16.11.4.6. The external signal treatment ................................................................ 334
16.11.5. Work limits .............................................................................................. 334
16.11.6. Tests ......................................................................................................... 334
16.12. The electric engines, Starting-up and the system of the speed organizer ... 334
16.12.1. Work scope .............................................................................................. 334
16.12.2. Standards .................................................................................................. 335
16.12.3. Operation conditions ................................................................................ 335
16.12.4. The engine specifications:........................................................................ 335
16.12.5. The specified design data ......................................................................... 335
16.12.6. Starting-up and the speed setting system ................................................. 336
16.12.6.1. Transformers ......................................................................................... 337
16.12.6.2. The transformer unit:- ........................................................................... 337
The measure equipment: ........................................................................................ 337
16.12.7. Design and construction ........................................................................... 338
16.12.7.1. Cooling method..................................................................................... 338
16.12.7.2. The constructer styles ........................................................................... 338
16.12.7.3. Vibration ............................................................................................... 338
16.12.7.5. Protection .............................................................................................. 339
16.12.7.6. The dimensions specifications .............................................................. 339

16.12.7.7. Frame and Cover ................................................................................... 339


16.12.7.7. The column ........................................................................................... 339
16.12.7.8. Holders .................................................................................................. 339
16.12.7.9. Insulation............................................................................................... 339
16.12.7.10. The additional devices and the measure tools..................................... 339
The engine:............................................................................................................. 339
The oil system: ....................................................................................................... 340
Cooling system: ..................................................................................................... 340
16.12.7.11. The terminal boxes .............................................................................. 340
16.12.7.12. The local control box .......................................................................... 340
16.12.7.13. The boards of the estimative values .................................................... 340
16.12.7.14. Painting works .................................................................................... 341
16.12.8. Test........................................................................................................... 341
16.12.8.1. Examination and test in the factory ...................................................... 341
16.12.8.2. Tests at the site ...................................................................................... 341
16.12.9. Accessories .............................................................................................. 342
16.13.1. Work scope .............................................................................................. 342
16.13.2. Standards .................................................................................................. 342
16.13.3. The operation conditions.......................................................................... 343
16.13.4. The specifications of the equipment ........................................................ 343
16.13.4.4. Constructer requirements ...................................................................... 345
16.14. Test.............................................................................................................. 345
16.14.1. Examination and test inside the factory ................................................... 345
16.14.2. Quality tests ............................................................................................. 345
16.14.3. Testing in the site ..................................................................................... 345
16.14.4. Accessories .............................................................................................. 346
16.15. Revision ...................................................................................................... 346
16.15.1. Work scope .............................................................................................. 346
16.15.2. Operation conditions ................................................................................ 346
16.15.3. Standards .................................................................................................. 346
The seventeenth chapter ......................................................................................... 348
Telecommunications/Telemetering........................................................................ 348
The seventeenth chapter ......................................................................................... 349
Telecommunication/Telemetering ......................................................................... 349
17.1. General: ......................................................................................................... 349
17.2. System Configuration: .................................................................................. 349
17.3. The functional requirements: ........................................................................ 349
17.3.1. The control requirements: .......................................................................... 349
17.3.1.1. The operation statuses of the well pumps ............................................... 349
The system of the central manual status ................................................................ 350
17.3.2. Sending the signals to the remote control/ telemetering ............................ 350
17.3.2.1. The well pumps (Experimental for 15 wells) ......................................... 350
17.3.3. Discovering the leakage ............................................................................. 351
17.3.4. Telemetering requirements: ....................................................................... 351
17.4. The system description ................................................................................. 352
17.4.1. The system work ........................................................................................ 352
The eighteenth chapter ........................................................................................... 352
The well pumps ...................................................................................................... 352
The eighteenth chapter ........................................................................................... 353
The wells pumps .................................................................................................... 353

18.1. General: ......................................................................................................... 353


18.2. Definitions: ................................................................................................... 353
18.3. The virtual/design age: .................................................................................. 354
18.4. Castings:........................................................................................................ 354
18.5. Forgings: ....................................................................................................... 355
18.6. The plates of the estimative capacity, the names plates and the identification
cards: ...................................................................................................................... 355
18.7. Analyzing the water that will be pumped: .................................................... 356
18.8. Corrosion obstruction: .................................................................................. 356
18.9. The external protection ................................................................................. 356
A. In the factory of the manufacturing company ................................................... 358
B. In the site ........................................................................................................... 358
5. The works of the pipe networks that is buried in the concrete .......................... 358
6. Painting by enamel that is fixed by heat ............................................................ 358
18.10. Nuts and bolts, studs, flanges:..................................................................... 359
18.11. Spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment: .......................................... 359
18.12. Extension/ Electric power feeding: ............................................................. 359
18.13. The electric power for building/ implementing and tests: .......................... 359
18.14. The temporal storage, protection and filling: .............................................. 359
A. Filling: ............................................................................................................... 359
2. Storage: .............................................................................................................. 360
18.15. Guarantees of the good performance: ......................................................... 361
18.16. Tests at the manufacturing company workshop: ........................................ 361
18.17. Tests of the workshop on the vertical pipes: ............................................... 362
18.18. Tests of the workshop on the pumps: ......................................................... 362
18.19. Tests of the workshop on the engines: ........................................................ 362
18.20. Tests of the workshop on the electric equipment: ...................................... 363
18.21. Tests certificates: ........................................................................................ 363
18.23. Tests at the site: ........................................................................................... 364
18.25.1.1. The general requirements of the pumps: ............................................... 365
18.25.1.2. The general requirements of the engines: ............................................. 366
18.25.1.3. The general requirements of the column pipe: ..................................... 366
18.25.2. The submerged pumps: ............................................................................ 367
18.25.2.1. General: ................................................................................................. 367
18.25.2.2. The engine:............................................................................................ 367
18.25.3. Installing the pumps ................................................................................. 368
18.26. Electrical Installations:................................................................................ 369
18.26.1. General ..................................................................................................... 369
18.26.2. The container and compartments: ............................................................ 369
2) The remote-measure and wireless compartment ............................................... 370
3) Compartment of the transformers ...................................................................... 370
4) The compartment of the electric switches group for the high voltage: ............. 370
18.26.3. The electric switches for the high voltage: .............................................. 370
18.26.4. Transformers: ........................................................................................... 371
1. The starter: ......................................................................................................... 372
2. Fuses/ The mechanical cutter ............................................................................. 372
3. Contactors .......................................................................................................... 372
5. The protection devices ....................................................................................... 372
6. Correcting the electric power factor .................................................................. 373
7. The circuit cutter ................................................................................................ 373

18.26.6. Control gear cubicle: ................................................................................ 374


3) Fuses .................................................................................................................. 375
4) The current transformers ................................................................................... 375
5) Protection relays ................................................................................................ 375
7) Devices .............................................................................................................. 376
9) Labeling ............................................................................................................. 377
10) The guide lamps............................................................................................... 377

First Section:
Instructions to Bidders

Instructions to Bidders
Ministry of Water & Electricity (Water directorate general of Ha'il) desires to
deal with companies and institutions that are licensed to practice the work
which includes works and services of the tender.
This is according to the rules of government tenders and procurement law that
issued by Royal Decree no. (m/58) on 4/9/1427 Hijri, and its executive rule that
is issued by the minister of finance, act no. (362) on 20/2/1428 Hijri. Also, the
amendments, acts, circulations or instructions that issued regarding them such
as, including not limited to, the following:Item no. (1) Work Scope:
Works and services that are expected to be implemented include (The project
of supporting and completing (The first stage) for the comprehensive
village water project at Ha'il) that are stated in the tender documents.
Item no. (2) Tender Documents:
The documents of tender include the following:
A. Instructions for the bidders.
B. Sample of the tender.
C. Basic document of the contract.
D. General conditions (if found).
E. Particular conditions (if found).
F. Specifications.
G. Supplements
H. Schedules of amounts and prices lists.
I. Charts.
These documents are inserted as a digital copy into a Compact Disk (CD).
Bidder contracts for printing, sealing and offering such documents in his tender
in addition to the other required documents as the conditions and specifications
requires.
Item no. (3) Tender Acceptance:
3.1. Any tender is provided to the ministry (directorate) after the deadline of
the providing according to the target date that is stated in the tender
announcement, will not be accepted.
3.2. Tenders are not accepted unless they were conforming to the prototypes
that are certified by the ministry/ directorate and sealed by its seal. Also, all the
schedules of amounts and prices lists; written and complete.

3.3. Without breaching of what provided in the item no. (6) of these
instructions, if the conditions, specifications, amounts schedules, or the
certified sample of any tender are changed, it will not be considered. Also, all
the documents of the tender should be written with ink.
Item no. (4) Tendering:
4.1. Tender should be conforming to the prototypes that are received from the
ministry (directorate), and sealed by its seal.
4.2. Tender should be signed by the bidder. If it was tendered by a company or
institution, it should be signed by its permanent representative. It should also be
attached to all the documents that are provided in the paragraph no. (4.3.) of
this item.
4.3. The following documents should be attached to the tender:
A. Tender documents (Look at item no. /8).
B. Implementation method (Look at item no. /16).
C. Capacity proofs (Look at items no. / 20&21).
D. Details of the partnership contract (Look at item no. /22).
E. Title (Look at item no. / 23).
F. Any explanatory documents referred to hereinafter.
G. Bid bond (Look at item no. /7).
4.4. Tender is not accepted unless it is provided complete with all the required
documents are put inside a sealed envelope in such way that guarantee its
privacy and not opening it.
It also should be free from any distinctive writings and marks which may
identify its owner, addressed to his Excellency/ .
Ministry of Water & Electricity (Water general directorate of Ha'il).
_ Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
Tender should be delivered before that target date of opening the sealed tenders
through the registered mail, or handing over to the ministry (directorate).
Bidder is given a receipt includes the date and time of tendering. Any tender
will be delivered to the ministry (directorate) after the deadline of tendering, it
will not be considered.
The following illustration should be stated on the envelope:
(Tender . )
Private tender () Tender no. ()
4.5. The provided outer envelope should contain two envelopes that include the
following:
The first envelope: Bid bond.

The Second envelope: All the documents that are stated in the paragraphs (1-2)
of item no. (4) of these instructions.
Both of the two envelopes should be sealed. Names of the bidder and project,
contents of the envelope and the date of tendering should be stated on the
envelopes.
4.6. Tender should be attached with a letter that illustrates the attachments in
details. Any document will not be referred to in the tender, will not be
considered.
4.7. Envelopes are officially opened at the target date of the tender
announcement. Bidder should assign a representative of him, or an authorized
agent to attend the envelopes opening.
4.8. Tenders opening committee will not receive any tenders, letters, envelopes,
or samples will be provided during tenders opening session.
4.9. Ministry (directorate) may postpone the date of tenders opening. Bidders
will be informed and notified with the new date of tenders opening.
4.10. Bidder may withdraw his tender before the tendering deadline.
Item no. (5) Tender Validity:
5.1. The tender is valid to ninety (90) days from the date that is specified for
tenders opening. If the bidder withdrew his tender before such period is ended,
he will not get his bid bond back.
5.2. Ministry (directorate) may ask the bidder for extending the validity period
of their tenders for additional ninety (90) days.
Bidders should accept within two weeks from the date they are notified with
the extension request. Those who don't provide anything during such period
will be considered that he doesn't agree for extending their tenders; moreover,
they will get their bid bond back.
Item no. (6) Bid Bond
6.1. Bidder should attach with his tender any of the following guarantees:
A. Bank guarantee from one of the national banks.
B. Bank guarantee from an abroad bank that will be provided by one of the
banks working at the Kingdom.
C. Financial guarantee in addition to the bank guarantee regarding the cases of
living guarantee, or such cases that require urgent guarantee, provided that not
exceed the living or works costs of three days.
6.2. The value of such guarantee should vary from one percentage (1%) to two
percentages (2%) of the tender value. This is according to the rules of item no.
(11) of the government tenders and procurement law. The tender that
contravenes such rules will be discarded, whatever the decrease rate was.

6.3. The guarantee formula should be conforming to the bank guarantees


formula that is certified by Ministry of Finance.
6.4. Bank guarantee should be valid to not less than ninety (90) days from the
date that is set for tenders opening. However, the tender that contravene that,
will be discarded whatever the decrease period was.
6.5. Guarantee is payable when the ministry (directorate) requires that without
an adjudication or a decision from an arbitration board.
6.6. The bid bonds are given back to the discarded bidders after the
adjudication of tenders, also in the case of tender cancellation, or after the
expiry of the tenders validity period.
6.7. Ministry (directorate) may ask for extending the bid bond for the
successful bidder, if it expired before providing the performance bond.
6.8. Guarantee should be unconditional and irrevocable. Also, its value should
be free from any discounts related to taxes, customs, or other expenses.
6.9. Any tender is not attached with the original bid bond letter, will not be
considered.
Any tender is attached with a guarantee under a check, showing seriousness for
cash payment, a discount request from sum of the ministry (directorate), or
attaching a copy of the indemnity letter, will not be considered.
Item no. (7) The necessary conditions that the bidders should
have:
7.1. Bidder should attach the following documents and authorizations
(provided that being valid) to their tenders:
A. The commercial register or the regular license of works or services he is
tendering to.
B. Career rating in the field of works or services regarding the contracts of
public works or operation, maintenance, and cleanliness of tendering with
observance to the financial limitations of the rating degree according to the
rules of contractors rating system. (Any tender contravene this, will be
discarded.)
C. Tax or alms payment certificate.
D. A certificate from General Organization for Social Insurance states that the
institution is registered, and the deposits are paid.
E. A certificate of affiliation to the industrial commercial chamber.
F. The investment license, if the bidder was licensed according to the foreign
investment system.
G. Certificate of realizing the regular percentage for settling the jobs.
H. Attaching a certificate, from one of the national banks which the bidder
treats with, states the financial status and the credit ability.

7.2. If the tender was provided by institutions and/or foreign companies, the
following data and information should be attached to the tender:
A. A certificate from an acknowledged and accredited bank to Saudi Arabian
Monetary Agency that states the company capacity, financial reputation and the
commercial deal of the company.
B. A statement of the works that the company has achieved outside the
Kingdom in the project that it tendered to implement it inside the Kingdom,
provided that it should be certified by the industrial and commercial chamber
of the same country of the company.
C. The completion certificate that the company got for the works it
implemented, whether inside or outside the Kingdom.
D. A copy of the company budget, profit and loss account for the last two
years. It should be certified by an acknowledged chartered accountant.
7.3. Bidders should attach an authorization letter of the authorized agent for
signing any document related to the tender that is certified by an official board.
7.4. If the bidder didn't provide any of the documents, licenses, data and
information that referred to in the two paragraphs (8.1. & 8.2.) of this item with
his tender during tendering,
Or the provided tender was expiry, he may be granted an additional period that
the ministry (directorate) determines for completing such documents, licenses,
data and information, provided that not leading to ending the targeted period of
the tender adjudication. If he didn't provide it on that time, he will be discarded
from such tender.
Item no. (8) the responsibility of bidders to know the
circumstances of working at the workplace:
8.1. Bidder who is tendered to implement the required services and works
should survey the nature of works he is tendered to, the circumstances of
implementation, knowing all its data and details, what may impact on the
categories of his tender and the risk of its commitments.
8.2. It is expected that the bidder should have made known, read and
understood its content.
Also, making sure of the supply sources, sufficiency, the way of getting it,
transporting it to the workplace regarding materials, water, fuel, power,
workers, and all the necessary for works and services of the contract.
Also, Precaution should be taken for all the possible emergencies, whatever its
type and reason was including entering to the different workplaces.
Bidder should make sure of getting all the necessary data and illustrations for
all the matters related to services and works achieving and completion before
the date of tendering. Also, knowing the project volume and all the general
information which enable him to evaluate the necessary services and works.

8.3. Ministry (directorate) is not responsible for the authenticity of any


information and/or data that stated in the report or any other documents
attached to the tender documents. Also, any mistake may the report has and
cause financial loss or any additional costs in the required services and works.
All the reports, information and data bidders were provided with, were only for
helping them for the purpose of illustrating the required services and works, but
it will not exempt any from his commitments.
8.4. Bidder is expected to be convinced with the validity and sufficiency of the
tender, categories and prices that are stated in the amounts schedules, and that
it will answer all his contracted commitments resulting from the project
implementation, all the necessary things, and matters related to the right
implementation and completion of works and services.
Item no. (9) The provided information are not obligatory to the
employer:
Any information or data are not obligatory to ministry (directorate) except the
tender documents, or any official letters that are issued by it and gave it out to
the bidders.
Item no. (10) The information accuracy of the tender document is
unsecured:
Bidder should make sure of the authenticity of any data or information stated in
the tender documents, any approximate amounts stated in the schedules and
prices lists (if found) related to the necessary services and works of this tender.
Item no. (11) Failure in getting accurate information:
Failure of bidders to get any accredited data and information about the nature,
circumstances and place of the work, or to appreciate their commitments under
the tenders' documents, will not exempt them from the responsibility resulting
from such failure.
Item no. (12) No change in the prices for the provided information:
12.1. Bidder should provide his price according to the conditions,
specifications, and amounts schedules that are certified by the ministry
(directorate), also including all the expenses, costs, and fees of the bidder.
Ministry (directorate) will not accept any claim for increase the prices that are
stated in the amounts schedules, any other schedules, or any prices were
determined in the tender value after providing it.

12.2. Bidder is not allowed to amend any of the conditions, specifications and
the amounts schedules. Also, not deleting any of the items or specifications of
the tender. The tender contravene to that, will be discarded.
12.3. The successful bidder is not allowed to claim any allegations for
providing him with information, giving him any promises or guarantees by any
person (whether he was one of the ministry (directorate) employees or not).
Also, any failure or neglect appear during showing his tender or determining
the necessary prices, will not exempt him from undertaking any risks, and his
responsibilities of implementing the commitments stated in the tender
documents.
Item no. (13) Amounts and prices:
13.1. Amounts that stated in the amounts schedules and the other schedules are
approximate (if found).
Bidders should make sure of its accuracy. If they discovered important
differences, they should state this in a separated brochure to the ministry
(directorate) before the date of tendering.
Bidders also should state such differences when showing their tenders, as there
will no be any chance to change the prices if it is been realized that the real
amounts differ from the amounts stated in the amounts schedules or others.
13.2. Prices of the tender should be individually and wholly written in the
amounts schedules in the numbers and letters format. Also, its value should be
written with the American dollar, if the tender value exceeded (300.000.000)
three hundred million Saudi riyal (according to the exchange rate when
tendering), and also if the tender was offered by institutions, foreign
companies, or the joint foreign Saudi companies and institutions.
If the value tender was lesser, the individually and wholly tender prices should
be written in the amounts schedules in the numbers and letters format with the
value of Saudi riyal.
On the other side, tenders that its value exceed (300.000.000) three hundred
million Saudi riyal, also provided by institutions and companies that fully
owned to Saudis and registered in the Kingdom, it is allowed to write the prices
with the value of Saudi riyal or American dollar, provided that clearly
determining the currency in the tender.
13.3. Bidder is not allowed to omit or leave any item of the tender without
quotation. In case of omitting any of the items in the amounts schedules,
ministry (directorate) will be entitled to discard the tender, or considering the
unquoted items included in the total value of the tender; moreover, the bidder
will be considered that he accepted such condition when tendering.
13.4. Bidder should sign his tender and all the documents including the
amounts schedules and prices lists.

13.5. Bidder is not allowed to amend, delete, or obliterate in the prices list. Any
correction is made by the bidder should be re-written in the numbers and letters
format, signing, and sealing it.
Bidder knows that if the value of the prices list that are amended, deleted, or
obliterated exceeded (10%) of the price list, tender may be discarded.
13.6. The total value of every item of the different items that are stated in the
amounts schedules and prices lists should be written to be used in the
comparison of the received tenders.
The real total value is the product of amount and price multiplication. It should
not be paid unless in exchange for the real amount, not under the amount stated
in the amounts schedules.
13.7. If an item was stated in any of the tender documents without setting
amounts in the prices lists, bidder is committed to set a price to it in his tender.
If he didn't that, it will be included in the total value of the tender.
13.8. Ministry (directorate) may do the necessary corrections if it is found that
there were mistakes in the total value of any item because of a mistake in the
written amount and price multiplication, or assembling the values of many
items.
13.9. Categories of prices lists should include and cover all the bidder
commitments of expenses whatever its type that he incurs regarding every item
of the project items. Also, it should contain completing all the works and
services then delivering it to the ministry (directorate).
13.10. Tender that is based on a percentage decrease or lesser value of others
tenders, will not be considered.
13.11. Ministry (directorate) may revise the prices and amounts schedules that
are stated in the tender; whether in its individually or wholly, and doing the
necessary correction in the tender.
If there was a difference between the price that is written in the letters format
and that in numbers, price that stated in letters is the one will be taken into
consideration. If there was a difference between the unit price and its total, the
unit price is the one will be taken into consideration.
13.12. Bidder undertakes the responsibility of any mistakes; whether in
estimating the values of items, or including them in each other. Ministry
(directorate) will not consider any claim regarding that.
13.13. The whole prices and its increase or decrease should be determined in
the original tender. Any decrease will be provided in a separated letter will not
be considered, even if it was attached to the tender.
Except the cases that negotiation is allowed in according to the system rule, it
is not allowed to amend the prices of their tenders after providing them;
whether increase or decrease.

Item no. (14) Systems and language:

14.1. All the systems, orders, decrees and instructions of the Kingdom will be
applied for implementing the required works under the tender such as, for
example but not limited to, government tenders and procurement law, its
executive board, the related decrees, royal orders, circulars, instructions and the
ministerial acts that are issued.
14.2. Arabic language should be used in all the tender documents. It is allowed
to be translated to the language that the bidder knows.
If there were technical terms which are universally known, bidder may write it
in English between brackets in addition to writing it in Arabic also.
Item no. (15) Implementation method:
15.1. Bidder should generally states the program, methods work, equipments
and its ability that they suggest to use in implementing the works and services,
in a separated letter attached to their tender.
They should state the work program, the numbers of workers are expected to
use in the different groups; whether they were Saudis or not, stating the
expected changes during the implementation period, also the names,
nationalities, qualifications and experiences of the senior staff who will be
responsible for supervising the works implementation, in the same letter.
15.2. Bidders should state in the same letters, the daily working hours they
suggest for implementing work or services during it.
If it was necessary to work for two shifts, this request should be provided to the
engineer and stating the extent of bidders ability to work for two shifts. In this
case, compensating the engineer should be undertaken for the additional costs
resulting from the supervisory works relating to the additional services and
works or working for two shifts.
Item no. (16) Financial affairs:
Bidders should consider the amounts schedules, prices lists, works, services,
certifications issuing, paying the deposits, rebating the retained money etc.
Payment for bidders is always with the value of Saudi riyal or the American
dollar according to the conditions that stated in the item (14.2.) of these
instructions.
Item no. (17) Starting time, achieving period, maintenance and
insurance period:
Bidders commit to the target periods that stated in the tender sample; whether
for starting the works implementation, achieving period, maintenance and
insurance period and the priorities of achieving the works and services
according to what stated in the main document of the contract, the private and
general conditions.
If works were relate to the public works contracts, bidders may determine
another period for implementation shorter than that stated in the tender
documents. If they did so, the suggested period will cancel the period that
stated in the tender documents, except the period of insurance, maintenance
and operation, as it is not allowed to change anything of the item provided in.

Item no. (18) Contract and insurances:18.1. The successful bidder is committed to provide the performance bond with
the rate of (5%) of the award within (10) days from the date of the award. It
may extended to a similar period, but if he delayed, the bid bond will be
withdrawn; moreover, his tender will be discarded according to the rules of
item (33/A) of the government tenders and procurement law.
18.2. The successful bidder, after providing the performance bond, is
committed to the target time of signing the contract.
If he delayed to the target time without an accepted excuse, he will be notified
with registered letter. If he didn't come for signing the contract within (15)
fifteen days from the date of notifying him, work will be withdrawn according
to the rule of item no. (53) of government tenders and procurement law.
Item no. (19) Similar works and services that have been
implemented by bidders:
Bidders should have previously implemented works and services of the same
field and volume of the works and services they tendering to, in a good way.
They should provide proofs to the employer regarding this field when tendering
until the employer is convinced that the bidders are technically and financially
able to implement the required works and services of this tender, provided that
the provided proofs should state the works and services that previously
implemented, fields of use, the supervisors engineers, the contracts value, its
places, starting and conclusion dates.
Item no. (20) Other contracts details:
Bidders should state, in a separated letter attached to the tender, the details of
other contracts they have been awarded when tendering to this one.
Also, stating the values, type, starting and concluding dates of the work. They
should mention all the works and services that they have achieved, or starting it
5 years ago. If they haven't achieved yet, they should state the reason of this.
If they never do works and services of this field, they should provide to the
ministry (directory) what proves that they did works and services in the near
decades similar to that provided in the tender, its places, the total value, and the
dates of achieving.
Item no. (21) Information that should be provided regarding the law
status of the bidders:
21.1. Every tender is provided by a company should be attached with a
certified copy of its establishment contract and its law representatives.
When providing the tender by a commercial institution from more than person,
it should be attached with a certified copy of the partnership contract.

21.2. If the tender was provided from institutions or mutual general partnership
among them, the following regulations should be considered:A. Partnership should be made before providing the tenders and under a
concluded agreement between the partners; moreover, it should be approved
from concerning board regarding authentication and approving.
B. The partnership agreement should include the commitment of the partners;
either jointly or separately, to implement all the works and services that are
presented in the tender. The origin of the agreement is attached with the tender.
C. The partnership agreement should state the legal representative of the two
parts for the ministry (directorate) for completing the agreement measurements
and signing the contract, also the responsible of signing and the letters to the
ministry (directorate).
D. The documents of the tender are stamped and signed from all the partners.
E. No one of the partners is allowed to provide an individual tender or making
partnership with other bidder for the same project.
F. The partnership agreement is not allowed to be adjusted without the
ministry/directory approval, after providing it.
21.3. If the tender was provided from institutions or general partnership, each
one of them should be categorized in the field of the works and services. One
of them at least is categorized in the field and the grade that is required to be
implemented.
Item no. (22) Bidders address:
The bidders should have address inside or outside the kingdom in order to be
officially addressed. All the letters and/or notifications that are sent to them to
these addresses by the recorded mail are official.
Item no. (23) Inquiring about the tender documents:
If the bidders had any doubt, mysterious or confusion in the tender documents,
they should be inquired about this in writing before the specified date for
opening the envelopes. The ministry (directorate) will state that and distribute
them on all the bidders who received the tender documents.
Item no. (24) Accepting the tender:
The ministry (directorate) is not abiding by accepting any tender even if it was
of the least prices. It will not incur any cost or expenditures resulting from that.
Item no. (25) Expenditures of the tender preparation:
Bidders incur all the costs that are resulting from preparing their tenders, any
work or visiting the site. The ministry (directorate) will not pay any costs or
expenditures that are resulting from that.

Item no. (26) The property of the tender documents:


The tenders and all the attached documents are property for the ministry
(directorate). It will not return to its bidders in anyways after providing them.
Item no. (27) Subcontracting and Sub-waive:
Waiving any part of the works and services, or the sub-contract for
implementing all or some of the works and services placing the competition,
subject to the conditions and the regulations that are provided for in the
Government Tenders and Procurement Law, its executive regulation or the
private and public conditions that are attached with its competition.
Item no. (28) Tenders Evaluation:
28.1. Evaluating the tenders will be in the light of the following elements:
A. The specified specifications and conditions conformity.
B. The tender price.
C. The tender balance.
D. The financial capacity.
E. The regularity and technical competence.
F. The previous experience in a work or similar services.
G. Providing the employees/ the skilled workers
H. Certificate of completing the Saudi proportion that are issued from the labor
offices.
28.2. The elements above are not included for all the evaluation elements.
There may be another elements and other factors, but have not mentioned.
Item no. (29) Changing the tender documents:
The ministry (directorate) keeps its right of not accepting any adjustments or
changes in the tender documents by the bidders that they want to make in their
tender.
Item no. (30) Import and Customs:
Any works of supplying and charging any products or parts from it subject to
the kingdom or the customs and import instructions and systems of the
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
Item no. (31) Attachments of the tender documents:

The ministry (directorate) keeps its right of issuing attachments of the tender
documents before the specified date for opening the envelopes, provided that
such attachments (if found) are issued for the purpose of stating the documents
or making any adjustment. Such attachments are sent to the bidders enough
time before. It is an integral part for the tender documents.
Item no. (32) The Periods are provided for in the documents:
Bidders should notice that all the periods that are provided for in the tender
documents are stated according to the Moslem (Hijri) calendar for the public
works contracts or the calendar for the contracts of the operation, maintenance
and cleanliness according to what is stated in the main contract document, the
private and public conditions and its attachments.
Item no. (33) Tender Devaluation and cancelation or partition:
34.1. The ministry (directorate) may divide the tender when awarded for some
of the bidders when the partition achieves its purpose. It may also eliminate
some of the items or devaluating it for the purpose of reaching to the project
certified amounts.
34.2. The ministry (directorate) may divide the competition between the equal
tenders or determining the least price among the equal tenders through a closed
tender and inside stamped envelopes.
Item no. (34) Tender cancelation:
The ministry (directorate) is entitled to cancel the tender at any time without
objection from the bidders. If it was canceled for a reason related to the
ministry (directorate) before the award or for violating the measures of the
system rules, errors in the conditions and specifications, raising the provided
prices, or if it exceeded the approval of the project, the value of the tender
documents will be return. If the cancelation was after opening the envelopes,
the value of the tender documents will not be return except to the bidder of this
tender. In all the cases, the value will not be return unless after the bidder
returns the documents that he bought.
Item no. (35) The functions settlement:
The awarded bidder should employ the Saudi workers. The ministry (directory)
does not allow approving issuing the foreign workers visa unless after being
sure of that the Saudi labors is not available according to the regulations and
instructions that are issued from the ministry (directorate).
Item no. (36) Period of implementing the works and services:
36.1. The implementation period will be twenty four (24) months that starts
from the specified date in the main contract document, the public conditions,
the private or its attachments. Bidders should attach the detailed time schedule
with their tender for implementing the required services and works stating in it;
all the activities that he will do during the contract period.

36.2. The period of implementing the works and services will start during the
period that is specified in the main contract document, the private conditions,
the public or their attachments.
36.3. If the awarded bidder delayed, slowdown or refrained from starting the
work and/or receiving the worksite, he will be sentenced according to the rules
of the item no. (53) of the Governmental Tenders and Procurement Law and
the item no. (46) of the executive regulation.
Item no. (37) The contract agreement:
37.1. The awarded bidder accepts signing the main document of the contract,
the private and general conditions that are attached with the tender documents
without any adjustment or reservation.
37.2. If the awarded bidder delayed of the specified date for signing the
contract without an accepted excuse, he will be informed by a recorded letter.
If he did not attend to sign within fifteen (15) days from the date of informing
him, the work will be withdrawn from him according to what the item (43/1) of
the Government Tenders and Procurement Law provided in for.
Item no. (38) Systems and Regulations:
The tender conditions and the contract documents that are issued by the
ministry (directory) subject to the systems and regulations that is applicable at
the kingdom. For example, The Government Tenders and the Procurement
Law, its executive regulation and any texts break it, its rules will be firstly
applied over these documents.

Contract Samples:
1. Tender Sample:
Note: The tender sample is a part of the tender.
Contract no. (), The transmission line of diameter by 900 mm from AlShuqaiq wellfield to Buzakha tank.
(Bidders are required to fill all the spaces in the tender sample and the
attachment of the tender sample).
HIS EXCELLENCY, GENERAL MANAGER,
Hail General Directorate for Water
Hail, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
May the peace and blessings of Allah be upon you,
1. After we checked the contract conditions, the amounts schedule and the
designs of constituting the works that are mentioned above, We, the signatory
below, . Who are recorded in the commercial register of the city:
Record no.:. As the attached document state, we provide our tender for
implementing the mentioned works according to the mentioned contract
conditions, specifications, amounts schedule and the charts in exchange for
Riyal Saudi.
2. If you accepted our tender, we commit to start working from the date of
receiving the site. In addition, the site will be delivered within sixty (60) days
from the date of signing the contract. We also commit to achieve all the works
which the mentioned contract includes during period of months that starts
from receiving the site.

3. If our tender was accepted, we will get guarantee from an approved and
certified bank through participation or individually joined us by sum equal 5%
of the sum that is mentioned above for implementing the contract as necessary
according to the conditions of the commitment sample that includes this.
This guarantee will be valid through extending its date to the date of releasing
the final receiving record for all the works.
4. We are also committing to this tender for .. from the date that is specified
for providing the tender. The tender will stay abide and accepted for us during
this period.
We will stay committed to our tender for any additional period, if we did not
inform you that we will not be committed to that after ending the period that is
mentioned above.
5. Unless and until preparing and concluding an official agreement, such tender
with your written approvals and providing us to the final guarantee that is
mentioned in the paragraph (3) above will be considered as an obligatory
contract between us.
6. We know that you are obliged to accept the less expensive tender or any
tender provided, without showing reasons.
Bidders are required to provide a statement that states a list like a schedule of
the projects he is currently work at stating the value of such projects, the
related boards, the date of starting the project and its period.

2. Sample of primary insurance letter


1.2. Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry of Finance and National Economy
The Legal Administration
No:..
Date: .. Attachments:
His Excellency:
Place:
Number:
Date:
May the Peace and blessings of Allah be upon you,
Whereas the gentlemen:
Provided their tender for implementing the contract of a transmission line of
diameter by 900mm from Al-Shuqaiq well field to Buzakha tank,
We, bank ., guarantee an insurance that is conditioned by paying for you
after the first written notification asking for paying. A sum that does not exceed
(.), (in letters, ) Riyal in which equal (1%-2%) of the value of their tender
that is provided under the tender conditions.
Such insurance is valid until the end of the day .. month.. year. Hijri.
Any claim for paying the value of such insurance during the period of its
validity should be provided.
Any disagreement resulting from interpreting the conditions of this insurance
for the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia systems, specially the insurances regulation
that is issued by the announcement of His excellency, the Minister of Finance
and the National Economic no. (17/67) on 2/4/1408 Hijri.

3. Sample of a final insurance letter


1.2. Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Ministry
of
Finance
and

National

Economy

The Lawful Administration


No:..
Date: .. Attachments:
His Excellency:

Place:
Number:
Date:

May the Peace and blessings of Allah be upon you,


Whereas you granted our customers the gentlemen:.. the contract of the
transmission line of diameter by 900 mm from Al-Shuqaiq well field to
Buzakha tank.
We, bank .., guarantee our customers who are mentioned above without any
objection from the customer to pay a sum that does not exceed ( . ) ( in
letters, ) Riyal in which equals (5%) of the contract value.
We commit to this without any conditions in which we will give a sum that
does not exceed the sum that are mentioned above by .. under your disposal,
when receiving the first written notification from you during the insurance
period which states, according to your absolute evaluation, that there is a
neglect in implementing the contract conditions that are mentioned above
which lead to your claim under this insurance.
Such insurance is valid until the end of the day .. month.. year. Hijri.
Any claim for paying the value of such insurance during the period of its
validity should be provided.
Any disagreement resulting from interpreting the conditions of this insurance
for the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia systems, specially the insurances regulation
that is issued by the announcement of His Excellency, the Minister of Finance
and the National Economic no. (17/67) on 2/4/1408 Hijri.

Current value

Current location

Property (1. Owned, 2.


Rented, 3. Intended to buy)

Capacity (in horse)

Quantity

Model

Manufacture. Year

Manufacturer

Description

5. Form of Equipment List (Standard Sample)

5. Form of Employee Particulars

Particulars of Bidder's Employees, to be employed, to execute the Works


by virtue of this contract.
(use one form for each person according to this form sample)
1. Full Name:
2. Nationality:
3. Marital Status:
Schools joined

Address

From

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4. practical experiences

Employer:
Project Location:
Project Site (Estimated Value in Saudi Riyals):
Appointment Dates:
Job:
a.)
b.)
c.)
d.)

Too

Qualifications

e.)
5. Experience Years in the following fields:
a. Electrical Works:
..
b. Mechanical Works:
..
c. construction structures:

d. Finishing Works Professions (specify profession)


.
e. Quality Control ..
f. Basic Utilities Works
Roads ..
Sanitation Water
Electricity Power Distribution .
Site Coordination
.
g. Other Works
6. Jobs assigned to him by the Bidder
.
..
Date .

6. Form of Sub-Contractor List


Subcontractor Estimated
Name
percentage of Address
Total
Bid
Value
Work Type

& Saudi
Company
(Yes/No)

Commercial
Registry
Number

7- Form of a table indicating the main activities and respective


durations
Description
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
Preparation Works
Supply of Equipment to site
Installation of Equipment
Works of Execution &
Constructions
Tests
Maintenance until
preliminary Approval
Maintenance after
preliminary Approval
Return preparations to
normal case
Note:
These durations shall be in accordance with the durations stated in the Bid
Announcement.

8- Form of Unit Price Analysis into Percentage


Wages and salaries stated in the Bill of Quantities include all direct and indirect
costs and general experiences and project of Bidder. The under mentioned
percentage shall be standard for each wage or price mentioned in the Bill of
Quantities.
Direct Costs of Materials:
(Includes, but not necessarily not limited to, the following: . %
Material price out of warehouse, in addition to costs of transportation,
insurance, shipping, taxes, fees, damages and consumption).
Director Costs of Installation Workers:
Includes, but not necessarily not limited to, the following: . %
Hour-base wage, social insurance sum, air travel fare, medical insurance, dayoffs, as well as all the provision of Saudi Labor Code.
General Expenses in Site:
(Includes, but not necessarily not limited to, the following: . %
Supervision Works, Living, Transportation, Housing, Warehouses, Security
Measures, Stationary Utilities, Consumptions, Insurances against all risks.
General office expenses in homeland .. %
Profit .. %
Other expenses (to be described) .. %
100%
Price denominations may be used to specify the value of each change order or
claim by virtue of t his contract.

Bidder declares that this analysis does not include any amount assigned for the
preliminary items, priced in the Bill of Quantities on a continual basis.
Bidder shall attach to this form a written description of all items included in the
above percentages.

Signature: ..
Date: ..

9. Summary of Bid Total Value


Section of Bill of Quantities

Sum/ Saudi Riyal

(Technical Specifications)
Fourth Chapter
Pipes Works
Contents
4.1. General:
4.1.1. Work Scope:
4.1.2. Pipes Materials:
4.1.3. Pipes pressure rates:
4.2. Ductile iron pipes:
4.2.2. Pipes joints:
4.2.3. Joints are made of the ductile iron:
4.2.4. Pipes mechanical couplings:
4.2.5. Lining with cement mortar for the ductile iron pipes:
4.2.6. The external covering of the ductile iron pipes and joints:
4.3. Steel pipes:
4.3.1. General:
4.3.2. Type and quality of the plates and slices:
4.3.3. Chemical and mechanical properties:
4.3.4. Manufacturing Method:
4.3.5. Manufacturing competence report:
4.3.6. Test measurements:
4.3.7. Tests:
4.3.7.1. Procedural Tests:
4.3.7.2. Production tests:
4.3.7.3. Production and test records:
4.3.8. Approval standards:
4.3.8.1. Variance in dimensions:
4.3.8.2. Optical examination:
4.3.8.3. Non-destructive test:
4.3.8.4. Technology mechanical tests:
4.3.8.5. Frequent defects:
4.3.9.1. Defects of the basic material:
4.3.9.2. Welding the defects of the weld splice (seam):
4.3.9.3. Welding the weld splice (seam) cracks:
4.3.9.4. Fixing the weld and surface defects:
4.3.10.1. Plates and tapes:
4.3.10.2. Pipes:
4.3.11.1. General:
4.3.11.2. Polyethylene properties:
4.3.11.3. Putting the covering layer:
4.3.11.4. Tests measures:
4.3.11.5. Tests:
4.3.12.2. Service conditions:
4.3.12.3. Materials Specifications:
4.3.12.4. Lining manufacturing:

4.3.12.5. Lining:
4.3.12.6. Hardening and treatment requirements:
4.3.12.7. Tests measurements:
4.3.12.8. Tests:
==
==
==
==
==
==
==
==
==
==
==
==
4.4.8. Automatic Air Valves:
4.4.9. Air Relief Valves:
4.4.10. Control Valves:
4.4.11. Pressure Reducing Valves:
4.4.12. Electric Control Valves:
4.4.13. Machines Working by Electric Motor:
4.4.14 Gearboxes:
4.5. Digging, Preparing and Shaping the Trenches:
4.6. Pipes Bed:
4.7. Concrete Cover:
4.8. Binding Concrete inside the Trench:
4.9. Arranging and lowering the pipes according to the path:
4.10. Length of the Uncovered Trench:
4.11. Pressure Lines Expansion:
4.11.1. General:
4.11.4. Steel Pipes Connection and Expansion:
4.11.5. Pipelines Expansion:
4.12. Expanding the pipes next to each other, the existing services network, etc.
4.13. Expanding the pipes under fences, walls, beside trees, etc.
4.14. Expanding the pipes through culverts:
4.15. Expanding the pipes in the marshes areas:
4.16. The external protection for the installation pieces (Joints):
4.17. Electric conduction continuity:
4.18. Cathode protection:
4.19. Trench refilling:
4.20. The chosen filling material:
4.21. Pipelines Testing:
4.22. Valves installation:
4.23. Rooms covers:
4.24. Guide poles:

4.25. Metallic rims and stairs:


4.26. Warning tape:
4.27. Flanges/flanged joints:
4.28. Screw fixing nails, nuts and flat places
4.29. Elastic connection rings:
4.30. Collars (High pressure) Sealed hoops:
4.31. Installation and dismantling joints:

(Technical Specifications)

Fourth Chapter
Pipes Works
4.1. General:
4.1.1. Work Scope:
This section describes the technical and general requirements of designing,
manufacturing, preparation, testing and covering (external protection), lining
and transmission, storage in the pipes keeping room, supplying from the pipes
keeping room to the site. Also, works of trenches/ fillings, expansion,
connection, fixing by press nails, refilling and remaking the field tests,
experimental pipes operation, installation pieces, special accessories and valves
for the main transmission pipelines and lines transmission in the well field,
plumbing works, and sanitary fittings.
In addition to workers, equipments and tools (Rigs), emergency buildings for
achieving works as stated on the charts. Also, such works include survey
preparation for paths and pipelines to transmit inside the well field, the main
transmission pipelines and pipes paths.

4.1.2. Pipes Materials:


Pipes materials have been taken as they are:
A. Ductile iron (DI) (Transmission lines in the well field)
B. Steel (The main transmission lines from the pump station to tanks)

4.1.3. Pipes pressure rates:


All pressure pipes are designed and its installation pieces (joints) and valves are
cut at operational pressures ranges from 25 to 100 Bar. This is conditioned by
the pressure areas of the steel pipes, while the ductile iron is 16 Bar.
The operation maximal pressure is that of the pipelines regardless the transient
surge pressures. All the pipes and installation pieces (joints) in the site should
be tested at pressure by 150% of the applied maximal operation pressure.
Pipes and installation pieces (joints) should be suitable for endurance under the
extra load that is resulting from earthy cover ranges between 1.2 and 6 m, in
addition to a wheel load (4 x 20 Kilo Newton + 8 x 65 Kilo Newton) and
pressure coefficient by 1.3.
Wheel consists of four (4) tires in which the distance between each of them 1.8
m from the middle of the three (3) pivots, while the distance between the front
pivot and the middle one is 4.30 m. The distance between the back pivot and
the middle varies between 4.30 and 9.00 m.

4.2. Ductile iron pipes:


4.2.1. General:
Ductile iron (Wrought) pipes should be in conformity with the British
specifications 4772 or the specifications of the International Organization for
Standardization (ISO) no. 2531.
Pipes that are buried in Al-Shakik well field and that of diameters range from
300 to 1000 mm for operation pressure 16 Bar that of the grade K 9 (In general,
the flexible joints that are installed by propulsion/ and pressing on the buried
pipelines, should be installed unless otherwise mentioned).
Pipes lengths are regular (commuted) according to the manufacturing company
standardizations.

4.2.2. Pipes joints:


The flexible socket and spigot joints that are installed through propulsion and
an elastic bed (Seal hoop) of special shape (Tilton type or certified similar one),
guarantee fair seal within the extent (scope) of the curvature and intake of the
joint that is specified by the manufacturing company. Bed is made of a flexible
material which in conformity with the British specifications 2494.
The flanges joints (flanged) are in conformity with the British specifications
4505 as proper. They are all supplied with all of the connecting nails and units,
beds and collars, etc.
Flanged joints should be provided with bored loop beds from the inside for
fixing the connecting nails as described in the British standardizations no.
4865, First section.
Such beds should be made of the natural elastic which is in conformity with the
British Standardizations no. 5292 unless otherwise is provided.

The connecting nails should be made of galvanized soft steel or painted by


cadmium. Also, it should be completed with the nuts and flat plates . The
length of the salient screw part after connecting the nut should be proper in
which at least two notches of the screw notches appear.
The manufacturing company provides all the rings, beds (seal hoops), nuts,
connecting nails, insulating material, (sealing, bed compound (sealing)), etc.
that are necessary for making full joint.
Costs of all the connection components are included in prices of supplying the
pipes and installation pieces (joints).
All elastic beds (Seal hoops), rings and joints are stored for using with the
pipes in a shadowy cold depositary until using it. In case of using elastic, If any
defect or deterioration appeared because of exposure to the hard sun's rays or
any other reasons allow the engineer to refuse such batch of the elastic, etc.

4.2.3. Joints are made of the ductile iron:


Standard joints of the pipes (K 9) that are installed through propulsion and
press are of the grade (K 12).
The proper grade of the joints that matching with the pipes grade, are used for
the flanged pipes.
If pipes considerations required using anther grades different from those that
mentioned above, it subjects to the agreement with the engineer.

4.2.4. Pipes mechanical couplings:


A. Mechanical couplings should contain a central sleeve, edge flanges, elastic
sealing rings of wedge shape, nuts, and connecting nails from an accredited
supplier.
B. Joints should be sealed under the operation pressure, when the expansion,
shrink, and the angular displacement within the limits that are specified by the
supplier.
C. The final flanges and sleeves are made of the ductile iron, gray iron, rolled
steel, or flexible steel according to the dimensions and pressure rates.
Couplings and flanges adapter are supplied covered by a protective layer in the
factory.

D. Flanges adapted surfaces are flattened and bored according to the British
specifications 4504.
E. Couplings are supplied without the protrusions of marking the middle.
F. All nuts and connecting nails should be galvanized or painted by zinc. The
sealed rings are made of the artificial elastic according to the British
specifications 2494.

4.2.5. Lining with cement mortar for the ductile iron pipes:
All the ductile iron pipes and joints are lined from the inside with cement
mortar according to the specifications of the International Organization for
Standardization (ISO) 4179.
The used cement should be anti-sulfate according to the British specifications
4027. Sand materials should be gritting and chemically inert, also have solid
atoms that are not topped with external layer that in conformity with the British
specifications requirements (BS 1201, 882), schedule no. (2), appendix no. (4),
when it is examined after taking a sample from it according to the British
specifications (BS 812).
Water should be obtained from a proper supplying source. It should not has any
element that may adversely affect on the type of the cement, or in case of
drinking water, it does not affect on the water flowing through the main line.
Existing the inorganic solid particles is allowed, provided that it should not
contain any components that may spoil the cement mortar ripening or damage
the water type; this is in case of the main drinking water lines.
The mixture of the cement mortar should contain cement, sand, and water that
are fully mixed with a cohesion grade that enable getting identical heavy lining.
For adding any material, there should be an agreement between the engineer
and contractor before that.
Proportion of the cement amount and sand amount in the cement mortar
mixture should be 1:3.5.
Pipes are lined by centrifugal or head of a centrifugal pole. Equipments are
lined using any way that enable getting complete linings at the same level of
the pipes linings.
The surface that is in need to be covered should be clean and free from loose
scale, odd bodies, or any other materials that may obstruct the good coherence
between the metal and lining.
The way of lining should be controlled in order to be at a level that guarantee
painting continues layer of the cement mortar on the internal diameter of the
pipes or equipments.

The internal parts of the sleeves and the flanges surfaces should be free from
the cement mortar.
If the lining damage was small, it may be fixed by removing the lining layer up
to the metallic surface of the pipe, wetting the uncovered surface of the metal
and the next lining well, then repairing it with new concrete cement mortar to
guarantee its adhesion to the uncovered surfaces.
Lining treatment should be in a way that guarantee getting a lining of the
cement mortar that is properly filling with water, while it is solid at the same
time. Treatment process should be done under temperature not lesser than 4 C.
Treatment process is experimentally implemented under climates that it may be
controlled in by making coherent insulation layer. Any insulation layer should
be under an agreement between the contractor and engineer.
The coherent insulation layer should contain bitumen coating that is in
conformity with the British specifications (BS 3416), materials type (2). It
should be coated by spraying or the brush when the lining is still moisture.
Insulation layer should not add color, smell, or taste to the drinking water after
at least 48 hours from its dry.
Lining thickness should be according to the specifications of the International
Organization of Standardization (ISO) 4179.
Lining thickness may be tested by the grab hook standard or gauge. When
using the grab hook standard, lining should be hole using a thin edged of the
tough steel which its diameter doesn't exceed 1.5 mm. This is immediately after
putting the lining on the internal diameter of the pipe and the joints before the
cement mortar become solid.
Thickness should be measured at each part of the pipe, at least from one sector
perpendicular with the pipe pivot. This is should be done for each sector (that
should be distance by at least 200 mm from the pipe edge).
Measurements should be taken at four positions in which each one of them
distance 90 degree from the other. Arithmetical average and the individual
minimum value for each sector should not be lesser than stated above.

The lining surface should be completely soft, while the tin wrinkles that are
linked to the surfaces that are filled with cement, are allowed. The separated
cracks that resulting from shrink may be accepted, provided that its width does
not exceed 0.8 mm. Surface should be completely free from the concrete layer
and contain the possible least amount of the sandy discontinuity.

4.2.6. The external covering of the ductile iron pipes and


joints:
The ductile iron pipes and the joints should be cleaned, according to the British
specifications 4232, second-class quality (SA 2.5 or SSBC. SB 10), by the
pressed sand blasting.
Pipes and joints will be coated by a layer of zinc before it is coated by Nitocote
ET550 that is a coherent coating material of the treated tar and epoxy. It
consists of two parts; inert reinforcement bed and special mixture of solvents. It
is equipped with the amounts that are previously studied and ready for mixing
and using in the workplace.
The thickness of the external protection that is made of epoxy that is treated by
coal tar, should not be lesser than 500 Micron.
Pipes and installation pieces (joints) that will be buried underground should be
externally coated by a layer of epoxy that is treated by coal tar, and covered by
the polyethylene sleeves. These materials should be approved by the engineer.
It will be coated for two layers in order to get the least thickness, for the dry
thin layer, which reaches to 500 Micron.
Coating will be done through an accredited way or non-pneumatic with the
absolute compliance with the using instructions by the factory regarding the
surrounded climate conditions. Polyethylene sleeves are of black color with
thickness not lesser than 200 Micron and in conformity with the specifications
of the American Water Works Association (AWWA) C105.
Pipes and installation pieces (joints) that will be installed in the rooms, will be
coated by epoxy that is treated by zinc phosphate in addition to the finishing
paint. Metal zinc epoxy will be sprayed on the surface in which gives the least
thickness for the dry thin layer reaches to 100 Micron.
It will be followed by a layer of the usual beneath coat before finishing the
paint.

As alternative, pipes and its joints will be painted inside the rooms by epoxy
that is treated by coal tar. The thickness of the dry thin layer reaches to 300
Micron.

4.3. Steel pipes:


4.3.1. General:
All the steel pipes should meet the requirements of the American Petroleum
Institute standardizations (API) 5L in its latest issue. The grade of the used
specifications is PSL2. Also, meet the additional requirements for such
specifications. Pipes should be able to bear operation pressure by 100 Bar (16100) as stated in the amounts' schedules and charts. It is buried in the ground
and covered by filling by minimum1.2 m and maximum 6.0 m.

4.3.2. Type and quality of the plates and slices:


A. Material is of Siemens-Martin steel, the treated by the electric furnace, or
that treated by oxygen. It should be in conformity with the specifications of the
American Petroleum Institute (API) no. 15 for the following pipes:
Steel pipes, grade x65, thickness of the pipe wall 15.88 mm.
Steel pipes, grade x56, thickness of the pipe wall 15.88 mm.
Steel pipes, grade x56, thickness of the pipe wall 12.7 mm.
Steel pipes, grade x56, thickness of the pipe wall 9.53 mm.
Steel pipes, grade x56, thickness of the pipe wall 7.93 mm, or its
equivalent as approved by the engineer.
Slices and plates are thermally treated and rolled under thermal conditions that
are controlled.
The treatment method of the slices and plates quality certificate should be
stated.
B. Defects that may affect on the weld process should distance by 25 mm from
the edge; this is should be proven through ultrasonic waves test that may be
taken during the pipes manufacturing.
In case of discovering failure like that through the ultrasonic waves test after
welding the pipe, it should be rejected, also the spoiled part may be cut from
the pipe, if the pipe remaining length was within the allowable limits as the
specifications.

4.3.3. Chemical and mechanical properties:


The chemical and mechanical properties of the plates and steel slices should be
in conformity with the requirements of the American Petroleum Institute
specifications (API) 5L of the different categories mentioned above in the item
(4-3-2).

4.3.4. Manufacturing Method:


A. All pipes are produced according to the fixed manufacturing method.
B. Supplier should prove that he is able to produce pipes according to these
specifications; this is through a report about the competence of the
manufacturing method.
C. Pipes are manufactured using the submerged electric arc welding. Weld
quality should be good in which produces efficiency coefficient for the joint by
1.0.
D. Pipes that lengthwise welded:
Pipes are produced by one longitudinal welding (seam). Pipe will mechanically
expand up to maximum 1.5%.
E. Rifle welded Pipes:
The distance of the horizontal ribbon steel weld from the pipe end should not
be lesser than 300 mm. Inclusion the horizontal ribbon steel weld in the pipe, is
limited in which does not exceed one joint in each pipe.
The plate width is within 0.8 to 3-fold of the pipe external diameter.
Joints of the letter (T) shape are radiography. The remaining butt weld is
examined by the ultrasonic waves
F. For guarantee the pipes quality, tests should be made as stated in the
specifications.

4.3.5. Manufacturing competence report:


Within four weeks after making each competence test, pipes supplier provide a
competence report of three copies and written in English about the
manufacturing method to the engineer.
Such report should state the minimum of the following information:1. Materials (Steel quality and type).
2. Weld joint (seam) type.
3. Joints design.
4. Slices and plates preparation.
5. Weld measurements.
A. The type, size and grade of the packing metal, weld assistant, weld number,
distance, and poles positions (Electrodes).
B. Weld acceleration.
C. Electric properties.
D. Weld strokes numbers, size and depth of each weld stroke.
E. The complete weld dimensions.
6. Chemical installation (chemical analysis checking).
7. Destructive testing results.
8. Pictures of the large sleeves (Macro).
9. Results of the rays and ultrasonic waves examination.

4.3.6. Test measurements:


A. Radiography:
Radiography is done according to the specifications of the American Petroleum
Institute (API) 5L / 5LS.
Before the products radiography, supplier, in the inspector presence, prepares
the testing movies that will be approved as the measure of the quality. Movie is
explained (read) according to the specifications of the American Petroleum
Institute (API) 5L.
B. Ultrasonic test:
Contractor, in the inspector presence, make the ultrasonic tests for one of the
first pipes; this is for the purpose of setting the testing measurements for
production.

Verification of defects finding ability should be taken on the test pipes or the
pipes of striations and pores that are automated made by the machine according
to the American Petroleum Institute specifications (API) 5L.
Test pipes are parts of a pipe that has same diameter, wall thickness, and weld
that is similar to such in the pipe that will be examined. Its length should be
enough for enabling making the ultrasonic test measures with the real test
speed.
The ultrasonic signals, which indicate that there is a defect according to the
latest issue from the American Petroleum Institute (5L), should automatically
be shown by warning alarm or other machine.
The ultrasonic machine finds the defects at the longitudinal and horizontal
directions.
In addition, the ultrasonic examination should be made on the steel plates and
tape as an experimental test to state that the method and measures are enough
to find the foils that are not in conformity with such specifications. The
ultrasonic test may be made on the completed pipes.
C. Tensile tests:
The horizontal samples of the basic metal are crosswise taken for the pipe
pivot.
The horizontal weld samples are taken from the pipe width at the weld
direction. The over-material of the basic material by grinding.
Test sample are prepared and tested according to the American Petroleum
Institute (API) 5L.
Samples of the horizontal main material are tested for the plasticity extent, the
maximal tensile resistance and lengthening. The horizontal weld sample is
tested for only the maximal tensile resistance.
D. Impact tests:
Impact test is made according to the American Petroleum Institute
specifications (API) 5L. Sample is crosswise taken for the pipe pivot.
All samples are taken in which the notch pivot is orthogonal to the pipe
surface.
Samples of the weld material are crosswise taken for the weld, while the notch
is in the middle of the weld.
E. Hydrostatic tests:
Hydrostatic tests are made in one loading course in which the pipe is under the
test pressure for at least 10 seconds.

Test pressure is calculated as follows:


20
P=Y. .S.T
---------D
(P): Test pressure (Kilo Pascal)
(S): The specified minor plasticity limit (Mega Pascal)
(D): The internal diameter (mm)
(t) The specified nominal thickness of the pipe wall (mm)
(y) Plasticity modulation factor = 0.9
4.3.7. Tests:
4.3.7.1. Procedural Tests:
The procedural tests are made by the pipes supplier to provide the report of the
procedures competence.
For observance with the allowable variance of the diameters dimensions, wall
thickness, non-rotation and alignment, weld curves (contours) and the surface
defects, one full-completed pipe for each wall thickness and a particular
resistance degree should be optically examined. Also, in the case of supplying
the joint pipes in which the joint is made at the beginning of the normal
production, after any change in the weld or in the manufacturing
measurements.
After examination and approval, pipes subject to the following tests:
A. Hydrostatic test.
B. Ultrasonic waves tests.
The ultrasonic waves test for the welding splice includes distance by 25 mm
from the edges, while the radiography tests at full extension of the weld length.
C. Bending Test:
(Two samples) of the foundation material that are perpendicular with
the pipe pivot.
Four samples perpendicular with the welding splice (seam) in which
two of them are bended on the steam, while the remaining on the
surface.
D. Tensile test:

The following tensile samples should be taken:


Two horizontal samples of the metal (Basic).
Two samples perpendicular with the joint (seam) (Weld).
Two samples of the weld material.
The horizontal tensile samples of the weld are tested only for the tensile
resistance.
Tensile samples of the weld and the main material are tested for the plasticity
limit, tensile resistance and capacity.
E. Tests of the metallic installation and consistency.
Twelve (12) samples of horizontal welding splice are taken for the weld
direction. Samples subject to the microscopic precision buffing works.
Materials consistency are tested in the different areas (Pipe material,
transmission area, packing material).
F. Impact test:
Seven groups of the impact samples are taken at the notch with the letter
(V) shape from the basic material that is perpendicular on the pipe pivot.
Each group should be tested at temperature by (60 C), (20 C), (0 C),
(- 20 C), (- 40 C), (- 60 C) and (- 80 C).
Using the test results, a graphic diagram will be designed that states the
temperature for the impact resistance at the notch.
Three groups of three samples for the impact at the notch that contains
weld splice (seam) are crosswise taken for the weld direction. It is tested
at temperature 0 C.
G. Tests of the weld splice:
The circular weld splice (seam) subjects to the same previous tests, except in
the following cases:
Without the weld material tensile test.
The cross-section of the weld splice (seam) is (6) instead of (12).

The curve of the impact resistance temperature at the notch should not
be made again.
4.3.7.2. Production tests:
A. Tests of the plates and tapes:
The following tests are made and registered in a certificate that will be
delivered to the observer.
Each tape and plate is probed (surveyed) along its periphery by the ultrasonic
waves as certified by the inspector.
The middle area subjects to the fixed examination by the ultrasonic waves.
Pipes may also be examined by the ultrasonic waves.
B. Pipes tests:
During production, two types of tests should be made.
A. Non-destructive tests for each pipe.
B. Destructive tests on experimental pipe for each 50 pipes at maximum.
A. Non-destructive tests:
The manufacturing company makes the following tests for each completed
pipe. Also, register the results in the pipes report for approval by the observer.
A.1. Hydrostatic tests.
A.2. Ultrasonic waves tests.
Each pipe weld and the next pipe material are tested in extent by 25 mm on
each side of the weld by the ultrasonic waves along the weld length. All the
parts that may have discontinuous weld should be imaged through radiology.
Each beveled pipe end should be tested within extent by 25 mm from the pipe
end.
A.3. Radiology tests
Each completed pipe weld should be imaged by radiology from both of the two
sides; this is along length by at least 200 mm.

The circular weld splices (seams) that are implemented in the workshop are
required to be fully imaged through radiology; in addition, Each pipe of
number (1000) should be imaged through radiology along its full length.
A.4. Additional tests for the spiral welded pipes.
The cross point of the ribbon weld and the spiral should be imaged through
radiography in which it covers at least 150 mm of the ribbon weld, and 100 mm
of the spiral in both of the two directions.
The remaining part of the ribbon steel weld is examined through the ultrasonic
waves like in the case of the spiral weld. Meanwhile, examination through
radiography is for the area that may have not discontinuous weld.
A.4. Checking the dimensions and examination
The following points should be examined:
1. Internal diameter
2. The internal and external surface and the weld splice (seam) defects
3. Thickness of each pipe's end
4. Pipe oval
5. Alignment
6. The weld edge at each end (chamfer)
Spot examinations are allowed.
B. Destructive tests
The engineer is allowed to personally choose the pipes that will be tested from
the full group that consists, at the maximum, of 50 pipes of the same wall
thickness and steel ion.
Tests should be made for each steel ion.
Tests are made according to the specification in the presence of the observer.
Pipes will be tested and examined as follows:
B.1. Tensile tests for the basic material. (Pipe material)
Tensile samples are taken from the basic material at the horizontal direction.
The resistance of plasticity, tensile and lengthening is tested.

B.2. Tensile tests for the weld splice (seam)


Tensile resistance is tested for one sample that is crosswise taken from the weld
splice (seam)
B.3. Bending test for the weld splice (seam)
The two bending samples are crosswise taken for the weld splice (seam) in
which one is bended on the weld face, while the other on the weld stem.
B.4. Impact test for the basic material and the weld splice (seam).
Three samples for the impact are taken at the notch from the basic material,
also the same number from the weld splices (seams).
B.5. Chemical analysis
Analysis ==
A knowledge test is made for each steel ion and a check analysis on one pipe
for each steel ion.
C. Re-testing the mechanical properties:
If any sample does not meet the requirements of such specifications, the reason
is determined, if possible. Hence, it is allowed to re-test as follows:
Two groups of the test samples are taken from the area next to the first
samples, and tested.
If the two samples did not meet the requirements, such pipe will be rejected.
Hence, one sample is taken from other two pipes that are randomly chosen
from the same group.
If the two samples did not meet the requirements, the full steel temperature will
be rejected, also progressing the concerning production.
After that, each pipe may be tested as the manufacturing company chooses.
Knowing that re-testing is only made for the mechanical property that did not
meet the requirement.
4.3.7.3. Production and test records:
The independent (individual) pipe card is issued for each pipe to record all the
information of the pipe in it. The pipe card is filled in which it should has
minimum of the following information:
1. Pipe number
2. Specifying the steel ion data
3. Results of all the production tests and examinations
4. Repairs statement

5. Approval notification that is issued by the observer, provided that all the
production tests and examinations, according to the previous chapter, should
show results that are within the approval standards limits according to the
specifications.
Only pipes that its approval notification is issued are supplied, or be subjected
to later stages of manufacturing.
Pipes supplier keeps the pipe card as a proof for ten (10) years. After such
period, the supplier should deliver the cards to the employer according to his
requirement.
4.3.8. Approval standards:
The following approval standards are valid for all the examinations and tests
that are stated in these specifications.
4.3.8.1. Variance in dimensions:
A. Diameter:
Pipe tails (ends).
The internal diameter that is measured from the inside in any place within 100
mm from any of the two ends (tails) should not differ from the nominal internal
diameter by not more than 1.6 mm to + 1.6 mm.
Pipe body:
The external body of the pipe that is measured from the external periphery,
should not deviate from the nominal diameter by more than 3.0 mm.
B. Non-circularity:
For distance by 100 mm from both of the two ends, the difference between the
specified internal diameter and the minimal internal diameter should not exceed
than 3.0%. The difference between the specified internal diameter and the
maximal internal diameter should not exceed 8.0%.
C. Protrusions, holes and the flattened parts:
Deviations from the original curve (contour) of the pipe should not exceed 6
mm; also not expand at any direction for distance longer than 1/4 of the pipe
diameter.
D. Wall thickness:

The allowable negative variance should not exceed 5.0 mm


E. Pipe length:
Unless it is determined in the purchase order, the length requirements are as
follows:
1. Pipes are supplied by length 16 m.
2. The mean length should not be shorter than 15 m.
3. Any length should not be shorter than 12 m.
4. Joint is approved until 3%. The length of any part of the pipe should not be
shorter than 4 m. The joint should contain only one circular weld splice (seam),
also special marks will be put on the joints (Jointers). The circular weld splice
(seam) should be tested through radiography.
F. Pipe heaviness weight
Pipe weight is within + 7.5% and 2.5% of the calculated weight.
G. Alignment:
Pipes are randomly examined; specially the alignment. Deviation from the
straight line should not exceed 2.0% of the length.
H. Pipes tails (ends)
Pipes ends are of right angle (perpendicular) on the pipe pivot. Deviation from
the right angle should not exceed 2.0 mm.
The internal weld rebar is removed for distance by at least 100 mm from the
pipe end on both of the two sides.
Joints design:
Pipe tails (ends) are beveled by the machine with an angel (30 degree) (+5, -0)
and directed to the root by 1.6 0.8 mm. ==
Bevel protection:
The ends of the beveled pipe should be protected from the harm by proper
mechanical protection.

4.3.8.2. Optical examination:


A. The basic material is free from scale, rifling, holes (dents), boring, Arc
welding burns and the other visual defects of the surface.
B. The external and internal welds pivots are within 3 mm from each other.
C. The edges ridge that is equipped for the plates should not exceed 10% of the
specified thickness of the wall at maximum 1.6 mm at the weld splice.
D. Welds are free from cracks, holes, small borings, penetration (permeability)
or breakdown. The undercut should not be strict, does not exceed 5.0 mm in
depth and 25 mm in length.
At maximum, two undercuts for each weld splice (seam) are allowed by 33
mm.
E. Welding processes are made for getting the minimum of the protrusions.
Spot deviation from the circular pipe shape at the edge of the weld splice
(seam) is 1.5 mm of the pipe body.
F. The portion between the width and height of weld rebar should not be lesser
than 4 inside and outside the weld. Height should not exceed 3 mm and 3.6 mm
for the wall thickness that is 17.5 mm and up.

4.3.8.3. Non-destructive test:


Radiography and ultrasonic waves tests are made according to the paragraph
that under the title of "Tests".
Pipe will not be approved, if the non-destructive tests found any of the
following defects:
A. Layers in the tapes and plates that are found through the continues test by
the ultrasonic waves within 25 mm from the edges at the beveled tails (ends) of
the pipes, also have unfavorable effects on the weld.
Examination through the ultrasonic waves may be made during the pipe
manufacturing.
B. The experiment of the insulation layer may be made during the pipe
manufacturing.
C. Cracks
D. Penetration
E. The separated air pockets that exceed 1.6 mm in any direction and/or the air
pockets deposits that its number exceed (6) for each 4 cm of the weld.
The next groups that consist of two or more of air pockets that exceed 1 mm at
any direction, should be separated by fine metal by distance 100 mm.

F. Impurities that exceed 2 mm in width or depth, or 12 mm in length. The next


metallic slag impurities should be separated by at least 50 mm of the fine weld
materials.
G. Undercuts that exceed 0.5 mm in depth and 25 mm in length. Only two
undercuts that are approved for each weld splice (seam) by length 300 mm. The
undercuts of the external weld should not accumulate on the internal weld cuts.
H. The deviated weld from the weld splice (seam) that contain penetration
between the external and internal welds.
I. Continues happening of the undercuts, porous, air bubbles or the metallic
slag impurities; this is regardless the dimensions.

4.3.8.4. Technology mechanical tests:


A. Tensile test
Each tensile test sample should meet the requirements that are stated in the
steel specifications.
B. Bending/Curvature test
Any defect with any extension exceeds 3 mm at any direction, is not allowed.
If a premature disruption that starts at deviation without any clear reason, a new
experiment should be made.
For removing Hydrogen, the bending samples may be heated for maximum 24
hours under temperature by about 200 C
C. Impact test at notch
The average of impact for a group of three samples should be at minimum 27 J
under temperature 5 C. Any individual value should not be lesser than 19 J
D. Chemical analysis:

The maximum content of the different elements should be in conformity with


the requirements of the American Petroleum Institute specifications (API) 5L,
degree x 60, or with the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
572, degree 60.
4.3.8.5. Frequent defects:
When testing the pipes during production, if a same damaging defect
continually or periodically happened again, the observer allow him stop the
production according to these specifications. Hence, The pipes supplier should
modulate the production in which this concerning defect does not happen
again.
Pipes supplier should prove through tests on the same type that this defect has
already been fixed.

4.3.9. Defects Fixing:


4.3.9.1. Defects of the basic material:
The surface small defects are removed through grinding, provided that the
remaining wall thickness at any point should not be lesser than 95% of the
allowable maximum wall thickness along length by maximum 300 mm. Also,
there should be a glazed transmission area between the grinded part and the
pipe original curve (contour)
4.3.9.2. Welding the defects of the weld splice (seam):
Fixing the weld splices (seams) should be implemented before the expansions
and hydrostatic tests. If this test was necessary to be made after the expansion
and hydrostatic tests, such pipe should be hydrostatically re-tested after fixing.
Parts that are fixed should be tested by the ultrasonic waves and radiography.
The full length of the entire fixing weld should not exceed 4% of the pipe weld
splice (seam) full length.
Fixing is not allowed to be made again for the same part.

4.3.9.3. Welding the weld splice (seam) cracks:


If the pipe contains crack in its weld splice at a distance by more than 200 mm
from the pipe end, it will be rejected.
Cracks of the pipe end that its maximum length is 200 mm, should be removed
by cutting the damaged part from the pipe.
The weld splice of the pipe remaining part should be imaged by radiography
within a distance by at least 200 mm from the new pipe part.
4.3.9.4. Fixing the weld and surface defects:
It is not allowed to fix the welds or caulk ( ) the surface defects on the
basic material.

4.3.10. Putting the badges:


4.3.10.1. Plates and tapes:
The plates and tapes are marked by circular steel stamps or other proper way. It
should state the following:A. Steel ion number
B. Plate number
C. The manufacturing company logo
4.3.10.2. Pipes:
A. The following should be stamped on the pipes ends near to the weld splice
(seam).
- Pipe number
- The manufacturing company
- Steel/iron grade
B. The following should be coated with artificial resinous (gummy) using steel
plate for painting.
- Pipe number
- The nominal diameter
- The nominal wall thickness

- Steel grade
- Pipe length
C. In addition, jointers on both of the two pipe parts are marked by a ring of the
red paint.

4.3.11. Covering (External protection) by Polyethylene:


4.3.11.1. General:
The basic covering (external protection) material is obtained through the
ethylene high-pressure polymerization. Polyethylene is split for shaping a plate
or a continuous tape, and then it is hardened by cooling and finally cut for
grains then smashed to be powder. Polyethylene is a translucent material, solid
and low-density.
Polyethylene should be fully fixed.
For getting good resistance against the ultraviolet effects. 2% of the black
carbon is added to polyethylene and fully mixed.
The black carbon atoms should be smaller than 25 Micron. Polyethylene may
be fixed against the Ultraviolet effects before or after crushing the material to
grains as the manufacturing company choice.

4.3.11.2. Polyethylene properties:


Polyethylene should meet the
following properties. The entire
covering material is tested before
using for being sure that it is in
conformity with the specified
specifications.
Density
of
the
resistant
Polyethylene to the ultraviolet
(Polyethylene + 2% black carbon)
(German
Institute
for
Standardizations 53479).
Water absorption in 24 hours
Softening grade ()
Melting grade
Temperature resistance

0.93 - 0.95 g/cm2

0.03% weight
85 95 C
110 160 C
10 + 60 C permanent
(+ 80 C short period)
(Storage and handing)
resistance
(German > 14 Newton/mm2
for
Standardizations

Breaking
Institute
53455).
Lengthening
when
breaking
(German
Institute
for
Standardizations 53455).
Shore hardness G/C (German
Institute
for
Standardizations
53505).
Adhesion to the steel surface
(German
Institute
for
Standardizations 30670).
Fissure voltage
Volume resistance
Heat conductivity
Melting guide (German Institute
for standardizations 53735)

> 200%
70-80
> 175 N/5cm at 23 C
> 100 N/5cm at 40 C
25 30 K.V/mm
> 10 15 Ohm/cm
0.3 Kcal/mhgrd
> 0.3 g/10 minutes

When starting the production, Polyethylene supplier should approve the data
mentioned above.
Polyethylene that is used for covering (External protection) should be free from
the tensile cracks.

Covering by polyethylene is able to burden the high-temperatures that are


caused by sunrays during storage; this is without damaging it.
For reducing the sunrays effect, polyethylene cover should sufficiently be
protected by a protective layer of high-reflection rate (Ex: White paint of the
water dilution acrylic resin). Protection layer subjects to the engineer approval.
4.3.11.3. Putting the covering layer:
A. Surface preparation:
Before covering (external protection), the pipe external surface should be free
from the pollutants such as oil, lubricate, humidity, etc.
It is cleaned (blasted) by pellets (metal shavings) for removing all the effects of
rust or factory scales. It is not allowed to treat the pipe surfaces by acid
solution.
Cleaning (blasting) the steel surface by pellets should completely remove the
rust effects and give surface roughness by 60 80 Micron (from the bottom to
top).
This is equivalent to "The white paint". Steel surface that is cleaned through
blasting should be completed according to the British specifications 67/4232.
B. Putting the Polyethylene layer:
Polyethylene should be used through fusion. After removing the scales from
the steel surface up to the white steel status as stated above, it is heated under
temperature higher than the polyethylene fusion point.
After that, polyethylene powder is spread from the bottom on the slow-rotation
pipe, or from the top.
During melting and adhesion the polyethylene on the heated pipe surface, it
shapes a regular plastic layer that tightly adheres to the pipe when it gets cool.
4.3.11.4. Tests measures:
The mentioned tests measures are in conformity with the German Institute for
Standardization specifications (DIN) 30670, its equivalent of the American
Water Works Association (AWWA) or the American Society for Testing and
Materials.

A. Porosity
Porosity is checked by an electric machine (25 K.V) for finding the covering
deficiencies. It is exactly put at the covering slope end.
During examination, the machine of finding the covering deficiencies (or
circular metal comb) should be completely tangent with the covering surface,
as any air enter may change the standardizations accuracy.
If a defect or more appeared on any covered pipe, it should be separately
stored.
The damaged covering either is fixed and electrically re-examined, or the pipe
is rejected and its covering is removed before putting a new layer of
polyethylene.
B. Adhesion/Coherence:
Adhesion is measured at 23 and 40 C
A plate of width 50 mm is cute from the covering by coupled-saw (or knife, if
the plate will be taken from the pipe end) perpendicular on the pipe pivot.
This plate is cut by 90C from the pipe top surface. From this point, pipe is
decorticated at the pipe bottom direction by 135 C from its top surface.
Weight by 17.5 Kg is added at the decorticated plate end for measuring at 23
C. In addition, weight by 10 Kg should be used for measuring at 40 C.
Adhesion test consists of measuring the necessary time for cutting the plate
under the load effect at the pipe bottom.
This time that is appointed by minutes should be larger than or equal to 0.4
diameter/cm

C. Penetration by boring under load effect:


Penetration is measured by inserting a penetration tool into the covering under
specified conditions regarding temperature and load.
Depth of penetration to covering should not exceed 0.15 mm.
The following equipments are necessary for testing:
Water bath is by 25 C. Thermostat should guarantee maximum temperature
from the allowable variance by 1 C.
Penetration tool consists of:
Cylindrical penetration tool of diameter 1.8 mm (section-cross 2.5 mm2), that
is topped by an additional load.
Penetration tool and the additional load are equal 2.5 kg in which the
temperature is 10 Newton/mm2
- Comparative machine by 1/100 mm.
Test measures:
- A test sample is taken from the pipe with covering (external protection).
- The test sample is immerged in the water bath under test temperature by (25
C), and then it is left for at least one hour.
- Penetration tool is installed, and the comparative machine is read (1). After
that, the additional load is put on the penetration tool.
- The comparative machine is read again (2) after 24 hours.
- The difference between the two reading (1) and (2) gives the penetration
depth at 1/100 mm.
D. Impact resistance:
Impact resistance is examined for covering (external protection) the pipe by
awl of a particular shape coming down on the covering from a specified height
and an apparent temperature.
- (Awl) which its head shapes a part of ball body by diameter 25 mm.
- Test machine with descending load and adjustable height.
- Loads of different sizes

Test is made on a covered pipe that is put on the ground or on steel plate of
letter (V) shape at circumferential temperature by 20-25 C.
The normal impacts are made on the covering surface through boring card
(hole) by 5 Newton/mm for the maximum specified covering thickness.
Distance between the impacts positions and the covering end is at least 150
mm, and 50 mm between the impact pivots.
The machine of finding the covering deficiencies by electric potential 25 K.V
at the minimum examines each impulse. Such machine should not find more
than two deficiencies of 100 impulses.
E. The transverse electric resistance
Test consists of measuring the insulation resistance for covering a pipe that is
immersed in salt solution at regular distances.
The following equipments are necessary for test:
- Bath filled with decinormal sodium chloride solution
- Copper back plat as an electrode
- Direct current source, the maximum is 25 V
- Proper Scale for Ampere and voltage measurement
A test sample from the covered pipe is used and plugged from one part for
preventing tangency between the salt solution and the pipe metal.
Before immersing the test sample in the solution, it should be tested by the
machine of finding the covering deficiencies (25 K.V).
Pipe is connected to the cathode from the direct current source.
Transverse electric resistance (RS) is measured using the values; I, A, U as
follows:
RS - U.A (ohm/m2)
_____
I
U = Voltage of the transverse direct current.
A= Contest of the immersed pipe surface by m2 (Minimum 0.3 m2).

I = Amperage. Covering transverse resistance should be 10 for force, 8 ohm/m2


at least; this is after 100 days of immersion.
Results are not accredited, unless the transient current does not exceed the
measured current (I).
It may be used; branching/ the way of connecting the transient current
according to the specifications of German Institute for Standardizations 53482.
F. Aging resistance (Thermal treatment) using Ultraviolet.
This test should be made by radiation machine that is provided with Xenon
lamp. Test sample subjects to a continuous radiation at specified temperature
and humidity rate, measuring and comparing the fusion before and after
exposure to the radiation; in such way change in the metal may be found.
The following equipments are required for test:
- Radiation machine of Xenon lamp test type
- Test sample of polyethylene by thickness 1.5 mm
- Fusion test machine
Test samples are exposure to the test radiation of Xenon lamp for 800 hours at
60 C with relative air humidity by 65%
Fusion is determined according to the specifications of German Institute for
Standardization 53735 before and after exposure to radiation.
Fusion deviation after samples are exposure to radiation should be maximum
+35% of the original index.
G. Interruption extension test:
Test samples are obtained by heating the pipe to maximum 120 C. Hence,
samples are carefully taken
Interruption extension test is made, according to the specifications of German
Institute Standardizations 53455 on the test bars that are between the handles of
the tensile machine that are connected to the sample two parts, by 3 test
samples with free distance by 115 or 57.5 mm between the two tensile handles
(half dimensions are allowed). Speed is 50 or 25mm/minute. Displacement of
clamps (retaining shackles) are calculated
At the minimum, interruption extension is 200%

H. Aging resistance (Thermal treatment) using the temperatures.


Test is made in air-furnace. Test sample, that the adhesive is removed from it
and its maximal thickness is 2 mm, is exposure to temperature by 100 C for
100 days (2400 hours). Samples should be taken every 400 hours for measuring
the fusion index.
Fusion index is determined according to the specifications of German Institute
for standardizations 53735, Method (A); this is before and after aging (thermal
treatment).
Fusion index deviation after aging (thermal treatment) the samples should be
maximum +35% of the original index.
4.3.11.5. Tests:
A. Procedural tests:
The completed pipe firstly subjects to the following tests and examinations;
this is in case of starting production or any changing in the manufacturing
method.
Results are explained in "Competence of manufacturing method" that will be
delivered three copies of it to the engineer within four weeks after making the
tests of measures competence.
B. Production test
During production, the following cases should be tested and examined:
1. Porosity
Each pipe is examines according to the specifications
2. Adhesion
One pipe measure are randomly taken from 500 pipes. If any of such measures
did not meet the measures requirements according to the specifications,
additional measures should be taken for other ten pipes.
3. Penetration through boring under load effect
Test is randomly made for one test sample from 500 pipes. If there was no pipe
accepted, test should be re-made for other ten pipes and give satisfactory
results.

4. Impact resistance
Test is made for a pipe that is randomly taken from among 500 pipes. If one of
the pipes was unaccepted, other 10 pipes should be re-tested and give
satisfactory results.
5. Transverse electric resistance
One test is taken when starting production.
6. Covering cases
Covering each pipe is regular, soft and black. It should be free from bubble,
scratches, holes and other deficiencies (defects).
7. Covering thickness
The minimum thickness of covering by polyethylene on the basic pipes is 3.5
mm.
(10) test measures should be taken from each (10) pipes at regular distances
along the length and around the periphery.
This machine takes non-destructive test. The covering thickness is measured by
magnetic or electromagnetic meter; such meter should have accuracy by 5%.
8. Aging (thermal treatment) resistance by ultraviolet and temperatures
One test is made when starting production.
9. Pipes terminals (ends)
Each pipe terminal is examined. They should be free from any covering by
polyethylene by length 200 mm 10 mm; this is for giving way to welding the
pipes through the transversal (horizontal) butt.
Steel surface that is free from covering is protected against paint corrosion.
Such paint should not have any negative effect on the adhesion strength of the
covering material to joints.
10. Interruption extension
Test is made for one test sample that is taken from one pipe from among 500
pipes. If the sample failed, tests for (10) samples that are taken from other (5)
pipes will be re-made and give satisfactory results.
C. Production and test records

Results of the tests and examinations that are provided in such specifications of
covering approval are sorted. Knowing, tests are made by the pipes supplier
and examined by the observer.
Pipes supplier orderly register the test results considering the pipes numbers.
He keep such records as a proof for 10 years. After such period, he deliver the
pipe card to the employer according to his request.

4.3.12. Lining with cement mortar:


4.3.12.1. General:
Such specifications include the requirements of the cement mortar lining that is
made at the workshop for the steel pipes that will be used in the water
transmission network of the comprehensive villages' water project at Ha'il.
Lining is made in the workshop by the rotator sprinkler (sprayer) method under
the factory conditions. Field implementation for the lining is not allowed.
Standards that will be applied are that of the German Institute for
Standardizations according to its latest issue, or the specifications of the
American Water Works Association C 2.5.
If there was discrepancy, the specifications are mentioned here have the
priority over the standards of the German Institution for Standardization.

4.3.12.2. Service conditions:


The used cement mortar lining should have long-resistance for water that will
be transmitted through pipes after that.
4.3.12.3. Materials Specifications:
All materials are non-toxic and healthy accepted. A list of all the materials
properties; such materials that will be used according to the rotation and
centrifugal ways, is provided to the engineer for approval.
A. Cement

The used cement is of the Portland type that is in conformity with the
specifications of the German Institute for Standardizations 1164, and the
American Society for Testing and Materials specifications (ASTM) C150,
second type, or as approved by the engineer.
B. Materials that are added to the Cement
It is allowed to add the material of (Trab) according to the specifications of the
German Institute for the German Standardizations 1045. It will be considered a
part of the cement; this is by maximum 10% of the cement weight.
C. Sand
Sand consists of chemically inert materials of solid and coherent atoms, also
not topped by an external layer. It is in conformity with the requirements of the
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C 33.
D. Mixers Water
Water is clean, odorless, and free from rejected amounts; organic compounds,
alkaline, salts or other impurities that may reduce the mortar strength, its safety
period and the other desired properties.
Water should not contain materials that may negatively affect on the water that
will be transmitted through the pipelines after that.
Water quality for mixing should be approved by an internationally accredited
laboratory.
E. Materials that are added to the concrete
As useful as the materials that are added to the concrete, they are allowed to be
used for producing proper lining, provided that not negatively affect on the
required properties for lining such as strength, permanent solidity, protection
against corrosion, etc. Also, it should not leave any harmful effect for the
transmitted water.
4.3.12.4. Lining manufacturing:
A. Manufacturing measurements
1. Lining is fixed according to the rotation or centrifugal ways at the supplier's
workshop or contracts' sub-workshop according to the factory conditions.
2. Pipes supplier should abide by the instructions of lining as specified in such
specifications regarding the rotation or centrifugal ways.

3. For guarantee lining quality, tests should be made as specified in such


specifications.
B. Pipes preparation
Before lining, the pipe internal surface is cleaned from impurities, weld angles,
weathered rust, scales, lubricate and oil. Also, it should be free from paint.
There is no need to clean (blast) by sand or pellets (iron shavings) through the
pressed air.
C. Mortar preparation
1. Mortar is batch mixed in proper mixing equipments at the specified time
according to the specifications of equipments; this is for reaching to the
maximal plasticity.
The signal mixing compounds weight are measured by accuracy 3%
2. Proportion of water to cement
Water proportion to cement should not exceed 0.42.
3. Cement content
Cement content is added in which the weight proportion between the aggregate
and the connecting material is lesser than 3.0; this regarding the rotation lining,
while centrifugal lining is 1.5.
4.3.12.5. Lining:
A. Straight pipes
Straight parts of the pipes are lined using rotational tool (rotor). Such tool is
particularly designed and manufactured for the purpose of rotating the part and
fixing the cement mortar linings through the centrifugal way on the internal
surface of the steel pipe or in a way that gives equal results.
When it is necessary to obstruct distortion or shaking during the rotation, each
pipe part should be properly fixed with internal and external brackets that suit
equipment.
When fixing the lining using the rotational sprayer tool, all the necessary
mortar amount for achieving the pipe part lining should be cast without
interruption.
After the mortar mixing reaches to regular thickness, the rotation speed is
increased for producing heavy mortar with soft surface and the least extension
of shrink.

It should be prepared for removing the excesses water.


B. the edge bends and special pipes
Special pipes and bends that could not be automatically lined according to the
specifications, it is manually lined with mortar.
Mortar that is manually fixed should be regular. Also, the manual cement
mortar should be made of the same mortar of lining that is mechanically made
through the centrifugal way.
Parts that will be lined should be cleaned and moisture, if necessary, by water
directly before fixing the manual mortar.
Steel trowel is used in the completion of the manual cement mortar, except at
the bends.
4.3.12.6. Hardening and treatment requirements:
Immediately after the sprinkler pivot rotation, pipes parts are transported to the
treatment area. At all the times, the best care should be done for obstructing the
lining harm. Treatment is, either accelerated or by moisture as the contractor
choose.
The accelerated treatment is alternatively used according to the time-proportion
by 3-5 hours from the moisture treatment to (1) hour from the accelerated
treatment.
On the other hand, moisture treatment is only used if the minimum peripheral
temperature always exceeds 5 C during the required minimum treatment
period. Anyhow, Linings should always be kept until the required minimum
treatment period ends.
1. Moisture treatment
When the pipes reaches to the treatment period within not more than 30
minutes after lining is completed, they are covered by plastic or the wet sacking
for minimum 24 hours.
Any statement for any time that the temperature was (- 10 C), it will not be
approved.
Lining treatment is approved writhing (4) days before shipping. Ends/terminals
of the pipes parts (pieces) should be kept sealed by plastic covers during the
treatment period.

If the plastic covers were installed for the terminals/ends at this time, it also
used in shipping to the workplace. Contractor should do his best to obstruct the
lining crack or dry.
2. Accelerated treatment
Accelerated treatment starts immediately when the pipes reach to the treatment
area. However, pipes temperature should not exceed 32 C for (7) hours, or
until the mortar is primarily concreted whatever which one of them was firstly
happened.
After that, the surrounding vapor is kept at temperature by 43 - 66 C and
relative moisture by not lesser than 85% for treatment period minimum 6
hours.
Lining should be treated for 18 hours before shipping.
3. Alternative ways for treatment
When the employer allows it, the treatment ways are replaced, provided that
giving the way that is used by the contractor a treated lining equal to such
specified in paragraphs (1) and (2) above.
4.3.12.7. Tests measurements:
A. Aggregate Test
Aggregate is tested according to the specifications of the German Institute for
standardizations 4226, page no. (3).
B. Test of mixing and water proportion to the cement
1. After maximum fifteen (15) minutes from achieving lining with the cement
mortar, it will be taken; 300 gm of the loose mortar (soft) from the pipes
terminals (ends).
At this time, it should be noticed that the model average for installing the
mortar is taken from the full horizontal sector of the cement mortar lining.
After that, The loose mortar is fully mixed to get one sample by weight 100
gm, and another one by 200 gm. It is provided in both of them, the same
mixing proportion.

The following abbreviations and instructions for analysis should be considered:


(Units of mass): M+Z+S = M
M= Mortar sample that is weighted
S= Sand
Z= Water
2. Fixing the sand content
Mortar sample is about 200 gm.
The known: M1 , What should be found: S1
Immediately after taking and weighting the samples, the loose mortar is filtered
on a test colander of netting wire by 0.09 mm, while the sand remaining on the
colander is rinsed by water, then it is put down in porcelain bath and softened
by concentrated hydrochloric acid by 20-25 mm.
After that, sand is put again on the colander and rinsed by water until the water
becomes free from the acid. Sand is dried under temperature 110 C until the
analytical result weight is proven: S1
Result and the new value are corrected through the accurate weight for sand.
3. Fixing the water content:
Mortar sample is about 100 gm
The known: M2, what should be found: W2
This test may be made according to one of the two following ways:
3.A. Drying until the weight is fixed (Specifications of the German Institute for
Standardizations 1048)
Principle of such way:

Water amount is determined by measuring the difference of weight between the


new mortar sample and that dry one. Accordingly, water proportion to cement
is calculated based on the original weight of the mortar sample.
Test equipments:
- Balance
- Heating plate with enough big surface
Test implementation:
Within a term does not exceed fifteen (15) minutes after achieving the mortar, a
sample of the loose mortar by 100 gm is taken from the pipe terminal/end
Sample is weighted and equally distributed on the heating plate that is
previously warmed. Drying is fast made through continue moving until al the
masses disappear.
After cooling the sample, it is weighted again. The loosing weight equal to the
water amount
3.B. Xylol way (Wood oil).
Principle of such way:
The water amount is determined through distillation a sample of the loose
mortar that is mixed with xylol material. Calculating the water proportion to
cement based on the original weight of the mortar sample.
Test equipments:
- Balance
- Proper distillation machine (according to the specifications of the German
Institute for Standardizations (DIN) 51582
Test implementation:

Within a term that does not exceed fifteen (15) minutes after achieving the
lining, a sample of the loose mortar by about 100 gm is taken from the pipe
terminal/end
Mortar sample is immediately filled in the distillation crucible that is sealed
and weighted.
After weighting the loose mortar, about 120 milliliter of xylol is added to the
sample. Crucible is linked to the distillation machine, and then mixture is
heated; in such way, the water and xylol is evaporated together.
After cooling, the condense water is gathered in an echelon cylinder. Because
of the higher specific gravity of water and non-mixing it, it is clearly separated
from xylol.
4. Calculating the mixing proportion and water to cement
4.A. Mixing proportion:
V- S
----Z
1
v- ___________________
M1/S1 (1-W2/M2) 1
Proportions of SI/ M1 & M2/ W2 are obtained according to the specifications.
4.B. Water proportion to cement W:
W= W/Z
W2/M2
v- _____________________
1- (W2/M2) (SI/MI)
C. Test of compressing and blending resistance:
A lot of water, is added to the dry mixture, equal to the original cement mortar
in which after two (2) minutes of mixing in a blender of the mechanical rotor
container type, falling is by 13-16 cm. Falling is determined using the flow
schedule according to the specifications of the German Institute for
Standardizations (DIN) 1060, paragraph (9.10.10.)

Three (3) measure fliers (4x4x16) for testing are taken. They may be obtained
by the following method:
A. Mortar samples are grazed from the loose pipes/newly lined, then mixed
well until reaching to homogeneous texture as possible.
B. Before lining the pipe, loose mortar samples are taken, while its water is
displaced on an absorbent filter.
Samples are manufactured, stored and tested according to the specifications of
the German Institute for Standardizations DIN 1165, page no. (7).
In addition to resistance, it should always be stated; the falling rate and water
proportion to cement.
D. Test of lining thickness:
Tests are made for the loose pipe/newly lined through either measuring
penetration or on the indurate lining according to the non-destructive test
method.
1. Penetration measure
A harden graded steel needle is used for measures in which measure is made in
two points at each pipe terminal/end.
2. Non-destructive measure
For measure, a measure meters of (the electromagnetism layers thickness
indications, sensitizing measure meters, etc.) with accuracy by 10%.
Values of lining thickness are given by accuracy 0.1 mm.
Thickness measure is made at both of the two pipe terminals/ends and on the
remaining lining at two positions of the pipe.

This test should be made for minimum (4) points that are equal distribution on
the external periphery.
4.3.12.8. Tests:
A. Procedural tests
In case of starting production, or making any change in the treatment, mortar
installation, or adjusting any compound, one of the first completed pipes should
subject to the following test and examinations stated below.
The test results should be explained in the report of manufacturing method
competence that will be provided in three copied to the engineer within (4)
weeks after making each measures competence test. Report should state the
minimum of the following information about the following test results:
1. Sand, additive
2. Water
3. Water proportion to cement
4. Pressing and bending power
5. Lining thickness
6. Pipe ends/terminals
7. Surface state
8. The refined part of the lining structure
B. Production results
Examination
Test
or
frequency
examination
Once a week
Sand, additives
Once a week
Lining
tool,
water,
cement,
pipe diameter and
mixing
propor ion.
Once a week
Pressing
and
bending
resistance
20% of pipes
Lining thickness
Each pipe
Pipes
terminals/ends
Each pipe
Surface state
Once a month
Lining structure
C. Records of tests and results
Lining with cement mortar approval is conditioned by the results of the tests
and examinations that are provided in these specifications. Knowing, tests are
made by the pipes supplier and examined by the observer.

Pipes supplier regularly records the test results considering the pipes numbers.
He keeps these records as a proof for 10 years.
4.3.12.9. Approval standards:
The following approval standards are valid for all the examinations and tests
that are stated in such specifications:
A. Allowable variances in dimensions
1. Lining thickness
Lining thickness of the main pipe has the following values:
Maximum Minimum Nominal Treatment
Single
Single
Value
Process
Value
Value
19
12
14
Rotation
way,
sprayer
pivot/rotator
sprinkler
14
12
12
Centrifugal
2. Pipes ends terminals
Pipe ends/terminals are free from lining with the cement mortar along length by
maximum 150 mm. Lining ends/terminals are sharp edges by 90 C.
B. Optical examination
1. Surface state
The completed cement mortar surface is soft. It is only allowed to sporadically
beetle the aggregate grains on the surface.
Surface should not be flattened in the independent positions, also should not
loose the sand, have waves or grooves.
Knowing, the single grooves and waves are not a reason for disapproval, if the
minimum specified lining thickness that is according to the formula/Colebrook
equation was lesser than 0.1 mm.
Because of reduction that may happens to the mortar-lining, hairline cracks are
unavoidably. The cracks of hairlines and surface that sporadically happen are
only allowed by width 0.8 mm.
2. Lining structure
In the lapped part of the mortar sample, the separated grains are surrounded
from all the sides with cement. Also, it should not have any pores.
C. Layer structure requirements
Aggregate should be surrounded from all sides by cement, and it should not
have any pores.

Regarding the rotator sprinkler pivot, increase of the soft aggregate on the
mortar surface that resulting from the sprinkler pivot rotation should be kept
low as possible; this is through the rotation of the sprinkler pivot or the portion
of the mortar mixing.
Thickness of the soft aggregate layer at the separated points should not exceed
1/4 of the layer thickness.
D. Mortar mechanical properties
Tests should be made for experimental samples that are manufactured in a
special shape in which the samples could not be taken from the lining, because
of that the final thickness is only 14 mm and its arched-shape.
The pressing and bending resistance should reaches to the following minimum
average value after the experiment of the 28 days.
Bending
Resistance
Newton/mm2

Pressing
Resistance
Newton/mm2

5.0
5.5
6.0

40
45
50

Water
proportion to
the
cement
including the
sample
0.42
0.40
0.35

The average values are obtained through approximation.


The pressing resistance for each sample should not differ, by more than 5
Newton/mm2 (10%), while the bending resistance by (1) Newton/mm2, from
the values mentioned above.
4.3.12.10. Defects maintenance
Lining that is produced not according to the specifications are not approved by
the contractor/ or the engineer, and it should produced again at the pipes
supplier's expense.
If it was necessary to maintain the harmed areas, maintenances should be as
follows:
If the harmed areas were covering the full external periphery of the pipe,
maintenances should be mechanically made according to the specifications.
The scattered and harmed points may be manually maintained.
The harmed lining should be removed and replaced by new mortar.
Regarding the maintenances of the pipes that are lined through centrifugal, the
mortar that used for the manually maintenance should has the same
composition of that is mechanically produced.

The rotator sprinkler pivot way; the mortar that is used in the manual
maintenance should has the following composition:
1. Cement weight part
2. Sand weight part
The other properties of mortar are according to the specifications
If an abstracted material will be added to the mixing water, the requirements of
such specifications should be obligatory.
Before putting the mortar, cement mortar should be moisture.
4.3.13. Bens that are produced in the factory:
4.3.13.1. Standardizations scope:
A. These standards cover the technical requirements of the bends that are
produced in the factory and used in the main water transmission pipeline for
the comprehensive villages' water project at Ha'il
B. The butter welding bends should meet the requirements that are specified
according to the standard (SB75) that is developed and approved by The
Manufacturers Standardizations Society of the valves and joints according to its
latest issue and the requirements of these specifications.
4.3.13.2. Materials specifications:
A. Steel
Steel should be of X65 and X56 type or any equivalent material of mechanical
properties and composition according to the specifications of he steel pipes.
B. Covering by polyethylene
Bends are covered by polyethylene from the outside. Also, covering should
meet the requirements of the covering by polyethylene specifications as far as it
is applicable.
C. Lining with cement mortar
Bends are lined with the cement mortar from the inside. Also, lining should
meet the requirements of the lining with cement mortar specifications as far as
applicable.
4.3.13.3. Manufacturing:
A. Bends are manufactured by hot or welding shaping, considering the
specifications of the American Petroleum Institute standards (API) 1104 or
using both of the two ways.
Pipes supplier manufactures them according to a proven way that should be
approved by the engineer.
B. Pipes that are used for manufacturing the bends are produced and tested
according to the pipes specifications.
C. The joint competence is 1.0; this value is for all the weld splices (seams).
D. Weld ends are according to the specifications of the Manufacturers
Standardization Society (SB75), paragraph (13.1.2.).
E. Bends that are produced by welding two parts that are pressing-shaped,
should subject to the thermal treatment after shaping.
F. Documents are delivered for approval before starting the production.

Bends are manufactured, only after the engineer and contractor approve the
provided documents.
1. Charts:
At the minimum, charts should contain the following information:
- Materials (Chemical composition and mechanical properties)
- The allowable maximum operation pressure
- The maximum test pressure
- The wall thickness and the allowable variances
- Dimensions
- Internal diameter, length, radius, etc. including the allowable variances
- The weld splice (seam) design
- The weld ends design, the specifications of manufacturing by equipments and
the allowable variances.
2. The wall thickness calculation
3. Report of the welding and manufacturing measurements
- Such report should contain the following information at the minimum.
-Complete specifications about the material.
- Shaping process including the temperature that shaping has been made under.
- Detailed description for the welding process including: the type, size and
grade of the filing metal and the weld protection layer, weld speed, electric
properties and number of the weld strokes
- Thermal treatment after shaping and welding
- Dimensions accuracy
- Showing the capacity of enduring pressure equal to that is necessary for
making circular/ring effort equivalent to the minimum plasticity of a pipe has
the same equivalent grade and thickness.
4.3.13.4. Test measurements:
A. Radiography
Radiography is made according to the specifications of the German Institute for
Standardizations (DIN) 54111, type (B) and (DIN) 54109; this is by using the
techniques of the lens hole and the treatment processes (development) that lead
to producing a movie that is free from the surface defects and give sensitivity to
the image quality. Such movie is of the grade (1) (DIN 45109) and by using the
indications of (FE-10/16); this is regarding the real wall thickness.
Before starting imaging the production by radiography, pipes supplier, in the
observer's presence, prepare a group of the test movies that will be approved as
a measure for the sensitivity quality and images explanation.
B. Ultrasonic waves test
Before start testing the production by the ultrasonic waves, pipes supplier, in
the observer presence, makes the ultrasonic waves test for the purpose of,
setting the production test measures.
Verification of finding defects ability is made on such test pipes that have
welds of known defects such as lack of penetration, porosity, harmful
impurities and cracks. Also, it may be done on test pipes of notch and holes

that are mechanically implemented according to the specifications of the


American Petroleum Institute (API) 5L.
Test pipes are parts/pieces of pipes that have the same diameter, the wall
thickness, and similar weld to that of the bends that will be examined. It should
be with enough length to be sure of making the ultrasonic test in the same
speed of the real test speed.
It is necessary to have single air pockets by diameter larger than (1) mm in the
pockets area in which it should not be more than seven air pockets by contest 4
cm2.
It is automatically notified, that there are ultrasonic waves signals, which
indicate that there is a harmful defect according to the latest issue of the
American Petroleum Institute specifications (API) 5L, by warning alarm or
other machine.
The ultrasonic waves' machine should find longitudinally and widthwise the
defects. The factory also should examine the slices and plates by the ultrasonic
waves as a procedural test for conforming that this way and measure are
enough to find the disagreeable layers according to these specifications.
C. Tensile test
The samples of the cross basic material is taken from the bend width regarding
the rolling direction.
The samples of the cross welding material are taken from the bend width
regarding the weld direction. The bend material that is extra over the basic
materials should be removed by grinding.
Test sample is prepared and tested according to the specifications of the
American Petroleum Institute (API) 5L.
The samples of the cross basic material are tested regarding the plasticity, the
maximum tensile resistance and lengthening. The cross weld sample is tested
only regarding the maximum tensile resistance.
D. Impact tests
The size, preparation and testing the impact test samples are according to the
specifications of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E3268, chapter (ISO R 148). It is crosswise taken regarding the bend pivot.
E. Bending tests
The size, preparation and testing the test samples are according to the
specifications of the American Petroleum Institute (API) 5L.
4.3.13.5. Tests:
The following tests are made by the pipes supplier:
A. Destructive tests:
The following destructive tests are made for one bend from each group.
Samples are taken from the joint of the original part. At maximum, the group
consists of ten bends of the same size, wall thickness and steel ion. Charts
should be provided for the thermal treatment.
1. Tensile test, Basic material
Two samples for tensile are taken from the basic material in the crosswise
direction. Resistance of plasticity, tensile and lengthening is tested.

2. Tensile tests for weld splice (seam).


The tensile resistance is tested for one sample that is crosswise taken from the
weld splice (seam).
3. Bending test for the weld splice (seam)
The two samples of bending are crosswise taken from the weld splice (seam) in
which one is bended on the weld face and the other is on the weld root.
4. Impact test
Three samples for the impact test are crosswise taken from the basic material,
also from the weld splice (seam). It is tested at 0 C.
5. Chemical analysis
The following chemical analysis are made:
- ....
- Experimental test for each group
B. Non-destructive tests
The following Non-destructive tests and examinations are made for each
completed bend:
1. After shaping, calibration and the thermal treatment, all the weld splices
(seams) are tested by radiography and the ultrasonic waves along its full length.
2. Regarding welding at the site, all the weld terminals (ends) are tested by the
ultrasonic waves within 25 mm from the edge. It should not be found; any
layers.
3. Dimensions checking and examination
==201==
4. Impact resistance
Test is made for a pipe that is randomly taken from among 500 pipes. If one of
the pipes was unaccepted, other 10 pipes should be re-tested and give
satisfactory results.
5. Transverse electric resistance
One test is taken when starting production.
6. Covering cases
Covering each pipe is regular, soft and black. It should be free from bubble,
scratches, holes and other deficiencies (defects).
7. Covering thickness
The minimum thickness of covering by polyethylene on the basic pipes is 3.5
mm.
(10) test measures should be taken from each (10) pipes at regular distances
along the length and around the periphery.
This machine takes non-destructive test. The covering thickness is measured by
magnetic or electromagnetic meter; such meter should have accuracy by 5%.
8. Aging (thermal treatment) resistance by ultraviolet and temperatures
One test is made when starting production.
9. Pipes terminals (ends)

Each pipe terminal is examined. They should be free from any covering by
polyethylene by length 200 mm 10 mm; this is for giving way to welding the
pipes through the transversal (horizontal) butt.
Steel surface that is free from covering is protected against paint corrosion.
Such paint should not have any negative effect on the adhesion strength of the
covering material to joints.
10. Interruption extension
Test is made for one test sample that is taken from one pipe from among 500
pipes. If the sample failed, tests for (10) samples that are taken from other (5)
pipes will be re-made and give satisfactory results.
C. Production and test records
Results of the tests and examinations that are provided in such specifications of
covering approval are sorted. Knowing, tests are made by the pipes supplier
and examined by the observer.
Pipes supplier orderly register the test results considering the pipes numbers.
He keep such records as a proof for 10 years. After such period, he deliver the
pipe card to the employer according to his request.
4.3.12. Lining with cement mortar:
4.3.12.1. General:
Such specifications include the requirements of the cement mortar lining that is
made at the workshop for the steel pipes that will be used in the water
transmission network of the comprehensive villages' water project at Ha'il.
Lining is made in the workshop by the rotator sprinkler (sprayer) method under
the factory conditions. Field implementation for the lining is not allowed.
Standards that will be applied are that of the German Institute for
Standardizations according to its latest issue, or the specifications of the
American Water Works Association C 2.5.
If there was discrepancy, the specifications are mentioned here have the
priority over the standards of the German Institution for Standardization.
4.3.12.2. Service conditions:
The used cement mortar lining should have long-resistance for water that will
be transmitted through pipes after that.
4.3.12.3. Materials Specifications:
All materials are non-toxic and healthy accepted. A list of all the materials
properties; such materials that will be used according to the rotation and
centrifugal ways, is provided to the engineer for approval.
A. Cement
The used cement is of the Portland type that is in conformity with the
specifications of the German Institute for Standardizations 1164, and the
American Society for Testing and Materials specifications (ASTM) C150,
second type, or as approved by the engineer.
B. Materials that are added to the Cement

It is allowed to add the material of (Trab) according to the specifications of the


German Institute for the German Standardizations 1045. It will be considered a
part of the cement; this is by maximum 10% of the cement weight.
C. Sand
Sand consists of chemically inert materials of solid and coherent atoms, also
not topped by an external layer. It is in conformity with the requirements of the
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C 33.
D. Mixers Water
Water is clean, odorless, and free from rejected amounts; organic compounds,
alkaline, salts or other impurities that may reduce the mortar strength, its safety
period and the other desired properties.
Water should not contain materials that may negatively affect on the water that
will be transmitted through the pipelines after that.
Water quality for mixing should be approved by an internationally accredited
laboratory.
E. Materials that are added to the concrete
As useful as the materials that are added to the concrete, they are allowed to be
used for producing proper lining, provided that not negatively affect on the
required properties for lining such as strength, permanent solidity, protection
against corrosion, etc. Also, it should not leave any harmful effect for the
transmitted water.
4.3.12.4. Lining manufacturing:
A. Manufacturing measurements
1. Lining is fixed according to the rotation or centrifugal ways at the supplier's
workshop or contracts' sub-workshop according to the factory conditions.
2. Pipes supplier should abide by the instructions of lining as specified in such
specifications regarding the rotation or centrifugal ways.
3. For guarantee lining quality, tests should be made as specified in such
specifications.
B. Pipes preparation
Before lining, the pipe internal surface is cleaned from impurities, weld angles,
weathered rust, scales, lubricate and oil. Also, it should be free from paint.
There is no need to clean (blast) by sand or pellets (iron shavings) through the
pressed air.
C. Mortar preparation
1. Mortar is batch mixed in proper mixing equipments at the specified time
according to the specifications of equipments; this is for reaching to the
maximal plasticity.
The signal mixing compounds weight are measured by accuracy 3%
2. Proportion of water to cement
Water proportion to cement should not exceed 0.42.
3. Cement content
Cement content is added in which the weight proportion between the aggregate
and the connecting material is lesser than 3.0; this regarding the rotation lining,
while centrifugal lining is 1.5.

4.3.12.5. Lining:
A. Straight pipes
Straight parts of the pipes are lined using rotational tool (rotor). Such tool is
particularly designed and manufactured for the purpose of rotating the part and
fixing the cement mortar linings through the centrifugal way on the internal
surface of the steel pipe or in a way that gives equal results.
When it is necessary to obstruct distortion or shaking during the rotation, each
pipe part should be properly fixed with internal and external brackets that suit
equipments.
When fixing the lining using the rotational sprayer tool, all the necessary
mortar amount for achieving the pipe part lining should be cast without
interruption.
After the mortar mixing reaches to regular thickness, the rotation speed is
increased for producing heavy mortar with soft surface and the least extension
of shrink.
It should be prepared for removing the excesses water.
B. the edge bends and special pipes
Special pipes and bends that could not be automatically lined according to the
specifications, it is manually lined with mortar.
Mortar that is manually fixed should be regular. Also, the manual cement
mortar should be made of the same mortar of lining that is mechanically made
through the centrifugal way.
Parts that will be lined should be cleaned and moisture, if necessary, by water
directly before fixing the manual mortar.
Steel trowel is used in the completion of the manual cement mortar, except at
the bends.
4.3.12.6. Hardening and treatment requirements:
Immediately after the sprinkler pivot rotation, pipes parts are transported to the
treatment area. At all the times, the best care should be done for obstructing the
lining harm. Treatment is, either accelerated or by moisture as the contractor
choose.
The accelerated treatment is alternatively used according to the time-proportion
by 3-5 hours from the moisture treatment to (1) hour from the accelerated
treatment.
On the other hand, moisture treatment is only used if the minimum peripheral
temperature always exceeds 5 C during the required minimum treatment
period. Anyhow, Linings should always be kept until the required minimum
treatment period ends.
1. Moisture treatment
When the pipes reaches to the treatment period within not more than 30
minutes after lining is completed, they are covered by plastic or the wet sacking
for minimum 24 hours.
Any statement for any time that the temperature was (- 10 C), it will not be
approved.

Lining treatment is approved writhing (4) days before shipping. Ends/terminals


of the pipes parts (pieces) should be kept sealed by plastic covers during the
treatment period.
If the plastic covers were installed for the terminals/ends at this time, it also
used in shipping to the workplace. Contractor should do his best to obstruct the
lining crack or dry.
==211==
Valve levers are made of stainless steel that at least is equal to (C13 X20) or
(1.4571) according to "DIN 17440". It is preferable to be of the Telescopic type
or adapter couplers for lengthening it.
Seal rings that are on the wedge (Cutter) and inside the valve body are made of
stainless steel (1.4021) according to "DIN 17440". The nut of the lever is made
of bronze (2.0592) according to "DIN 1709". Connecting bolts and nuts are
made of stainless steel (1.4301) or (1.4303) according to "DIN 17440" or its
equivalent. Each valve has two lifting holes for handing by the jack. Rubber is
put on the wedges (cutters), into the seal rings, etc. It should be of a high
quality to bear storage in dry climate.
All the valves will be installed underground should be provided with surface
services boxes that can bear (10) Ton, and protection pipes with the accessories
and connecting rods that should be included in the valves public price.
Moreover, additional amount by 20 % of the accessories should be supplied.
Percentage
80
10
10
60
30
10
30
60
10

Length (cm)
70
100
130
60
90
120
50
80
110

Diameter (mm)
75
100
150

The percentages mentioned above may be modified before supplying the


connecting rods.
Connecting rods should have a design, as if necessary, it may be cut to the right
length overall.
Connecting rods are provided with square-head handles that are operated by a
button of dimensions 14 x 14 mm that at the minimum of the valves by
diameter 75 mm, 19 x 19 mm, 100 mm, and 150 mm.

Valves that will be installed in the valves room with the valves of large sizes,
should be equipped with the same equipments mentioned above, and suit the
same depth of backfill.
Surface services boxes, connecting rods, etc. that are in touch with the dusts
that lead to corrosion, should be protected from corrosion by Epoxy. The
thickness of painting at the minimum is 300 Micron.
A group of seal rings for each five valves should be supplied for installing on
the pole. It is included in the valves public prices.
An operating switch for each 20 valves are supplied, should be guaranteed.
Also, a manual operating wheel for each 100 valves (Diameter 300 mm and
250 mm) are supplied for each category at the minimum. Switches and wheels
are included in the valves public prices.
The surface protection for the inner surfaces of the Gates Valves that are
installed inside the valves rooms and sealed (Gaskets), should be of resin epoxy
that suits the used static electricity. The outer paint is of the metallic ceramic
with additional artificial resin.
The seats rings (Bearings) should be replaceable. It should also be provided a
proper tool for keeping the disk and seat in touch in order to guarantee the
direct seal. Any oiling (Lubrication) for the seats surfaces (Bearings) are not
allowed.
The valve cover should be provided with a back pivot seat for achieving the
appropriate coincidence for the axle of the disk and the valve body when the
valve is used.
4.4.8. Automatic Air Valves:
Automatic air valves should be double-open; one large and the other small,
with check valve of a separated screw thread in order to allow checking the
valve without locking the main line. Air valves are provided with a float that is
made of carbon steel which is coated by rubber or stainless steel that in
conformity with (DIN 17440, 1, 40. 01), (ANS 3161) or its equivalent, or the
stainless steel that is coated by the brass and Nitrile rubber that is shaped in
blocks. It should be considered to supply spare amount of the floats by 20% of
the floats numbers that are included in the supplying; this is regarding the
public prices of the air valves that are provided with guide brass indexes.
The coating and cover of the valve should be made of the ductile cast iron that
is in conformity with (DIN 1693 GGG 50 or 40). The poles of the separated
valves are made of stainless steel (20 C 13) according to (DIN 17440).
The air valves should be designed in the way that eliminates the water hammer
impacts.

The dry layer thickness of coating should be of inside and outside resin epoxy
by 300 micron at the minimum.
Valves operating pressures varies between 10-60 Bar.
4.4.9. Air Relief Valves:
Air relief valve should be designed in the way that allows flowing large
amounts of the air through the hole during the pipeline filling (Loading). The
seal is locked after the liquid is entered into the valve. It should also allow
flowing large amounts through the hole during the pipeline discharging in order
to eliminate the discharging pressure. The size of the discharging hole should
be larger or equal to the one of the filling in the valve. The valve should consist
of body, cover, protective barrier, float, and seat (bearing).
The protective barrier is designed in such way that protect the float from the
direct touching with the flowing water and air in order to prevent the float
locking inside the valve. The seat (bearing) is fixed on the valve cover without
distortion. It should be easy to dismantle if necessary.
Float is made of stainless steel and directed from the middle by guide collars
for the right lock in the seat.
The outer surface of the valve is painted by Lead oxide (TT-P86, Type IV) for
the high resistance against corrosion.
All the materials of implementation should be supported by documents to
prove that they are in conformity with the American Association Specifications
for checking the materials that are used in making the automatic air valves.
4.4.10 Ball Valves
Barrier should be made between the ball and the valve body on the two sides of
the valve, by a plastic material that suits the part will be locked. Seats are made
in a way that guarantee the sealed isolation on the ball even if the plastic
purling is damaged, while the seats of the lubricate barrier are not approved.
The sealed surface should be ball-shaped and lapped perfectly. If the chroming
was used, it should be perfectly put and the factory is the responsible for any
corrosion may happen to the chrome layer.
Pier (leg) should be integrated with the ball.
Isolation barrier should be made between the pier and cover by circular rings,
neck collar, an additional sub-sealed material, or its equivalent.
He circular rings are made of material that suits the pressure and temperature.
The material that is used in manufacturing is in conformity with (ASTM 536).
The other designs are approved by the engineer.

4.4.11. Check Valves

Check Valves of the Swing Type:


Check valves of the swing type should be in conformity with the following
general specifications:
A) Body: It is made of stainless steel, and designed carefully for keeping the
pressure drop at the minimum. The wide hole on the upper surface of the body
should be designed in such way that easily allow checking and maintenance.
The body including the cover flange is circular. It is provided with screw gears
for the seat that is renewable/ replaceable. It should also be provided with
movable turn off tool for the disk.
The body should be provided with: ( ..... )
B) The cover: It is made of stainless steel. The sealed surfaces are either salient
or from ring connection that suits the estimative capacity of the valve.
C) Hinge pin: It is a part of the valve group that is made of stainless steel which
is shaped by hammering, while the actuator is made of the ground rod. It is
fixed in the middle of the body by two keys of screw threads, and sealed by
mineral collar. Hinge should be easily dismantled for maintenance.
D) Seat ring: It should be made of stainless steel that is shaped by hammering.
It is a part of the valve group that its external diameter is provided with screw
threads, while the internal is provided with notches to make the processes of
dismantling and installing easy.
E) Disk: It is a part of the valve group that is made of stainless steel. Its back
surface should contain tail link of screwed threads on it to connect with the pin
lever through nut and pivot (head-screw nail).
F) Pin: It is made of stainless steel.
4.4.12. Electric Control Valves:
Electric valves are of the jetting nozzles type, and there is a fixed bored plat to
achieve the necessary control for the pressure and flowing.
Valves are designed in such way that control flow and measure the flow rate
using the differential pressure method. Valves are tested to guarantee that
operation is free from cavitations under the severest conditions. It should be
provided with the valves, performance curves (Draining, pressure loss,
cavitations element).
Each valve should be provided with the following:
- Bezel control tank with a protection grade by not lesser than (IP 55). It should
be equipped with group of control switches, pressing buttons, guide lamp, and
remote control switch.

- Differential pressure transmitter by (4) and (20) mA.


- Indicator that states the current status.
- The position transmitter by (4-20) mA.
- Processing and transfer unit based on a processor for the automatic control of
flow rate, flow indicator, total volume indicator, and proper turnout amounts
for indicating doubling of the flow rate, total volume, and the valve status.
- Remote indication (guide) should be guaranteed for knowing the valve
maximum positions and when it is out of action.
- Electric supplies 220/380 Volt, and frequency by 60 HZ.
- Operation pressure is not lesser than 40 Bar.
Materials:
- The main body and the movable plat:
They are made of the ductile cast iron according to (DIN 1693 GGG 50 or 40),
or its equivalent.
- The fixed plate:
It is made of the stainless steel according to (ASTM Grad TP 316 L), or its
equivalent.
The materials that are chosen for the other parts of the valve should be
appropriate for the water type, and keep it away from any electrolytic corrosion
problem.
Resin epoxy is used in painting the internal and external surfaces of the valve
by (300-350) Micron. It should be usable in drinking water (water well)
transmission.
Resin epoxy may be made of two compounds; resin itself and hardening
element.
Contractor should determine in his tender all the specifications of the resin he
will use.
Valve pole is made of stainless steel (1.44.60) and in conformity with The
German Institute for the industrial measures (DIN 1744).
It is fixed inside bearings that are made of material full of oiling/lubrication.
Valves disks are designed without outer strengthening mainstays, but it has
holes for entering the poles tails inside it.
Connecting nails and nuts are made of stainless steel (1.4301) or (1.4303)
according to (DIN 17440), or its equivalent. Each valve has two lifting holes
for handing by the jack. Rubber is put on wedges (cutters), inside the sealed
rings, etc. It should be of a quality that bears storage in dry climate.
Valve should be double-flanged (flanges).
4.4.13. Machines that working through electric motor:
The moving units that are working through electricity should be able to operate
the valves at the maximal operation pressure.

Cycle of open or lock should be about (2) minutes. This is for all the valves
that working through motor.
The specifications of "Electric motors" should be in conformity with all the
required motors for operating the valves that working with motor. Electric
valves should be of the three-phase type, and working with the alternating
current. Also, it should be of the inductive model of the squirrel box type, with
rosette connection, isolation of (F) type and protecting the motors through three
(3) thermal protection switches for releasing the moment at the ends of the
open and lock that is set from the beginning to control the open and lock
direction.
Motors are provided with the necessary gears boxes and couplers for linking to
the valves levers. It should be installed in a good way that is proper for
operating until 60 C.
Actuator is also equipped with a manual operating wheel and mechanical
indicator for knowing the status.
All valves that work with motors are equipped with the following equipments
that are designed to be used through the system of (48 F), with direct current:
For switching off in the cases of the final position
Electrical switch for controlling the stroke by locking and shutting off
when the valve is completely opened.
Electrical switch for controlling the stroke by locking and shutting off
when the valve is completely locked on the status of "Always open,
Always locked".
The edge switches are of the type that is torsion sensitive that prevent
the sudden shutting off for the motors at the end positions. Position tests
control switches are added (open, switch off, lock), also remote
operation switches, contactors that reflect and separate the potential with
non-potential contact. The mechanical status reviewer should be
equipped with electric actuator.
The edges electric switches should be easy to found for setting and
editing it. Also, it should be completely surrounded by covers and
protected according to "IES Protection Form Ip 68".
4.4.14. Gears boxes:
4.4.14.1. Worm gears boxes:
Worm gears boxes should be proper for operating by the manual operating
wheel that is installed on the connecting rod, also proper for operation when
locking at the clockwise. Gears boxes have end arresters by an adjustable and
movable nut; this is for both of the final status. Connecting nails and outer nuts
should be made of stainless steel.
Worm gears boxes are protected according to (IP68) for pressure by (6 m) of
water at the maximum.

4.4.14.2. Barrel gears boxes:


The fork barrel gears boxes should be proper for operation by the manual
operating wheel, the connecting rod of the electric operator, and operating
when locking at the clockwise.
Gears box is made of the ductile cast iron (GGG 40) according to (DIN 1693).
The outer connecting nails and nuts are made of stainless steel.
4.4.14.3. Chamfered gears boxes:
The chamfered gears boxes should be proper for operating by the manual
operating wheel or the connecting rod, also proper for operating when locking
at clockwise. Gears box should be made of the ductile cast iron (GGG 40)
according to (DIN 1693).
The protection should be according to (TP 68) for pressure by (6 m) water at
the maximum.
The outer nails and nuts are made of stainless steel.
Connecting rods for operation by switch with the shape of the letter (T):
The connecting rods are made of galvanized and soft steel, telescopic type,
galvanized connecting, and square-head handles of switch and dimensions by
27 x 27 mm at the minimum.
Connecting rods for operation on the ground:
Connecting rods are made of stainless steel including the expansion and ball
connections.
4.5. Digging, fettle, and shaping the trenches:
When implementing the pipelines digging, contractor should abide by the
requirements of these specifications regarding the dust works. Accordingly,
when this is required, building and keeping certified type of the temporal fence
around any work, also securing the fenced paths through the trenches.
Trenches should be dig to hollow of regular surface that is manually trimmed
as necessary. Also, its horizontal section should be flat and of breadth that
guarantees at the minimum turnout by (300 mm) between the pipelines body or
fossils, woods and the mineral supporting plates, or turnout larger than this as
necessary.
The maximum breadth of the all the pipelines trenches should not exceed,
between the fixed soil in the sides of the trench, 300 mm above the upper
surface of the pipeline, the dimensions that are stated in the charts unless the
pipeline will be protected by complete concrete filling for all the sides, or if
there was more than one pipeline at the trench.
If the trench breadth exceeded the allowable dimensions, or the trench brackets
has been moved and the soil next to the trench has been rarefied at height by
300 mm or lesser upon the upper surface of the pipelines, contractor should

surround the pipelines with concrete type of (C 30) at his expense and as it is
determined, or he may provide another protection for the pipelines as the
engineer guide.
At the places that the pipelines will be expanded through fixed soil (without
bed), contractor should guarantee stopping the diggings of the first stage at
height 75 mm upon the shaping level, and the low part of the trench foot to the
shaping level should be manually and directly implemented before the
pipelines expansion. The trench foot should be trimmed and flat to guarantee
regular support for the whole pipeline. It should also be free from the large
stones or the rocky burrs.
Additional diggings should be made in the trench sides or its bottom for
making the connection easy as it is necessary. Connecting digs should be with
depth sufficient to guarantee thickness by 200 mm at the minimum of the
gritting at the end of the pipeline head as necessary to expand the pipelines on
gritting or inside concrete cover. Trench should be dig under the pipelines level
to leave distance between the shaping level and the pipe body; either equal or
larger than the right dimensions of the charts.
All the unnecessary or improper digging materials will not be used again. Hey
should be disposed in a proper way away from the workplace.
4.6. Pipeline bed:
The digging materials resulting from the trench digging and the digging works
generally should be transported to the general filling areas according to the
employer instructions. In the cases that the digging for pipelines is
implemented near to adjacent buildings, the necessary precautions should be
taken and putting the proper mainstays for such buildings to avoid any damage
may happen to it.
==221==
The remains of digging and/or the loose rocks that are in the trenches bottom
should be cleaned up before putting the pipes bed layer; moreover, if the
natural soil in the trench bottom became loose because of the digging works, it
requires to make the necessary compaction for the soil as stated hereinafter. If
the subjacent soil in the trench bottom kept incoherent, it should be replaced by
other proper materials from off-site. The places of the extra-digging should be
filled up with proper materials that are chosen from off-site, provided that
being suitable for such purposes and free from the organic materials, rocks,
debris, and impurities.
Contractor, if been advised, should expand the pipes on a bed that consists of
sand gritting. The space in the low of the pipes body that is dig as detailed
should be filled with gritting at the full width of the trench as layers. It should

be completely flattened by an approved light vibratory roller or plate tamper.


After the pipeline expansion, sand gritting should be put and flattened at layers
of thickness by 100 mm. This is through )
( ...
If the gritting got harm because of the water, sewage, or fall down of the trench
sides, it should be removed from the trench and replaced by a new gritting
before launching out into expansion or re-expansion the pipes.
Components of the High-grade Sand:
The pipes are expanded on a bed of the clean sand. It should meet the following
grade requirements:
Sieve No./ Size
American
Percentage of What
Standardizations
Passing through the
Sieve
3/8 Inch
(9.5 mm)
100
Sieve no. 4
(4.75 mm)
95-100
Sieve no. 8
(2.36 mm)
80-100
Sieve no. 16
(1.18 mm)
50-85
Sieve no. 30
(600 Micron)
25-60
Sieve no. 50
(300 Micron)
10-30
Sieve no. 100
(150 Micron)
2-10
It is kept compacted until its relative density reaches to 75% (According to the
standardizations of the American Society for Testing and Materials, 4254 D),
or to maximal density by 95% according to the standardizations of the
American Society for Testing and Materials, 1557 D, 4257 D (Whichever is the
greater). It is necessary to choose the proper compaction way which doesn't
cause damage for the pipes. However, it is allowed to precipitate the water only
when the off-site or original filling materials are of the sand type that allows
drying the water out, or of the granular soil type. The places that exposed to
extra diggings or requires extra fillings for achieving the required structural
rates should be filled up with proper materials of low plasticity. It should be
free from the organic materials, the extra fine materials, rocks, and impurities.
Filling is according to the specifications, as the pipes are surrounded by the fine
sand. The bed consists of (20 cm down the pipe + 30 cm up the pipe followed
by the warning tape).
Components of the High-grade Filling:
The high-grade filling above the sand layer consist of pebble or broken rock, as
the digging products are not reused and threw away from the site in a proper
way. Filling material should be of high-grade and fall under the following
grade limits according to the British specifications:

Size of Test Sieves


BS
75 mm
37.5 mm
10 mm
5 mm
600 Micron
75 Micron

Percentage of What passing through


Sieves/ Weight
B10S
100
85-100
85-100
45-100
25-85
8-45

Gradation is determined according to the requirements of the American


Specifications BS no. 1377. When the materials that passing through the sieve
B.S 425 Micron is tested according to the American specifications B.S 1377,
its plasticity index will be lesser than 6.
The high-grade filling materials in addition to its conformity with the grades
mentioned above should contain percentage of CBR (California Bearing Ratio)
by 25% at the maximum. This is after 96 hours of soaking in the water with
maximal density is 95% according to (The Modified Actu).
Filling materials are put on layers of particular thickness in which the maximal
thickness of the flatten layer reaches to 150 mm. immediately after each layer,
it should be crushed and flattened by either roller for the soil compaction,
pneumatic tire road roller, vibratory roller, or any group of the three types until
the full depth is regularly and completely flattened in order to reach to the
specified density.
The flattening density should not be lesser than 95% of the Modified Actu,
when finishing. The material and the moisture content should be put in the soil
within (1%) and more or (2%) under the optimum rate that is determined
according to the test method of the vibratory hammer that is described in the
British specifications 1377. When the material is little moisture, a sufficient
amount of water is added for getting the proper moisture content. This is after
the layer bed.
It is not allowed to moisten the material while it is stored.
The gritting bed of the pipes should has free drain, also consists of the broken
rocks, pebble, or a ragged layer of sand and pebble. It should be free from the
organic materials, mud, fluvial, building wastes, and the concrete cohesive soil,
also in conformity with the specifications of the American Society for Testing
Materials (ASTM), C 23 Model: 8. The bed material should be able to provide
invariable shaping for the pipes expansion. It should not be subject to the size
enlargement or falling because of the climate changes or groundwater
conditions after bedding and flattening.
4.7. The Concrete Cover:
Contractor should, if been advised, guarantee a full concrete cover for the pipes
as stated on the charts. It should be used, concrete of model C30.

It is not allowed to use the trench sides, wood, plates, or the support plates
instead of the temporary blocks for casting of the bed concrete or the concrete
cover. The space in the sides or any place should be filled with a chosen
packing material. It should not be lesser than 300 mm above the outer surface
top of the pipe, also the ground should be returned back to its solid status
during the work progress.
After checking, testing, and certifying the pipes, concrete should be lowering
carefully inside the trench and carefully accumulated under and around the
pipes with taking the necessary care for preventing the pipes from moving or
displacement from its places in any way.
Concrete should be equally caste on the full width for both of the bed and
concrete cover within 25 mm above the pipe bottom. Accordingly, it is cast
carefully, without stopping, on one of the pipe sides in order to take its path
under the pipe. It is necessary to be sure that there is not any space under the
pipe, after that working is continue for equally rising the concrete level at the
two sides of the pipe until the required final height.
The concrete cover that surrounds the pipes, which its diameters reach to 400
mm with a vertical shape of height by 150 mm, should be implemented on the
outer surface top of the pipe then it is fixed. The necessary concrete cover for
the pipes which its diameters exceed 375 mm with a vertical shape reaches to
the middle of the pipe height, should be implemented then separately casting
the remaining of the concrete cover.
It is not allowed to make the horizontal structural joints in the concrete cover
under the middle of the pipe height, also making the vertical structural joints
except at each pipe coupling. The joints should be expanded through the
blinding concrete when it is necessary. Barriers that are made of the
fiberboards, or another certified material, and shaped according to the exact
shape of the external face of the pipe, concrete bed, or the concrete cover,
should be put at places which touch the last edge of each negative part of the
pipe in which supports the position. They also may be put at distances, which
are determined by the engineer, for stopping the continuity of the concrete
protection. Contractor should take the necessary precautions to guarantee that
there is tight isolation between the barrier and the last edge of the pipe negative
part, and that there is concrete will be entered into the joints.
Contractor should cover the pipes joints, vertical pipes, bends, side branch, etc.
by concrete of model (C) 30 where is required.
4.8. Blinding Concrete inside the Trenches:
Contractor should cast concrete of model (C 30) as determined and where is
recommended by in the trenches for shaping the pipes foundations, the concrete
cover, or the bed. Otherwise is required, concrete thickness should be 75 mm,

while its width should be as the width of the concrete that is specified for the
concrete bed that is cast under the pipe.
4.9. Arranging and Lowering the Pipes According to the Path:
All the jacks or the other lifting equipments should be of capacity that is
sufficient to safely lift the load in the proper range. Also, the pipes should
carefully be lifted without shaking using guide rope for setting the movement,
or using the wooden slopes when lowering the pipes, where necessary, for
shock absorbing, preventing the pipes damage and its outer cover.
All the hooks and claws of lifting the pipes should be lined properly, while the
lifting ropes (bearings) are made of sturdy synthetic fabric of Terylene or
Nylon types from 8 to 12 layers. It should be of proper width for distributing
the load with a width not lesser than 500 mm, and capacity not lesser than load
of 6 Ton. Chains should not be used directly with any of the project materials
during loading or unloading it.
All the supplying materials should be tightly fixed on the trucks or trailers in
order to prevent moving it through transportation. The shaped beds, wedges,
wooden masses, and the rope joints should be used for keeping it from moving
or damage. It should be avoided, unloading through rolling from the slopes.
This way is allowed to be used only after the engineer approval. Slopes of the
pipes are made of wooden sliding bearings. Each pipe slope should be set by
two or more of the guide ropes properly, and fixed in the further side of the
truck or vehicle.
Height and accumulation way are approved by the engineer. Compaction
(Accumulation) should be in a way that is parallel to the wooden joints, or in a
hierarchy way. All the necessary blocks, wedges, plates, etc. are used for
providing balanced accumulation in which each pipe is secure of damage.
There should be a seat of the salient wood in order to be a fixed ground for
each accumulation. Pipes and the special pipes should be coordinated and
arranged in a way that doesn't restrain people and cattle traffic or harm it, not
standing in the way of cattle and paths to the other properties. Pipes are
prohibited to be put in the water well bottoms or the valleys. All the necessary
measurements should be taken for keeping the pipes clean before its expansion.
4.10. Length of the Uncovered Trench:
The length of the trench that will stay uncovered before starting the pipe
expansion should not exceed 200 m. Any trench should not be left uncovered
for more than 20 days as long as the contractor didn't get a written approval
from the engineer regarding this matter. Such period starts from the date that
the digging starts on until the date of returning the ground to its original status.
The total length of the uncovered trench at any area should not exceed 200 m
of the joining pipeline.

4.11. Pressure Pipelines Expansion:


4.11.1. General:
As long as the materials of any gritting, concrete beds, or concrete cover are
not described, the pipes should be properly expanded on a finished natural bed.
After finishing the trench shaping, putting, and flattening the gritting, if
necessary, the connection dig should be shaped with the most possible short
length for passing the negative parts and allowing make the joints fairly. All the
pipes should be leaned on the full length of its bodies, also expanding them in
the rectilinear form or regular curves. If it was required to lug the pipes for
making regular curve, the manufacturing companies for such kinds of
connections should consider not exceeding the allowable tolerance grades for
lugging and curving.
Pipes should be expanded in which produce the least cover for the top surface
of the pipes according to the charts unless otherwise agreed with the engineer.
The retaining concrete masses of the dimensions that are stated in the charts, or
that of the larger dimensions, if been advised, should be put at all the bends,
pieces that are of the letter (T) shape, joints of the graded diameter, valves, and
the ends of the main lines. It should also be shaped in such way that provide at
least the necessary bearing distance for a vertical side of the fixed soil. If there
was only poor soil or for any reason, such masses will not be shaped, contractor
should immediately inform the engineer who in turn determines the necessary
measurement. In some cases, after permission from the engineer, contractor
may use the keys for fixing the pipelines on the next area, etc.
Each pipe should be cleaned up by a brush and checked before expansion, also
choose the metal pipe that is made through centrifuging. It is hammered by the
hammer, while it is suspended on a height in which doesn't touch the ground,
for being sure of its safety. During the pipes expansion and until completing the
works of the contract, pipes should be kept clean and free from remains, mud,
and the other obstacles. Pipes and joints, etc. should be blocked with bored
wooden disks when preparing the trench to the next pipe or after the work
hours.
Any pipe should be accurately checked for being sure that it is not damaged
and that there is no any impact of the internal lining or the external covering
damage impacts. In case of finding any defects, the engineer should be
informed before starting any reformatory works. If the engineer ordered
making the reforms, contractor should reform such defects in an accredited way
that make the protection level as that of the original level.

Each pipe should be carefully lowered on the bed that is prepared for it by
jointers (Slings) and lifting equipments (Hoisting sheave). If the bed got harm,
and the stones fell down in the trench, pipe should be lifted, bed should be
fixed, and the stones should be removed before continue the pipe expansion.
Wherever there is ground water, it should be kept away from the negative parts
level of connection using the pumps.
When it is required to shorten the length of any pipe, it should be cut rightly,
cleanly, and with an accredited way without harming the pipe or its lining. The
parts will be cut should be prepared for reusing it by the pipes manufacturing
company including adding the final touches or remaking the internal lining or
the external cover in order to get the original protection level.
When the contractor is advised, he should expand two pipes or more at the
same trench hole. Unless otherwise recommended or stated on the charts, pipes
are expanded in which the horizontal distance between the outer surfaces of the
pipes are not lesser than 300 mm. When two pipes or more are expanded and
covered by the concrete under a public road, each pipe of them should be
covered by concrete cover. Contractor may, under permission from the
engineer, use vertical barriers for separating the concrete covers, while it is not
allowed to use only the barrier as a block for casting.
All the mechanical pieces, pipes parts; head and tail (positive and negative),
cuffs, collar, or any of the other accredited joints should be collected according
to the instructions of the manufacturing companies. The tails of the pipes are
cut, should be lathed, beveled, or prepared in any other way that suits the
standard connection part.
Touching surfaces for all the joints should be completely clean from impurities,
rust, lubricate, and any other pollutions. Beds of the joints should be clean and
checked for being sure that it is usable. Beds (Seal hoops) should be carefully
installed, also using the lubrication materials (oiling) that are produced by the
joints manufacturing company and that are installed by pushing.
Flanged joints should be rightly installed before linking any screw. Also,
adhere completely to link the screws according to the way that is recommended
by the manufacturing company. When determining the moment status of the
torque, it should be applied as originals.
All joints should be checked, after rightly putting and fixing any filling, by the
standardizations of the thickness calculation or special equipments that are
provided by the manufacturing company as proper.
After finishing the connection, the external protection of the joints should be
made according to the item related to such specifications.

4.11.2. Expansion and Connection of the Steel Pipes:


4.11.2.1. Handing the pipes and putting it in its places:
All the pipe works should be installed according to the instructions of the
manufacturing company and these specifications. These pipes are handled
according to the good engineering practices. All the necessary precautions
should be taken for keeping the protection that are guaranteed by lining and
covering. At all times, pipes should be handled using the proper equipments,
also never pushing or pulling it on the ground; moreover, pipe should be
handled in the way that guarantees the safety for the dimensions of the general
shape of the joint.
The full length of each part of the pipes and installing pieces (joints) should be
firmly fixed on the pipe bed with digging to facilitate the welding of the joints.
The keys and support poles should be provided as necessary and advised. The
proper precaution for the pipelines expansion and shrinkage should be taken.
Pipes should be cut for installing the valves, installation pieces (joints) or a
lock piece cleanly and professionally without harming the pipes or lining, also
leaving a fine part with a right angle on the linear pivot of the pipes. When the
mechanical cutting/clipping is available for cutting the pipes, it is allowed to
cut using the electric arc. It is allowed to use only the qualified workers and
those who have experience in such field. Pipes are not allowed to be cut by
flame using oxygen acetylene.
For keeping the proper distances in the site, pipes should be lined before
welding for a short period that not exceed (5) Km in any ways. According to
the site conditions, the engineer may change this distance during the work
progress.
Contractor should make sure of that direct connection between the pipes and
soil doesn't cause any damage for the tails that will be butt welded, the lining,
and the covering.
Contractor should provide the sufficient precautions for the proper separate
distances between the pipes. It should be left, proper distances between the
pipes lengths to facilitate the following handing during the welding phase.

===231==
4.11.2.2. Steel Pipes Connecting:
The joints that are installed in the site should be butt welded by a full
penetration weld. It should be used; the proper internal installation handles
(Fasteners) for keeping the pipes tails lined in a straight line before welding the

joint. Such internal installation handles should have a fitting design to


guarantee not damaging the internal lining.
4.11.2.3. Welding:
A. Preparation for Welding:
Preparing the pipes tails, removing the cover/lining from the welded joints,
cleanliness, arranging the pipes in a straight light, any prior warming, and
welding should be in conformity with (ANSI B31.4) and (API 1104). It should
be used; mechanical brush or grinding wheel for cleaning. Before welding, the
tails will be welded should be checked as for its cleanliness, being free from
defects, and that any defect nears to tails should be grinded or hammered using
a tool of non-ferrous touching surface. Parts of the pipe that couldn't be
reformed should be cut. In case of cutting using oxygen or the electric arc, slag
and the harmful materials that its color has been changed because of its fusion,
should be removed. Edges that are shaped through cutting by using oxygen or
the electric arc should be smooth, regular, and free from scale and the slag
accumulations. The cutting surfaces should appear as a good metal that is free
from layers, surface defects, or the other harmful defects. Also, the plates
surfaces that will be welded should be free from rust, lubricate, and the other
odd materials. This is for a distance by at least 50 mm from the weld edge.
B. Workmanship Requirements and the Apparent Quality:
Contractor should provide qualified and skilled welders with an accredited
certificate according to the standard (API 1104), as the sixth item of such
standard qualify them to weld the steel pipes, provided that the tests should be
made in the presence of the engineer. Contractor should provide the necessary
proper equipments for implementing that.
The weld of the welded steel pipes should meet the requirements of the
American Water Works Association (AWWA) C 206. In addition to the
conformity with the quality that is specified in the applied system (Law) and
specifications, all the weld works should meet the following requirements of
the workmanship and the apparent quality. Each weld layer should be soft and
substantially free from the slag impurities, porosity, and the extra lower cutting.
Cracks and fusion recession are not allowed to be found; moreover, the final
weld layers should be substantially free from the weld withdrawing waves
( ) , the irregular grain shapes, the high burrs, the deep grooves. All
the weld withdrawing, beginnings, and halts should be on the weld way or
removed by grinding.
When reforming, trimming, or grinding the welds, it should not be made; any
holes or grooves in the main metal and not reducing its thickness.
Parts that its weld should be reformed, should be cleaned properly and
reforming it through an accredited weld way. All the reasons that caused the

defects should be determined, also it should been stated that all these defects
are reformed before allowing the weld continuity. Such reforms are made
without incurring the employer any expenses.
The surface that needs to be weld should be free from scale, rust, lubricate,
paint, impurities, and the other odd materials.
C. Tests:
The full weld length should be completely tested through rays according to the
requirements of the paragraph (UW-SI) of the item no. (8), part (1) of ASME
Code. The percentage of testing the pipes welds through rays should be 100%
of its amount.
4.11.2.4. Lining and Covering the Joints in the Site:
A. Covering
After the joints are welded in the site, tested, and approved by the engineer, the
external surfaces of the joints that are implemented in the site should be
covered according to the standardizations of the American Water Works
Association (AWWA). Covering system of the joints that are implemented in
the site should be matched with that of the next pipes.
Covering the joints that are implemented in the site by polyethylene should be
made using the heat shrink pipes sleeves as follows:
- Before starting welding, being sure that the sleeve is expanded on the pipe.
- Before covering, the pipe external surface should be free from impurities such
as oil, lubricate, moisture, etc., sand, or blasting it by iron filings (shot) for
removing all the impacts of the rust or factories scale according to the
specification (ISO 8501-1) or its equivalent.
-All the covering edges that are implemented in the factory by the filing should
be bevel.
- Warming (heating) of the part that will be covered should be made to 70-80
C.
- Sleeve should be installed on the part that will be covered.
- The pipe external surface should be warmed (heated) to 150 C through the
Propane flame or the hot air. Pipe is warmed and the temperature is regularly
distributed through the pipe surrounding. Also, grinding each part of the
welding area by a steel brush with a width not lesser than 100 mm from each
part.
- The sleeve splicing and the pipe covering should be by epoxy from the parts
by distance not lesser than 80 mm.
- The external surface of the shrink sleeve should be warmed (heated) to 150
C through the propane flame or the hot air. The sleeve is gradually warmed
starting from the middle up to the tails regularly for avoiding any air bubbles
by roll.
- The first layer of covering by epoxy should not be lesser than 150 Micron on
the steel pipe.

- Covering thickness: The minimal thickness of covering by polyethylene on


the main pipes is 3.5 mm. Test measures should be taken at regular distanced
along the pipe external surrounding. Such machine can make a nondestructive
testing. The thickness of the covering is measured by a magnetic or
electromagnetic scale which its accuracy is 5%.
- Testing the covering safety by discovering the electric deficiencies machine
(25)==
B. Internal Lining for the Pipes Joints that are implemented in the site:
After finishing weld, joints testing, making the hydrostatic test, and the
engineer approval, the internal surface of the pipe at the joint should be cleaned
from all the impurities, dust, and wastes. Cement mortar is put according to the
requirements of the American Water Works Association standardizations
(AWWA) as follows:
- The internal joints of the pipe that are lined with mortar should be covered by
the cement mortar and finishing it with the pipe internal surface by polishing,
trowel, or similar way. Before putting the joints mortar on the lining surface,
such surfaces should be carefully cleaned and moisture to guarantee a good
connection between the lining and joints mortar. Joints repair mortar should be
fixed by a treatment compound or keeping it moisture continually for at least
24 hours. If the treatment compound is used, it should be approved by the
engineer, also not leaving a taste or smell for the water that flowing through the
pipes, after getting dry. Pipeline should not be put under service until
maximum 24 hours from the mortar repair are passed. Joints should be finished
in which being polished with the lining internal surface by the trowel.
4.11.2.5. Observing the Quality at the Site:
All the joints weld that are implemented in the site in the steel pipeline should
be tested as specified in the covering examination. It should be in conformity
with the applied requirements of the American Water Works Association
(AWWA) standardizations.
4.11.3. Pipelines Expansion:
Pipelines should be expanded through straight lines. Each pipe should be fairly
set in its proper line and direction. It is set by the surveying rod and the rods of
measuring the level slope which its depth is not lesser than 150 mm and,
properly painted, fixed on studding which its dimensions are not lesser than
100 mm x 75 mm, and steadily inserted in the ground with depth not lesser than
600 mm. It should be installed and kept by a distance not exceed 25 m between
each one and the other. At the minimum, there should be 3 rods for measuring
the level slope for each line of the pipelines.
Pipes should individually be expanded in which the head is in the high part of
the line and according to the stated standards. When the groundwater is

approved, it should be kept under the pipes heads level at connection by


pumping or any other proper tool.
4.12. Expanding the Pipes nearer to each other and the current
services network, etc.
When it is necessary to expand new pipes along, above, or under existing
networks of the sewage pipes, surface water drain pipes, water or gas lines,
electric cables, telephone cables, etc., contractor should show the necessary
care for the least possible interference in the existing services work system and
its connections, also he should fix any damage happens to it at his expense.
Contractor should make all the necessary arrangements for supporting the
existing services networks, and the temporal treatment for the flowing resulting
from any pipes. He should also provide the collection basin, pumps,
equipments, and materials that are necessary for such purpose.
Services networks, pipes, the main tapings, cable canals, etc. that are exist and
uncovered inside the new working trenches should be protected according to
the requirements of the related board before filling the trenches. When there are
not any special requirements regarding it, all pipes should have concrete wall
built of the new digging seat, built under it by up to 75 mm under the existing
pipe internal bottom level. Such space is expected to be filled with (75) mm of
the dry sand which is fairly flattened. Sand is put above and around the existing
pipe with thickness not lesser than 150 mm. Also, cables and its canals are
expected to be supported by a wooden beam that is inserted into the trench
sides. Cables, etc. are similarly surrounded by sand.
4.13. Expanding the pipes under the fences, walls, near to the trees,
etc.
Contractor should expand and install the pipes, special pipes, etc. Also, under
the fences, walls, etc. if necessary.
When fences or walls are damaged or crushed, it should be returned back to its
original status using similar materials as the owners or the occupants and the
engineer are satisfied and convinced.
Contractor should guarantee continually not harming any of the trees or
extracting it from its place under the contract implementation except the sites
that is been advised for, and that permanent buildings will be built at.
4.14. Expanding the pipes through the water supplies:
Contractor should expand the pipes under the bridges, pools, water supplies
wherever facing it, considering the necessary allowance for the seasonal flood
flow.

When the path of any water supply places at an extensive land owned by public
authority, works should be implemented as the engineer of this authority is
satisfied and convinced.
Contractor should implement all the works including the temporal works,
temporal wood works, the water tight, temporal spilling, temporal plumbing
works, etc. in an accredited way. Also, accurately considering the requirements
of any person, persons, general or private authority, or any company has the
authority or the legal sovereignty on the water paths or its sides as the engineer
of such parts is satisfied and convinced.
Contractor should implement the work in such way, according to the engineer's
opinion, that doesn't obstruct the water supply, and not damaging its shape and
use. Also, he should achieve the work in such way, according to the engineer's
opinion, that doesn't cause corrosion in the pipes trench, and not lead to water
infiltration along the pipes trench. As recommended by, contractor should
surround the pipes with concrete of grade (C 30) as stated in details.
Pipes that are expanded in the valleys and the canals bottoms either are covered
by concrete, filled with a soil fixed with cement, or both of them together
according to the engineer's instructions. Pipes that are expanded in the valleys
should be filled according to the way that is specified in the specifications
except the last 750 mm, as it is expected to be filled with a soil fixed with
cement and compacted in layers of thickness by 250 mm.
Soil that is fixed by cement should consist of chosen bed that is completely
mixed with the cement by 1 part of the cement and 20 parts of the soil. Water is
added as necessary for helping in fixing.
4.15. Expanding the marshes areas:
Pipes should be expanded in the marshes areas with the full commitment to the
contract documents and as the engineer advises. The material that is necessary
for the trench bottom and refilling after the pipes expansion should be supplied
and transported to the site by the contractor.
Height of the pipes seat fillings should not be lesser than 60 cm and 160 cm
above the ground and water ground level respectively. The ground surface
should be dig for depth by 300 mm down the normal surface level.
The material of the pipes seat should be flattened/compact for layers, in which
each layer thickness is 15 cm, while the density of Proctor inside it at the
minimum 90%. In any case, reaching to the buildings place is the responsibility
of the contractor. Regarding the maintenance works method, the filling material
(Seat layer) should be flattened according to the standardizations of the

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D 698, while the density
of Proctor inside it is 90%.
Refilling the shoulder of the pipeline may be implemented without any
compaction/flattening.
If it was necessary to prevent corrosion the fillings layers of the pipeline and
the maintenance way through spraying live oil that is treated by exposure to the
climate factors and the nonpoisonous chemicals that are called Sand stills, the
suggested material by the contractor subjects to the engineer approval.
Flattening/compaction of the refilling material at the crossings with the other
facilities (services) in which the density of Proctor is 90%. The way for
compounds and arranging the pipes in its path should be implemented by the
contractor before the pipes transmission.
One of the contractor commitments is that to use a proper material for
implementing this path.
Contractor should cast the concrete channels under the fillings of the pipe with
sufficient amount and size. This is reserve for the drain conditions without
obstacle when the water levels are increased or decreased. All the calculations
and charts subject to the approval.
All the others similar systems of the pipes expansion will be applied.
4.16. The external protection for the installation pieces (Joints):
Mechanical couplers, flanged adapters, flanges, etc. that will be buried or put
underground inside rooms, should be covered by a layer of nylon (Rilesan) for
protecting it as that the Victaulic company at America produces or a certified
alternate. Nylon layer is made either through the whole immerse method or the
electrostatic spray in which the thickness of the paint dry layer is not lesser
than 250 Micron. Regarding equipments that should be buried underground, it
will be put in the polyethylene sleeves in addition to the protection mentioned
previously.
4.17. Electricity Conduction Continuity:
Where it is recommended by, contractor should keep the electricity conduction
continuity for the steel pipes through welding short cables through each pipe
joint or around each room of valves that is applied by accredited thermit welds.
He should show the necessary care to guarantee the cleanliness of the welded
area on the pipe before starting the weld. After the weld is completed and the
welded area gets cool, such area should be protected as describes in the
specifications. It is a must to show the necessary care during the trench refilling
in order not to damage the weld or get separated from its place, and not harm
its protective layer.

The pipe should be tested for making sure of the electricity conduct continuity
at chosen syllables which its length is 100 m before and after the trench
refilling.
If any lack or defect appeared in the electricity conduct continuity of the circuit
tests, it should be determined and fixed by the contractor as the engineer is
satisfied and convinced, then retesting.
4.18. Cathode Protection:
Where is recommended by, contractor should protect the steel pipes from
corrosion through installing all the cathode protection equipments with all
necessaries of the polyvinyl insulated cables, weld, testing points boxes, poles
of the guide marks, etc.
4.19. Trenches Refilling:
Where the pipes are surrounded by concrete, it is not allowed to start the filling
works unless after 48 hours after casting the concrete is completed. It is
allowed to extend such period according to the engineer's instructions where it
is expected to use heavy filling or heavy surface loads.
According to the requirements mentioned above, filling works should be made
as soon as possible after the pipe expansion is completed, tested, and certified.
All trenches should be protected from entering the water into it and keeping it
in such status during the filling works progress.
After checking and certifying the pipes, contractor should guarantee that the
space between the trench sides and the pipe, also that is between the concrete
bed or covering, if found, including the lower surface of the expanded pipe on a
trimmed natural shape and rightly flattened by filling material that is chosen
according to the specifications.
Filling material should be put in layers which its thickness doesn't exceed 150
mm. It should be manually and completely compacted using wooden tampers,
or where it is possible to be applied in case of the large pipes by certified
mechanical means. Filling should be continued like this to height by 300 mm
above the pipe body.
After covering the pipes according to the way described above by a chosen
filling material, filling works of the trench should be continued in layers which
its thickness don't exceed 200 mm. Each layer should be manually flattened
using ferrous tampers of weight not lesser than 5 Kg until it is filled to height
by 600 mm above the pipe top.

After that, the remaining of the trench should be filled with chosen filling
materials in layers which its thickness doesn't exceed 200 mm. Each layer
should be flattened well by mechanical tamper, masher of vibratory plates, or
other certified mechanical mean until the ground is completely get solid
according to the required level for the process of returning the surface to its
original status.
4.20. The Chosen Filling Material:
The chosen filling material should includes regular materials that is easily
integrated and free from trees roots, plant materials, and building wastes. Also,
it should not contain muddy blocks that are retained on a sieve of size by 75
mm, and the stones that are retained on a sieve of size by 25 mm. It should be
chosen from the drilled materials and that brought from another sources.
4.21. Pipelines Test:
Contractor should guarantee that all the pipes, installation pieces (joints),
private pipes, etc. are sealed according to the satisfactory and conviction of the
engineer.
===241===
All the pipelines of the pressure should be tested by clean water according to
the pressures that are specified in the specifications.
Test should be taken on the pipelines of length not more than 1000 m unless
otherwise agreed. Also, all the system should be tested and chlorinated before
the final connection.
Contractor should achieve all the necessary works for making the temporal
joints of the current main lines in order to get the necessary water for testing.
Water may be supplied for testing at his expense.
Any certified additional materials such as sleeves, pipes, valves, etc. and the
necessary additional water for achieving any reformative work that is necessary
for any test sector at the contractor expense.
In case of failure the hydraulic test, contractor undertakes all the
responsibilities and risks that are included in the re-digging works for finding
the infiltration places, doing all the necessary reformative works, etc.
Test is not satisfied unless the water amount doesn't exceed the necessary
amount for keeping the test pressure by 0.1 Liter/ mm Diameter/ Km length/ 30
m experimental pressure/ Day or the lost water amount that equals the loss

amount in the length of 1 Km for the pipe of the small diameter under the test.
All the main pressure pipes that are tested by water should be able to bear the
pressure of the water pole for at least 30 minutes.
Only the engineer can rate the pipes network sealing option.
Making the tests while the valves are locked is not allowed without the
engineer approval. Contractor should secure all the workers, the clean water,
test pumps, meters, climbers of the stuffy parts, plugs, etc.
Contractor is not allowed to operate the valves unless under the engineer
instructions and during the presence of one of the engineer employees.
Services pipes joints should be tested for 30 minutes through opening the lock
valve joint (Cock) of the main services pipe, when the main pipe is under
pressure equal a pole of water by 50 m, and the lock faucets that are installed in
closed rooms (counter room). The length of the full services pipe is to be
uncovered, while the test is under implementation. The engineer makes an
optical check for being sure that there in no any infiltration.
All infiltrations should be fixed as the engineer is satisfied and convinced.
Doing such tests or examinations for any part of the pipes will not exempt the
contractor from the responsibility of delivering all the pipes works properly,
cleanly, complete, and free from any infiltration or other defect appears under
the operation pressure. This is either because of workmanship or defective, or
for a reason in pipes, joints, installations cut, or other materials.
4.22. Valves installations:
Before installation, all valves should be stored in a clean and dry place. Also,
valve should be locked.
Before installation, all the valves should be checked for being sure that they are
not damaged because of transmission or shipping and discharging. Also, it
should be cleaned well specially the valves faces and rings, etc. Gears,
bearings, and pivots should be lubricated or oiled by the lubrications or oils that
are recommended by the manufacturing companies. All valves should be
checked for being sure that the operation is easy and statuses are good.
The pipes works of the valve sides should be supported by a proper stand
before installation. Valves should be installed while its grooved (What )?
All the screws of the flange should be regularly linked and followed on the
diameter line. The installation instructions of the manufacturing company
should be accurately followed.
After installation, valves should be checked once again for being sure that the
operation is easy. After filling with water, it should be checked for being sure
that there is no infiltration, but if there was, it should be immediately fixed.

The gate valves should be installed in which the levers are in the vertical
position, unless otherwise advised by the engineer. After hours of starting
operation under normal pressure, fillings should be checked for being sure that
there is no any infiltration, then it is set, if necessary.
Butterfly valves should be installed in which the poles are in the horizontal
position, unless otherwise advised by the engineer. When installation, the edge
stop means should be released and set according to the instructions of the
manufacturing companies.
Air valves covers should be removed before installation. Any fixed tools
should be removed for preventing any damage for the floats during
transportation, also cleaning the seal rings carefully. Before filling the main
lines, the isolation valves should be opened.
After installation, the uncovered metallic surfaces of all the valves should be
coated with two layers of the accredited bitumen.
4.23. Rooms Covers:
Covers of the air valves rooms should be ventilated and contain heavy
galvanized box for the wastes.
The surface boxes should be made of the gray iron from a certified
manufacturing company. The internal and external surfaces are painted by a
certified type of the epoxy that is treated by tar.
Covers of grade (A) are used in all the sites except gardens pedestrian crossing
in the complexes. (Test weight should equal 40 Ton on a test mass by 300 m
diameter), while covers of grade (B) are according to the paragraph (4.27.)
mentioned above.
4.24. Guide poles:
Guide poles that are made of the reinforced concrete should be put at a distance
not more than 500 m from the pipes along the transmission pipeline where it is
built at or along unpaved ground.
Guide poles are made of reinforced concrete as stated in the charts regarding
form and marks.
Plates and guide poles that are made of the galvanized soft steel, are as stated in
details on the charts. Information will be written on it in Arabic including all
the valves rooms, irrigation tapping, etc.
4.25. Metallic rims and stairs:
Valves rooms are provided with rims or stairs according to what is stated in the
charts. In case of using rims, it should be made of galvanized iron or the cast
iron according to the American standardizations 1247.

The vertical distance between the rims is usually 300 mm. The first trim should
be put at a distance not more than 300 mm above the seat surface level.
Metallic rims are not required when the difference between the cover height
above the seat level is lesser than 900 mm.
Metallic rims in the valves room that are previously cast is preferably to be
installed during the period of manufacturing them, while the alternative
solutions for building will be used only if the engineer approved it.
In case of using the stairs, it will be made of the galvanized mild steel or the
hammered iron with rims of diameters not lesser than 25 mm, while the beams
distance at least 230 mm from the wall.
In case of using the valves room that are previously cast, it will either be
provided with retaining shackles or screw collar in order to be entered and
hanged in the stairs. Stairs should be in conformity with the details that are
stated on the charts in all respects.
4.26. Warning tape:
Contractor should provide all the trenches with warning tape above each
service line and main transmission line. For all the main water lines, the tape is
blue, while the electric cable and data transmission is yellow. In the other
places, the tape is covered from the two sided by polyethylene, PVC, or other
plastic materials. It will be written on it in Arabic and English alternately;
"Caution, there is a water line is buried below", this is for the main water lines.
For the electric cables and data transmission, it will be written; "Caution, there
is an electric line is buried below". The tape width is 300 mm, and its nominal
thickness is 100 Micron. It is obtained from an accredited supplier.
4.27. Flanges/Flanged joints:
- All flanges should be in conformity with the pressure rates of the technical
specifications and amounts' schedules under the operation temperature.
- Flanges should be provided with salient surface.
- Steel that is used should be of the fine carbon steel that suits the field welding
with the equipments and the pipes that are manufactured according to the
following standardizations: (ASTM A53, ASTM A105, BS 4504, API 5L, API
5 L X, Grade X 65, X 56).
- Chemical analysis should be in conformity with the following percentages:
1. Carbon is 22.0% Maximum
2. Manganese is 1.5% Maximum
3. Phosphorus is 04.0% Maximum
4. Sulfur is 04.0% Maximum

5. Silicone is 35,0% Maximum.


-For securing transmitting the flanges hub of a neck welded to the next pipes in
a satisfied way, it should be used; flanges material of high sufficient flexibility.
- The welded flanges should be of the neck type.
- All data should be printed on the flanges (Nominal diameter, pressure,
thickness, name of the manufacturing company, specification which the flanges
are made under, etc.)
4.28. Screw hook retainers, nuts and flanges ()
Screw hook retainers, nuts and flanges of the flanged joints should be made of
the galvanized steel by the hot submersion; this is according to the
specifications ASTM A 193 Grade B7.
The length of the salient screw part of the nut that is connected with the screw
hook retainer should be at least equal to the diameter of such hook. The screw
hook retainers, nuts and flanges ( ) that will be uncovered on the soil,
should be of the stainless steel 1.4301 or 1.4303 according to DIN 17440, or its
equivalent. It also should be in conformity with Pare III, ISO 970, or its
equivalent.
The two terminal of the screw hook retainer should be provided with the metal
flanges ()
4.29. Elastic connecting rings
The elastic connecting rings should be free from any material that may affect
on the water, which will be transmitted. Attention is drawn again to the bad
weather at the kingdom such as the high temperatures.
Such paragraph is applied on all of the sealed rings.
Regarding the type of rubber, it is preferable using the type EPDM or any
resistant rubber and suitable for the weather, temperature of the water and air.
Also, it should be in conformity with the British standards 2494.
4.30. Collars (High pressure) of the sealed hoops:
Collars (High-pressure gaskets) hoops of the flanged joints should be made of
(FILLER Graphite) and the steel of (SS316) according to the specification
(ASTM B16 20). It should be less solidity of the flange material, while the
gasket thickness should be no less than 4 mm; this is according to the diameter
and its width in which suits the opposite flange.
All the data should be printed on the gasket face (The nominal diameter,
pressure, thickness, the manufacturing company name, the specification in
which the gasket is made according to )
4.31. Joints of dismantlement and installation:

All the flanges of the installation and dismantlement joints should be in


conformity with the pressure rates that are stated according to the technical
specifications, amounts' schedule. It should also be in conformity with the
valves pressures and the opposite parts at the operation temperature.
- The joint body and the flange should be made of the fine carbon steel. It
should also be in conformity with the following specification:
(MILD STEEL ACCORDING TO EN 10025-2:2004)
- The bolts are according to the following specification:
(ACCORDING BS 916 HOT DIP GALVANIZED TO BS 382)
- Gasket is made of (EPDM) according to the specification (BS 2494)
- The protection of the external and internal surface should be by resin epoxy
that is suitable for the drinking water with suitable thickness by no less than
480 Micron.
- All the data should be printed on the installation and dismantlement joints
(The nominal diameter, pressures, thickness, the manufacturing company
name, the specification in which the gasket is made according to ..)

(The Technical Specifications)

Chapter Five
Returning the surface back to its original status
Schedule of the contents
5.1. General:
5.1.1. Work Scope:
5.2. Maintenance the works of returning the surfaces to its original status at
roads
5.3. Asphalted/paved roads (Heavy endurance):
5.3.1. Asphalted/paved roads (Average endurance):
5.4. Paved footpaths (Asphalted):
5.5. Paved footpaths (Ingots or tiles):
5.6. Curbs, channels and edges:
5.7. Returning the surfaces back to its original status at the gardens:

(The Technical Specifications)

Chapter Five
Returning the surface back to its original status

5.1. General:
5.1.1. Work Scope:
This chapter covers the specifications, of all the works of returning the surfaces
back to its original status, which the contractor may meet in the contract
context. Hence, all the surfaces that are harmed because of such contract should
be returned back to its original status according to the specifications stated
below.
Contractor should return the surfaces to its original status regarding all (the
trenches) except the are described other than this; they are returned to a similar
level as they were before starting the processes of putting the pipes or
according to the engineer requirements.
Contractor should proceed the works of returning the surfaces back to its
original status within the necessary seriousness and time. Particularly, the
public crossways, as it requires, the separated period between attempting to dig
the road to extend the pipes and achieving the works of returning the surfaces
back to its original status, to be according to the Ministry of Transportation
requirements.
If it was proven, according to the engineer opinion and after taking into
consideration the special conditions of the status, that the contractor didn't do
all the necessary efforts for achieving the works of returning the surfaces back
to its original status within the seven (7) days that are specified or any
reasonable extension that is permitted by the engineer. Accordingly, the
engineer will be entitled to take additional steps or following alternative
methods to accelerate implementing such works. Such orders that are issued by
the engineer will not exempt the contractor from his commitments that are
provided in the contract.
If it is found that there is a part of a pipe under a public road was not tested
before achieving the works of returning the surfaces back to its original status,
the contractor will undertake the responsibility of accelerating the maintenance
of the pipe and renewing the works of returning the surfaces back to its original
status.

5.2. Maintenance the works of returning the surfaces back to


its original status at the roads:
The works of returning the surfaces back to its original status at the roads and
public footpaths should be maintained and kept sound according to the
satisfaction and conviction of the Transportation Ministry and the engineer.
This is for six (6) months or until the insurance period is expired; whichever
was further. Such surfaces should be left in a proper position when such period
is completed according to the full satisfaction and conviction of the
Transportation Ministry and the engineer. Before such period is completed, the
Ministry of Transportation or the engineer may require implementing any
necessary maintenance works within 24 hours from the related notification. If
the contractor did not abide by such notification, the Ministry of Transportation
and the engineer are entitled to assign who implement such work.

5.3. Asphalted/paved roads (Heavy endurance):


Contractor should coordinately cut and trim both of the trench sides by width
150 mm and of depth 325 mm under the next surface. The trench top should be
shaped by:
1) Concrete of normal mixture in two equal layers by 300 mm. It should be
flattened in its place by a certified mechanical road roller that its weight is 8-10
Ton when this is required from him. Also, it may be made through an
alternative method; mixing the concrete by digital vibrator.
2) Returning the final surface level that is by 25 mm should be similar to the
quality of building the original surface.

5.3.1. Asphalted/paved roads (Average endurance):


Contractor should coordinately cut and trim both of the trench sides by width
150 mm and of depth 215 mm under the next surface. The trench top should be
shaped by:
1) Concrete of normal mixture in two equal layers by 150 mm. It should be
compacted in its place by a certified mechanical road roller that its weight is 810 Ton when this is required from him. Also, it may be made through an
alternative method; mixing the concrete by digital vibrator.
2) Returning the final surface level that is by 65 mm should be similar to the
quality of building the original surface.

===251===
Materials should be spread and mixed in such way that keeps original slopes
and curvatures. The surfaces above the trench should be flat and straightly
finished with the next surfaces.
Contractor should give a term by no less than 24 hours between the times of
casting the concrete and returning the final surface.

5.4. The paved footpaths (Asphalted):


Contractor should coordinately cut and trim both of the trench sides by width
150 mm and of depth 190 mm. The trench top should be shaped by:
1) A consolidated grain material by thickness 150 mm, which compacted in its
place by a certified mechanical road roller of 5 Ton
2) A layer of tar emulsion that is coated by spraying and followed by a layer of
the asphalted concrete by thickness 40 mm. It is flattened un its place by a
certified mechanical road roller of 5 Ton.

5.5. Paved footpaths (Ingots or tiles):


Contractor should carefully lift and clean the ingots, stony or concrete tiles. He
also should properly prepare it in order to spread it again on a brush of
flattened grind material by thickness 150 mm. Tiles and ingots are tightly
spread on mortar by thickness 50 mm, while the space between them is injected
by soft cement mortar (colored when necessary) according to the required
specifications. Spreading should be done in a suitable way with the existing
pave.
Any stony or concrete tiles, any concrete or stony ingot got harm, should be
replaced when lifting or re-spreading. The new tiles and ingots should also be
made of a type that is certified by the Ministry of Transportation.

5.6. Curbs, channels and edges:


All curbs, channels and edges that are lifted should be cleaned and prepared
carefully according to the satisfaction and conviction of the Ministry of
Transportation. Then, re-spreading and connecting it with the mortar.
Contractor should supply the pave curbs, new channels and edges to replace the
harmed parts, provided that being in conformity with the specifications of the
Ministry of Transportation. The pieces of shaping and blocking the gaps should
be of length by no less than 450 mm.
The materials of bed and the supporting back filling should be of concrete
(Degree, C30). The paves curbs of the public roads should include a bed of
thickness by 150 mm and a supporting back filling of limits by 75 mm from the
top.
The necessary edges and paves curbs for the roads sides, paves and the
footpaths should include a bed of thickness by 50 mm and a supporting back
filling of limits by 25 mm from the top.

When it is necessary, the paves curbs that are made at the site using concrete of
degree (C 30) should be caste again. It should be matching with the lines and
levels of the next paves curbs.

5.7. Returning the surfaces back to its original status at the


gardens:
All surfaces should be return to a similar status to its original one according to
the satisfaction and conviction of the engineer and the owners of the
concerning areas, wherever it is true to be applied according to the satisfaction
and conviction of the Ministry of Transportation.
Gardens, seedbeds, farms and the other properties, their surfaces should return
to its original status using the same depth of the soil that has been removed. It
should not be by less than 300 mm. If a collapse happened, it should be
flattened by soil.
The surfaces of all the extended private roads between the public roads and the
buildings, courts and paths, other than that mentioned regarding the roads and
its original status is as mentioned above, should return. They are returned using
any necessary materials, either they were obtained from the materials that
resulting from digging or not including the flattened stones of preparing the
paves, the tough foundation fro paving, concrete and metal plates, stones of the
roads paving, the paving tar stones or the other necessary materials for getting
similar surface for the original one.
The compacting works should be made by mechanical road roller, as necessary.
The works of returning the surface back to its original status should be kept
fine for six months or until the insurance period is ended; whichever is further.
Such surfaces should also be kept in a good status according to the satisfaction
and conviction of the owners, occupies and the engineer.

(Technical Specifications)
Chapter Six
The concrete works and materials
Schedule of the contents
6.1. General:
6.1.1. Work Scope:
6.2. Concrete requirements:
6.3. Aggregate/stones sources:
6.4. Aggregate/stones examination:
6.5. The proportion of dust in the contents:
6.6. The soft aggregate:
6.7. Aggregate/stones storage:
6.8. The rough aggregate:
6.9. The proportion of chlorides in the concrete components of the normal
Portland cement:
6.10. The allowable proportion of chlorides in the tough concrete of the normal
Portland cement
6.12. Sulfate:
6.13. The allowable maximum proportion of sulfate in the tough concrete of
the normal Portland cement:
6.14. Aggregate chemical reaction:
6.15. Cement type:
6.16. The alternative cement types:
6.17. The alkaline content in the cement:
6.18. Cement sources:
6.19. Cement freightage:
6.20. Cement loads:
6.21. Cement dispatches:
6.22. Cement Storage:
6.23. Cement approval:
6.24. Guarantee the cement performance:
6.25. Water:
6.26. The complex of preparing the mixtures groups, mixer, etc.:
6.27. Mixer:
6.28. Scales accuracy:
6.29. Materials measure:
6.30. Accuracy of preparing the groups/mixtures:
6.31. Setting the equipments of the weight:
6.32. Mixing the concrete:
6.33. Sequence of the concrete certification:
6.34. Concrete of degree (C30):
6.35. Experimental mixtures at the site:
6.36. Requirements of the concrete mixture:
6.37. Taking samples and testing the concrete:

6.38. Concrete additives:


6.39. Concrete transmission:
6.40. Casting. General:
6.41. Casting of the sawn plates:
6.42. Casting of the soft surfaces:
6.43. Supplying and storing the materials of the reinforcement:
6.47. Rebar:
6.48. Wires of rebar:
6.49. Fixing/installing and supporting the reinforcement materials:
6.50. The concrete cover of the reinforcement bars:
6.51. Bending the reinforcement materials:
6.52. Building and blocking the holes:
6.53. Structural separators:
6.54. Joints of expansion and shrinkage:
6.55. Concrete casting:
6.56. Concrete casting in or under the water:
6.57. The concrete treatment and protection:
6.58. Removing the casting (tensile):
6.59. Seats of the machines and cement injection:
6.60. The items of the concrete:
6.60.1. General:
6.60.2. Hook retainers:
6.60.3. Steel ornaments:
6.60.4. Pipes:
6.61. Finishing the surfaces:
6.62. Concrete works under the hot temperature:
6.63. Re-making the defected works:
6.64. Water sealing property:
6.65. The liquid mortar that is used in injection:
6.66. Mortar:
6.67. Finishing the ground by granolithic concrete:
6.68. Concrete prior casting:
6.69.Concrete blocks prior to casting:
(Technical Specifications)
Chapter Six

Concrete materials and works


6.1. General:
6.1.1. Work Scope:
This chapter describes the specifications of the components and types of the
concrete, also the types of concrete itself that will be used in this contract. The
specifications of casting the concrete are also included in this chapter.
6.2. Concrete requirements:
Concrete that is used in all the works should be of regular shape, intensive,
tight (sealed for water) and free from discontinuity, nesting, cold joist, sand
flow, bleeding, dewatering, plastic deposits, the initial plastic and thermal
crack, shrink through drought or crack in any way.
The contractor's attention is drew towards examining and taking samples,
testing the aggregate, cement and the water sources, providing the supplying to
the sites and re-treatment, when necessary.
Also, storing, handing over, preparing the groups, testing the aggregate and
cement; moreover, providing, supplying, storing, bending, fixing and testing
the rebar. In addition, mixing, transmitting, casting, flattening and treating the
concrete, all of these according to these specifications.
6.3. Aggregate/stones sources:
The sources of the aggregate/stones, the extraction method and the ways of
production should be subjected to the engineer approval.
6.4. Aggregate/stones examination:
The aggregate/stone for the concrete, mortar or other purposes, in all cases,
should be free from the dust, clays (mud, sand clay; the dissolved, tabular,
mud, clay and soft stones, the organic materials and the other impurities). It
should be of intensive and harden type. The caved scale should be kept at
reasonable proportion matching with the production of the intensive concrete.
This proportion is not preferable to be of weight by more than 3% of retaining
in the filter no. (7) according to the British standards. These rules should be
applied on all the concrete works except all that are used in building the
installations for retaining the water liquids. It should be according to the British
standards 5337, paragraph (21, 2, 3).
Aggregate/stones should be in conformity with the British standards (882)
aggregates of the natural sources. It should also be obtained from sites that are
approved by the engineer.
The aggregate for all the reinforced concrete should be obtained from the
valleys' aggregates. It should be properly filtered and broken according to the
concerning standards, provided that the following standards should be applied:
The value of the aggregate crashig should be no more than 20%
The value of the water absorption should be no more than 2%

The rough aggregate that has been examined according to the five strokes that
are described in the standards of (ASTMS 88) (American Society for Testing
and Materials). It should not lose by more than 16% when using the
magnesium sulfate solution unless otherwise is approved.
It should be obtained; samples of sand and stones for the specified
examinations that should be implemented before any arrangements for
producing the aggregate from the new sites are finished. The mixture should
also be examined from time to another for confirming its appropriate.
6.5. The proportion of dust in the contents:
The proportion of the materials that are passing from the filter 200 (75 Micron)
for the British standards when they are tested according to the standards of
Saudi Arabia no. (226) should be exceed the following proportions:The soft aggregate: 6% weight
The rough aggregate: 1% weight
6.6. The soft aggregate:
A. Type
The contractor is completely responsible for choosing the sand source
according to the engineer approval. He should also incur all the expenses that
are included in producing the approved material. In addition, he should insert
the costs of filtering the sand in the proper way, in the lists of the concrete
works costs.
The sand that is used in the concrete should be able to passing through a test
sieve of size 5 mm. It should meet the following grading requirements:Sieve
The
The
No/Size
American Proportion
Standards of What
Passing
through
the Sieve
3/8 inch
(9.5 mm)
100
Sieve no. 4 (4.75 mm) 95-100
Sieve no. 8 (2.36 mm) 80-100
Sieve no. (1.18 mm) 50-85
16
Sieve no. (600
25-60
30
Micron)
Sieve no. (300
10-30
50
Micron)
Sieve no. (150
2-10
100
Micron)
When mixing the sand with the rough aggregate and cement, it should produce
a concrete of maximum density. It is allowed to add the smashed sand to that

natural for getting the required grading, while it is not allowed to use only the
smashed sand unless after the engineer approval.
Any sand, according to the engineer opinion, is not clean or has a larger
proportion of the soft particles; it should be completely washed before using it.
B. The molecule shape
The soft aggregate should not contain significant amounts of the long or flaked
particles.
C. Mortar Sand:
Sand that is used in the mortar should be, from all the side, according to the
British standards 1198 (Building Sand from the natural sources).
6.7. Aggregate/stones storage:
Sand and aggregate of the concrete should be stored in boxes or through stages
that are designed to prevent the grained separation, prevent mixing the different
aggregate with each other and avoid the inclusion of the impurities and the
other odd materials in the concrete. Generally, each standard of the aggregate
should be stored individually.
6.8. The rough aggregate:
A. Type
The rough aggregate refers to such aggregate that is retained on a test sieve of
size 5 mm. The grading of the rough aggregate should be within the described
limits of the British standards (BS 882) and (BS 1201).
It may also be within the following grading limits, as when it mixed with the
sand and cement, results a concrete of a maximum density.
Sieve
No/Size

The
American
Standards

1 inch
3/4 inch
1/2 inch
3/8 inch
Sieve no. 4
Sieve no. 8

(25 mm)
(19 mm)
(12.5 mm)
(9.5 mm)
(4.75 mm)
(2.36 mm)

The
Proportion
of What
Passing
through
the Sieve
100
90 100
20 55
0 10
0.5

The engineer approves the densities numbers of the concrete different grades
after making the examinations in the site.
Contractor should take all the necessary steps to prevent separating the rough
aggregate to individual standards after grading it.
B. The molecule shape

The indications of flaking and lengthening for the parts of the biggest size in
each rough aggregate group that has a specified sized and matching with the
standards of Saudi Arabia 226, should not exceed 20% and 30% weight
respectively.
C. Rubbing and Collision
The aggregate that is used in the concrete which is exposure to rubbing and
collision should be according to the test requirements of the Saudi Arabia
specifications (226) and the British specifications (BS 184 and 882)
respectively.
6.9. The proportion of chlorides in the concrete components of the normal
Portland cement:
The proportion of the dissolvable chlorides in the acids should not equally
exceed, as it is generally in the sodium chloride (CLX1.65 = NaCL), the values
that are mentioned below.
A. The rough aggregate
The reinforced concrete: 0.05% weight
==261===
Masses concrete: 0.10% weight
B. The soft aggregate
All the types of concrete: 0.1% weight
C. Fresh water
All the types of concrete: 600 m/liter
Proportions state the mixture components. It is also subjected to the prevailing
maximum limits that are described for the total mixture.
The level of chlorides (ex: sodium chloride for any mixture including that is in
the cement and any mixtures) that are estimated should not exceed 0.5% weight
of the cement in the mixture (1% in the normal concrete).
6.10. The allowable proportion of chlorides in the tough concrete of the
normal Portland cement
In spite of the requirements stated above, regular tests are made for the tough
concrete for determining the content of the dissolvable chlorides in the acids.
Tests are made according to the British standards 1971:1881, chapter (6).
Concrete is approved if:A) it 95% of the test results contained a proportion by less than 0.5 of sodium
chloride and weight of the cement.
B) any of the results didn't contain a proportion by more than 0.65 of the
sodium chloride and weight of the cement.
6.11. The allowable proportion of chloride in the tough concrete of the
sulfate resistant Portland cement
Regarding the sulfate resistant concrete, the proportion of the sodium chloride
weight should not exceed that of the cement in the rough concrete by 0.2%
6.12. Sulfate:

The proportion of the dissolvable sulfate (with the shape of SO3) in the acids
should generally exceed the values stated below:A) The rough aggregate: 0.5 weight
B) The soft aggregate: 0.4 weight
C) Fresh water: 250 mlg/liter
Knowing, the proportions state the necessary components of the total mixture.
It should also be subjected to the maximum limits that are described in the total
mixture.
6.13. The allowable maximum proportion of sulfate in the tough
concrete of the normal Portland cement:
In spite of the requirements stated above, regular testes are made for tough
concrete according to the British standards (BS 1881:1971) (Chapter (6) for
determining the total content of the sulfates (with the shape of SO3)) for any
mixture. Concrete is approved, if the sulfates were not more than 4% weight of
the cement in the concrete.
The allowable level for the chlorides and sulfates that are provided in this
paragraph is not average values for all the works, but it will be applied for any
concrete.
6.14. Aggregate chemical reaction:
The aggregate should not contain any material that negatively interacts with the
alkaline materials in the cement. Also, that may interact with any alkaline
materials that are additives in the aggregate and the mixture water or in the
water that is in contact with the concrete or the mortar by sufficient amounts,
because it causes extra local expansion or general to the concrete or mortar.
Bar tests are made for the mortar according to the standards of (ASTMS 227)
The American Society for Testing and Materials.
Contractor, when advised by the engineer, should determine if there was any
rock that is used as one of the components of the stone/aggregate interacts or
not with the alkaline. For this purpose, the test of (ASTM C 289) or other
certified test is used. If such tests stated that any rocky component interacts in
any way, such aggregate should not be used in the concrete of the permanent
works. Unless or until bar tests on the mortar decisively state that, the effect of
such interactions do not cause damage or harm when mixing with other rock
components with the proportions that will be used in the concrete mixtures for
the permanent works.
6.15. Cement type:
Cement should be of the sulfate resistant Portland type according to the British
standards (BS 4027) or the standards of (ASTM C150), type (5).
The tough cement of the extreme speed, the fast-solidification cement and that
of the high-Alumina (Aluminum oxide), also the cement that contains Calcium
chloride.

6.16. The alternative cement types:


The engineer may consider the cement types that are shown in the presentation
and similar to that are described above, as they are manufactured according to
the other local standards other than that stated above or any other types of the
cement that its properties are similarly accepted. However, approving any of
them is conditioned by the contractor approval for additional limits without
increase the fees.
Any tenders are provided under this paragraph should be attached with three
copies of the concerning specifications in which includes the specifications of
the test method that should be (if it was proper) translated to English and
confirmed.
6.17. The alkaline content in the cement:
The total content of the dissolvable alkaline in the acid (Na2 + O, 658 K2O) in
the cement that is stated according to the British standards (BS 4550, part 2)
should not be by more than 0.60% weight, unless it is approved or otherwise is
required.
6.18. Cement sources:
Specifying the cement sources subject to the engineer approval. The following
information about the productive company should be known and provided
about each source and each suggested cement type:1) The company name and the factory address and name
2) Specifications that are provided by the productive company about the
cement type and trademark name
3) The standards that should be considered
4) The average, maximum and minimum values of the components and
properties of the cement of the period after continuous production by no less
than six months. It ends within a time by no less than three months from
providing the information.
Components
Dissolvable deposits
Silica (Calcium oxide)
Alumina (Aluminum oxide)
Overall iron (Iron oxide)
Calcium (Calcium oxide)
Magnesium (Magnesium oxide)
Potassium (Potassium oxide)
Sodium (Sodium oxide)
Sulfate
Sulfur
Chloride
Loss when firing
Properties:- Lime saturation factor
- Proportion of Alumina/iron

- Tricalcuim Aluminate (C3A)


- Calcium oxide in the fire wastes (Ca O)
-The total of the dissolvable alkaline in acids
-Liquescence temperature at the seventh and twenty-eighth days
-Pureness degree (Kgm/m2)
-The final and initial solidification material (by particles)
- Originality (mm)
- Press resistance at the seventh, twenty-seventh, twenty-eight and ninetieth
days
5) The test method and the standards that are used for determining:- Liquescence temperature
- Pureness degree
- Originality (Stabilization)
- Press resistance
Wherever it is supposed or preferable that the productive company will supply
cement of the required type from more than one source, the information that are
stated in the paragraph (6-17) should be provided about each source.
Contractor should obtain from each production and suggested source, a sample
of the cement that should be completely tested at a certified independent
laboratory according to the concerning presentation.
It should be suggested, secondary and main sources for the required cement
types.
6.19. Cement freightage:
Cement should be freighted by the productive company in bags that are
designed with the format that prevent any pollution and reduce the reverse
effects of the high wetness and moisture during the transportation and storage,
to the least.
It should be written on the bags, the name of the productive company, the trade
name of the cement (if found), the productive factories name, the standards that
they are manufactured according to and production date, or its expiry date.
It should be obtained, 2 unused experimental bags from the company that
produces the cement, then provided to the engineer for the approval.
6.20. Cement loads:
The following information of (all cement loads completely or partially) that
will be supplied to the site, should be provided:
Production date, the original loading date, the points that it will passing by in
the way to the site, discharge date and the date of supplying to the site
Cement that has been produced before six months from the date that is
determined for delivering it to the site should be examined. It should also be
taken, a sample for testing for the purposes of approval before delivering to the
site.

6.21. Cement dispatches:


Contractor should get and deliver to the engineer, test certificate of the
company that produces the free cement for each cement dispatch. Such
certificates should be provided before the order of dispatches for using. Also,
the chemical composition and the specified physical properties should be stated
according to the related standards.
It should be taken, samples from each dispatch of the cement dispatches and
testing it according to the engineer instructions at a certified independent
laboratory.
Wherever the free cement is suggested, contractor should provide all the
information that are required by the engineer regarding the arrangements of
loading and storage away from the site. Also, providing the reasonable
facilities for the engineer for checking such arrangements for the approval
The sent loads should be used according to the sequence that they are delivered
according to.
6.22. Cement Storage:
All the cement that is freighted in bags should be stored in structure that is
resistant for the climate conditions. Such structure contains concrete grounds or
sealed intensive bitumen that should be kept clean at all the times. All the
storage arrangements should be completely achieved and approved by the
engineer before supplying the cement to the site
Each cement dispatch should be separately stored to be easily reachable,
known, examined and taking the samples from it. It should be kept, a sufficient
store at the site to guarantee the work progress, also the storage process should
subject to the engineer approval.
If the cement that is freighted in bags in the cylindrical depository (soils)
stored, it should be freighted in soils through reticulate sieve of standard by 6.3
mm. It should be welded and fixed by bolts and covering the whole feeding
area for the soil batch hopper.
Cement that is stored in the soil should be, according to the engineer view
point, properly protected against rains, humidity and the dew falling. All the
points of freightage, discharge of the soil should be properly sealed. It should
also include equiptments for the depository ventilation, if there were machines
for removing the humidity.
6.23. Cement approval:
Cement from any dispatch is not allowed to be used in the permanent works
without the engineer approval.
Cement that contains masses solid by the air, crushed materials solid by the air,
odd materials, polluted materials or any materials that is unsatisfactory in any
way, according to the engineer's opinion, it will be rejected and should be
removed from the site without delay.

6.24. Guarantee the cement performance:


Contractor undertake the responsibility of reaching to the sufficient conviction
that the performance properties of the cement are not as the extra cement
contents should be. It is not preferable to cause or exceed any undesirable
specifications in the solid or loose concrete, in spite of its apparent matching
with the specifications.
6.25. Water:
A. Quality:
Water that is used for making the concrete should be clean and free from the
harmed materials in such amounts that affect on the properties of the concrete
in the solid or loose case. The sources of such water subject to the engineer
approval
B. The salty content:
The total condensation of the chlorides in water should not exceed 600
mlg/liter (with the shape of sodium chloride)
The total condensation of the sulfates in the water should not also exceed 250
mlg/liter (with the shape of SO3)
The limits mentioned above subject to the following prevailing requirements:
The total amounts of the sulfates (SO3), for any mixture regardless the amount
that is in the cement, but including any amount in the other materials, should
not exceed 2.5% weight of the cement that is in the mixture.
The total amount of the chlorides (Sodium chloride) for any mixture, including
any amount of the chlorides in any other materials, should not exceed 0.5%
weight of the cement that is in the mixture.
6.26. The complex of preparing the mixtures groups, mixer, etc.:
The whole factory of mixing and making the concrete should be as groups
within walled complex of sufficient capacity to include additional treatment
equipments, when necessary. For storing the aggregate, cement, soils, all the
equipments, the traffic of the subsidiary cars and the workers, the complex
ground should be completely covered by concrete tiles to prevent the pollution
through the sand dunes or any other similar materials that are naturally exist.
All the necessary precautions are taken to prevent passing the sand and dust
that are shaken by the wind into the areas of storage, mixing and the factory.
The whole area should regularly be cleaned and kept free from sand, dust and
the other polluted materials that come with the wind
6.27. Mixer:
Contractor should provide separated storage boxes or the soils or both of them
together for each nominal size and the aggregate type.
Methods that are used for loading and discharging the aggregate should be in a
way that reduces separation to the least. Mixture is made among the different
types and sizes of the aggregate.
During the loading processes, storage boxes should be kept covered to prevent
passing the sand that comes with the wind.

Hoppers of weighting the water and cement mixture (when measuring the
weight) should of types that are approved by the engineer. It should be hung
from scale or another certified machine for measuring the load and equipped
with a certified discharge mechanism
The control method of the loading mechanism should be in such format that
enable adding the materials by proportions that may be set and stopped within
the possible variance of the weight that is specified in the specifications.
The weight hoppers should be built for discharging worthily and preventing the
materials congestion. Also, it should be provided, equivalent weight by
maximum 10% of the scale nominal capacity on the weight mechanism.
It should be provided, hoops for the dust sealing on the hoppers that are used
for the cement among the loading mechanism and the weight hopper.
It should be installed in a way that prevent the dust emission and does not
affect on the weight accuracy.
Hopper should be ventilated for getting rid of the air without the dust emission
by large amounts.
It should also be provided, sufficient protection for all the weigh mechanisms
and hoppers to prevent any deficiency for the weight accuracy that resulting
from climate conditions or the external congestion of the materials.
The soft and rough aggregate should be weighted individually inside the weight
hopper. Any materials congestion inside the hopper should be removed.
Scales should be set on zero for at least once everyday through cleaning the
equipments.
All the equipments of making the mixtures should be kept clean and in fine
operational status, according to the satisfaction and conviction of the engineer.
All the edges of knifes that on the weight equipments, hoppers and doors
should be kept clean and in high-competence operational status.
6.28. Scales accuracy:
The division of the standards of the cement, aggregate/stones and water (if the
last was scaled by weight) should be easily distinguished in which its width
should not be less than 2.5 mm. Its weigh should be no more than 0.5% of the
nominal capacity for the proper weight hopper or the weight compartment.
During installation or maintenance, it is not allowed that the stated weight on
any point on the scale differ from the right weigh by more than 1% of the
actual read for the scale within the range of the quarter of the scale total
capacity.
The weights that of capacity lesser than the quarter standard of the scale, the
difference should be larger than 1% of the quarter-read for the scale
At any time during the operation, the weight that is stated on any point of the
scale should not differ from the right weight by more than 1.5% of the actual
read for the scale within the range of the quarter of the scale total capacity.
The weights that of capacity lesser than the quarter standard of the scale, the
difference should not be larger than 1.5% of the quarter-read for the scale.
==271==

6.29. Materials measure:


A) Aggregate/Stone:
Mixture should be measured by weight considering the hot humidity content of
the aggregate. It should daily be checked or with more frequently according to
the engineers' instructions.
B) Cement
Cement should be measured by weight or inside full bags as it is supplied from
the productive company. It should be weighted in a hopper or in a separated
compartment other than that is used for other materials on a scale of proper
sensitivity.
C) Water:
It should be provided; sufficient amounts of water equivalent with accurate
measure tools. The added water is measured by size or weight.
6.30. Accuracy of preparing the groups/mixtures:
The materials of the groups/mixtures are measured within the following
allowable variance. It should be freighted in the mixer without any loss:Cement 2% of the cement weight in the group/mixture
Aggregate 2% of the weight of each type of the mixture in the group/mixture
Water 2% of the water that is added to the group/mixture
Mixtures 5% of the amount that is added to the group/mixture
6.31. Setting the equipments of the weight:
It should be kept, available sufficient weights in the site for being sure of the
accuracy of all the scales. Tests should be made at periods that are determined
by the engineer. Such test results should be recorded.
Scales should be checked and examined, along its full expansion, by an expert
every three months at least and its results should be written
It should be provided, calibrator container of the mixtures containers for testing
the measure accuracy for once every month at least
6.32. Mixing the concrete:
Mixing the concrete manually is not allowed. Concrete should be mixed for the
concrete buildings in the site in such machines that of certified design for
making the mixtures.
The capacity and numbers of the mixers that are provided by the contractor
should be in such shape that enables of meeting the requirements through it
without producing noticeable additional amounts of the concrete at anytime.
It should be devoted a special interest for that point when the weather is hot in
which the solidification-speed of the concrete increase by a large amount then.
Contractor is not allowed to use mixers of continues feeding for the concrete or
the stones.
The size of the mixed materials for the group should not exceed the capacity of
a mixer that is estimated by the productive company.

For guarantee mixing the concrete materials easily and constituting similar
mass, when available, the cement, stone and water should be feed at the same
tine with a regular rate inside the mixing cylinder.
Each materials group include water should be mixed in a cylinder or in the
mixer flatten bath, unless the concrete was of regular shape and color.
The minimum period of mixing should be two minutes for the cylinder mixers,
while it should be thirty seconds for the flatten bath mixers.
The mixing period should be measured from the time that all the required
materials for the group, including water, are inside a cylinder or the mixer
flatten bath.
The cylinder or the flatten bath should be completely freighted before the recharge. Any remaining water in a cylinder or the mixed flatten bath should be
drained for the complete cleaning.
Water should be added from a tank on the mixer that is provided with a scale. It
should be daily tested. Also, it should be arranged in which the size of the
water that is added to each group could be accurately determined.
It should be also provided, a side-waterway tap for transmitting the water to a
container of known size. When mixing the materials, it is not allowed to cast
the water inside the cylinder by a bailer, water hose or other pipe under the
pressure of the water that is taken from the tank. It is not allowed to change the
size of the water that is used in the group, unless as it is provided according to
wetting the stone.
It should be taken, samples of the mixture water and regularly tested to find the
amounts of salts and pollution
The mixture cylinder should be completely cleaned at the end of each
operational period. Also, all the sticking concrete should be removed. When
using mixers that are provided with blades or scraper, mixture should be
checked more than once and kept within the allowable variance range that is
specified by the productive company.
6.33. Sequence of the concrete certification:
The following sequence should be applied for approving the concrete. It is not
allowed doing permanent works until the engineer approve all the stages. It is
permissible to set the following method:
A) A comprehensive report about the examinations and taking the samples and
tests of the water, cement and aggregate sources.
B) Providing the methods of the mixing, making the groups, storage and
treatment processes for all the materials in the site, attaching with complete
details about the machines/equipments that will be used.
C) Providing samples of the aggregate, cement and water for testing and
examination according to the concerning paragraphs.
D) Contractor should provide the suggestions of the mixture composition for
the approval according to the paragraphs (6-23) of these specifications
E) Achieving full-range experimental mixtures in the site according to the
requirements of the paragraphs (6-24) of these specifications
F) Approving the competence of the concrete to work

G) Doing experiments of full-range casting


H) Achieving satisfactory performance for the concrete and getting good
results.
6.34. Concrete of degree (C30):
Contractor should provide the suggestions of designing the mixture and
sufficient amounts of all the concrete materials of type (C 30) to a suggested
examination laboratory for testing.
It is not allowed changing the proportions of the cement, aggregate and water
to the cement that are stated in the contractor tenders without getting the
necessary approval. The proportions that are used for making the concrete
subject to the following conditions:
A) A group consists of six cubes of size by 150 mm should be cast, treated by
moisture and tested by the laboratory in which three of them at the seventh day
and the other three at the twenty-eighth day according to the British standards
(BS 1881).
The average of the resistance for each group consists of three cubes, should be
no less than the values that are stated under the paragraph (6-25) of these tests
(the initial tests). Also, the difference between the maximum and minimum
resistance should be no larger than 20% of this resistance average.
B) The concrete cubes of the experimental mixtures should be cast at the site
according to the paragraph (6-34) of these specifications. Resistances should be
according to the specified requirements.
C) The concrete cubes of the concrete mixtures should be cast at the site from
time to another during the period of the structural works according to the
paragraph (6-36) of these specifications. Resistances should be according to the
specified requirements.
D) The competence of the concrete that is cast for the laboratory examinations
or the initial group, should give value for the drop test, (for measuring the
range of the cement shrink when doubt), when it is tested according to the
British standards (BS 881) by 40 mm with allowable variance by 14 mm. The
competence of the concrete that is cast at the site during the period of the
structural works should be according to the paragraph 26 of these
specifications.
When these conditions are not compliance, it is not allowed to do any concrete
works until providing new suggestions for designing the concrete by the
contractor and returning the examination method back as necessary.
6.35. Experimental mixtures at the site:
Before starting the permanent concrete works, contractor should make fullrange experimental mixtures at the site. All the materials that are used in the
tests at the site should be approved by the engineer according to the concerning
paragraphs in these specifications. It should be delivered, accumulated, stored,
handed-over and made in groups. It should also be mixed by the way and mixer
that are suggested by the contractor for producing the concrete of the
permanent works

The mixture proportions should be approved by the suggested examination


laboratory and the engineer
Concrete should be examined according to the paragraph (6-26) of these
specifications. The mixer performance should be according to the satisfaction
and conviction of the engineer.
If the results, according to the engineer's opinion, were not satisfied or
contradict, it is allowed providing other samples of the rough and soft
aggregate, cement or water for checking and examination. Also, it is allowed
changing the mixture design and approving this test, while it is not allowed
starting making the concrete of the permanent works, until the type, grade and
the proportions of the rough and soft aggregate, cement and water are
determined in satisfactory way by these tests and approving it.
During the contract period, if it was necessary for the contractor to get rough or
soft aggregate, cement or water from different sources other that that are
approved. Also, if the implemented examinations that are described below
stated that there was any change happened regarding type or the proportions of
the stones, or the factory has changed during building/implementation. Hence,
contractor may be asked to stop the concrete works, making additional
experimental mixtures at the site or re-sequence the concrete approval before
starting the concrete works.
6.36. Requirements of the concrete mixture:
All the concrete mixtures that are used in the works should be (designed). The
minimum and maximum requirements should be according to what stated
below:
Note: 1 Newton/mm2 = 10.2 kgm/cm2
The proportion of water to cement should not exceed the number of designing
the specified mixture according to the paragraph (6-34) of these specifications.
The competence of the concrete work should be in such way that enables
casting without discontinuity, also completely flattening it. It should surround
all the reinforcement materials and completely fill the casting mold.
All the aggregate types should be according to the requirements of the
paragraphs (6-2) to (6-13) (inclusively) of these specifications.
All the cement should be of the sulfate resistant type according to the
requirements of the paragraphs (6-14) up to (6-23) (inclusively) of these
specifications.
Water should be as specified according to the paragraphs (6-24) of these
specifications.
The rate of taking samples from the soft concrete should be as follows:
A) In the poles and cantilever beams, one sample is taken for each 10 m3 from
the casting concrete.
B) For all the other units, one sample is taken for each 40 m3 from the casting
concrete.
The maximum temperature of the soft concrete is 30 C.

6.37. Taking samples and testing the concrete:


All the works of taking the samples, treatment by moisture and the tests of the
solid or loose concrete should be made exactly according to the British
standards (BS 1881) under the supervision of the representatives of the
engineer and the engineer of the materials or the contractor's representative.
Concrete samples for the test should be taken from the inclined drainage
channels of the mixer, from the concrete that is mixed on the scaffold or
directly on the stand before casting the concrete or according to the engineer's
instructions.
Contractor should prepare a group of the cubes that are six or seven of size by
150 mm for each sample of the concrete for testing. Cubes should be made in
metal moulds according to the British standards (BS 1881) that the contractor
should provide 12 units of them. It should be kept at each site during the
period of casting the concrete.
Contractor should make the necessary arrangements for treating the cubes, then
testing three of them after seven days and another three after 28 days according
to the engineer's instructions and providing the results directly to the engineer.
The remaining cube should be kept at the site. Contractor should provide the
suitable means for transporting the cubes without it get hard or damaged for
any reason. Treatment by moisture, testing and transportation should be made
according to the British standards (BS 1881).
If the value of any of the examined cubes were not matching with the values
that are mentioned in the paragraph (6-35), the contractor should stop the
concrete works until the engineer approve to complete it. Contractor may be
asked for stopping the concrete production, if necessary according to the
engineer's opinion, and re-sequence the concrete approval.
Contractor is also asked for making the drop test (for measuring the extent of
the cement shrink when doubt) everyday at least, or according to the engineer's
instructions and the British standards (BS 1881). The results should be
promising and in conformity with the proven values in the approvals of the
design mixture.
6.38. Concrete additives:
The concrete additives are not allowed to be used without the engineer's written
approval or according to his instruction.
If the contractor suggested using the additives or he has been guided to do, he
should provide sufficient technical details and samples from the additives for
testing and approving it.
The concrete additives are not allowed to be used except such type of (water
reduction) or (solidification delay). Its main type should be of the wooden
sulfates (Ligno Sulphonate). Additives should also be produced by a certified
company and it is not allowed to use the calcium chloride or the additives that
contain chlorides.
Additives are used as liquid or powder. It is measured by size and weight in the
liquids, while in the powder; it is measured only by weight.

It is distributed through equipments that can measure within the variances


limits that are provided in.
Tanks and the cylinders that contain the liquid additives should be marked by a
card that is fixed on it and contain the contents clearly, for the purposes of
defining
It should also be stored in such way that prevent any harm that resulting from
the pollution. It should be provided, a shaking movement for the liquid
additives that are not considered buffer solutions.
6.39. Concrete transportation:
Concrete should be freighted from the mixers and transported to the site in a
way that does not cause any separation or sealing for its constituent materials.
The way and the equipments that are used for transporting the concrete, subject
to the engineer approval. The transportations should guarantee being the
concrete in its required status in order to be used in the place and time of
casting it.
Hoppers that are used for the loose concrete should constitute of sealed soft
containers and provided with proper freightage mechanism. It should also be
provided, the covers or other means for protection and preventing the concrete
to be polluted. It is not allowed to cast the concrete at height by more than 1.8
m.
6.40. Casting module. General:
The temporal modules should be made to be suitable for the pressure resistance
of the moisture concrete without making any significant distortion. It should
also be fixed in its straightness and tightly strengthen to be able to bear the
heaviness of the construction, workers movement, materials and equipments
without making any movement of any type. All joints should be near to each
other in which prevent the liquid infiltration from the concrete.
Contractor should ask the engineer for providing the maps and accounts of the
temporal moulds and supporting structures works.
The places that the concrete casting stopped at should be determined through
dividing the temporal moulds along the reinforcement lines in a way that
enables of setting the position of each part individually and removing it without
making disruption for the reinforcement or concrete.
The temporal moulds should be painted by the flow-facilitate factor of the
certified moulds oil. Emulsions that are dissolvable in water are not allowed to
be used. The new temporal moulds that are made of the wood or the plywood
(Glued laminated timber) should be painted by three coatings of the flowfacilitate factor of the mould oil before using it for overcoming the natural
differences that are resulting from absorption.
It is not allowed that the flow-facilitate factor of the moulds oil to be in touch
with a concrete that is already cast or with the reinforcement.
Before start casting any concrete, all the moulds and its supports should be
checked and accurately examined, then cleaning it from the inside by press air.

Traps are made in the temporal moulds at the level of lifting each concrete to
facilitate the cleaning process.
It is not allowed to use the wire stays that are used for fixing the moulds and
that kept buried in the concrete.
It is not allowed also to use the sleeves or the bolt-holes inside or through the
barriers parts for the water, unless it has not been obtained previously, a written
approval from the engineer.
The approved types of the walls stays may be used, provided that it should
contain the stays that passing through the barrier structures for water

Contractor is not allowed to use any type of the moulds that using it requires
the walls' stays with repeatability larger than one stay for each square meter.
In all the cases that the steel is kept buried in the concrete permanently, the
minimum cover should be as it is determined for reinforcement or by no less
than 25 mm, whichever larger. The wooden or elastic blocks should be
removed as fast as possible after removing the temporal moulds. The holes also
should be filled with mortar of proportion by 1:2 at the fast possible practical
time.
Concrete should include mixture of the Portland cement that is gray and white
sulfates resistance with proportions, in which the mortar color is completely
similar to the solid concrete color.
The square should be completely cleaned by the brush and moisture by water.
The packing should be compacted in a good way and ended by a soft surface in
a flattened way with the concrete surface.
Any mortar that has been spread on the solid concrete should be carefully
cleaned and removed.
6.41. Casting moulds from the sawn plates:
Moulds should be made of plates that are sawn by the saw and properly
saturated with regular dimensions for producing flat surfaces for the casting
concrete, or in alternative way, steel moulds may be used
6.42. Casting moulds of the soft surfaces:
The moulds of the soft surfaces should be made by using plates from the glued
laminated timber for making regular concrete surface.
Moulds of the soft surfaces should be used for all the apparent concrete faces;
either internal or external and wherever the concrete could be apparent in the
future.
All the apparent sharp corners should be ended by trimmed edges of size by 20
mm x 20 mm, unless there are no other instructions.
6.43. Supplying and storing the materials of the reinforcement:
All the reinforcement materials are delivered in a straight or curved status
according to the required shape.

All the reinforcement materials should be stored on wooden supports that are
installed on non-porous tar or concrete tile that are particularly made for that
purpose.
Tile should be kept clean in all the times and free from dust, sand or the other
materials that may come with the wind, cars, feet or any other way.
These instructions should be equivalently applied on the parts of bending the
reinforcement materials that are previously made. The concrete or tar tile
should be made and prepared according to the engineer approval before
delivering any materials for reinforcement to the site
6.44. Reinforcement materials protection:
Before fixing the reinforcement materials and when it is not handed over, it
should be protected from the chemical corrosion impacts that resulting from the
dust that come with the wind and the dew falling or any other harmful impacts,
in an approved way.
6.45. Cleaning the reinforcement materials:
During the fixing process, the reinforcement materials should be free from the
free manufacturing scale and the rust scale. It should not also be polluted by
lubricates, impurities, oils, dyes, dusty sulfates, chlorides or any other material
that may spoil the coherence character, or cause the chemical corrosion for the
reinforcement material or increase it.
Contractor should suggest methods for the cleaning and practically state it for
approval to guarantee meeting such requirements, in spite of considering the
storage general requirements and the mentioned protection.
==281==
6.46. Casting the concrete around the reinforcement materials:
It is not allowed to cast the concrete after more than seven days after start
fixing the reinforcement material that should be covered at the night and at the
times that it is not used.
Wherever concrete could not be cast around the fixed reinforcement material
for long times, it should be protected from the dust that come with the wind of
the dew falling, in an approved way.
6.47. Rebar:
The steel reinforcement bars should be made according to the Saudi standard
specifications 002.
6.48. Wires of rebar:
The steel rebar wires should be made according to the Saudi standard
specifications 224.

6.49. Fixing/installing and supporting the reinforcement materials:


Contractor should check all schedules of the reinforcement bars on the charts,
then informing the engineer about any contradictions.
Contractor should guarantee that the number, size, format and the place of the
steel bars, stays, connection rings, the strap ties of the concrete bars and the
other reinforcement materials conform what is provided in the executive charts.
It is not allowed the interference of anything in the arrangement of the
reinforcement bars. Contractor should show the necessary interest to guarantee
the competence of arranging such bars from all the required faces, also
guarantee being it proven as necessary by loose metal wire of proper size for
preventing it from shifting before and during the concrete casting.
The connection rings that connect the stays, the longitudinal bars or the other
parts as poles, should be tightly tensile to a level in which the main bars
become truly tensile and strengthened at every side.
The horizontal bars and the horizontal parts of the bending bars in the beams
should be arranged parallel to each other and to the sides. The strap ties of the
concrete bars should be kept tensile on the bars that it includes, also keeping it
away from the concrete face according to what stated on the executive charts.
The back bending for the reinforcement bars in the casting moulds in the
purpose of externally bending it after that when removing the mould will not be
allowed without the engineer's approval.
When it is allowed, the reinforcement bars should be externally bended on
former of proper size to prevent any harm or extra strain for the reinforcement
bars.
It is not allowed to use any parts of the steel, masses of the wood or any other
materials other than the approved plastics or concrete separators in the bottom
of the moulds or on the sides for keeping the reinforcement bars in its
positions.
The concrete separators should not exceed 50 mm in the length or width. It
should also constitute of one part of the cement and two parts of soft mixture.
The tensile wire should be buried inside one of the masses faces, while its sides
are tapered by little towards the outside at the direction of the face that the wire
is buried in.
The pattern of the plastics separators should be in a shape that satisfy the
engineer, and then gain his approval. It should bear the loads that re impressed
on it without causing any significant distortion. It should also not lead to
chipping and breaking the concrete cover or to the chemical corrosion for the
reinforcement materials.
Concrete or the steel that is in the concrete works should not be cut in any ways
without getting a prior written approval.
6.50. The concrete cover for the reinforcement bars:
Contractor should guarantee that the reinforcement bars are provided with a
cover of concrete according to the executive charts.

6.51. Bending the reinforcement materials:


All the bending works should be cold made by a proper machine.
It is not allowed using the heat for making hooks at the bars' terminals and also
making any weld in the bars without a written approval. In such cases, all the
safety measures should be taken to guarantee keeping the physical properties of
the steel and not changing it.
6.52. Building and blocking the holes:
Contractor should guarantee that pipes and steel works are installed in the
inside when building the walls and floors or after the holes are constituted, and
then installing the pipes and steel works. It should be shown, the necessary
interest for guarantee the water non-infiltration in the joints.
6.53. Structural separators:
Contractor should constitute the structural separators/joints, when the period
between stopping the concrete casting and starting it again exceeds the twenty
(20) minutes, or wherever is stated on the maps.
Contractor should provide all his suggestions about the structural separators
and the program of the concrete casting in details to the engineer for the
approval.
The emulsion foam of the cement that is accumulated on the concrete should be
removed during the cement solidification by using wire brush or the press
water, before the surface is largely solidified for doing this successfully.
Before casting loose concrete on any concrete that has previously solidified, the
surface of the solidified concrete should be roughed by edge tool for showing
the aggregate, and then filling such surface with water and completely cleaning
it for getting rid of all the odd materials.
After that, a strong mortar that consists of three parts of the cement to two parts
of the sand on the uncovered surface should be used. Then the new concrete of
the somehow dry and solid consistency is carefully flattened on the wet mortar.
Joints/separators are constituted in the beams and the surfaces tiles in the
middle of the expansion distance between the supports, unless otherwise
instructions are given.
Such separators are made with vertical faces in which it is not allowed
constituting any structural separator among a tile or beam and wall at the level
of the wall face, but it is constituted inside the wall by depth 1/8 of the wall
total thickness. The joints positions in the walls are set according to the
engineer approval and before starting the concrete casting.
In any reinforcement concrete works, a cavity of the letter (V) is constituted in
the never-ending concrete before it is solidified. In the normal concrete works,
joints/separators should have cavities by width 50 mm and 40 mm in the walls
and the concrete hoops of the pipes which its thickness is 200 mm.
The concrete hoops that its thickness exceed 200 mm, cavities by width 50 mm
and depth 100 mm are constituted for it. The cavities positions are determined
according to the engineer approval and it is constituted at the both of the
vertical and horizontal surfaces.

6.54. Joints of expansion and shrinkage:


The necessary materials for the joints of the expansion and shrinkage including
the water seals should be obtained from a certified supplier.
The joints of the expansion and shrinkage are made according to the details and
dimensions that are stated in the charts or according to the engineer's
requirement. It will be consisted of the joints fillings and the seals as stated
below.
In the joints of expansion and shrinkage for the sealing parts, the water seals of
the central hole or any other type of the elastic water seals by width 230 mm, is
used as stated in the charts or as detailed in the amounts' schedules.
Water seals are manufactured with the possible largest lengths in the
manufacturing places. It should be continuous along the building length under
the highest level of the water.
The contractor suggestions about making the water seals continuous in all
buildings are provided to the engineer for the approval.
The joints fillings should be of the Cellulosic type, compressible, elastic and it
should not become crisp at the cold conditions. It should be made of the
grained wood that is saturated with bitumen, cork, cork that is combined with
the rubber or with the resign materials.
Water seals should be of certified type and polysulfide. The engineer should be
convinced that the seals that are provided by the contractor have the suitable
properties of adherent, dilatability, flow resistance, and resistance for the
chemical components and the climates in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. It
should also be suitable for the protective paints, when it is necessary to paint
the joints. The lining layer for the paint should be obtained from the same
manufacturing company of the seals.
Seals should be accurately kept in the places that are stated in the charts. It also
should be protected in all the building stages. Barriers that are on the two sides
of the seals should have the proper shape.
The cavity of the seal should be flattened as stated in the charts. Contractor
should provide the wooden plates on the barriers or during the building. In the
horizontal joints, such plates are left or the cavities are properly protected until
the process of blocking the joints is ended. Sealing process is made for the
surfaces of the expansion joints when the next concrete surfaces are dried.
The wooden plates or any other protective means should be removed before
directly putting the joints' permanent seal. The amount that will be removed
should be the amount that putting the seal in it takes only one day.
Holes should be cleaned well, coated with a proper paint lining and filled with
the certified seal with accurately committing to the instructions of the
manufacturing company
Before putting the seal, contractor should be sure of that the filling in the joints
secure fixing support in which the seal does not impact by the loads that are
resulting from the next concrete surfaces.

6.55. Concrete casting:


Concrete is not allowed to cast, unless the reinforcement is examined and
approved by the engineer's representative, and the casting moulds are cleaned.
Contractor should cast the concrete within no more than 15 minutes after
giving it out of the mixer cylinder. It is not allowed using any concrete after it
starts its initial solidification. Any group or a part of a group started
solidification is rejected before using.
Concrete should be cast in a way that doesn't cause any separation and shaking
it by certified immersion vibrator which its vibration should not be less than
8000 round/minute. When starting the concrete casting, it should be continued
until finishing the casting in one continuous process between the two joints that
are previously determined. Concrete should not be vast under the water.
When there is a sufficient amount of the concrete inside the mould for
submerging the vibrator, the shaking process should start and continued during
the casting.
It should also be provided, sufficient number of the vibrators and keeping them
in an operational status inside the mould for getting the maximum compacting
and avoiding any separation in the concrete materials.
In any ways, it is not allowed using the vibrators for moving the concrete
horizontally inside the moulds. The operation of each vibrator should be
supervised by one worked who devotes all his interests to such job during the
concrete casting and in the course of the casting progress. It should be shown,
the necessary interest for preventing the vibrators to be in touch with the
reinforcement bars.
Contractor should guarantee that there is sufficient number of the equipments
and the reserve machines that are able to guarantee the continuity of the
concrete casting without stop if any trouble happened.
The full apparent surfaces should be kept in semi-horizontal configuration as
possible during the casting process. The concrete surface, wherever apparent,
should be given free finishing, unless otherwise is guided with, and left with a
solid soft face. Wherever the concrete is cast, contractor should firstly operate
the soft part for getting a solid soft face.
Concrete should not be fallen in the place that is determined for it from a height
by more than 2 meters. Wherever the work requires casting the concrete from a
height by more than 2 meters, it should be used, inclined channels and drainage
according to the engineer's approval for preventing the concrete materials
separation.
It should also got, the engineer's approval for the used methods in shaking the
concrete deep castings. Unless the contractor is otherwise guided with, he cast
the concrete with the full depth of the beams, tiles or the similar parts all in one
process.
In the reinforcement concrete works, concrete should be freighted among the
reinforcement bars and around it. It should be shown, the maximum interest for
preventing any shift or bending for the bars, stays, connection rings, the strap
ties for the concrete bars or the other parts for the reinforcement bars.

The maximum horizontal length of the wall or the floor at any direction that
should be cast in one process is 7.5 m. Building the walls and floors are
consecutively made with allowing a term of seven days between the adjacent
casts except the places that are provided with water seals, as such period should
be reduced according to the engineer's approval
In an alternative way, a hole may be left by width 600 mm among the castings
and filling it after a period by no less than 7 days after constitution.
When it is necessary using the salient concrete castings at the cast
separators, its height should be at least 100 mm. In addition, it should be
built at the same time of casting the concrete that it is based on.
In arranging the cast mould, contractor should consider what is required for all
the ends of the necessary seals and for replacing the cast moulds for the walls'
faces as necessary in order to lock the building holes with any width.
A record, includes the time and date of the concrete casting at each department
of the works, should be kept at the site.
6.56. Concrete casting in or under the water:
The method of casting the concrete in or under the water should be in such way
which the concrete that is cast is, as possible, far from the direct touching with
the water; this is for avoiding the fast movement or making any impact on the
uncovered surface.
Concrete should be cast, when possible, in one process. If this is unworkable,
the emulsion foam of the cement, aggregate or any odd materials that may be
previously accumulated on the concrete that is cast should be fully removed
before casting the additional concrete. After that, such concrete is directly cast
on the surface that has been cleaned.
The pipes of casting the concrete that is under the water should be soft from the
inside, sealed for the water infiltration, equipped with fast-dismantle joints and
have a cross section enough to the size of the aggregate that will be used.
Hoppers of the down-opening should be of straight-sides, fully soft, equipped
with coupled doors that are opened from the down and operated from the
outside and has overlapping backflows ==
Only the bags of the lug that are used for the small casting, and for casting the
small discontinuous amounts of the concrete.
Concrete that is freighted in bags should not be used for the permanent works.
During and after casting the concrete under the water, the processes of
pumping or the water drainage at the next area should be stopped, until the
engineer permit its continuity.
Contractor should provide his detailed suggestions about the concrete casting to
the engineer and take his approval for that.
6.57. The concrete treatment and protection:
All the concrete should be treated by moisture for a period by no less than 10
days directly after the concrete casting. Contractor should do his best to restrict
the change range at the temperatures that the concrete is under it.

All the horizontal and vertical faces of the casting moulds and the uncovered
concrete should be covered by gunny or the jute bags that are stature and
should kept completely wet by water continually.
The temperature of the water that is used for this purpose should be at near
temperature of that of the concrete, but no less than.
All the covers should tightly be fixed at its positions to prevent the air-current
proceeding under the covers, through the new concrete or the casting mould
surface.
When removing the mould during the minimum treatment period, the saturate
protective covers should be replaced immediately, and that is directly touching
the uncovered surfaces of the concrete; this is to prevent exposure the concrete
to the climate.
The discontinuous treatment for the protective covers is not allowed during the
treatment period. Contractor should use the workers at other than the work
hours in addition to the observers to guarantee respecting the conditions
mentioned above accurately.
All the concrete surfaces should be protected from any matter that may
interfere in the solidification process.
It is not allowed impressing any load on the concrete parts after removing the
compressibility lists, until the concrete is fully solidified and achieving the
desired power after passing 28 days.
It is not allowed using the sprayed membranes that constitute the treatment
components, unless after the written approval by the engineer.
The treatment component should be of white dye and clearly give visual dyer
membranes when using it on the concrete to guarantee full coverage. The
component should be nontoxic and used by following the recommendations of
the productive company accurately.
The engineer's approval for using particular component and its usage method
should not be granted unless after the contractor make satisfactory field
experiments and preparing samples that have been taken before 28 days.
The treatment by membranes should start at the nearest practical time and
implementing it by using the spraying. Contractor should take all the necessary
safety measures to guarantee not polluting any of the concrete surfaces as a
result of using the treatment component on the horizontal surfaces.
The treatment component is used after 10 minutes from achieving the cast
processes, if the surface water disappeared and directly after finishing the
spraying. The surface should be protected for a period by no less than 8 hours
by movable tires that are covered by dimmer material.
The cover should provide a continuous coverage which should be between 100
and 300 mm above the concrete surface. If it was of the absorptive type, it
should be kept fully wet. On the vertical surfaces or that constituted, the
treatment component is directly used when the mould is removed. Wherever
the mould could not be removed within 12 hours from the casting process, the
mould should be protected from the direct sunrays. Wherever it is been guided
of that, the mould is sprayed by water to reduce the humidity loss from the
concrete to the least extent.

All the joints that should be filled with sealed component, the surfaces that
constitute structural separators in a way that guarantee nit casting any treatment
liquid on the surfaces that a concrete will be cast on it after that through putting
the wet gunny or any other certified way, should be protected.
Protection should also guarantee true treatment for the joint surface and the
next concrete, and it should be kept at its position until providing the joint
surface with seal or for at least four days.
According to the engineer's opinion, if using components for treating the
surfaces for the purpose of the concrete treatment not a satisfactory matter in
any ways, the approval will be withdrawn and contractor should apply the
treatment method by water that previously described.
6.58. Removing the casting moulds (tensile):
Contractor should inform the engineer's representative of his intention for
removing the moulds and that he should guarantee the following minimum
periods for removing the moulds :
The
vertical
moulds for the
poles, walls and
the large beams
The minimum
mould of the
arch surface for
the tiles
Tiles supports
The minimum
mould of the
arch surface for
the beams
Beams supports

24 days

8 days

14 days
8 days

21 days

Contractor should completely be convinced with that the concrete had achieved
sufficient structural resistance before removing the moulds.
==291==
Moulds should be removed without making any concussion or shaking that
may harm the concrete, and it should be done under the supervision of a
competent supervisor assigned by the contractor. If the works got damaged or
harmed as a result of the supports and moulds removal, the contractor should
fix it regardless any permission or approval that is granted for removing such
moulds or supports.
Based on what mentioned above, the side mould is built in a way that allows
removing it as soon as possible after casting the concrete and before it is
completely solidified in order to allow completing the surfaces properly.

6.59. Seats of the machines and cement injection:


Seats in which the machines and pipes works will be put on, should be made of
soft-surface concrete and according to the dimensions that are stated on the
approved charts of the machines or as the engineer orders. The seat surface that
the machines will be fixed on should be completed by the metal trowel as the
valid plane surfaces.
The structural concrete that the seats will be made on should be made by
roughing and cleaning its surface.
Seats should be tied on the structural concrete by the vertical reinforcement,
while the horizontal reinforcement is always supplied at the level of the hook
retainers cavities.
The cavities of the hook retainers should be formed for the cement injection in
a way that satisfies the engineer's satisfaction. Knowing, it is allowed using the
forming tools that are made of Polystyrene, but when the expanding metal is
used as a forming tool, it should be left at its place.
It is necessary to make a way for the machines' supplier to examine all the
seats. When the machines are built, the cavities of the fixing pins should be
filled according to the engineer's instructions by using free-flow cement
injection that is non-shrink and that is resistant for the fatigue that resulting
from the frequent dynamic load, when it gets solidified. Cement injection
subject to the engineer's approval.
Tools should be managed under the contractor supervision and at the engineer
presence, after the cement injection is solidified. When the contractor is guided,
he should achieve the cement injection by filling the space between the
concrete top surface and the down side of the machines' seat plate.
6.60. The items of the concrete:
6.60.1. General:
In the concrete works, all the restraints, inserts, sleeves, etc. should be supplied
and fixed as detailed or as necessary for the success of the work or adding the
other general works before casting the concrete in the moulds
The similar items that are required for the contractors sub-work for the
mechanical and electrical works should also be supplied and fixed by them
before casting the concrete; moreover, giving them a term and enough facilities
for their work. Knowing, the enough support should be provided to avoid
happening any displacement.
6.60.2. Hook retainers:
All the hook retainers should be galvanized by the hot dipping according to
(ASTM A 153 67)
Unless otherwise is determined, the hook retainers should be made of the steel
by size 5/8 inch according to (ASTM A307) and the impediment is as stated.
Hooks should be orthogonal with the concrete surface.

6.60.3. Steel ornaments:


It should be fixed, lamellar metal ornaments of the same type and measure of
the used leveling sheets.
6.60.4. Pipes:
It should not be replaced, any rebar to make a place for fixing the hooks and
boxes. Pipes should be put at the center of a particular part of the concrete. A
distance by 3 inch at least should be left free from the expansions that are
parallel to the rebar. Pipes should be fixed at its places.
Unless otherwise is approved by the engineer, the maximum diameter of the
pipe should be 1/3 of the wall or tile thickness. It should be left, a distance
between the pipes' centers by no less than threefold of the diameter of the used
pipe.
The pipe should have the same concrete covering that is necessary for the
rebar. Pipes that its nominal diameter is larger than 2 inch or any pipes should
not be buried unless after a written approval from the engineer
6.61. Finishing the surfaces:
Contractor should make the works of casting the concrete in such way that
leave the concrete surfaces, after removing the moulds, homogenous, soft and
according to the required specifications regarding the straightness and
equability.
Wherever the contractor get a written approval for forming the holes inside or
through the concrete, such holes should be fixed by a complete galvanism of
the cement mortar from the two sides in which the holes extend through the
concrete. After the mortar is solidified, the invisible surfaces should be painted
by two layers of the black bituminous
Contractor should stop, remove and re-establish any work that, in the engineer's
opinion, below the required standard.
In an alternative way, according to the engineer's instructions and choice,
contractor may be allowed adjusting any completed work properly by the
electrical machines, also adjusting the defects of the surfaces by roughing,
moisture and wiping by mortar that is constituted of a part of the cement and
two parts of the sand that is accurately washed.
Cement should constitute of a mixture of sulfate resistant normal gray or white
cement mixed in proportions in which the mortar color similar to the color of
the solidified surrounding concrete.
The adjustment works are made according to the given instructions, and it does
not exempt the contractor in any ways from his commitments regarding
removing the cast works and re-establishing them unless, in the engineer's
opinion, the adjustment works did not cover such required level for completing
the surfaces.
When the surfaces should be uncovered, contractor should remove the mould
as fast as possible, based on what is provided in above. He should also scrape
them by Silicon Cardman to get a soft completed surface of the first-class.

Contractor should use the Silicon carman grinders that are mechanically
operated, if it was necessary in the engineer's opinion.
All the horizontal and vertical angles, plinths, castings, etc. should be left in a
good case and free from the scrolling.
Floors including stands, channels, the down surfaces and the surfaces should all
be planed by the trowel to get a soft and proper completed surface by using
metal trowel, except the places that otherwise is determined for them in the
amounts' list. The surfaces of the roads should be flattened to get a soft
completed surface.
The finish works for the uncovered concrete surfaces should not be made
unless by skilled and experienced workers of such field of works. These works
also should be according to the full satisfaction and conviction of the engineer
who is entitled to order eliminating any worker who is not skilled enough to
implement such type of works, and use only those who have the required skills.
The allowable variance on the concrete surfaces is measured by millimeters as
follows:
Construct Type of the Sawn SoftFlatten TrowelType
regularity Mould surface Finish finish
variance
Mould
Buried
Non+ 50
+ 10
concrete
straightness
and
inclination

Uncovered
concrete
and
the
internal
surfaces of
the valves'

Differences - 10
in
the + 10
dimensions
of
the
crosssection

+10

Deviation
-5
from
10
straightness
accurately
measured
by 3 m
length

-5
10

Nonstraightness
and
inclination

10

10

Difference

+ 10

+ 10

rooms

in
the
dimensions
of
the
crosssection
Deviation
from
straightness
accurately
measured
by 3 m
length

-5
5

10

-5
5

6.62. Concrete works under the hot temperature:


Contractor should take all the necessary safety measures to reduce, the opposite
effect of the high temperature, the low relative humidity and the wind speed on
the quality of the solid or loose concrete, to the possible least extend.
The measures that are taken by the contractor for considering the requirements
that are stated in these paragraphs about the concrete works at the hot
temperature, subject to the engineer approval before starting the works of the
permanent concrete.
The maximum temperature of a concrete that is newly mixed should be 30 C,
provided that exerting the possible efforts for casting the concrete at the
possible minimum temperature.
Contractor should take the following measures to set the temperature of the
mixture, water, and the newly mixed concrete:
A) Providing windbreaks, covers, and shadow for the aggregate, mixers, the
inclined channels for draining the concrete and at the positions of casting the
concrete.
B) Providing sufficient amounts of the water, hoses, pumps, nasty-nozzles
spraying to cool the aggregate, the mixing cylinders, casting positions,
reinforcement materials and the concrete treatment by moisture
C) Painting all the storage soils, containers, water tanks, trucks and the mixing
cylinders with the white color.
D) Providing the cooling equipments and the ice making, or the cooling
equipments to cool the mixture water, isolating the tanks and the pipes works
properly
Contractor should make the necessary arrangements for mixing, transporting,
casting, compacting, strengthening and completing the concrete in the possible
shortest periods. He should also exert special effort to avoid all the delays.
Contractor should provide enough vibrator equipments to start the works of
compacting and strengthening after casting the concrete; moreover, keeping the
rate of compacting and strengthening the concrete at the hard sites.

It should also be provided, one reserve vibrator unit for each two used units of
them. All the reserve units should be ready and available at the workplace and
it should be tested and operated in every day the works of casting the concrete
progress at.
The connecting surfaces should be made by the sand blasting or cleaning by
high-pressure water before casting the concrete, also filling the conic tensile
holes as fast as possible after removing the moulds
According to the engineer's opinion, if the speed or temperature of the
environment, dust, sand that come with the wind, rain or any assemble between
any of these factors became excessive in intensity in which may harm the
concrete or casting it, he may stop casting the concrete until the prevailing
climate get better.
Concrete samples that are taken for testing should be handled and treated
immediately, also making the tests and taking the samples without any delay.
In addition, the samples should be protected from the sun, wind and the dry air
and doing the best to keep a regular temperature and humidity for the tests'
samples.
Contractor should provide and keep the temperature standards ad write down
the temperatures of the mixture, cement, the mixture water and the concrete
that is newly mixed, also the temperature of the air under the shadow and its
relative humidity for each of the mixture units and the moulds during casting
and treating the concrete by moisture.
6.63. Re-making the defective works:
Contractor should remove then re-make any structural parts from the work or
any part of it that shows, in the engineer's opinion; either before or after
removing the concrete, that the concrete was defective during casting or that it
is not properly cast, not flattened enough inside the moulds. Also, some of the
reinforcement bars are lost, wrongly fixed or moved from its place or the
concrete that is cast is not treat enough. He should also remove that shows any
defect or harm for any reason whatever its type was, and that may affect badly
on the strength and burden of the structure.
6.64. Water sealing property:
All the concrete structures should be water sealed according to the satisfaction
and conviction of the engineer.
6.65. The liquid mortar that is used in injection:
The cement mortar that is used in injection is made of sulfate resistant Portland
cement according to the specifications by the least approved amount of the
added water to get the required liquidity level.
It is not allowed adding sand or the other materials to the cement mortar that is
used in fixing the bolts, etc. in which a sufficient approved amount of sand and
additive materials free from chloride are added to reduce the shrink.

6.66. Mortar:
Cement that is used for mortar is of the sulfate resistant Portland cement type,
unless otherwise is provided. In addition, the sand of the mortar should be in
conformity with the British specifications (BS 1200) with limits from the
chloride and the sulfate as specified to the soft aggregate of the concrete.
6.67. Finishing the ground by granolithic concrete:
The following paragraphs and schedules consider three formats of the methods
of the floor finishing by granolithic concrete, which are: The consolidated and
unconsolidated Monolithic structure. The table below states the minimum and
maximum thicknesses and the spacing dimensions that should be applied.
Structure
Thickness
The Spacing
mm
Maximum Standard
The consolidated
Monolithic:
For floor and stairs

10 25 as maximum
40 as minimum
20 as minimum

Stairs and its


existing part

Square Meter
30 for concrete by
thickness 150 mm
15 for concrete by
thickness 100 mm
15 without
exceeding

The moulds are used


1.5 x width
The stairs and its
existing part
Mould are used
The unconsolidated

15 as minimum
Up to 75

The spacing divisions should pass through the thickness of the granolithic
layers and it should be in conformity with the expansion structural joints.
Contractor should for structural concrete floors that suit the granolithic layers
that are mentioned in the schedule above as necessary for each applying in
which guarantee finishing the surfaces in right slope and level.
Preference should be given for forming a basic concrete for the slopes to make
the layers with regular thickness.
It is preferable using Monolithic layers on the basic concrete that on the floor.
The granolithic concrete should be cast within three hours (or least in the hot
temperature) to let the granolithic layer take its position before the concrete
solidification, otherwise such structure will not considered Monolithic.
The consolidated granolithic finish of the floor is formed on a solidified based
concrete, in other words, on hanged concrete floors.
The maximum coherent is obtained through a mechanical roughing for the
concrete surface, moisture it and leaving it for one night followed by fine-shape
mortar of cement free from sand. Such cement is spread on it and followed

immediately with the mixture of the granolithic layer before the mortar
solidification
It is allowed using coherent materials of certified trademark instead of the fineshape cement mortar without leniency with the other precautions.
The granolithic layer will be considered of the incoherent type when it is cast
on separating films, humidity resistant films and concrete that is previously cast
and couldn't be roughed mechanically.
The defect of "warping" is avoided by being sure that the layer is cast with total
thickness by 75 mm on two separated layers in which the period between the
first casting and the second one does not exceed one hour in addition to
guarantee all the other considerations.
The thickness of the flattened first layer should be 35 mm before casting the
second layer to get the full-flattened thickness.
The mixture of the two layers should be similar and have the same proportion
of the cement and water.
After finishing the layer flattening and flooring, its surface should be planed by
the trowel and following this by another plane after two hours to lock the ends
and the tiny bores. It is not allowed making another plane until the layer
surface is solidified enough to get a solid flattened surface without making any
concrete film.
The layer should be kept moisture as long as possible to delay starting the
shrink until it is solidified enough to bear the strains that resulting from the
shrink.
The cast should be covered by a cover of the polyethylene
The mixture of the granolithic concrete should be constituted of the following
proportions 1:1:2 size of the cement: soft aggregate: rough aggregate
considering small adjustments to expand the sand size.
The aggregate should be according to the materials' department of these
specifications and the British standards 1202, the second chapter (meter). The
following tables also should be according to the British specifications 1201. It
is allowed constituting a mixture of the soft aggregate and the rough or mixed
normal aggregate according to the engineer approval.
Table 1 - The Rough Aggregate
Tests Sieves
The Proportion by Weight for
BS 410 mm
What Passing through the
Sieve, BS
14
100
10
85 100
5
0 25
2.36
0-5
The soft aggregate grading is within the limits of one of the two ranges that are
mentioned in the table 2. However, it allowed using total variance up to 5%
with the proportions that marked by the (*) star.

Such variance may be divided: for example, it may be 1% for each one of three
sieves, while it may be 2% for the other sieve, or 4% for one of the sieves and
1% for another sieve.
Table 2 The Soft Aggregate
# Tests Sieves
Proportion of What Passing
BS 410
though the Sieves BS
MM
Grading
Grading
Range 2
Range 1
100
100
10
90-100
90-100
5
60-95*
75-100*
2.36
30-70
*55-90*
1.18
Micron
15-34
35-10
600
5-20*
8-30*
300
0-10
0-10
150
# British Standards (B.S) no. 410, "Tests Sieves"

Chapter VI
Structural iron works
7-1
General
7-1-1 Scope of Work
This chapter includes the specifications of materials used in various types of
structural steel works, which can be used in connection with this contract.
7-2 diagrams
The structural steel works, which form part of the contract diagrams, showing
the general details for the execution of the work. The contractor must prepare
his executive diagrams to include all Connection and offer these stated
diagrams and designs to the Engineer for audit and approval.
7-3 Materials
All structural steel works must become identical with requirements of the
British standards BS 4360 Grade 43A.
All the steel with high flexibility must be of fusion welding type, which
corresponds to BS4360 Grade 50 B.
Steel of Fixing screws and nuts must have tensile strength not less than 392
N/mm2, resistance of extreme flexibility not less than 250 N/mm2, and
minimum elongation19 percent, except in the case of holding and severe
friction nails (High Strength grip) because it must correspond to BS 4395 .the
holding nails must be of type indicates the load.
The mild Steel and high tensile electrodes must correspond to requirements of
BS 639. Fixing screws and the parts of spiral gears must be galvanized with
zinc.

7-4 Metal surfaces


The prior galvanizing slab of metal surfaces must be of steel its thickness 0.7
mm of corrugated and Stud sheet sits dimensions almost 60mm 150 mm so as
to be able to extension for the distance of 1200mm with raft of 1.1 KN /m2and
ready to receive the system of an isolated and complex roof as stated in chapter
of buildings works.
Slab of surfaces must extend from the roof cornices to the roof's
top Line of
intersection, the terminal overlays be placed on transom, and a minimum of
overlay must be 320mm. The Lateral overlays must be installed so as to the
front end is away from the prevailing wind and be installed with one peak.

The panels must install by using self- spiral screws caliber 14 of Carbon
Almtalaeadiom Steel and Imports with integrated Fixation Imports with screws,
compressible, and made of Neoprene. (The contractor must take into account
the coated and resistance to chemicals installation parts in the building of
chlorination. Screws must install at each low point on the extension of every
transom at the roof cornices and the roof's top Line of intersection and in the
other places, one screw is installed at low point and leave the other, and so
alternately on the extension of every transom.
The Lateral overlays must install strongly with the use of Choked rivets with
the distance of 450 mm from the center to the center.
All overlays must be closed with the Sealing and Plastic ribbons or approved
and similar seal.
==307==
Water and electricity ministry, water facility in Ha'el zone, technical affaires __
the supporting and completion project (the first stage), which belong to the
overall project of villages' water in Ha'el zone

The eighth chapter


The roads and works of the site
8-1 General:
8-1-1 The work scope:
This chapter relates to the roads and works specifications, the used materials in
the various layers of the roads, the paving of the various layers, the flatting and
leveling progress, the experiments which belong to every layer, and the
allowed discrepancies, all of that are covered included in this chapter.
8-2 The establish/implement of crosswalk
To fully flat the formation of the crosswalks, straighten any hole, exchange any
soft soil with approved granular material, and then flat the formation.
To pave a layer this, is under the basis, with approved granular wrecked
materials, and to flat this layer with thickness 75mm.
The crosswalks, which is made from slabs or the pre-cost concrete slabs, it is
should to make layer at the rate of 1:3 to the mortar with thickness 50mm, on
the layer that is under the flattened basis. And it will be formed according to
the required slopes and ratio.
To install every slab on the layer, where the slabs are strictly stabilized to be
contiguous slabs on the same flat surface, to inject the links with the cement,
and to leave the site in a clean condition.

8-3 Roads establishment:


8-3-1 General:
To test sample from the soil of basis layer to know the content of the estimated
maximum moisture for the basis layer, and all of that to define the value of
"CBR" to the basis layer.
The value of "CBR" to the basis layer is 25%, and it may be increase. So the
roads paving should consist of basis layer with minimum thickness 150mm, in
addition to flexible paving.
And the value of "CBR" to the basis layer shall be minimum 20%; therefore it
should to pave a layer, which will be under the basis with minimum thickness
150mm.
(307)
Water and electricity ministry, water facility in Ha'el zone, technical affaires __
the supporting and completion project (the first stage), which belong to the
overall project of villages' water in Ha'el zone
After finishing of the digging, it is shall to clean the formation and purify it
from any loose or bad material. In the case of that, there is loose blots, it is
shall to be prepared it at the required level, by high-quality filling up. Then, it

is shall to prepare and prune the formation level according to the stripes of the
required containers. And to flat it until, the required concentration with
minimum 95% of the maximal dry concentration is achieved. It has been
reached by the ASHTO rate test.
Therefore, any filling up, that is required to raise the formation level, should to
be from high-quality filling material, as described in item 3-13.
8-3-2 The material of the layer that is under the basis:
The material of the layer that is under the basis should to include natural sand
and shingle or crushed rock, and the material should to be with good gradient
and to be within the following gradient limits:
The sieve size according to the British The ratio of the passing from the sieve
specifications
(weight)
75 mm (3)inch
100
37,5 mm (1.5)inch
85-100
10 mm (3-8)inch
100-45
5 mm (3-16)inch
85-25
600 micron (no. 25)
45-8
75 micron (no. 200)
10-0
To define the part size, according to the requirements BS 1377.
The size of the passing material from the sieve is 425 micron, according to the
British standards. And when this material has been tested according to the
standards BS 1377, it should to have minimum 6 evidences.
(308)
In addition that, the material of the layer that is under the basis should to be
identical with the mentioned gradients above, and to have value about 30% of
CBR. And that after the immersion process for 90 hour with ratio 90% of the
maximal concentration (ASHTO rate)
8-3-3 the basis layer material:
The basis layer material should to include crushed rock, and the material shall
to meet good gradient and to be within the following gradient limits:The sieve size according to the British The ratio of the passing from the sieve
specifications
(weight)
75 mm (3)inch
100
37,5 mm (1.5)inch
85-100
10 mm (3-8)inch
100-45
5 mm (3-16)inch
85-25
600 micron (no. 25)
45-8
75 micron (no. 200)
10-0
To define the part size, according to the requirements BS 1377.
The size of the passing material from the sieve is 425 micron, according to the
British standards. And when this material has been tested according to the
standards BS 1377, it shall not to have.

In addition that, the basis layer material should to be identical with the
mentioned gradients above, and to have value about 80% of CBR. And that
after the immersion process for 96 hour with ratio 90% of the maximal
concentration (ASHTO rate).
(309)

==310==
Before the processes begin at least 30 days, the contractor should submit to the
representative engineer a full written statement, which is about the quality, the
validity and site of the ingots that will be used for the main layers.
Before the paving and the flatting are made, all materials of the main layers
shall be examined by the engineer. Where the central mixing laboratory is used,
it is necessary to take a symbol from the material for the approval, directly after
the mixing process in the laboratory. When the mixing process is made on the
base of the road, the symbols shall be taken from the common storage of every
layer, and that's shall be before they are paved. The approval of the material
doesn't mean that the layer that under the foundation is approved fully.
8-3-4 the putting of the main layer:
The material of the layer should be imported to the base of road as a
homogenous mixture. It is put to the prepared surface of the layers that finally
is rammed layer that its thickness is maximum 150mm. Further, this thickness
may be difficult because of the defined thickness. So the engineer can request
to reduce this thickness. The material should be flatten by gravel pavers or any
other approved means to be regular layers. The material should be handled to
avoid the separation of granules. It is necessary to avoid and stop the ways or
equipment that causes the separation of granules. Furthermore every material
that causes the separation of granules should be replaced by suitable material.
The contractor should arrange the work, in order to achieve enough the strength
and the fixture, before the material of the adhesive layer is transferred. Every
layer should be treated sufficiently, in order to allow the next layer linked.
8-35 the mixing and treatment process of the material:
If it is necessary, the mixture and treatment process of the material should be
made in the central treat laboratory.
(310)
He engineer can allow making the mixture on the road base, if he is convinced
that this way provides homogeneous material for the main layers. Where this
mixture made, the martials should be put in various storages and to be mixed
by approved means on the road base.
8-3-6 the squash and flatting:
After every layer has been put, it is necessary to be fatted immediately by
(hooves of sheep), masher with pneumatic frames, vibrated mashers, or any

group of these three types. That's made, until the layer will be fully flatted and
homogeneous, according to the defined thickness.
After the flatting has been finished, the flatting thickness of the main layer
shouldn't be less than 100% of the AASHTO thickness, and the flatting
thickness of the layer that is under the min layer, should be 95% of the
AASHTO thickness.

8-3-7 the water addition:


The flatting should be implemented, when the material have moisture such +2%. If the martial need more moisture, it is necessary to add enough water in
order to achieve the suitable moisture, that's shall be after the material is
flatten.
The material shouldn't be moistened, when it is gathered or in storages.

8-3-8 the flatting tests:


After the flatting is implemented, every layer shall be tested in order to define
the field thickness of the base layers. The field thickness shall be defined in
according with A ASHTO T.191. Further, the thickness should be adjusted in
order to compensate the size and weight of the gravel, which is more than the
used gravel in the test of the flatting check.
(311)
It is necessary to make an experiment at least for every 200m2 of the surface of
layer, which is under the foundation or the main layer.

8-3-9 the trial squash:


The final layer should subject to trial squash by steel masher with three wheels
or steel masher with double axis that its weight is 12-14 ton. The flatting
process should be accompanied by paving process, which is approved by the
engineer, In order to achieve smooth surface with suitable cross-sections and a
suitable level of the high road in the curved area.
The trial squash should be implemented in presence of the engineer.
Furthermore, if there are any explored points in the trial squash process should
be maintained in order to be approved by the engineer.

8-3-10 the available variance:


Before the asphalted paving is implemented, the final surface of the main layer
should be examined and approved by the engineer. The surface shall not be
approved until the deviation level and surface smooth has 10mm in the level in
according with the defined level.
The conductor should maintain all pockets, droppings, holes, outstands, or
other damages, he can do that by removing the damaged work or adding a new
material in according to the engineer's guidelines. Then, all ends, slops of the
ends etc. should be pruned and equalized in according to the charts. All
works should be perfect.

8-3-11 the maintenance of the main layer:


The contractor should maintain the achieved main layer until it is covered by
the surface layer. This maintenance contains the clear and the flatting. The
surface should be free of any damages; it should be squashed, and sprayed by
the water. If there is any water on the surface should be removed. Further the
fallings of the main layers, which is made by the filling up of the lower pipes
retrenches, should be maintained in according with the available and accepted
disparities that is mentioned above. The contractor shall not be delegated for
any requirements
(312)
In order to compensate the work maintenance, this is mentioned in the
implement of the layer that is under the foundation or the min foundation.

8-3-12 the mixture of the asphalted cement for the main layer
and the surface layer:
The flexible asphalted cement should be consisted of two layers, the first one is
the main layer and its thickness isn't less than 50mm, and the second one is the
final layer and its thickness isn't less than 70mm respectively. These layers
should be from the squashed asphalt which is according with BS 594 that is put
as the single high surface layer.
The material should be set on gravel which has various sizes and hard bitumen
in according with the following schedule:
The size of the sifter
The percentage of passing through the
sifter
28mm (1) inch
100
20mm 1/2 inch
90-100
10mm 8/3 inch
66-80
5mm 16/3 inch
37-65
2.36mm (no.7)
30-50
1.28mm (no.14)
30-46
60 micron (no.25)
30-42
300 micron (no.52)
24-35
212 micron (no.72)
16-27
150 micron (no. 100)
10-12
75 micron (no.200)
9.5-5.5
The level of firmness by Marshal way
340 K.G
in the minimum level.
The flow value by the Marshal way
2-6.0 mm
The air spaces in the mixture
4 to 10 %
(313)
The size of the sifter
The percentage of passing through the
sifter
60/70% bitumen
0.3- 5.5
Between 1 and 1.5
The batting/ the percentage of the
bitumen

The thickness of the flatting layer


The value of the sandy equivalent for
the common gravel
The value of the smashed gravel
(BS12: 1963)

32 to 65 mm
45 minimum
30%

The harsh gravel (harsher than sifter, it size 2.3mm) may be from the smashed
gravel or rocks. The smooth gravel (is harsher than the natural sand, the smooth
materials which is resulted from the Brocken rocks or the mashed materials
75 micron in according with sifter that its size is 2.36, according to the
British standards) (is softer than the sifter no.200 in according with the British
standards) may be from cement or the dust of limestone.
The bitumen should be 60/70.
The contractor can suggest other mixtures in order to examine and approve it, if
it is approved that its usage ensures the successful on other projects in the
KSA.
(314)
Before the asphalt shall be paved, the adhesive layer of the emulsified bitumen
which is in according with class k 1-40 or BS434 a1 40 and with regular rate
0.35 to 0.55 to /m2. The emulsion couldn't full the spaces; it should be kept,
before the asphalt is put. The adhesive emulsified layer may be covered by
light layer of the gravel, which is covered by bitumen or the high surface
bitumen layer, in order to not gather any cement.
After the surface, which is put on it the asphalt, has been cleaned, the mixture
should be put by automatic and mechanical spraying machine (flatter).
The engineer or the representative can approve two machines, which can make
the paving with the required width, the linear slop and the camber, or the
adventitious fall. That's shall happen without separation of pimples, erosion,
burning, the other surface failures or the malformations. Further, they shall
operate in fixed speed. The mixture and the thickness of the layer shall be
flatted, so they result a regular thickness, structure and surface. The paving
machine (flatter) could be operate in the rate, which allows the continuous
paving in according with the circumstances of the site and incoming.
The layer should be arranged in order to achieve the final and required
thickness after the squash process has been made. After the paving of every
layer has been done directly, the surface should be examined, before the squash
process shall be done. All damages and malformations in the road, the slope, or
the structure of the surface, shall be maintained. Furthermore, the material shall
be removed.
(115)
The asphalt shall be flattening, when the squash process is done. That's shall be
happened without unnecessary remove for the mix material, it is will be in a

temperature which isn't less than 135c (the temperature of the bitumen
penetration 60/70).
The asphalt should be flattened regularly by masher with steel soft wheels that
its weight isn't less than 8 ton. The width of the back wheel of the masher isn't
less than 450mm. the back horizontal unit strength of the wheel should not be
less than 52 newton / mm.
The masher should have the property of returning to back easily.
The longitudinal regularity of the surface layers isn't more than the maximum
fall ,according to the standard of 3 meter which are put parallel with the axis of
the road about 5 meter.
The instruction of the speed reducer should be formed in the asphalt. It shall be
contain flexible curved outstand; its length is 100mm, and its width is 1.7m.

8-4 the beautifying works of the site:


The fillings up should be formed by layers which its thickness is 300mm, in
order to reduce regular slops, to achieve the lowest possible slop for every site
or according to the instructions in the site. Any slop line should not avoid
percentage of (1) shakily/ vertical (2) horizontal. Every line should be flattened
and paved separately, before the following layer shall be put, and that will be
happened by the chosen filling up material. The work should be separated to
parts in order to be suitable.
The conductor should be implement the beautifying works of the site for every
suitable separated part or what he shall be guided to. That's shall be after the
engineering civil works is done, and the sits become empty. After all works
have finished, the site should be empty from all excess materials and trash.

8-5 the external cornice carmine flags:


(316)
The external cornice carmine flags shall be implemented by the cross-section
which is indicated in the charts. The engineer should approve to the steel flags
of the paving, before they are put. Furthermore, the requited light should be
implemented for all pavements and roads, in according with the typical
specifications, for the lighting of the roads and attached streets. The normal
concrete and the sand shall be in according with the chapters which contains
these specifications.

8-6 the cultivation of the plants:


The important plants should be adapted to the hard circumstances of the site for
the suitable period of the plants and seasons, and that's done, before the plants
are planted.
The plants should have the right name. So, every plant in every group should
have label which has the name and the size of the plan, in according to the
standards of the private practice in the American association for the plant
breeder. Anyway, the names of the plants are preferred to the common names.
The trees, palms and small bushes should have the properties of the typical
growing and groups for these plants. These plants should be have new

branches, straight trunk, harmonious branches and main right branch that is cut
from the low at least only one time in the nursery.
The palm trees should have an active truck, a crown of the new leaves, suitable
color for the leaves of the palms, and enough strength. The length of the palms
should be measured from the land level of the nursery to the base of the first
scorch. The palms should be imported, and their truck covered by the soil and
twisted by the sacking, but the imported trees could be imported with
uncovered trucks.

8-7 the agriculture soil:


The agriculture soil of the growing process should contain the following
elements, which is fully mixed by the manures, as percentages for the size, as
the following:
75%
sand
(317)
10%
the khath alga of the Saudi perliat
for the
gardening works
10%
the khath alga (malky or the golden khath alga)
5%
raw manure + 1.5 K.G of NPK/m3 nitrate of the potassium
phosphate.
The palms, trees and the small bushes should contain at least 10% of
phosphoric acid, 3%-5% of the full nitrogen, and 3% - 5% of soluble
potassium.
The morog should be ensured at least by 4% of phosphoric acid and at least 2%
of potassium. The required percentage of the potassium should contain at least
0.5 K.G of the nitrogen for every 100m2 of the planted surface with marg. The
nitrogen should be available to the marg during the initial growing period.

8-8 the gravel that is paved on the land:


The gravel that is paved on the land should be hard eroded type by the water; it
should be free from loam, sand, mud and the other stranger materials. It shall
be with the following color and size:
The size scope (gravel)38mm maximum
20mm minimum
The size scope (granular gravel)
9mm maximum
3mm minimum

8-9 the blackening fences/ the external fences:


The blackening fences / the external fences should be in according to the
indicated points on the charts.
(318)
==319==
==322==

Chapter nine
The building works
9.1. General
9.1.1. Work scope:
This section covers the specifications of the different materials/components
that will be used in the building works, also fixing/extending it and the external
finishing for the purpose of this contract. All the building works should be
made according to these specifications.
9.2. The walls of the concrete block:
The walls of the concrete block that is like the shape of the coverage plates on
the concrete structure should not be used as a basic structural element except
the very special cases.
The works of the concrete blocks should be made according to its dimensions
on the charts. It is built by mortar within the structural construction.
The works of the concrete block should be implemented regularly in which no
part get higher over another part by more than (1) meter at the same time.
The works of the concrete block should be built by using the tensile tie of the
blocks.
The blocks should have a surface of open (rough) structure to provide the right
concrete requirement for putting the cover coating. It should have the low
absorbance properties to reduce the early dry.
The blocks should be set with standard size, thicknesses and the requirements
that are stated in details on the charts. It should also be solid and have a
minimum of the breaking resistance by at least 5 Newton/mm. The
reinforcement iron of the concrete blocks works should be of the galvanized
expansion metal.
All the walls of the concrete block that have the shape of interrupters from both
of the two sides on the concrete structure should be tied by anchor units that are
geared with each other.
The geared metal tie plates, the geared metal strengthening networks and the
anchors of he down surface should be all made of the anti-rusting iron or
nonferrous metal, but not Aluminum.
The geared ties should be appeared over the concrete block works by distance
150 mm. The total size should approximately be (200 mm length x 25 mm
width x 2.6 mm thickness).
The holes are by (150 mm length x 0.9 mm thickness). The tools of shaping
the holes are by (150 mm length x 0.9 mm thickness) of the galvanized iron
plates.
Ties of the hollowed walls should be of the couple triangular type and
nonferrous metal. It should also be made according to the specifications
BS1243, and it is put at distance by 900 mm between each one and the other
from the center to the center horizontally.

9.3. Mortar, coating and the thickness concrete:


Sand should be particularly chosen in order to be suitable for the desired
purpose. For example, mortar is for the concrete block works, while the cement
is for the wall coating.
The lime that will be used as a material that be added to the mortar or the wall
coating should be of the anhydrous high lime.
The lime should be supplied in sealed bags and ready to be used.
The water of the mortar, the external coating and the building veneering should
be of a drinkable standard.
Cement should be of the sulfate-resistant Portland type and according to a
certified international standard. The mixtures of the mortar for the hollowed
walls, the single-leaf walls or the interrupters of the concrete block works
should be made of the lime cement.
Sand is by proportion: 1:1:6 with the size. The mortar for the external walls of
the site that is manufactured from the concrete drift block, or the concrete
blocks should be of the lime cement by proportions: 1:2:8 with the size.
The mixture of the external and internal coating should be made of the cement:
lime: sand by proportion 1:1:6 with the size.
The surfaces should be harden and free from the dust, impurities, oil, lubricate,
paint, the crystal deposits, the mould oil, the organism growth such as fungi
and algae, etc. It should be cleaned by an alcoholic wash then cleaned by water
where necessary.
Coatings should not connect between the structural expansion joints, the
humidity-insulating layers or the joints between the dissimilar materials.
The surfaces should be whitened with a layer of thickness by 5 mm as
maximum by rough trowel to make the surface of the block works; waterproof.
The concrete fences of the surfaces should not be painted. Coating on the
neighboring materials should be finished to get a right line for the surface as
the status is.
Sights such as the rain drain grooves, the windows tires moldings for
preventing the water should not be obliterated or eradicating its effective
through coating it.
9.4. Finishing the external ornamental wall:
Finishing the walls that are of the Tyrolean type should consist of the Portland
cement with the sand of the special grading for achieving open-structure and
surface nested finishing that could not be scraped or absorb the water quickly.
The walls surface should be dry and clean in addition to fixing the defected
areas.
Aluminum and alloys should be kept clean.
The defects should be fixed and the single ornamented finishing layer should
be put; all according to the instructions of the manufacturing board.
9.5.The walls tiles
The vitrified ceramic tiles of the walls should be of square shape.

Coating should be left until getting dry before starting installing the tiles. The
coating surface should be soft.
The tiles should be fixed while it is dry. The adhesive should be put of
thickness by 3mm and it should not be used for flattening the surfaces
adjustment.
The white cement that is produced from the specialist company and that is
mixed with water should be injected until it becomes heavy putty between the
joints. It is also finished in which it is produced with straight lines.
The expansive (kinetic) joints between the tiles should be provided to be in
conformity with the structural joints that straightly extend through the wall at
distance 3 4.5 m between the one and the other either through the vertical
extension or the horizontal.
9.6. The unpolished ceramic tiles for the floors:
The vitrified ceramic tiles of the floors should be by measure 152 mm x 152
mm, and thickness by 12.5mm.
The hollow compatibility tiles should be of height by 100 mm in minimum.
Also, the external and internal angled compatibility tiles.
The chemicals-resistant injection material and the materials of the extension
joints should be provided in the tiled areas, as it may be exposed to a possible
casualty as in the chlorine buildings.
The concrete ground that the thickness concrete will be put on should be free
from the big distortions and completely dry.
The thickness concrete that will be put should be of the half-dry mixture by one
thickness that is approximately minimum 25 mm and maximum 65 mm. one
(1) part of the cement to four (4) parts of the sand with the size should be
mixed with the water until getting easy-cracking structure.
An adhesive material of a cement foundation should be spread on the thickness
concrete.
The tiles should be tightly fixed through beating on it to stay in the thinstructure mixture and getting a right flattened surface. It should be left;
separators by 3 mm between the tiles for injection by the cement.
9.7. Terrazzo tile:
The Terrazzo tile that has been previously cast should consist of concrete that
is hydraulically pressed with the marble aggregate that fixed in the colorful or
white connection mixture. The tiles are of square shape with flattening top
surfaces of rectangle width sector and size by 225 mm x 225 mm x 22.2 mm
thickness. It should also be from recorded production of specialist factory. It
should include suitable Terrazzo tile for the striking of the walls from the
down.
The Terrazzo tile is installed in the same way that the vitrified ceramic tile was
installed with making the adjustment when necessary to guarantee not lowering
the concrete thickness of the bed by 16 mm 19 mm ever.
Each movement away from the tile area should be prohibited until the final
solidification in the installed tiles happen.

9.8. The extension joints in the floors tile:


The depth of the extension joints should extent from the tile surface to the
down of the bed concrete. The extension joint should be put around the external
periphery of the floor between the hallowed tile and the first row of the floor
tile, also around all the external moldings, the big pipes and the floors
obstructions. In addition, the medium extension joints should be put at distance
by 3.5 m to 4 m between the one, while the other is measured in two directions
by right angle and extended in which shape a suitable sample within each
floors area.
All the surrounding extension joints should be of width by 12 mm, while the
medium extension joints by 6 mm.
Either the extension joints are filled with the cork tapes that are connected by
the complete resin during the work progress, or partly filled with block tapes of
the polyethylene foam that is above it until the surface level of depth by 10 mm
silicon putter. The work should be preciously and cleanly finished, also
flattening with the floor surface.
9.9. Fixing the ceramic tile directly on the concrete:
Once the tile is directly put on the concrete surface, the concrete membrane
should be completely removed from the concrete. The tile is fixed by using an
adhesive material that is of special cement foundation.
9.10. Separation slices/tapes between the floors:
When the surface finishing change from a material to another at the doors
holes, the copper division slices/tapes should be provided of width by 25 m and
thickness by 3 m at the tile finishing.
9.11. Finishing the floors by the chemicals-resistant epoxy:
For treating the insulating material and the floors surface by the epoxy, kindly
return back to the specifications, charts and the amounts schedules.
9.12. Finishing the ceil, the concrete surface tile:
The thickness concrete of the concrete structural surfaces tiles should be sloped
in order not allowing the rains to shape the water pools.
The water insulating layer should be of a registered trademark that is certified
and manufactured to be used in the hot weathers. It should also be able to bear
the cracks of the concrete surface until cracks of width by 0.6 mm in the
minimum. It should consist of flexible PVC plates of thickness by 0.3 mm in
the minimum which an elastic bituminous component is flatten above it in
which its minimum thickness is 1.5 mm. The foundation material of the
concrete surface should be produced by the same manufacturing company.
The whole ceil and the surface protective walls angles should be provided with
salient foil of the PVC in which its dimensions are 40 mm x 40 mm of
triangular-shape block. It should also be previously manufactured and of wall
thickness by 5 mm; moreover, it is manufactured from a special type of the

materials and shaped to be used under the hot weather. It is also supplied from
the company that manufactures waterproof insulation membrane.
The insulation layers should be above the waterproof insulating layer
membrane, also of the expansive polyethylene foam of thickness by 50 mm. It
is also of the holes-locked type that is manufactured through the extrusion
process. The proportion of the water absorbance in it is 0.1%, 32 Kg/m3. It is
made as harden flatten plates which loosely extend without fixing with dry butt
joints.
The plate tiles of tying the ceilings should be of dimensions by 600 mm x 600
mm x 50 mm thickness. The complementary compatibility pieces should be cut
in the necessary sizes and in intensive environment. It should be loosely extend
with opened joints.
The cement of the plate tiles should be made according to SAS 143. The rough
and soft aggregate should consist of broken or unbroken natural material.
The necessary aggregate for completing the paved area on the ceiling in which
the plate tiles cutting is unpractical; it should not pass through a sieve of size
15 mm. It should also be free from any sand or soft materials.
The workplace should be cleaned from the sand, dust and the undesired
materials before putting the preparatory layer that should be extended on the
surface by the brush, but not casting it. Care should be paid to guarantee that
the preparatory layer will not be shaped as pools.
A layer of width 300 mm from the self-adhesion material insulating membrane
at the middle along the angle should be put on all the vertical and horizontal
internal angles, before putting the membrane layer.
The membrane should be extended in the specified workplaces through
removing the protective covering, when dismantling the material and pressing
it on the surface in order not to retrain any air under it. All the joints should
interfere with each other by 150 mm, and pressed by a heavy roller of elastic
tires (or its equivalent) to guarantee the continuous adhesion and nonpenetrating to the water.
The steel legs should be implemented at the joint in the back structure as stated
on the charts through filling the joint with special block material of thickness
25 mm with blocking the joint terminal by the polyethylene sulfide putter.
The workplaces should be prepared in which the insulating extension is
achieved and the plate tiles are installed immediately after achieving each part
of the membrane. The membrane should not expose to the field movement or
be left uncovered for more than many years.
The uncovered membrane should be covered at the rain drain holes with a
protective layer of a special registered trademark that is manufactured for the
permanent exposure to the weather conditions.
19.3. Finishing the ceiling: The metal surface tile:
The ceiling tile should be of the longitude metal plates type that are previously
galvanized and mechanically fixed on the supported structure.
Vapor carrier that is strengthened by the bitumen according to BS 747 should
be adhered on the tile by imprecations 50 mm through using the hot oxidized

bitumen according to BS 3940, Grade 115/5, Type B with blocking and sealing
the imprecations.
The thermal insulation should be of thickness by 35 mm of the polyurethane
that is previously covered with the tanned felt on the humidity-preventive in the
hot bitumen by no less than 1.5 kg/m2.
The first layer of the waterproof insulating membrane should be shaped of the
ventilation foundation plate according to BS 747, Type 3 G. The grained flatten
is put toward the down and synchronically fixed on the insulating plate with the
second layer on the coverage with foundation of the glassy fiber according to
BS 747, Type 3 B.
Third layer, of the coverage that is of the metal surface and strengthen by
polyester that has nominal weight by 30 Kg/10 m2, follow the second one. All
the imbrications should be extended parallel with the ceilings slopes, while the
joints are installed through the interference on the disconformity in which the
side imbrications are by 50 mm and the terminal by 75 mm.
Lists of the protective wall for the metal ceilings and the rain drain holes
should be painted by a preparatory layer of the bitumen by no less than 0.5
Liter/m2. A layer of covering by the glassy fibers should be spread according
to BS Type 3B separately by using the hot bitumen by 1.5 Kg/m2 then
followed by a layer of the covering of the metal surface that is strengthen by
the polyester by 30 Kg/10 m2.
Imbrication toward the workplace should not be less than 75 mm. When
finishing, it should be mechanically fixed at the top.
In all the other sides, using the material should be in conformity with the
British standard system (code) for the practice no. 144, part (1), the layers of
the ceilings coverage, the compound bitumen felt.
9.14. Aluminum windows
The windows units should be made of parts of the aluminum that is shaped by
the extrusion that is in conformity with the standards of SAS and treated by the
anode by thickness 25 Micron.
The movable windows should include external thin window that is insectspreventive and prepared for preventing the insects from entering. The windows
are generally manufactured to be suitable for using in the hot weathers.
Frames should be collected by the manufacturing company. The joints are
machinery and accurately manufactured, mechanically collected and blocked
by insulating-preventive. The weld flatten joints should be soft in its surface
and in the faces which the glass is installed on. The deviation of the mechanical
flatten joints is at the same level only within the variance limits of the extrusion
according to SAS 79.
All the hardware should be supplied from the manufacturing company to
control each sloping plate and its locker including cylinder locking to
determine the maximum extent of the security.
All the aluminum should be treated by the anode until getting thickness by 25
Micron.

The collars and the components of fixing the windows glass should be of
materials that are in conformity with the aluminum and the accompanied
materials. The heads of the compatibility for the aluminum windows glass
should stay in paths for the complete tire in which such heads and the tire shape
box-sector.
==332==
The windows should be easily replaced without the need to dismantle the
external main tire.
The executive charts that are prepared by the manufacturing company should
be provided for the approval and agreement before starting the manufacturing.
9.15. Fixing the aluminum windows and its glass:
The aluminum tires should be fixed in an accurate and right angle, equipped it
with keys and fixing it with bolts that are put at 150 mm from the angles of the
windows unit and at distances that do not exceed 600 m between the one and
the other.
The thickness of the glass should be chosen from the data that the
manufacturing company provides to suit the areas, shapes and the windows
loads as suitable for each use, considering the necessary of keeping the material
unit and the thickness as possible.
The coupled glass plates and the anti-sun glass should be provided as stated on
the charts and schedules. The glass should be free from the defects and have
parallel flatten surfaces. The minimum thickness should not be less than 4 m.
The glass plates should be accurately cut with the required size and square
angle. The allowable variances in the two sides; the forehead and the back sides
should be enough in which allow putting the collars or the insulating materials
and the blocks. The clearance is by 3 mm for the plates that reach to 4 m2, 6
m2 and 6 mm for the plates that reach to 8 m2.
9.16. The catcher of the grating sands:
It should be produced by a famous specialist manufacturer company and
manufactured to suit the sizes of the full holes that are stated in the schedule
and charts.
The executive charts of the manufacturer company should be approved by the
engineer before starting the manufacturing.
The main box-sector of the sands catchers should be installed in the structural
hole without the need to the wood filling of the down structure.
The fixing points of the grating sands catchers should not be away by more
than 150 mm from the angle, also not more than 600 mm from the center.
The insects-preventive sieve barriers that are installed on the internal should be
easily dismantle for the purposes of maintenance or renewal, but it should also
be fixed, tough and tamper-resistant.
The beams of the lattice cover should be extended in one thread from the plate
to the other. It should also has the self-discharge sand drain holes, while the
beams of the catcher that do not exceed 1 meter in its horizontal projection

should be provided with supporting interrupters as necessary. Such interrupters


should be complete with the sand drain channels for keeping the self-discharge
facilities.
The grating sand catchers should be made of the aluminum plates or the
extruded aluminum pieces that are in conformity with SAS 79 and that is
treated by the anode of thickness 25 Micron.
The catchers of the grating sands should be of the flexible aluminum that is
previously painted with chemicals/corrosion-resistant finishing layer. It also
includes the insects-preventive lattice barrier.
9.17. The components of the suspended ceilings (Dropped):
The components of the suspended ceilings (dropped) should be produced by
specialist manufacturer company.
The suspended ceilings should be fixed according to the instructions of the
private manufacturer companies that are subjected to the requirements of these
specifications, charts and the schedules. The senior contractor and/ or his
contractor should sub-consider the necessary of coordinating fixing the ceiling
with the other works.
The ceiling should be similarly implemented in which the equal cut parts fall
on the two opposite sides of the area. The lattice bearings should be
perpendicular with the rooms.
The ring barriers should be fixed on the down of the ceiling tile at distance by
no more than 1200 mm from the centers through bits that are installed during
the casting, or installing in holes that are punched after casting. Fixing by the
shat is not allowed. The solidification of the suspended ceiling should be in a
way that could not be waved or shake when it expose to wind or air currents
that penetrate the room.
The angles covers that will be visible should be put on the external periphery
and on all the holes in which the tile terminals are not covered in another way
through, for example, cutting the light installations.
Tile should be fixed in which it should be right and flatten. The defected or
broken tiles should be removed and replaced.
At the separators, the tiles should be installed in which it should be easily
dismantled and replaced in order to bear working in the services that are in the
ceiling space.
9.18.Woods:
All the woods should be free from the wear factors and the insects. The solid
wood plates of the structural works wood should be free from the core wood
(near to the tree stem), the spots, the black core, the shining Sandal wood
(nearly cut), the wave terminals, etc. It should also be free from any defects
that may reduce its quality to be used.
The woodworking of the wooden installations should be carefully chosen as
suitable for the different purposes that are necessary for it.
All the wood should be sealed or marked from its source to show its type
degree according to an international standard.

All the dimensions of the wood are nominal dimensions. There is allowable
variance by 3 mm for each operated face. Any wood that the engineer deems
that it is not according to the specified type or there was defect appeared in it, it
should be removed and re-collected or replaced by new materials.
The wood of the stays, beams and the blocks supporting and filling, etc. should
be tested by the solid wood Greenheart, unless otherwise is mentioned. It
should be obtained from an accredited supplier.
The wood should be treated by using the suitable protective materials, or AlKorizon (The tar extract) under suitable pressure. Also, when it is required;
making the works of cut, () , digging and all the other works after the
treatment, the bare surfaces should be painted enough with a certified
protective material for the terminal fiber.
The treatment certificate should be provided when it is required. The treated
wood should be stamped or putting colorful marks on it before sending and
shipping it.
The works of the external wood installations (Woodworking) should be treated
on both of the two sides and on the external faces by an ornamented protective
material that is of the absorbed type and does not shape a blur layer on the
wood. Using the varnish or polyurethane on the wood installations works
(woodworking) is not allowed.
The wood that is used in the external wood installations works (woodworking)
that is of the solid wood should be chosen from the following types:
- Iroko (chlrophora excelsa)
- A fromosia (Afromosio elota)
- Opepe (Noucles diderichii)
- The solid wood Greenheart (Ocotoea rodiael)
The solid wood or the wooden scales for the internal wood installations works
(woodworking) that are of the hard wood should be chosen from the following
types:
- Teak (Tectona grandis or Baikiaej)
- Mahagany (K hoyo Spp)
- Padaak (Pterocarpus)
- African Walnut (Lovoa trichiliodes)
- Idigbo (Terminalia ivorensis)
It is not allowed using the Ramin wood, Yellow Meranti wood, or the straight
yellow solid woods that are of the similar fibers.
Finishing the surface for the internal use should be made; either by the shiny
polyurethane or the matt that is polished by the wax as mentioned in the
schedule.
9.19. The glued laminated timber (Plywood):
The glued laminated timber (plywood) that its thickness is more than 10 mm
should not be manufactured in less than five (5) layers. In the dry case, the
thickness of the surface layer should not be more than 3 mm and, also not for
any internal layer by 5 mm.

It should be of the WBP type as mentioned in BS1455, fixed by anti-rust bolts


and nails and manufactured by artificial resin adhesive material. The glued
laminated timber (plywood) that is described as impregnated should be
treated by a protective material.
The wooden scales that will be used should be of the type/degree (1) at the
places where the glued laminated timber is left bare in its natural shape. It is
polished by varnish, otherwise treated in a way that keeps the wood scale
surface visible. In all the other cases, the wooden scales that are of the
type/degree (2) are that should be used.
Each plate should be marked by the name of the manufacturer company, the
type/degree on the two faces; forehead and back and the type of the connecting
material.
9.20. The plates of the collected wooden pieces and the plates of
the laminated grained wood pieces:
The core of the collected wooden pieces plates and the plates of the collected
laminated grained wood pieces should be made of the wood slices that its width
is no more than 25 mm and 7 mm respectively. The wooden scales should
produce a solid surface that is free from the unfilled bores.
The wood plates, the glued laminated timber that is tanned by the resin should
be produced from a certified manufacturer company. Each plate should state
the identification marks and its data.
9.21. The fiber building plates:
The fiber building plates should be made of the wooden cellulose with a weak
connecting material only between the fibers. The adhesive connecting materials
should be added during the manufacturing or after it.
9.22. Doors:
The contractor should provide a detailed door and the schedule of the metal
works to the sites engineer for the approval based on the specifications, charts
and the prepared schedules.
The fire-resistant and the fire-buffer doors, also the accompanied and allowable
materials should be according to the requirements of the concerning boards.
9.23. The wooden frames for the doors:
The wooden frame that is made of the solid wood should be tightly fixed on the
concrete through inserting the keys and the bolts into the bores that are
previously dig and that of the right size also. The keys should be anti-corrosion,
matching with the material that it is in touch with and has special and registered
manufacture.
9.24. The metal frames for the doors:
The metal frames of the metal and wooden doors should be in conformity with
BS 1245. It should also be tightly fixed on the holes that are in the building
walls.

9.25. The aluminum frames for the doors:


The aluminum terminals for the doors should be treated by the anode and of
thickness by 25 Micron. It is also made of similar materials to that are
mentioned under the item of The aluminum windows and matching with the
standards of SAS.
9.26. The wooden doors:
The wooden parts of the structural door that have beams and plates should be
machinery achieved perfectly and accurately. The above heads (barriers) of the
doors should be of dimensions by 150 mm x 57 mm. The down and middle
heads (barriers) of dimensions by 219 mm x 35 mm, while the doors legs are of
dimensions by 125 mm x 57 mm. The stays are of dimensions by 106mm x 35
mm.
The toothed ( ) plates that are of the thickness by 22 mm should have
dimensions of equal width; moreover, connected on the letter (V) shape from
one side in which the width of the plates should not be less than 70 mm and not
more than 114 mm.
The heads (barriers) of the doors should be provided with gearing blades that
are penetrating to the legs. Each gearing blade should be fixed by packing of
the solid wood with putting adhesive material for filling the space for all the
joint faces.
The stays should be shaped to be tightly installed on the legs and heads
(barriers). The plates should be scavenged to the top heads (barriers) and the
legs as stated in the details.
Each plate should be fixed with the nails on the down and middle heads
(barriers) and the stays also by using no less than two nails for each head
(barrier) and one nail for each stay in which such nails are of length by 38 mm
and without head. Such nails are inserted in the down of the surface and put
unlike each other to avoid the long cracks at any parts.
The flat wooden doors should have solid cores for the internal use and of total
thickness by 46 mm approximately. The doors that are of the light weight and
have cores that are of the rolled wood chips are not allowed.
The tire group should consist of machined top head (barrier) of depth by 146
mm (to receive the ties of the door-buffer, a machined down head (barrier of
depth by 95 mm and legs of thickness by 38 mm that are collected together.
In addition, the locker fixing mass should be fixed in which its dimensions are
25 mm x 100 mm in the minimum at the required place and that is stated on the
completed door by a suitable mark.
The up surface of the two sides should consist of a long-fibers layer that is
established by a preparatory layer that is ready to be painted. It may also
consist of transversal-fiber layer that is covered with the scale and ready to be
coated and polished by the varnish as described in the schedule.
Before supplying the wooden doors to the site, it should be painted with at least
one layer of the ornamented protective material of the water or the resin
solution in addition to a preparatory layer as suitable. Knowing, the doors that

will be treated by a protective material should not be painted with the resin or a
preparatory layer.
At the site, doors should be stored under a protective cover and be protected
from the direct sun rays and the high-humidity conditions. Also, accumulating
it above each other to avoid the flexion.
9.27. The adhesive material for the wood:
The adhesive materials that are used for the wood should be made of specialist
registered manufacture. It should also accurately be used according to the
instructions of the manufacturing company for each type.
9.28. Nails:
The nails should be straight and of right shape; moreover, it should be new and
free from the extra oxidation.
9.29. Bolts:
The wood bolts should be penetrant pointed, while its heads are concentric with
the axle. The cracks and curves are clean and free from the extras and pivot
(central) with the head. Unless otherwise is determined, the bolts are of the
head-immersed type. The bolts of the thin plates should be of spiral coupledwheels in which the wheels are of the full length of the bolt stem.
9.30. The metal doors:
The flat hollowed metal doors that special for the external and internal use
should be made of steel coupled external plate of thickness by 1.2 mm with
separators that are of good conformity/ lockers at the head legs.
The internal structure should have cross-ply-terminals iron as a seat structure
for the internal periphery and properly strengthen. The internal hallow should
be filled with insulating material of the metal wool or non-burnable certified
equivalent materials.
Doors should be painted with a preparatory layer in which it should be ready to
be painted at the site.
9.31. The vitrified aluminum doors:
The aluminum doors, the side skylights and the up holes above the doors
should be of similar materials to that are mentioned under "The aluminum
windows and it glass. It should also be in conformity with the standards of
SAS. Coupled-glass units should be provided as an integral part for the doors
and the side skylights as stated on the charts and schedules.
9.32. Fixing the glass plates on the flat doors:
The glass of the holes that are on the flat wooden and metal doors should be
inserted as stated on the schedules and charts. It should be of materials and
fixing pieces as stated on the schedules and charts. It should also be of
materials and suitable fixing pieces for giving clear vision and the conformity
with the required estimations of the fire-resistance.

9.33. The doors equipment:


The doors equipment should be fixed according to the instructions of the
manufacturing company. The concrete withdrawn yellow copper castings
should be of proportion by 60% copper and 40% zinc. It is usually referred as;
either alpha-beta-brass or Muntz metal (casting).
Lockers should be chosen from matching group of high quality products that
are produced from one factory. The cylinder locking system should be of high
security type that the cylinder of its locks are seven (7) bolts, also providing the
ability of opening it with its general key or the main key.
9.34. The doors beams:
Unless otherwise stated, the concrete beams should be of width by 300 mm and
depth by 100 mm for the net extensions that are by 1000 mm to 1800 mm with
minimum terminal load by 150 mm.
The doors beams should be reinforced by two reinforcement bars of size by
T12 at the top and down with R8 joints at distance by 200 from the center to
the other center.
9.35. The roller shutlers doors and the external rotational sloped
doors:The barriers of the movement-lift network doors that are previously galvanized,
electronically operated, the sloped doors and that are in conformity with a
product of good reputation manufacturer company. It is not allowed mixing the
components that are prepared for the different types from the shapes of the
collecting pieces.
The manufacturer company should provide any necessary fixing devices.
Before starting the manufacture or collecting, the contractor should be sure of
that the detailed charts of the manufacturer company are approved by the
engineer.
The roller shutlers and the sliding rolling doors should be installed by the
manufacturer company or specialist certified representative according to the
instructions and requirements of the manufacturer company.
The sidings and the gears devices of the roller shutlers and the sliding rolling
doors should be fixed on the concrete structural frame of the building, not on
the blocking works in any ways.
9.36. Blocking the separators by insulating joints:
When it is necessary for preventing the humidity or avoiding the salient
separators in the building, the separator spaces between the wall blocks should
be blocked by the infiltration-insulating material, Thioflex 600 for the
separators. It is a liquid that is made of many components based on the multisulfates polymer that after mixing and applying it, it is treated to be a hard
insulating and semi-elastic. The treated sealed that distinguish by the excellent
adhesive with almost of the surfaces like the concrete that is coated by the
() , glass, aluminum and the anti-rust iron.

The horizontal and vertical insulating joints that are put between the walls
should absorb from the concrete block and the structural frame; the movement
through increasing the compressible filling that should be blocked by the
concentrated polysulfide insulating.
9.37. Fixings of the interrupters walls heads:
The contractor should install the suitable fixings on the interrupters walls to
securely fix the wall on the ground up-surface. The engineer should approve
the fixing method.
9.38. Blocking the walls bores:
All the wall bores should be filled with the expansive polystyrene by 50 mm, or
by equivalent certified insulating material.
9.39. The humidity-preventive insulating:
All the pave materials should be supplied in sealed and closed containers and
hold the original cards of the manufacturer company. In addition, the cardboard
that are covered with the bitumen should be supplied in rolls according to the
original filling of the manufacturer company.
The other materials should be supplied as provided in under the related items of
these specifications. All the materials should be in conformity with the
specified specifications and that approved by the engineer.
The preparatory coating should be of low-stickiness mixture of the bitumen and
the solvents. When it gets dry, it shaped hard bitumen film of high quality,
Naito prof 100 and matching with the following specifications:
Conformable with BS 1975.3416. Type (1) as bitumen paint for the general
purposes.
Conformable with BS 1975.3416. Type (2) as bitumen paint for the drinking
water tanks.
Conformable with ISTMC 309. The requirements of restraining the water as
treatment membrane.
Conformable with IWWIC 104, section 4.12.
The surfaces that the humidity-preventive insulation should be soft, clean and
dry. The bores, separators and the cracks should be painted in which it becomes
flatten with the mortar, also the level of the high-bores ground with the next
surface.
Before starting the humidity-preventive insulating works, the surfaces should
be cleaned from all the odd materials, examined and approved.
The humidity-preventive insulating should be put as stated on the charts of the
contract.
The humidity-preventive insulating should not be put when the temperature is
under 4 C or lesser. It should be implemented by experienced workers in the
field of putting the humidity-preventive insulating. The humidity-preventive
insulating should be put as stated on the charts.
==345==

==346==
The tenth chapter
The paints
10-1 general
10-1-1 the work scope:
This chapter describes the relayed specifications of the painting works for the
various types of the materials and surfaces, which cover the initial treatment,
the number of the painting layers; it's touching with water/water walls, the
surrounding circumstances and the cleaning after the finish.
10-2 the material:
All used materials should have high quality, be from approved manufacturer,
and they should be used precisely in according to the instruction of the
manufacturer. The changing of the manufacturer can't be done without written
approval by the engineer. If the paints of the manufacturer aren't in line with
the panting specifications, its necessary to submit the recommendations of the
manufactures to the engineer for the approval. Further, the contractor should be
drawn his attention to the danger of the usages of specific paints, when they are
used in limited site.
10-3 the surrounding circumstances:
All surfaces should be dry completely, and be free from any dust. Further, their
temperature should be less than 25o and more than 5o. When the degree of the
humidity is more than 90%or the weather isn't suitable, any painting works
can't be made.
10-4 the painting layers, which touch the drinking water (water walls):
The surfaces, which touch the drinking water, should be covered by the paint
which has net poly urea and the fosroc new cut STZO, which have the
following specifications:
1. The size of the soil material for the size 100%.
2. The tightening strength according to ASTM D-412 4350 PSI
3. The extending strength according to ASTM D-412 430%
4. The stiffness strength according to ASTM (SHORE A) ASTM D-2240
100
5. The stiffness strength according to ASTM (SHORE A) ASTM D-2240
55
6. The successful flexibilitystrength according to 3MM MANDREL
ASTM D-1737

(346)
7. The anti-corrosion according to ASTM D-4060 1KG FOR 100
CYCLES CS 17 WHEEL
8. It is could be applicable between the temperature of -30 C TO 170 C
The water which touch the painting dry layers shouldn't have bad taste
or smell and not to appear molten phenol. Moreover, it shouldn't have
more than 5 Hezen units of colors.
10-5 the protection of the other surfaces:
The contractor should protect the other surface from the paints and damages.
Enough covering panels, barriers, protectors and any other protecting
equipment.In order to prevent the drizzle or the drops from the falling on the
dirty surfaces those aren'tpainted, especially in the storage and preparing site.
All electrical sheets and the metallic equipment of the surface, doors, furniture,
installing pieces and the fixing equipmentetc., should be remote and coveted
before the painting process.
10-6 The preparing of the concert filler and the works of the block,
wood etc.
The concrete should be free from any dirt, extra mortar, crystalline deposits,
orany remaining light layer from the oil casting molds or from the compounds
of the concrete treatment. If the last mentioned way is used, it will be necessary
to clear the surface by the sand with the compressive air. Moreover, it will be
necessary to wash the surface by approval cleaner or soap, then, to rise and dry
before the painting process. If there are cracks and big failures after the
painting, they shall repair later.
It shall be free from any dirt, extra mortar or crystalline deposits (crumbled
materials) and it shall be dry completely. If there are cracks and bid failures
that can't cover with the block filler, they shall be repair by their dilution.
Further, if there is necessary to use filler for the bock works, it shall be used
before the final finish process.
The concrete should be solid and dry. Moreover, the surface that is painted
recently should be tested by the hygrometer before the painting process.
Further, the humidity should be in according to the recommendations of the
related painting factor. Before the painting process, it's necessary to remove the
deposits of the sand, the gravel, the mildew and the disjointed granules and to
repair the surface failures before the painting process. The cracks and the
punctures should be repair by the concrete that is rolled out properly on the list,
and then they shall be sandpapered in order to be smooth.
(347)

If any crystalline deposits are formed on the surface, it shall be necessary to


remove by the brush regularly until they are removed. Finally the final face of
the paint can be made. The concrete lands should be cleared by the air, and
then the surface shall be painted with paint that has net poly urea and the fosroc
new cut STZO, which have the following specifications:
The size of the soil material for the size 100%.

The tightening strength according to ASTM D-412 4350 PSI

The extending strength according to ASTM D-412 430%


The stiffness strength according to ASTM (SHORE A) ASTM D-2240
100
The stiffness strength according to ASTM (SHORE A) ASTM D-2240
55
The successful flexibility strength according to 3MM MANDREL
ASTM D-1737
The anti-corrosion according to ASTM D-4060 1KG FOR 100
CYCLES CS 17 WHEEL
It is could be applicable between the temperature of -30 C TO 170 C
10-7 the preparing of the woof for the painting works:
All woods should be dry before the preparing. All separators, engaging links,
tongues, perforations and the facing surfaces should be painted by initial layer
during the installation. In order to, avoid the moisture absorption, if those
perforations are still open after the decoration.
All surfaces should be sandpapered by the light emery papers towards the fiber
in order to achieve smooth finished surfaces. Further all sharp ends shall be
round slightly.
All nubs and the resinous parts should be painted by the nubs paint, and then
they shall be leaved until they are solid completely. If there are big nubs, they
should be cut covered and flattened in order to have smooth surface.
Before the main layers are put, any dust should be removed. These layers
should be put enough and then they are painted well by brush, specially the
terminal fiber.
10-8 the preparing and using of the protecting decorating for the
woods:
(348)
The woods should be prepared as if they shall be painted for the final finishing.
They shouldn't have any nabs; initial cover, and they can't be covered by any
material.

The protecting decorating material for the wood should have organic solvent
and resistant for the water and its colors are constant. Further, it shall be
absorbent type that doesn't peel.
The protecting material should be used in according with the factor's
instructions. It should be put enough on all faces, surfaces, sides, ends, and the
assembled steel woody components, before and after the fixing process.
10-9 the usage/put of the paint general:
All paints should be put and prepared in according with the factor's
instructions. So, any diluents or cleanerscan't be used but the materials that are
recommended by the painting factor.
All brushes, tools and equipment should be always clean. The surfaces should
be clean and they shouldn't have dust during the painting process. The painting
process can't be cleaned next to other processes, because that causes dust
accumulation. The final painting layer should have regular color that is free
from the effects of the brush or the paint flow or any other failures.
10-10 the metallic surfaces- general:
The preparing of the metallic surfaces and the protecting painting layers that
are anti-corrosion should be in according with the last emissions of the related
standards and cods.
(349)
In order to ensure the best result for the various processes of the preparing
surfaces and painting works. If all steel panels, which are rolled on the heat,
and the steel piecesaren't cleaned completely and to be painted by external
layer in the factor, they shouldn't painted by peeling layer of the factor. Further,
they shouldn't be exceeded the rust degree (B) as specified in the suede
specifications for the measurement of the rust peel, when they are received
from the equipment factor.
When the iron castings are received from the factor, they shouldn't have more
than the rust surface that is could be remove easily by normal machines.
Before the steel rolled cold panels are manufactured, they should be free from
any rust. Further, they should be painted by protecting oil layer on the all
surfaces. The steel that is painted by zinc could be used for the covers of the
steel panels.
It is necessary to ensure that the rust process stopped completely during the
manufacturing process, by put initial layer before the manufacture.In order to,
short protection for every part of the components.
10-11 the preparing of the surfaces of the metallic materials
(excepting, the steel that is anti-rust):
All structures and covers, which are made of steel, should be cleaned from the
welding granules and the sharp ends by the sandpapering process. The cast iron
or the cast steel should be prepared and sandpapered in order to remove all
failures.
All steel works should be cleaned from the rust and the factor cover by the
effective cleaning with the compressive air in according with the British

standards 4292 "the first type (sarsspf-sp5) for the steel works that are made
under the water and the British standards 4292 " the second type" (SA2.5or
sspcspc10) for the steel works anywhere. It is possible to use the lowest
quantity of the compressive air that is suitable to the adequate cleaning for the
casting parts/components.
All angles, small shoulders and pips claspsetc. should be cleaned by the
compressive air separately. Further, they should be painted separately before
their fixing on the building structure.
(350)

Ministry of Water and Electricity-Directorate ofHailwater. Technical


Affaires_Project to complete the first phase for Comprehensive Water Hail
Project.
The preparation of wire brushes is not an acceptable way for the surface at this
stage but it can be used as a complement for the final phase in paint processes.
10-12
Paint Usage (outer layer)
The thickness of thin and dry layer for each paint layer as well as the entire
system must be in accordance with the recommendations of the paint factories.
The number of layers should achieve the minimum required thickness of a
thin layer.
Moreover, each degree of layer should have different color In order to easily
determine the intensity, extent, strength and stretch coating layers.
If not provided otherwise, in this case, the process of Thinning needs to be
taken into account if it is necessary for good finishing of the coating material.
Then it is supposed to be appropriate with the latest recommendations of the
manufacturer's instructions and is not allowed to paint thinning excess of limit
for spraying paint.
Generally ,the terms of cast iron pipes work and valvesetc do not
require finishing and decorating in open air or exposed to immersion in water
should have a specific finishing Insulating material(specified Albetomy).
When the steel materials and ferrous castings expose to erosion or immersion
in water, then the finishing paint should contain Epoxy resins.
Sstainless steel, non-ferrous materials prone to corrosion, is coating without
painting, but if considered that the corrosion possible to happen then you must
finish with biotin or epoxy.
This kind of materials which are not susceptible to immersion in water such as
valves and water works, form a part of the other equipments that can be
repainted for the purpose of decorating.
If not stipulated otherwise, the contractor can choose the adequate security and
protection system in painting surface according to suitable equipments as
described in the relevant standards.
On the other hand, the major elements of
The Program is for guidance only as the harsh environments In particular,
requiring details about protection systems that must be delivered to the
engineer to be approved and then carry out the work.
(10-13)
The first protective coatings:

In the beginning you clean all the surfaces in order to remove grease and
protect it from corrosion by mentioning the following methods:
if not stipulated otherwise, the work of steel castings and must be painted with
epoxy paint founding based on zinc.
-The engine exhaust systems and other equipments exposed to high
temperature operating result should be sprayed Aluminum
-painting the interior surfaces of tanks, containers and other surfaces in contact
with founding anodized red epoxy in case of exposing to water or fuel oil
wells .
- It
is necessary to spray containers of steel sheets of control, distribution
panels and tiles surfaces with special zinc etc. ............. or hot -dip galvanization
of 100 microns at a minimum
- painting surfaces with primitive layer by using zinc and chromium in order to
facilitate the adhesion and cohesion with coatings
- The separating outer surfaces from potable water or oil, such as works piping
(piping or buried steel workers must be painted by using epoxy with adding
tar as described in detail in Chapter IV(pipe works)
(10-14)
Layers of paint medium enterprises:
After decontamination the surfaces, we should cover the openings, grease
points, control devices and automatically treated surfaces completely. And any
defects on the surfaces must be repaired until the appearance of metal by
scraping it, filling gaps by toothpaste and then finishing according to the
manufacturer's instructions. When the first plating layer is solid, we must
remove the whole layers by using wet and dry sandpaper to give a smooth
surface.
Metal Works galvanized or zinc-plated strengthening layer must be founding
before placing Initial plating layer.
(10 -15)

Final Layers of enamel paint:


Machinery & structures must eventually spray with two layers of steel finishing
enamel of the desired color.
Also each layer should be thin and dry which amounting 45 micron.
But when finishing work, equipment may be susceptible to damage during
transport, so the equipments must be transported to the building with only
foundational layer plating layer and placing only foundational layer and a layer
of enamel paint brushing after installation as mentioned in agenda.
The steel plate of small solar modules for electric control and distribution
panels must be finished into two layers of enamel paint glass installer

thermosetting enamel required color in order to give a dry, refinement, overall


thickness of about 100 microns.
Prior to the transmission from manufacturer we must scan the paintings
unfinished, repair any defect is found paint working
Also, these paintings must be adequately protected in cases of potential
damage during transportation, installation.
Finally, it is necessary to protect all concerned parties.
(351-352-353)
Protective coverings should remain in place until the completion of full works
in buildings being done where these panels will be installed and accepted by
the architect.
The final layers of painting equipment must be protected away from liquids
such as water Diesel, Antifreeze and lubricant oil .etc.
It is necessary for shipping an additional paint box with quantity (1 liter) for
each color of the paint of the same once.
As well as the final layers of painting machines and control panels can be used
for the purposes of building maintenance.
(10-16)
Combinations of layer paint:
All machines & pipe work and steel structures must be installed under the
water level or underground by painting with Tar Epoxy For the sake of
protection.

Non-coated Steelhead surfaces:


All rotating shafts, gears convertibles and surfaces operators that would
normally leave without Painting must be protected temporarily by using tallow
before being sent from the location to the factory.
Layers of protective coatings should be solid to bear the damage which could
occur during transportation and installation or trial operation.
(10-18)
Non-Ferrous surfaces Preparation:
All non-ferrous parts need to paint must be rubbed with a cloth and rough
abrasives washing within a lotion (acetone, two parts oil) and then dried to be
used for applying to oil.
Coating surfaces by using the following steps:
1. Initial layer of Zinc chromate.
2. Foundation layer.
3. Two layers of enamel finishing with the required color.

NOTE: Surfaces consisting of aluminum, chromium and parts of stainless steel


are usually left without paint.
Location paint working:
In supplying different parts of the equipment to the site and through
installation, evaluating and processing buildings for the installation of the
equipment under the leadership of skilled, experienced workers as follows:
a) All surfaces must be cleaned and scraped with wire brush to get
rid of stains, scattering spots, dirty points, dust etc..........
In the case of damage to the surface layer constituent, it must be
scraped the metal so that it appears with original position and the
flame cleaning by flame or machines or Paint Brush.
b) It is important to erase all grease, on the other hand , nominal
paintings ,lube points and control devices should be covered etc.
........
c) Any damaged parts we can scrape it but nude metal with its
contents (fastening screws, nuts, bolts and washers,) which are
installed during construction and mend all separators and the
parties.
D) The corners and welding seams must be coated with a layer topical cream
by using the same Original Paint, but with different color.
All the acts of final touches must be in accordance with the instructions of its
Paint factories.
E) Finishing the remaining layers by placing demanded color by the
architect.
F) All the temporary paint layers being put to protect the pieces from
grease.
Paint working must be operated either by brushing or spraying device
In this case, the air must be free of dust, and all neighboring areas should
be covered completely.
You should not Perform Paint work surrounding by bad weather, as the
dust resulting in Surface staining
All surfaces must be dried and the required temperature needs to be above
4 percentages less than 30 Celsius. It is forbidden to re paint until the last
layer is dry completely and waiting time for drought which recommended
by the manufacturer.
(10-20)
Components of registered private:
Parts such as small electrical motors, gearboxes, Electrical control
devices........ etc., are parts of the formulations, can have finishing

Original industrial which is incompatible with this specification unless


treated more.
(354-355-356)
In such cases, after the removal of grease, sandpaper wraps, topical
preparations layers of paint and coatings as mentioned for the work of Paint
working above are protected enough
(10-12)
After work cleaning:
All ended or coated work should be left without painting order to protect these
walls from the new works.
You must remove any non-specific layers of paint during the preview and put
required finish at the expense of the contractor.
Nominal Paintings, panels data are installed on the equipment should be clean
and clear to read at the end of work.
After finishing, Contractor shall clean the floors and glass panels and control
handmade devices and bright spots that may be tarnished with paint.
Also, it is necessary for keeping the site clean and clear in accordance with
architect satisfaction.
i. Notes
Colors and colorful lines will be stated according to British standards
(1975, Bs 1910)
ii. The direction of the water flow must be kept in a statements related
to water works.
iii. Usage of Gradation ,contrast colors is going to be as follows
-Green
12
-Brown
06
-Yellow paint (of aqueous iron oxide aqueous) 08 C35
Violet
22C
-Blue 20E01
- choosing colors according to BS 4800
Black
-Orange
-Red
-Yellow
10
-Blue
- emerald 14E53
-Yellow pink 0C33
(357-358)

D45
C39
37
00E53
06E51
10E53
E53
18E53

==559==
==360==
The eleventh chapter
The metallic works
11-1 general:
11-1-1 the work scope:
This chapter is in respect of the specifications of the metallic works that the
contractor could meet it during the work offer in the contract. Further, this
contract includes the specification of the metallic components (such, stairways,
balustrade etc.) and their works such, their welding, fixation, galvanization,
formulation, shaping and finishing.
The contractor should design, import and install all necessary structural
components in order to support the passages, stairways, the balustrade, the
ladders etc. which are indicated in the scheme, unless otherwise specified.
The supporters of the passages should be separated from the supporting support
in order to avoid the noisy hesitations and vibrations.
The passages, stairways and ladders should be designed in order to support the
uniform load as much as 5 Kilo Newton /m2. Except that the load should be 7.5
Kilo Newton /m2 in the equipment sites, what it is defined, or for the centered
load which is as much as (5) Kilo Newton/ side of squire 300mm and what was
the bigger. These loads should be the lower request, but if the term of the
equipment needs bigger load, the loads should be increased according to the
request.
The big dimensions of the building, which are indicated in the schemes, should
be adhered. But the light changes could be done for the details by the engineer's
approval. The contractor is responsible for the accuracy of all main dimensions.
The planks should be fixed accurately on the steel standing works. But they
should be regular and their size allows removing it easily by two employees
without removing the touching planks or equipment. Their size isn't more than
50 K.G.
(360)
All of ends of the pavements...etc. should have approval borders. These borders
are imported by the contractor. Further, they should be installed by connecting
protrusions, which have parted end, in order to connect to the concrete works.
The contractor should coordinate with the importers for the building process of
the borders.
11-2 the ladders:
All ladders should be in according with engineer's approval. The constant
ladders should have the safe protected surround for the indicated sits in details.
They should be fixed in order to ensure the security, so the lowest protected
surround, which is put on the pavement or the land, is in distance of 2400mm.
the angle of the constant ladders are fixed accurately, and the distance between
every angle isn't more than 2000mm.

The ladder are fixed by suitable washers and the spanner bolt M12, which is
covered by cadmium or similar approved material.
The ladder should have full or welding building, which is according to the
requirements of BS 4211 that define the separated distances between the
supporters, stairways, the protected surround and the holders of the ups and
downs unless otherwise is specified.
The sites in which the ladders are above the pavement, the ladders should be in
the same height of the touching balustrade.
The ladders, which are made of flexible steel, should be galvanized in heat
after the manufacture.
11-3 ship type:
The stairways or ladders should be received from approved manufacturers,
which product by the flexible steel and galvanize by heat immersion after the
manufacture.
The inclination angle should be put between 65 and 75o.
(361)
The length pedal of the stairways, which is between the supporters of the
ladder, should be 550mm. the pedal of the stairways should be surrounded by
balustrade on the both sides. Further, these balustrades are fixed by typical
spanner bolts on the supporters.
The pedal of the stairways, which shall be fixed, should be made of flexible
steel that is galvanized and no to have gluey surface. Further, they should fixed
by spanner bolts on the supporters. The width of the stairways pedal is 250mm,
and its height is between 200 to 230mm.
In every group of the stairways, the inclination angle and the height of the
pedal shouldn't change.
All nuts, spanner bolts and washer should be made from the steel, which is
covered by the cadmium M 12.
All stairways should be covered by epoxy (coal tar) that is anti-friction. The
safety series are fixed at end of every group of the steel stairways.
11-4 the protected balustrade and the related standards:
The protected balustrades have approved design that is according to the
schemes, further it isn't accept the welding building. The designed load should
be 360 Newton/m2.
The balustrades that is made of aluminum, should have double lines which are
made of pipe, its external diameter is 3mm and its typical thickness is 9SWg.
Moreover, all connectors should be made in according with the standards, and
they should contain piece in their heart to be stronger.
The balustrade should be twisted by streamlined radiuses on the curves and
angles. All connectors are made in according with the standards, except that the
detachable parts. The external finish should be smooth, and it is free from any
failures or rough parts.
(362)
The balustrade is made of flexible steel pipes, which are galvanized by heat
immersion. The nominal internal diameter of the pipes should be as much as
32mm, and their thickness of sides is 3.255mm.

The standards define the height of the balustrade as much as 1100mm and
550mm. generally, the distances which separate between its widths, is less than
1500mm. the fixation process on the base should have two or three spanner
bolts according to the engineer's guidelines. Further, the nuts, the wishers and
the spanner bolts are made of steel which is antirust. Where the detachable
lengths are used, the half-installed connectors should be used.
11-5 bolts PVC:
In order to avoid the electrical action, where the sites that the aluminum
surfaces touch the various concrete or metallic surfaces , the bolts PVC should
be used in order to isolate the aluminum.
The finishing layers/ the finishing:
The building supporters of the passages, which is provided by the flexible steel,
should be galvanized by the heat immersion after the manufacture.
If it is required, the manufacturer or any other approved company put plastic
covering layers for the balustrades, before the incoming to the site. The design
of the connectors should be easy to be collected in the site without any
damages.
11-7 the safety series:
The diameter of the safety series should be as much as 19mm x 3 loops in
every 100mm. they are made of aluminum or antirust steel; they have the safety
hooks and grommet (the installation slots). Then they are fixed on touching
vertical supporters or the walls.
(363)
11-8 the galvanization:
All types of iron and steel, which is required to galvanize, their cortex should
be removed by sulfur acid. Moreover, they should be cleaned by acid solution
in bath of warm phosphoric acid (60o C). Also, they could be cleaned by sand
blasting or by another approved way, then; they are galvanized directly by heat
immersion. The bath of galvanization should contain molten zinc in percentage
of 98.5 at least by weight. After that, all materials/ parts are flooded in order to
earn the temperature of the bath, then; they are extracted quickly, so they are
galvanized in thickness of (90) micron. Also, they could be galvanized by the
other applied maximal thickness, which is applicable to the defined term in the
British standards 729, the first part "the covering layers by the immersion
galvanization for the iron and steel". Universally, the galvanization should be
done, after the works of perforation, trimming/cutting, clipping, filling,
installation and curving. Every material and its sides should be covered
regularly.
If it is required, all steel works should be galvanized, after the process of
manufacture and collecting.
All metallic works, which have light caliber/size, should be galvanized by heat
immersion; in according with the British standards 3083 "the burning
galvanized steel sheets by the heat immersion for the public purposes", or in
the British standards 2989 "the flat sheets and twist galvanized sheets by the
heat immersion continuously". It is necessary to prevent any touching between

the galvanized steel factors and the aluminum surfaces by approved isolating
material.
11-9 the molded and the hammered:
The molded and the hammered should be made of clear metal that is free from
any non-metallic purity, the stops of molding and hammering, repairs and
spots, which are resulted from the sudden cooling, or the air spaces. Moreover,
the molded and the hammered should be clear and bright, and any changes
should be done gradually. Their inside and outside angles and curved should be
twisted well. Further, the operating surfaces should be free from any failures,
and any other surfaces should be flattening carefully in order to remove any
damages that are result from the cast.
The finished molded should be prepared, frosted and painted carefully before
sending, in according to the specifications.
(364)
11-10 The fixation units:
The spanner bolts, nuts and the wishers of the detachable parts, which is
usually flooded in the water, should be made of antirust iron.
11-11 the welding:
Universally, the welds are vulnerable to stresses. So, before the beginning of
the design, the contractors should submit to the engineer the detailed schemes
of all related welds and the suggested procedures for the welding. Before ant
welding, the engineer should be accepted in written for the suggested details. It
is not allowed making any changes in approved welding without the engineer's
approval. The contractor could be summoned in order to make tests to ensure
that the procedures are safe and the employees are qualified.
The engineer can order to test the melted welds, which have high voltage, by
the rays. But the other automatic tests, if they are required, they shall be made
in the presences of the engineer. All pieces which shall be welded, they shall be
prepared carefully, because, when they are collected, they shall be conforming
together carefully. After the collecting and before the beginning of the general
welding works, the cutting weld should begin with small angles welds. The
initial welds should be strong in order to fix the parts together, and to be small
in order to be covered by the general full welding.
All welding parts should be free from the stresses, before they are flatten by the
machine.
11-12 the sliding gates:
The sliding gates should be made of iron and to be galvanized by rubbery
surfaces which prevent the leakage. The size of the used sliding gate should be
in according to the schemes of the contract.
The frames, doors, surfaces, the prevention of the leakage and the private arms
of every type of the sliding gates shall be in according with the related terms
which mentioned here. Every sliding gate should be provided with suitable

manual operating wheel that have suitable diameter for the required work.
Moreover, it's necessary to provide equipment P.(365) such the gears in order
to ensure that the required applicable operating power, which is result from the
pressure of the hand on the operating wheel edge, isn't more than 55 K.G
(55KGF). Further, the height of the manual operating wheel should be about
(1) meter above the operating level.
The manual operating wheels should be carved in the closing side which shall
be in the clockwise. The arms should be serrated or strong operating squareshape, which are made of antirust Orin or solid manganese or the bronze
manganese. The coupling and the connector of the arms are should be the type
of the coupling by flanged bolt/ MUFF. Moreover, they should be punched and
provided with nut and snapper bolts in order to fix the arm on the arm head of
the sliding gate which should be punched to enter the spanner blot in it.
All manual operating wheels, the incubators of the rotary heads, the lower basic
angle and the guide angles, should be made of cast iron. Further, the pushing
pipes should be made of cast iron. The sliding gates should prevent the water
under the pressure circumstances and the flowing way in according with the
schemes of the contract.
All used materials in the sliding gates manufacture should be applicable to the
following lower standers:
The cast iron:
The British standards 1452 Grade 180
Gunmetal:
The British standards 1400 LG 2
The antirust iron:
The British standards 970, part 4 Grade 150 M19
The manganese bronze:
The British standards 2874
Grade C Z 144
(366)

The works of plumbing and public facilities


12-1 general:
12-1-1 the work scope:
12-2 the systems of the cold and warm
12-2-1 general requirements:
12-2-2 the materials:
12-2-3 the connection and fixation of the
12-2-4 providing healthy pipes underground:
12-2-5 lead compounds:
12-2-6 the painting of the angles (the
12-2-7 the covers:
12-2-8 the pips of overflow:
12-29 the cleaning slots:
12-2-10
the valves:
12-2-11
the electrical water heaters:
12-2-12
the sterilization of the water systems:
12-2-13
the test of the water pipes and the
12-2-14
the thermal insulation:
12-3 the systems of the fitting of the
storm water:
12-3-1 general:
12-2-3 the plastic pipes and the installation
the ground:
12-3-3 the system of the sewerage of the
is resistant to
the high temperature:
12-3-4 the sewerage system by the pipes of
12-3-5 the sanitary equipment and their
12-3-6 the fixing units:
12-3-7 the installation of the drainage pipes
12-3-8 the protected covers on the sanitary
12-3-9 the test of the installation of drainage
12-4 the sewerage underground:
12-5 the services of the cold water:
(367)

water
pipes:
supporters) etc.:

storage ways:
sewerage and the
parts for the usage on
amended UPVC which
the polypropylene:
preparations:
and the used water:
equipment:
pipes:

Chapter Twelve:
Plumbing Works and Health Facilities
12.1. General:
12.1.1. Work Scope:
This chapter describes the plumbing works and the heal facilities that will be
provided in all the buildings of this contract.
The specifications of the different materials of the pipes that will be used,
extended, connected, fixed, covered protectively, tested and insulated are all
included under this chapter.
12.2 Hot and Cold Water Systems:
12.2.1. General Requirements:
The contractor should supply, secure, install and test the experimental
operation of the following engineering systems as described in these
specifications:
A) The cold water systems include the main feeding lines and the works of the
distribution types.
B) Amounts of the water that flow to the flush tanks (Siphons).
C) Hot water systems, distribution network and the installations pieces.
D) Insulating and covering the cold and hot water systems, Works of the
service and distribution pipes.
E) The control devices in the equipment of heating the water and extending the
related electric cables.
The contractor should take all the necessary precautions and measurements to
guarantee that the systems are completely work. Hence, he supply and fix the
full insulation from all the sides, also the devices and materials of absorbing
and squelching the vibrations that are necessary for eradicating its noise
transmission (The undesired voices) to the inhabitant areas in the buildings.
12.2.2. Materials:
The copper pipes of the internal use should be according to (BS 2371, part 1,
Table X). In addition, it should be semi-hard as described or stated on the
charts; moreover, it should be provided with the installations pieces that has
the vermicelli option according to (BS 864, Part 2).
The incompliant UPVC pipes should be according to (BS 3505 1968) with
dissolvent and welded installation pieces according to (BS 4364, Part 1, 1969).
The coverage plates that are related to the pipes sleeves at the inhabitable or
inhabitant areas should be made of the hinges-steel that is painted by the
chrome with the bolts fixing.
Bodies of the ball valves and the traps that its diameter does not exceed 50 mm
that are installed in the hot or cold water systems should be made of the casting
metal or bronze.

Bodies of the valves which its diameter is 65mm and larger should be made of
the casting iron. All the castings and the pieces that are shaped by the
compressor should be of a good quality, clean, soft and free from the scales and
defects.
Systems drainage valves should be installed on the distribution pipes until a
diameter by 38mm according to BS 1010.
The locking valves should be installed on the pipes of distributing the cold
water until diameter by 38mm, and also on the service pipes of diameter by
51mm according to BS 1010.
Locking valves that are used on the distribution pipes of diameter from 51 mm
to 76 mm should be according to BS 1952 by a solid wedge and a column of an
unchangeable height and decline.
Locking valves that are provided at the covered or uncovered areas in the
facilities and grooves areas that are easily reached to should be unpainted and
its terminals are screw in order to be tied with the copper pipes as required;
moreover, it should be according to BS 1010.
When the mentioned locking valves are installed at a distance by no more than
3 m under the down side of the cold water storage tanks, it should be provided
with piles that are rose with the lever.
The drainage taps that are of the screw down pattern should be made according
to BS 2879 1980. The air release taps of the installation pieces that are on the
water providing pipes should be of a certified type.
Check valve should be of a certified type, and it should also be suitable for the
pressure that is in the main line which is installed on it.
Valves of the mixers should be painted with the chrome. Unless otherwise is
mentioned herein, it should be of the easily-clean type. The locking
specifications of hot or cold should be horizontally marked on it.
It should has screw positive back end for tying with the copper pipes as
required; moreover, it should has normal fore and columns for locking and
opening the cesspool that is painted by the chrome.
The ball valves should be of the equal-pressure type, copper body or of the
Diaphram type according to the British standards 1212, part 2. The copper float
of the ball valves should be of ball-shape according to the British standards
1968, Type B.
The plastic valves of the ball valves should be according to the British
standards 2456. It should also be provided with heavy boss that has joints
andante-corrosion. It is made of the copper alloy.
The gate valves should be of separated gates or of solid wedges doors.
The direct flow valves of the hot water systems should be of the full-open
doors.
Valves that are run by the switch of Lock Shield Valves should have integrated
covers and easily-cleaned that is suitable for the entrance valves. Also,
distinguishing blocks for setting the valves as it is mentioned herein.
Air release and safety valves of the heating devices or the pressure pipes should
be supplied in which it should be suitable for the conditions of the system

operation. Each valve should be of the type that has the full covered spring and
a locker.
The check valves should be manufactured in which it makes the least resistance
to the flowing by the gravity. The flaps are made of light structure that should
be based on a spring fixed by two of the phosphor bronze hinges.
Each valve is provided with fixing joint for preventing the flap motion without
necessary. Valve is as silent as possible, when it is operated.
12.2.3. Connecting and fixing the pipes:
Joints that are weld with the copper and installed on the copper pipes should be
provided with the installation pieces that of the certified vermicelli option
according to BS 64.
Joints that are on the PVC pipes should be equipped with the installation pieces
that are welded of the certified solvent glue according to (BS 4364, Pare 1769).
For fixing the pipes, all the necessary tensioners, the ground shackles, pipes
couples, shackles of the socles or the similar supports should be supplied as
required in which include fixing the pipes rings Redland, hanging bars, the
screw big-head nails and the angles that are made of the flexible steel or the
grooves supports.
The rates of the separated distances between the fixing units that are mentioned
herein are only the straight pipes so; fixing should be made at the bends and the
installation pieces.
The pipes supports should be put at distances that exceed the following:
Pipes
Vertically
Horizontally
Nominal
Fixing
Material
Fixing (m)
Internal
(m)
Diameter
Copper 15/22
1.8
1.2
28
2.4
1.8
35/42
3.0
2.4
54
3.0
2.75
63/108
3.66
3.00
When it is required using nails of (U) letter shape, it should be as follows:
Pipes diameter
15mm. 50mm
63mm

and

above

Diameter of the (U) Nail


6mm
10mm
The contractor should, when necessary, supply and install a channel of (U)
shape and made of the flexible steel (75 x 38 mm) or (100 x 500 mm) for the
supports of the pipe works as superposed.

All the inbuilt angles, shackles and supports should be cut and fixed on the
structure of the buildings structure. It should be of accurate level and
direction; moreover, it should be installed perfectly before installing the pipes
and installations pieces.
The holding supports of the horizontal pipes and the joints should be put and
set before installing the pipes and joints.
The contractor should secure, extend, connect, collect and fix at the places that
are stated on the pipes charts, the special pipes, installations pieces, materials
and the accessories regarding the type and dimensions that are described herein
or stated on the charts. Besides all the items/articles; whether they were stated
or not, that are necessary for right accurate installation.
All the pipes works should be accurately and cleanly installed according to the
best work practices. The contractor is responsible for inserting all the bends
and crews for achieving regular installation; whether this work was stated on
the charts or not. All the discharges and directions changes should be properly
supported.
The contractor is responsible for fixing all the pipes works at the necessary
slopes and levels that allow the perfect installation.
It should be used; the sufficient and suitable angles for supporting the pipe. At
the areas which two pipes or more passing through it, angels should be put
parallel to each other.
In all the pipes works, it should be provided; the capability of containing the
longitudinal extension without making distortions when they are heated or
cooled which they are under the service.
The supports of the pipes should be provided as required, also it should be of a
type that allow full movement for the pipes works except at the permanent
fixing points.
Bends that are shaped should be free from the chokes, flatness or waviness.
The internal diameter and thickness should be kept along all the bends.
All the bifurcations should be installed in which it should be streamline in the
flow direction.
The asymmetrical materials that may cause corrosion through the electrolytic
impact should be separated by insulating joints.
Making joints inside the thickness of the walls, floors, ceilings, and its
equivalent.
The horizontal lines of the pipes should be installed; either by lifting or
lowering them slightly as necessary. This is made for releasing the air to the
tanks or taps and enabling discharging the networks.
The lengths of the pipes should be installed and fixed in which the traps and
air-locks should be avoided. When necessary, the (T) joints of discharging the
air and the drainage taps that will be installed should be of certified type and
toothed for installing the hoses joint. It should also be installed in which the
exit hole is of distance by no less than 300mm above the completed ground
level.

Works of the horizontal pipes should be installed with continuous slope


towards the low points for achieving full drainage for the pipes works, unless
otherwise is described or mentioned.
When the size of the horizontal pipes gets less, the decentralized points should
be used. In addition, the down surface of the pipes should be kept as a
permanent line for facilitating the ventilation process.
The minimum clearance between the level of the completed ground and any
pipe should not be less than 100mm or it is controlled by the level of the down
hollow of the next level.
When the pipes are hang inside the buildings or carried on piles, it should be
ruggedly fixed in order not to make any motion for any joint when applying the
internal pressure on the pipes.
The straightness of all the vertical pipes should be accurately set.
Pipes that are at the grooves should be put at a place where is free from all the
other services. A distance by minimum 150 mm should be kept from any pipe,
after putting the insulating cover, electric pipe, cable or an installation piece.
The locking valve should be fixed on the feeding pipe inside each building and
near to the seat of the upward pipe, also on any exit hole.
Installation should include the distribution pipes of the hot water system that
should be made of the same materials which the pipes materials of the opposite
cold water system are made of. Regarding the hot water, such materials are the
copper of the (K) type.
The contractor should provide and fix extension joints, which are suitable for
the pipes on the pipes works which are also of suitable diameter, when they
are crossed with the extension joints of the buildings.
When the works of the metal pipes are buried, it should be covered with a
Denso taps. In addition, all such covers should be approved by the engineer
before burying the pipes.
As long as the pipes should be in conformity with (BS 2871, Part 1, table x),
the internal diameter should be free from all the harming thin layers or the
scales according to the recommendations of the British Non-Ferrous Metals
Research Association.
The toothed drainage tap, that is a hoses joint is installed on, should be
installed and fixed in which the drainage hole should be of distance by no less
than 300mm above the level of the completed (T) shape-ground. It is installed
directly above the locking valve on the main line that is upward near to its
entering hole of each building.
The water joints of the short service should be provided and fixed on all the
equipment and the devices that will be fixed under this contract. It should also
be installed according to the following:
A) When works of the distribution pipes or the apparent structure, etc. are fixed
on the walls, the joints of the short service should have final joint of the pipes
of length by 460mm that is connected with the tap, mixer, valve or the device.
B) When the works of the distribution pipes or the structural are fixed in the
grooves, spaces, hollows or the normal ground concrete, joints of the short
services should have all the works of the bare pipes such as the related isolation

valves (if available); whether the valves were inside the grooves, spaces, etc. or
not.
Joints of the short service should be installed in the copper pipe according to
the British standards 2871, table (X).
When the apparent short joints are provided in the bathrooms areas, the copper
pipe should be according to the British standards 2871, table (X) and painted
with the chrome.
Joints of the short services should be fixed by the holder-lots that are fixed in
the buildings or by bolts on the walls and the wooden works as superposed.
When it is mentioned herein or on the charts, the overflow pipes should be
supplied. It should also contain certified identification marks or cards.
12.2.4. Extending the sanitary extension pipes under the ground:
Unless otherwise is guided with, the sanitary extensions pipes should be
extended under the ground by minimum of the filling by 750mm from the level
of the natural ground.
It should not be extended; any main water pipes or the distribution pipes along
a trench which a groove or drainage line is extended in it.
Pipes should not be extended on its rings, bricks tile or any other temporal
supports. When shaping or digging under the trench very lower, it should be
flatten by flat smashed filling or the stone.
The joints holes are constituted at the down of the trench before working in
order to properly complete the connections. In addition, the joints holes should
be as short as possible.
Pipes should be kept away from the mud, debris/ wastes, the extra connection
materials or any other obstacles during the extension process and until the
works are finished.
When it required extending the pipes through the seats/ foundations, walls and
the grounds, it should be toothed through certified sleeves.
The contractor should install the pipes sleeves, whenever the pipes are passed
through the wall, grounds and ceilings. Each sleeve should have enough
internal diameters for securing the surrounding free motion of the pipe.
All the extras should be removed from the sleeves before installing it. Unless
otherwise is mentioned, pipes should be fixed in which the center is united with
the sleeves.
12.2.5. Leads components:
The red lead (II, IV) or any other leaden component is not allowed to be used at
any place in the sanitary extensions systems.
12.2.6. The angles (carriers) paint, etc.:
All the ferrous angles (carriers), fixing units, grooves and the supports that are
a part of the works, should be painted by one layer of a certified paint, after
construction.
12.2.7. Covers:
The steel covers that are painted by the chrome and have hinges and fixing
units by the bolts as mentioned herein. It should also be supplied and installed
on the terminals of the pipes sleeves at the inhabited or inhabitable areas.

When necessary, covers should have a particular shape in order to be suitable


with the buildings structure, but when it is possible, pipes should be put at its
place in which allow fixing the standard separated covers without cutting them.
12.2.8. Pipes of the overflow:
Pipes of the overflow should be provided for each storage tank of the cold
water, tank or conversion tank. In anyways, such pipes should not have crosssection by no less than 50% of the cross-section of the feeding pipes. The
warning pipes should be fixed at approved essential places for that any relief
will be seen immediately.
When there is more than (1) of the warning pipes, it should also be provided
with proper levels in order to show the storage tank which its water is relieved.
All the overflow pipes such as the storage tanks and the conversion tanks
should be provided with filters that are preventive for the dust, vermin and the
mosquito.
12.2.9. Cleaning Holes:
Cleaning holes that contain taps which are ran by the switch and connected
with the hoses joints should be provided at the lowest points for each cold and
hot water system for guarantee the full drainage.
12.2.10. Valves:
The locking valves should be put at places that are easily reached to for
operation and maintenance.
Relief and safety valves should be provided as mentioned herein. It should also
be installed with full drainage joint of full internal diameter.
When there is low point in the drainage line, a discharge valve should be
provided of diameter by 15mm. The water and drainage pipes that are used
should be extended to apparent places and secured that are agreed upon with
the engineer.
Each valve of the equipment room/equipment and control valve of the circuit
should be provided with a certified plastic, ivory or copper card of dimensions
by 75 x 50mm, thickness by 1.6mm and stamped or graved with a referential
number.
When this is practical, such card should be fixed to the structured in a salient
position for identifying the meant valve and also at other places.
Light-weight steel angles that are manufactured to order should be fixed for
hanging the cards on it, also on the metal works that are next to the valves.
==379==
12.2.11. The electrical Water Heater:
The electrical water heater should be as mentioned in the specifications and at
the site that are stated on the charts. It should be complete with the pressure
relief valve, temperature measure and a measure to show the water rise.
When it is required operating heaters that are of the non-pressured type, it
should be used beside a device that ventilate the unit or protecting it from
making composing pressure inside it.
All the water heater should be provided with separator valves.

12.2.12 Water systems sterilization:


All the works of the new pipes in the main water lines, the service pipes,
distribution pipes, the storage tanks and the tanks should be sterilized before
using the water systems.
Before sterilization, all the pipes works, storage tanks and the tanks should be
washed for removing the dirty water, the wastes, etc. It is not allowed using
any water for drinking during the process of washing the pipes, or until
finishing the sterilization. The sterilization sequence should be as follow:
The lines of the main service, feeding and transportation pipes, storage tanks,
tanks and the distribution pipes should be sterilized after washing them.
Before making any test for any part and at the contract termination, the
contractor should be sure of that all the pipelines are completely free from any
obstructions, debris and the extra materials.
All the clean water, the other assistant devices that are necessary for the test
works should be provided during the contract works progress and for the final
tests also in which include securing and fixing the sufficient stays for all the
blocked ends and the necessary blocks then removing it when been guided for
that.
12.2.3. Testing the water pipes and the storage means:
The distribution pipes and the water storage means should be slowly filled with
water for allowing all the air to exit. When all the emptying tapes are locked,
the system should be absolutely sealed for the water infiltration.
12.2.14. Thermal insulation:
The concrete insulation that is previously shaped should be installed on the
following:
A) The works of the hot water system pipes in the buildings (including the
valves bodies and the flanges that are in these pipes works of diameter by
65mm and above).
B) The cold water storage tanks and tanks of feeding, extension, the works of
the ventilation pipes in the surfaces spaces, ceilings, channels, the horizontal
and vertical paths, the equipment rooms and the equipment for preventing the
humidity condensation.
The thermal insulation materials and its finishing should be free from Asbestos.
The concrete insulation that is previously shaped for the works of the hot water
and feeding with water systems should be in conformity with BS 5422. The
insulating should tightly settle on the pipes works and the other surfaces
without making holes between the joints.
Each part of the insulating that is previously shaped should be fixed on the
pipes by tying taps that are made of nonferrous metal, plastic or the adhesive
plates.
The concrete insulating that is put on the flat surfaces should be fixed with
nonferrous metal or plastic fixing units.
The bodies of the valves and flanges that are in the non-insulated pipes works
in the buildings should be insulated by using covers of two pieces. They are

regularly put in order to be easily removed, then finished by cloth that is


stringed on it or it is put through an adhesive material.
The bodies of the valves and flanges that are installed on the insulating pipes
works outside the building and also on all the works of the cold water pipes
should be insulated in the same way like the accompanying pipes works.
The insulating thickness of the works of the hot water system pipes should be
determined according to the following schedule no. (1). The insulating
thickness of the works of the cold water system pipes for the purposes of
preventing the humidity condensation are according to the schedule no. (2).
Schedule
(1)
Thermal
Conductivity W/
mk
0.056 0.041 0.04
to
to
0.070 0.055
The
Insulation
maximal thickness
(mm)
32
32
25
32
32
25
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
38
32
32
38
32
32
44
44
32
44
44
38
44
44
44
63
63
44
75
63
44

The
pipe
diameter (mm)

15
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
The flat surfaces

The contents temperature

The
external
diameter of the
pipes that the
insulating
has
been installed on
(mm)

(0) C
(10) C
Thermal Conductivity (W/mK)
0.05 0.04 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.03 0.02
3
2
5
4
The Insulation Thickness (mm)
43
36
28 20 27 23 18
13
21.3
48
40
32 23 30 25 20
14
33.7

55
64
69
75
81
94

46
53
57
61
66
75

36
41
44
47
51
56

26
29
31
33
35
38

35
40
42
45
48
53

29
32
35
37
39
42

23
25
27
29
30
32

16
18
19
20
21
22

60.3
114.3
168.3
273
508
Above 508 and
including the flat
surfaces

The concrete insulating that is previously shaped outside the surfaces should be
soft, non-intermittent and fixed. The external covers should contact with the
pipes works and the accessories.
The visible pipes works should be finished by the flexible plastic, the
Elastomers plates or the concrete plastic of thickness by 0.35. Such plastic is;
either be put at the factory on the parts that are previously shaped, imbricated,
sealed by adhesive material and that are supplied loosely and covered at the
sites by sealed imbricated joints. The plates are of one color as agreed upon and
they are painted at the end.
All the insulation should be painted by two of high quality and heat-resistant
paint, except if it was hidden or protected by metal covers, weather-resistant
finishing, or special protective ornamental finishing. The surfaces that absorb
the paint should be painted at the first with a layer of the foundation paint.
12.3. The systems of the sanitary extensions, drainage and the
rainwater:
12.3.1. General:
The contractor should supply, install, test and experimentally operate the
following:
A) The drain system above the ground, the works of the ventilation, drainage
and sewage pipes and the equipment that will receive the waste water that is
drain from the sanitary equipment, the kitchen tools and the other fixing
devices.
B) The rainwater drainage pipes and the special equipment.
C) Supplying and installing the sanitary equipment
12.3.2. The plastic pipes and the installation pieces above the
ground:
The plastic pipes and the installations pieces of the sewage drain that are fixed
above the ground should be made of special manufacture from the incompliant
polyvinyl chloride (PVC). The components that are from two different factories
or different systems should not be mixed.
The pipes and the installation pieces from all the faces should be in
conformity with the British standards 4514, 1969 or its equivalent of the
Saudi standards.
The connecting method that will be used is the welding by solvents through
using the certified glue of the manufacturer company. The elastic rings pieces

should be used as necessary for containing the thermal movement, or the


female terminals of the standard female installation pieces should be converted
to joints of elastic rings through adding coupler joint of an elastic ring.
When Polymer that is used for the pipes is tested through the method of (Vicat
Methool 102 D), it should have minimum flexibility point by 28 C, while for
the installation pieces is by 79 C as mentioned in the British standards (2782,
1970).
The pipes and installation pieces should be of the gray color according to the
British standards (BS 5252 10. A. 07), except the connections of the bathrooms
that may be of the white color.
The natural elastic insulating sealing materials of the blocking rings should of
(W) sector. It should be according to the requirements of the British standards
2494, 1969 and welding joints with solvents that are matching with the British
standards 4514, 1969.
The drainage connections of the secondary equipment should be weld with the
solvent glue for fixing the positions of the secondary pipes installations pipes
as necessary. It may be made; alternative drainage connections by using
unequal connections that are matching with the British standards 4514, 1969
with connections welded by the solvents that are also matching with the British
standards 4514, 1969.
The pipes holders that are installed on the buildings should be made of the
flexible steel and protected against the corrosion by the galvanization. It should
also have fixing unit of two suitable positions to work; either as pipe stay that
allows moving as a result of the thermal extensions, or as shackle that is
installed on an equipment piece to make fixing point. For the optimum fixing
on the pipes stays, a packing piece of the PVC may be used.
12.3.3 The drainage systems of the high temperature-resistant and
treated UPVC:
The pipes, installation pieces, the internal plumber and the drainage should be
particularly made for the high temperature-resistant drainage systems. It should
be made of the treated incompliant polyvinyl chloride (PVC) that consists of
one piece which is shaped by extrusion. The installation pieces, accessories and
the fixing tools should be in conformity with all of this.
The pipes and installation pieces from all the faces should be in conformity
with the British standard requirements 5255, 1976.
The pipes that are of two normal terminals should be supplied; moreover, all
the installation pieces should be connected with each other through the method
interference from the two terminals.
All the pipes and equipment should be in conformity with the
recommendations of the British standards BS 1978, 5572, The practice system
(code) for the works of the true pipes extensions or its equivalent from the
Saudi standards.
The connection method that will be used should be the welding by the certified
solvent glue of the pipes and installation pieces manufacturer company. Joints
of elastic rings should be supplied as necessary for containing the extension.
When testing the polymer that is used for the pipes by the

Kabole method, its degree should have minimum flexibility point by 100 C as
mentioned in the British standards 2782, 1970, method 102C.
All the installation pieces of the drainage pipes should have minimum
flexibility point by 80 C, when testing it by the Vicat method as described in
the British standards 5252, 1976 m.
The sector of the natural elastic sealing rings should be of (W) shape and
according to the British standards 2494, 1976.
The traps should be made of the white polypropylene. The installation pieces
from all the faces should be in conformity with the British standards 3943,
1965. It should also have smells sealing of the water by 754 mm height.
12.3.4. The drainage system by polypropylene pipes:
The drainage pipes that are made of the polypropylene and the installation
pieces should be according to the British standards 5254, 1976. The installation
pieces of the sealing rings that are connected through the interference method
will be used with the normal terminals pipes that are installed by the push.
Pipes should have clear internal diameters that are matching with the British
standards 5255, 1976 and 5572, 1978.The elastic sealing rings are according to
the British standards 2494, 1976, type 2 when applicable.
12.3.5. The sanitary tools and its equipment:
The sanitary tools should be from the products of specialist manufacturer
company that has good reputation. Such tools should be made of the glassy
Chinese ceramic that is made of a mixture of the burned white clay and
completely ground materials. After burning, at high temperature and without
vitrify, the water absorbance should be less than 0.5% of the dry weight.
All the bare surfaces should be covered by glassy white coating that is not
cracked, impermeable and completely dissolved on the tools body. The
invisible surfaces on the walls and grounds may not be covered with such
coating (Like the back parts of the washers and the down side of the drainage
holes seats).
All the sanitary tools should be free from the harming defects through its
appearance, its work smoothness and the easy-cleaning. It should also be free
from the defects, cracks, the thing slices degradation; whether vitrified or not,
split and the mechanical defects.
The washers should be according to the British standards 1188, or its
equivalent of the Saudi standards. It has total width by about 635 mm,
extension from the fore to the back by 455mm and also extension from the up
surface to the down by 265mm.
Each washer should have two legs/hanging units and legs that are painted with
the black enamel that is fixed by the heat, also a leg that is could be set and
adjustable of height by 785mm to the top of the fore edge for the washer. In
addition, two holes for the mixer, the waste water drainage and the extra curve
that is integrated with the washer.
The drainage hole should be made of the brass that is painted with the chrome
by 50 mm diameter. Also, the holes of draining the extra in addition to the

smells catcher that has a bottle shape and painted with the chrome by 50 mm
diameter. It should also have waterproof sealing of height by 75mm and the
pipe of the entering hole that could be set and adjustable; moreover, two of
short standing taps (completely from the metal) that are made of the brass and
painted with the chrome. It has also two indicators H and C. All the fixing
units should be anti-corrosion.
The foreign bathroom should consist of low-level ejection bath that is provided
by smells catcher that are of the S or P shape for the drainage holes in the
middle, on the left or right as required. In addition, ejection tank of the vitrified
porcelain that is suitable and has no valves with plastic siphon and lowpressure ball valve for feeding the tank (and high-pressure ball valve for the
main feeding ass matching).
The tanks should have a joint for the plastic pipe of the extra of an internal
diameter by 18 mm, while on the opposite terminal to the tank, the pipe of
feeding with the cold water of diameter by 15mm. The group should have the
ejection pipe of diameter by 42mm that suitable to the tank, connections and
the certified plastic connection of the bathroom.
The black plastic chair and the cover should be made of hard material and fixed
with anti-rust steel fixing units. Knowing that any special fixing means
necessary to the sanitary tools and from the manufacturer company should be
included in the installation group.
The eastern bathrooms consist of the white seat that is made of the Fireclay by
(760mm length x 610mm width), the complete feet positions, the bath that is
made of the glassy porcelain and smells catcher that is also made of the glassy
porcelain of the P or S shape which is suitable for the drainage hole as
required.
The ejection tank of the eastern bathroom should be similar to that of the
foreign one. Also, it is fixed at high level suitable for the tensile process of the
operation chain, suitable wall angles, the other fixing units and anti-rust steel
straight ejection pipe or the copper that is painted with the chrome suitable for
height by 2005mm from the completed ground level to the down side of the
tank to be suitable for the products of the manufacturer company.
12.3.6. Fixing units
The position of all the pipelines, the installations pieces, fixing units, etc.
should be previously approved by the engineer before installing or
manufacturing any groups that are previously manufactured. At that time, the
contractor will be responsible for completion at the site which require operating
the angles and the shackles of the pipes, etc. that are stated on any parts of the
buildings structure. It should be coordinated before starting installing the pipe
works or the installations pieces.
The pipes stays should not be put at distances exceed the following:
Horizontal
Fixing (m)

Vertical
Fixing (m)

The Nominal
Internal
Material
Diameter

0.5
0.6
1.9
1.2

1.2
1.2
1.8
1.8

Horizontal
Fixing (m)

Vertical
Fixing (m)

1.5

3.0

1.2
1.8
2.4
2.75
3.00

1.8
2.4
3.0
3.0
3.66

(mm)
32-38
50
75-100
150

The Nominal
Internal
Diameter
(mm)
All
the
diameters
15/22
28
35/42
54
63/108

UPVC

Materials
Steel
Copper
Copper
Measures
The external
diameter

All the angles, shackles and stays of the built-in type should be cut and fixed on
the structure, constructer or the buildings and of true direction and straightness.
It should also be properly regular before installing the equipment and pipes.
The path of the hanged stays that are related to the pipes horizontal lines and
the equipment should be cleaned and set before installing the pipes and
equipment.
The separator distances between the pipes and that are mentioned above for
fixing the centers are only for the straight pipes. Fixing should be provided at
the bends and the special pipes for the material as required or been guided by
the engineer.
12.3.7. Installing the sewage pipes and the waste water:
The pipes of sewage, waste waters and ventilation should be designed
according to the system of the National plumbing code (N.P.C.).
The secondary pipes, the main secondary pipes, the main sewage pipes, the
waste water pipes, sewage, ventilation, siphon drainage-resistant pipes should
be made according to the required diameters and materials in BS 5572, or its
equivalent of the full Saudi standards; moreover, all the necessary accessories
and installations that require this and fixed at these levels and slopes which are
necessary for the installation good performance.
Pipes works that are part of installing the sanitary pieces such as the extended
pipes to (showers) or the bathrooms ejection boxes, etc. should be made of the
copper that is painted with the chrome of the anti-rust steel.
Such pipes should not be buried in the cement, concrete or plaster. It should
also be protected by the sleeves when passing such works.

The pipe works should be accurately extended and at the places where some of
the parallel pipes are extended at. It should be put as equal separator distances.
In general, the pipelines should be kept alignment with the walls terminals, or
follow the paths that make installing the protective covers of the pipes possible.
While pipe works are in progress, etc. all the opened ends should be blocked
through a certified method by using well-manufactured blocks or flanges
without bores.
Under any conditions, it is not allowed using the paper, wood or the other
similar materials for blocking the opened ends of the pipes, etc.
When the site of the pipes works is next to the reinforced concrete structural
columns, walls or the floors, fixing with the concrete should be made by selfbore retaining nails with maximum penetration by 32 mm in the concrete. The
contractor should consider all the retaining nails and the necessary additional
plates for meeting these requirements; moreover, providing enough tying and
fixing for the pipe works.
When the ventilation and sewage pipes cut an extension joint of the buildings,
an extension joint of suitable diameter for the pipeline should be provided and
fixed.
The drainage holes of all the warning, extra pipes and the cleaning holes which
the special equipment or the equipment group that extrude from it could not be
clearly seen, it should be provided with suitable plate next to it states the pipe
source or the cleaning hole, etc.
Cards should be apparently put on all the valves, taps, electric switches and the
other control devices to state the place and the numbers of the boards that each
valve, tap or electric switch control.
Either it is mentioned or not, stated on the charts or not, the contractor is
responsible for providing what is necessary for considering the full shrinkage
and extension for all the pipes works and the other tools.
When possible, measures should be taken for the extension and shrinkage
through the changes in the direction of the pipes main lines, etc. When
considering the enough shrinkage and extension through the changes in the
direction is not possible, it should be provided; extension joints for the pipes
that are of certified manufacturing and type.
The main sewage pipes, the sewage pipes, the waste water, the waste water
pipes and ventilation should be continued by the full internal diameter up to a
height by 300 mm above the surface frieze or the surface level that is no less
than 900 mm above the up limit for any window within a horizontal distance by
3 m from any pipe.
The sewage pipes, the waste water pipes and ventilation that pass through the
ceiling finishing should be protected against the weather conditions. It should
also contain the ventilation pipe joint in the ceiling.
The ends of the main sewage pipes, the waste water pipes and ventilation
should be provided by galvanized wire protective (covers) or of the copper that
matching with BS 416, or by boring plastic protective of certified manufacture.

12.3.8. The protective covers on the sanitary tools:


The protective covers should be kept during and after fixing the sanitary tools
for as long as possible. Tools that have small breaks or scratch should be
replaced at the contractors expense.
It is not allowed for any person to stand in or on any device for any reason.
Devices should not be used for any reason during the building processes
progress (in which include the suitable use). Any device is also not allowed for
washing the tools or getting rid of wasted materials.
Devices should be fixed according to the instructions of the manufacturer
company as possible. Care should be paid for being sure of not making the
wrong fixing processes or the extra tensile.
The devices that are based on the floors by a bed of the cement mortar should
be fixed without specified instructions.
The devices, the casting or built-in fixing units should be tightly supported
until it gets solid and strong.
The ejection tanks should be fixed at the heights that the manufacturer
company recommended by and according to the charts and/or being suitable for
the lengths of the straight ejection pipes that are supplied with the devices.
Tanks of the bathrooms are of the eastern type and urinals are all of high level,
while that of the foreign bathrooms are of low level.
The straight ejection pipes should be put and fixed in which guarantee the full
drainage after each ejection process. Taps should be fixed according to the
recommendations of the manufacturer company with the particular material to
seal any water infiltration from the device. The tap of the hot water should be
put on the left hand side, while that of the cold water on the right hand side as
the person who use and stand in front of them see.
The pipes of the waste waters should be extended on a bed of water-resistant
component and fixed with an elastic flange between the device and the screw
back nut.
Bathrooms should be connected with the sewage pipes through plastic joints
according to the recommendations of the manufacturer company, sealed collar
that painted with the tar, sand and cement mortar of mixture by proportion 1:2
and flatten like plastering shape by 45 C.
Taps/smells catchers should be fixed on the baths or the kitchen baths
(washers) before installing the device; moreover, leaving the ends extended for
connecting the pipes to avoid the work positions that are hardly reached to.
12.3.9. Test of sewage pipes installation:
Water and the devices that are used for the tests should be clean. Tests should
be made as fast as possible after achieving each part of the installation. All the
hidden works should be tested before blocking and lock it.
Test should be made in the air by the full filling of the water catchers/ water
insulating of all the sanitary devices; moreover, inserting test keys (blocks) in
the opened ends of the pipes works that are currently tested.

One test key (block) of (T) shape and tap is installed on each tapping and
connecting the one tapping with the pressure measure (Manometer) by using
flexible pipe.
Air or smoke should be injected through the other tapping until it is appeared
on the pressure measure stair (Manometer); pressure equal to 38 mm on the
water measure. Such pressure is kept for period no less than 4 minutes.
Water tests should be made by inserting test key (block) in the down terminal
of the pipe under the lowest sanitary device, then filling the pipe with the water
up to the extra water level of the device.
The static pressure should not exceed 3.0 m. For the external sewage lines,
water tests should be made after the solidification of the cement joints, or in the
case of the other joints, it is made after making the joints and before starting
and works of covering with the concrete.
All the ground sewage should be filled with water under pressure by no less
than 3.0 m. After a reasonable period pass, the water level should be corrected
by adding the water as necessary. Such water level should be kept for 30
minutes without adding water.
Any defect should be maintained and remaking the test.
12.4. Sewage under the ground:
The pipes of sewage, waste water, ventilation and rain water should be
extended in order to connect with the matching that is considered as a part of
the sewage system at the site.
The surface water drains should be extended to an external natural sewage.
12.5. The cold water services:
The lines of the drinking water should be extended from the central water
tower to all the buildings in a way that secure water pressure by minimum (2)
bar at the entering point to each building.
The Check and Separator valves should be installed on the line of feeding with
the drinking water, at the entering point, to the buildings as stated on the charts.
The service line should be extended from the entering point to be connected
with all the points that need feeding with the cold water and also to the
electrical water heaters.
==394=
==398==
The fourteenth chapter
The installation of the connecting cables (telemetry)
14-1 general:
The project consists of installing 15 wells pumps in Elshakekwalls.
Every wall should be provided with remote control system. And it contains all
RTU accessories, optical fiber, terminal equipment, flow meters, transporters
and other equipment.

The references of the units and other equipment should be sent to the terminal
units (RTU), through the system of optical fiber. They are transferred to the
main control station in the working composite of the walls field as specified in
the following paragraph.
There are two pumping stations, the first one for the Bazakha, and the second
one for the Salaf in the working composite of the walls field.
The cable of the optical fiber should be installed along the line of the pips from
the pumping station of Bazakhato the converting valves in the Salaf tapping.
The cables of the reference should send the data to RTU from the devices and
terminal cables of the optical fiber.
The data of these tanks should be transferred to the control chamber in the
working composite of the water if the walls field.
14-2 the type of the cables
(398)
The connecting cable (telemetry) is made of the optical fiber, to have 4 hearts,
and to be suitable for the burial directly. Moreover,the external cover of the
cable is suitable to extend underground, and it is resistant for all possible
effects and factors in the soil. It is suitable for single mode transmission.
The engineering properties of the optical fiber and its transporting features
should be in according with the recommendations. The cables have twisted
buffer around control strength member (CSM). Thetightening strength of the
cables shall be achieved by continuous (CSM), which is made of steel and
covered by the glass fiber.
The protectingmaterial of the pips (buffer) is made of (PBT), and the pips have
color code. It is necessary to install filling compound in the buffer,in order to
prevent the entrance of the water and to keep the mechanical safety
(machinery) of the finished cable.
The buffer and separators is installed around the main strengthening element to
be cylindrical shape. The size of the protected pipe (buffer) and the strength of
the cable should be suitable to bear the recommended thermal retraction and
the tightening bear.
The buffers are fixed as converse volute share by the usage of various linking
wires. The spaces of the twisted heart and the radius strengthening compounds
shall be filled by suitable element in order to prevent the water penetration.
On every wire, the glass fiber and texture is put as converse volute shape, and
the flooding plastic material is put on the texture in order to prevent the water
penetration.
The cable should be protected, and the internal cover, which is upon the
protection, should be made of the average density polyethylene. During the
jacketing process, the plastic flooding material shall be put on the heart in order
to prevent the water penetration.
(399)
The cable is protected by metallic ribbon and plastic jacketing paint on the both
of the sides in order to be anti-corrosion. Further, it is necessary to put external
cover, which is made of the average density polyethylene on the cable, in order
to be resistant for the external factors.

The achieved cable shall be printed with constant code, which clears the
manufacturer name, the manufacturing month and year, the number of the
cables of the optical fiber, the type of the optical fiber the single mode (single
wire) or the various modes(wires)-, and the length of the cable in meter.
The text certifications are received to the engineer for the revision and the
approval, before the cables shall be loaded to the site.
14-3 the installation of the cable
The contractor should take into hid consideration the following points, in order
to install the cable from the pumping station to the interfering point as specified
in the schemes:
14-3-1 the instructions of the manufacturer of the cable should be adhered
carefully.
14-3-2 the cable is extended along the pipe line, from one side in the same
trench as specified in the schemes. Furthermore, the depth of the burial shall be
as specified in the schemes.
14-3-3 the installing way of the cable is in according with the recommendations
or the instruments of the postal, paragraph and telephone ministry in the KSA.
That's operating by the usage of the mechanical equipment and tools as much
as possible.
14-3-4 the distance of the cable of the buried electrical power should not be
less than 1 meter. It's necessary to take the precautions to isolate the cable from
the high voltage cable, if there are cables 13.8K.V/33,132/K.V.
(400)

14-3-5 Facilities of Cables' test is provided along the path of the cable,
according to the manufacturer company's recommendations.
14-3-6 Operations of connecting and interconnecting cables must be in the
lowest possible level.
14-3-7 In the places which cable enters across valves' chamber, the path of
cable expansion is around chamber.
14-3-8 In areas where the cable traversing public roads, regular roads,
pipelines, valleys and other special points required by the Engineer, the cable
must be protected by concrete- closed pipes and both sides of the pipes must
close after cables are installed. Thus, edges and acute angles should be
removed to prevent damage to the cable during the process of tensile and
intake. After cables are installed, these tubes are closed by plugs and Foam so
as to prevent the entry of exotic materials and objects.
In areas where pipes traverse other pipelines above sea level by bridges of the
pipeline, the cable must also be extended above the ground in a metal
Casing pipemounted on supports propping tubes. Cable tubes must be reached
harsh earthon both sides.It should take care to avoid condensation of internal
waters in the cable Casing pipes.
14-3-9 At certain points alone, where the cable needs to traverse pipelines,
pipes/ Ducting protection of PVC steel are used.Note that the pipe/ pipeline
protection must traverse the pipelines, which in the normal top of direction,
with considerate bending radius allowed for the cable according to the
manufacturer company's recommendations.
Engineer must approve the location of the cable traversing to the pipelines.
14-3-10 For site of connecting boxes or cans and the cable's path, the
Contractor shall conduct an accurate survey with statement of all of these
points on the track schemes. Connecting box is mounted according to the
manufacturer company'sInstructions for the cables to cable's type, and the signs
of connecting cable are placed over these places. The mark consists of rod of
plate or disk inscribed with the writing and can be seen from the road.
14-3-11 At traversing points where pipes of waterline extended in the
concretecasts or Casts that of asbestos cement, and executed by exposed trench,
cable's pipe is installed close to the concretecast by using "Handles of
installation" or similar means to do so.
At traversing points, whereCasing pipes of waterline are installed by drilling or
pressure / pressing. Also pipe of Cable casing is installed either by drilling or
pressure / pressing.
Length of pipe of Cable casing must be less than the length of casingpipeline.
In the case of the work of the traversing points by open trench without
providing the casings of the pipeline, pipe of Cable casing is extended with the
work of appropriate measures (spacing separators or what it is similar)to
prevent any metal contact / communication possible between the screencable
and pipeline .
In these crossing points, cable's pipe must extend outside the road which it
crossed (or otherwise) with a distance that not less than 3 meters from both
sides.

14-3-12 In the areas of stones and rammed gravel and rock, cable is extended
inside the pipes/ Ducting. These pipes / Ducting must cover / filling with a
layer of sand its thickness is 15 cmat least , before re-filling the trench caused
by the hole and the depth of the pipe/ pipeline must not less than1meter under
the layer of the final rule in rocky areas and in gravelly or stony areas .
However, in areas where pipes of the waterline are located under the surface of
the earth, cable is extended in pipes/ Ducting protection.
Pipes / Ducting are installed during the implementation ofmattresspipes.
Minimum clearance distance between pipes of the waterline and pipe/
pipelinemust not less than 30cm.
The length of a piece of single - pipe/ pipeline without an intake point prefers
not to exceed almost 400 mm. In any case, Contractor must inquire from the
manufacturer company about tug of the maximum intakewhich cable is
possible to subject, and designation place of intake points accordingly.
Pipes/ Ducting protection made ofthePVC steel is with net and internal
diameter at least 75 cm, and the wall thickness is not less than 4 mm, and is
high resistance against sunlight and Ultraviolet emission and environmental
conditions and temperatures. And material must maintain its mechanical
properties buried under earth and with prevailing environmental conditions for
a period of (50) year at least.
During the process of installation,cleanness of Pipes/ Ducting protection is
inside- maintained with the best shape fromany type of materials (such as
sands, stones and another).
Each piece of Pipes/ Ducting protection must prepare withappropriateWire pull
(metal wire) allows installation of the cable subsequently.
14-3-13 Cable is extended under the supervision of a qualified
telecommunications engineer and approved by the employer or by his
authorized representative.
14-3-14 handling and transport cables
14-3-14-1 transport of cable
All cables, Pipes protection, and other materials must move with the utmost
care and attention to the site.
The Contractor shall take precautions and preparations to move cables reels' to
their store areas by using the most appropriate means of transport, considering
the work program.
The process of transport is executed according to Instructions and guidelines
issued by the engineer to speed the distribution of materials.
14-3-14-2 Lowering
Lowering cables' reels or rolls is prevented by projection or throwing down.
Reels are lifted up by crane or by bearing/ lowering dais. Standby platform can
be used from beams and girders. Thus, the front which refers to it by the
guiding arrow must take into account when reels are rolling.
14-3-14-3 Storage of materials
The Contractor must prepare enough storage spaces to receive material.
All the ends of the cables are protectedvery carefully against moisture, until the
start of connecting works.

Amputated ends are protectedvery carefully with make them resistance against
moisture, until the start of work.
The Contractor shall follow the instructions of Storage issued by the engineer
considering the artistic purposes and transport for cable's installation as well as
change of its place.
Before cable is installed, the engineer shall examine the cable, and cable will
not be installed except after the engineer making sure that the cable is valid for
installation.
14-3-14-4 Restore of empty Reels
As soon as reels and their relevant subsidiary become empty, after extension of
cable, the Contractor shall move all to the storage area secured well.
The Contractor shall ensure from time to time to return the empty reels to
supplier depositary of cable.
14-3-14-5 The cable's pull
The Contractor should ensure the adequate quantity of all instruments and
required equipment which facilitate the process of cable's pull according
toprocedures for extension / pull cable that described by the manufacturer's
company.
The cable's drag can be made to pieces of Pipes/ Ducting protection or
extended within trench by using machine pull with very extreme respect
tostress ofmaximum allowable pull specified by thesupplier of cable.
Before pulling the cablethrough pipes or
ducting/ tubes protection,
theseducting/ pipes should preview. According to the cable allows only the
straight pieces / parts. Note that borders of pipes and tubes/ ducting must
protect with supports ofCannabis or cardboard (carton) which have not any
harmful effects on the cable.
14-4-6 Signs of the cable
Signs of the cable must be placed directly above the cable's path every distance
of (20) meters along the path in areas of the pumping station, and at all places
of turning the direction of the path, and at points of traversing roads and pipes
and other suitable points to determine and illustrate the paths of the cable
clearly, and this mean of cable teaching must be appropriate and inscribed
writing.
The cable's paths must be taught with additional form by educational tape.
The phrase "Be on the alert there are cable of communications" writes on this
tape with both Arabic and English languages.
14-5 Tests
14-5 -1 Tests in the factory
Measure/calculations of electrical data for cables according to systems must be
made at the ratio of 100% of all supplied lengths.
Results are recorded in a report delivered to the engineer with the supply of
cables.
14-5 -1 Tests on site
Before the final acceptance and after completion of cable's extension works,
The Contractor shall regard the following:

Auditing and entering all changes in documents by the implementation


(The cable's lengths and etc).
Works of measurements on the extended cable.
Test all works according
recommendations for cables.

to

the

manufacturer

company's

The Contractor shall perform measurements and the Engineer witnessand


signed by the Contractor and the Engineer.
14-6 Charts and documents
All essential Charts and required inspecifications and applied to works of
cable's extension must be presented.
Sites of cables and connectionpoints and the accurate locations of pieces / parts
of ducting/ pipes protection and the traversing points must be entered in all
Charts.
Charts of these sites are deliveredas soon as possible to the Engineerand at least
when part of the path is ready.
Measurements / the standard specifications
Unless otherwise specified, all the material andequipment and Systemrelatedinstruments must adhere with the following specifications and
measurements:
Ministry of Post Telegraph & Telephone
American Standard Code for Information Interchange ((ASCII)
Consultative Committee for International Telephony and Telegraphy
(CCITT)
American Measurements or what it is equivalent of the European
Measurements.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
For the cable's extension,civil works related correct engineering practice
is accepted.
Chapter Fifteen (XV)
Mechanical equipment
15-1 general:
15-2 Groups of applicable systems (codes) and standards:
15-3 Brief description of the pumping systems:
15-3-1 general:
15-3-2Pumping system in the Sibling field:
15-4Water quality that will be pumped:
15-5 the environmental conditions:

15-6 Acts of pipes and station's valves:


15-6-1 Non-return valves with swinging plate:
15-6-2 Moth(Butterfly) valves:
15-6-2-1 the valve operator (actuator):
15-6-2-2 Electrical Equipment:
15-7 tests:
15-7-1 test of factory:
15-7-2 test of site:
15-7-3 Casing and lining with epoxy for the inside and outside of station's
pipes:
15-7-3-1 general:
15-7-3-2Type and quality of materials:
15-7-3-3 placing a layer of (facing) Lining:
15-7-3-4 The basic data for hydraulic calculations that must be accomplished
by the Contractor:
15-7-3-5 Lecterns:
15-8 flashes:
15-8 -1 Scope of Work:
15-8 -2 standards that that govern the work:
15-8 -3 rates of pressure and temperature:
15-8 -4 Surfaces of flashes:
15-8 -5 materials:
15-8 -6 pressure tanks:
15-8 -6-1 the purpose:
15-8 -6-2 Manufacturing data:
15-8 -6-3 Technical requirements and equipment:
15-8 -6-4 materials:
15-8 -6-5 design:
15-9 Protection System of surge pressure:
15-9 -1 Criteria of Permissible noise level:
15-9 -2 documents/docs:
15-9 -3 making tests to determine noise levels:
15-9 -3-1 test requirements:
15-9 -3-2 test environments:
15-9 -3-3 testreports:
15-10 HVAC (heating, ventilation, and air conditioning):
15-10 -1 general:
15-10 -21 Criteria ofdesign:
15-10 -3 Centrifugal fans:
15-10 -4 axial flow fans:
15-10 -5 air filters. General:
15-10 -6 acts of air conditioning ducting:
15-10 -7throttles/ DAMPERS:
15-10 -8 terminal equipment of air holes exit:

15-10 -9 Net covers and Pneumatic control equipment:


15-10 -10 diffusers (Publishers):
15-10 -11Intakes and outlets of air holes:
15-10 -12 guards:
15-10 -13reels of fans management:
15-10 -14 facing and placing Tariffmarks:
15-10 -15 anti-vibration means:
15-10 -16 Automatic control apparatus- General:
15-10 -17 control apparatus:
15-10 -18 units of independent, externalandweatherproofair conditioning:
15-10 -18 -1 general:
15-10 -18 -2 rates of performance:
15-10 -18 -3 Containers of units:
15-10 -18 -4 Compressors:
15-10 -18 -5 Compressor engine and devicestarting of engine:
15-10 -18 -6coolant circuits:
15-10 -18 -7condensers which get cold by air:
15-10 -18 -8Files of the multiple compressors' concentration:
15-10 -18 -9 control apparatuswith Condensers:
15-10 -18 -10 Drainage basins:
15-10 -18 -11isolation:
15-10 -18 -12 Fans of evaporators:
15-10 -18 -13 Groups of files:
15-10 -18 -14filtersbins:
15-10 -18 -15 admixture boxes:
15-10 -18 -16 control system:
15-10 -18 -17 control devices with automatic temperature:
15-10 -18 -18electrical coils heating:
Chapter Fifteen (XV)
Mechanical equipment
15-1 general:
This chapter includes the general requirements for the design,
Manufacturing,test workshop,supply, facing works, tests site,installation of
equipment, and Mechanical equipment in satisfactory operating conditions
including well pumps and pressure tanks.
15-2 Groups of applicable systems (codes) and standards:
These following standards must be applied:
APS Standard 610
ANSI B 16.5 and B 15.1 , Or MSS SP - 48
( ANSI B 16.11 and ANSI B 2 . 1( if it is required)
ASTM A 536 Or equivalent.
15-3 Brief description of the pumping systems:
15-3-1 general:

This paragraph provides with all the data and information that must be taken
into account by the contractor for the detailed designs that he will prepare (and
this from the standpoint of hydraulic and operational).
15-3-2Pumping system in the Sibling field:
This system will pump well water in the Sibling field to the collection tank that
located in the well field by submerged pumpsworking within these wells, then
water is pumped from this tank by Pumping station of Albzakhh (currently
implemented) to the collection tank in Albzakhh area, this requires a major
transmission line with length of 109 km and 900 mm diameter reach to
Alborzkhh.
15-4Water quality that will be pumped:
Water which will be pumped is water of well that located inthe Sibling field
and table below shows the specifications of this water:

Chemical
examination

Unit

power of hydrogen ( pH)


Total Dissolved Ppm
Salts ( TDS)
Total hardness
ppm as
Ca Co3
hardness Ca
ppm as
Ca Co3
Mg hardness
ppm as
Ca Co3
TotalAlkaline
Ppm
Ph
Ph
ALK Ppm
Phenolphthalein
Alkaline
Ammonia
Ppm as
NO3
Nitrite
Ppm as
NO2
Nitrate
Ppm as
NO3
Ppm
Total
Nitrogen (TN)
Sulphate
Ppm
CI
Ppm
Iron
Ppm
SiO2 (silica)
Ppm
Turbidity
NTU
Free
chlorine Ppm
residual CL2

specifications
the
of Non-packed Sibling
drinking water
field (1)

the
Sibling
field
(2)

the
Sibling
field
(3)

North
west of
soil
(4)

North
west of
soil
(5)

6.5 - 8.5

7.98

8.00

7.60

7.97

7.84

1000

304

355

300

261

281

500

141

140

150

133

166

126

95

117

96

122

15

45

33

37

44

79
NIL

61
NIL

93
NIL

106
NIL

116
NIL

1.5

NIL

0.012

0.012

0.036

0.036

0.0627

0.0198

0.0132

0.0132

0.0693

50

22

17

20

18

21

5.11

4.11

4.60

4.23

4.82

250
0.3
5
0.5

55
49
0.009
11.8
0.05
NIL

65
180
0.185
9.0
0.14
NIL

55
162
0.015
12.5
0.25
NIL

15
43
0.037
16.0
0.121
NIL

25
38
0.011
18.7
0.357
NIL

15-5 the environmental conditions:


Pumping equipment must be capable of working under the following climatic
and environmental conditions of the project area:
Maximum 46
degree centigrade
peripheral temperature
Minimum 50 degree centigrade
Relative humidity
30- 45 %
Height above sea level

800-900 m

All the units for Interior installation must be provided,and they are suitable for
operation without attendance of Technical Engineer and are remotely controlled in an open area for the sandstorms.
15-6 Acts of pipes and station's valves:
15-6-1 Non-return valves with swinging plate:
(Diameter 900 mm - Operating pressure 60 bar)and is installed on the gate of
pipeline 900 mm after exiting from the pumps' building.
Non-return valves with swinging plate must correspond withthe following
general specifications:
A. Body: body is from Corrosion resistant steel, and carefully designed
to keep the pressuredrops to a minimum. The wide aperture on the top
surface of the body should be allowed the easiness of preview and
maintenance.
The body is rounded until cover Flash. The body is equipped withhelical
gearsfortherenewable/mutable chair (seat),disk must provide with movable
stopping tool. The body must be equipped with two helicalbosses to
secureInsure of thecorrect alignment / righteousnessto the axis of theplate
hinge.
B. The cover: is from Corrosion resistant steel and it is sealing surfaces
either salient or of annular joint that is suitable for the virtual ability of
the valve.
C. the hub of the hinge : the hub of the hinge is a part of the valve's group
and is made of Forgedstainlesssteel and is operated fromthe grinder rod
, and the hub of the hingeis Stabilized in mid-substance by two
(keys) wedges with helical gears and is closed withmetal bushings.
And the hub must bedismounted easily.

D. Ring of chair: the ring must be from Forgedstainlesssteel and formed a


part of the valve's group. Its outside diameter is provided with helical
gears and ItsInside diameter with notches to facilitate the process of
dismantlement and installation.

E. The disk: is a part of the valve's group andis made of


Corrosion
resistant steel.It must be found on Its back surface a caudal joint with
helical gears toCombine with the hinge's arm by nut andRecessed headhub (nail).

F. The hinge: is of Corrosion resistant steel.


15-6-2 Moth valves:
(Diameter 900 mm - Operating pressure 60 bar)
A. General:Moth valvesthat will be supplied in the network of the
station's pipes must becompleted with all Supplements andcontrol
devices and this to make system works satisfyingly.
Valve's size, materials,the minimum and maximum Operating
pressuresexpected in the moth valves and the maximum and minimum time
for the opening and closing of the moth valves, all these previous things
must be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Valves must be based on metal chairs, of type the butt moth valves with
rough design and tight closure in both flow directions. The moth valves
must be designed to work under the normal and non-normal of the harshest
operating conditions. Valves must be suitable for frequent actuating under
conditions of theunbalanced maximum pressure.
The hub of disk's column must behorizontally, and theminimum side of disk
must move toward the water's inlet when valvetaking into closure.

And valve must be equipped "withhand operated mechanical locks' tool


"that shall install valve's plate in fully open valve's position and fully locked
valve's positionso as to be used in maintenance operations. Valves are
equipped with suitable indicator explains disk'sposition and remotelyindicator (explains" fully open" and" fully closed" position that must be
installed in panel of equipment placed in control room of pumping station.
B. Valve body: valve bodymust be provided with"a construction
suitable base" and convenientBasal plate that are supported by
Concrete Pedestal. Precautions must take to allow sufficient
movement between the base and Basal plate to prevent the force that
imposed by thethermal stress or complete locking pump pressure
on the closed valve from harming equipment or Concrete Pedestal.
Thus, valve bodymust be according to ASTM - A 240 TYPE 316
L,Stainness SteeL.
C. Valve column : Valve column must form of one piece that fully
extended across valve's disk or it Can be of " Stub Shaft "type which
forms of two separate columns install in the effeminate sides of
valve's disk . When Valve column being of Stub Shaft structure,
every Stub Shaft must be entered in the effeminate sides of valve's
disk for a distance not less than 1.5 from column's diameter.

Valve column must be connectedtightly with valve's disk by keys, stays


and taper nails or any group of these three. The connection between
column (shaft) and disk must be designed to convey columnmomentwith
what equals at least 75% of the torsion moment force for column
(shaft). Stays (keys) and taper nails are installed mechanically.
Valve column must be with the full size in its part that extended across
the bearings valve, valve disk and valve plug. In case of reversingValve
column tothe bottom tobecome suited toconnectionsof Valve setting
machinery, the reversed part must have rounded corners with
Radii equal to the bulgeOffset , so as to minimize the possibility of the
stress'concentration to a minimum level when two different diameters
are connected
D. Valve disk: the disk's surfaces should not be had transverse nerves
for audit. The design ofValve disk in a manner to withstand the full
differential pressure across the closed Valve disk without exceeding
the operating potential by one fifth of tensile force for the used
material. And thickness of Valve disk must not be more
thantwiceand a quarter of the column.

E. Valve Chair (seat ) : valve chairs aredesigned to allow the


dismounting , switching, and adjustment without dismounting the
valve from the pull or push line , it must provide (with) a tight
closure and the full pressure of the pull line on the surface of the
water outlet valve add without any pressure on the surface of the
water inlet valve .
F. Stuffing boxes: Stuffing boxes must be from materials listed
in subparagraph "b", and it must provide with bronzy collars and
hydraulic suitable stuffing with suitable closingspackaged
hydraulically. A suitable clearance must be provided so as to stuffing
can be adjusted or switchedwithout prejudice toany part of the
hydraulic valve oroperator except the bushing and its supplementary

, and Stuffing boxes must have enough depth to contain at least four
filling rings .
G. Bearings:the valve must be installed with self-lubricating (oiling /
lubricating) bearings of the sleeve type in hubs of the valve body and
the support Container of the valve operator. The support Container of
the operator must be designed so as to provide the support bearing of
the valve column on both sides of lever of the valve column. The
internal bearing support must be designed so as to allow easy access
to the stuffing box.
Two thrust bearings (compressors) or thrust bearing (compressor must
be provided to ensure the stability of the disk in the middle. The
installed bearings of the valve body must be from the self-lubricating
(lubricating) materials which do not have a detrimental effect on water
and have friction Coefficient more than 0.25 when the maximum
bearing pressure is operated.
15-6-2-1 the valve operator:
H. The valve operator group : The valve operator which operated by
the electric motor must be consisted of the electric motor and
reduction gears, the marginal switchmechanism , mechanism of
disengagement , terminal panel , and all of them are installed in a
container with existence of the Joint connection gears inside the
casing. All Signalling apparatus, Pilot with indicators, and extension
of wires and cables between control room and the operator Form part
of the electricity feed. Cover must be water resistant and supplied
with hole of Screw inside pipes, so as to convey all main lines from
the processing unit to the engine control equipment in one pipe
(canal). The motor must be from the reversible type and had the
characteristics of thehigh moment suited to the Service that is used
for it. It must be designed for continuous operationto at least five
minutesand an increase in temperature that no more than 55
Centigrade degree.The engine must conform to ANSI Standard C50
or the like. It must be convenient to workwithcircle of three - phase
current,pulse60 Hertz (Hz)and 400 volts. Andactuator must be
designed so as to allow for motor to reach full speed
beforereleasingthe
momentand to provide an effective hammer
stroke that move the disk from its chair. Also the actuator
(Operatinginstrument) must be responsible forregulation secures the
possibility of the Manual operation at any time when the valve does
not work with electricityand without prejudice to the amendments of
the marginal switch, and it must provide what it is requiredto return

to operating by the motor at any time. The manual Operating wheels


must be prepared so that one mancan always operate the valve, and
they must be designed so as to remainMotionless when the valve
works with electricitySo as to be dismounted when it is not needed
for the Manual operation.
The marginal switch must be from quick-diffraction type,
easy-modification,
and
supplied
withthe
Subtledriving
worm(Micrometer) for amendment of scrutiny.The marginal switch
must be connected with mechanism of the valve operating across gear,
and it must be worked either the valve operates manually or electrically.

The measures must be taken to avoid damaging the valve chair or the disk at
closing or from disabilities. Stability of valve on its chair can be achieved at
closing with the moment switch that can be adjusted to stop at any specified
moment of the engine. Travel of the valve disk (Mechanisms of the limit end)
must be stopped without any movement in excess of the limit.
B. the manual operator of the valve: moment rating for the manual
operator of the valve must be Sufficient for The stability of seating or
unseating of disk or stall the disk strongly in any intermediate position
under all conditions of operating and the maximumdysfunctional water
pressure on the valve disk.
The valve must be prepared with adjustable mechanicalstop tool to
control (curb) theexcessive movement of the valve disk in its two
positions "opened and closed " and the operators Casings, retaining
supports and valve connections must be designed with a minimumof
safety factor byamount of five underthe maximum Forces and byamount
of three under the power outage ofthe used materials.
15-6-2-2 Electrical Equipment:
A. The Engine : Engines must be with power 400-volt , three - phase
current , and60pulse and it must conform to ANSI Standard C 50 or the
like and it must be suited to the Service that it will work for it. Engines
must be completely surrounded by closings for the internal installation
and suited to start operating with the full voltage and from the reversible
type of the characteristics with thehigh moment. The operating moment
must be less than 250percent of load full torque.
B. The marginal switches: The marginal switches with the positive
management of the operator mechanism must be supplied with operator
to work with Control circuit with the engine starting system to stop the
valve at the maximum terminal end of opening and closing of Valve

travel. The double marginal switch tool that works must be provided
with Incitement of moment. the contact points of this tool is connected
to the control circuit with the engine starting device and it must work
to stop the engine if the valveencounters any obstruction during the
operation of opening or closing the valve . The limit end (marginal)
switches must have the quick-work (quick-response) contact points and
have the possibility of the accurate amendment (micrometer). Thus,
each key container of the limit endmust beresistantof the water and has
the pipes slot(ducts) for the Comprehension of the solid metal pipes. It
must be with regulation so as to the switches can be connected and
maintained after its installation in its places. These switches must be
with power220-volt, three - phase current, and60pulse.
C. the engine starting equipment: every valve operator runs with engine
must be supplied with the engine starting equipment that are integrated
with the operator or are installed in theseparate metal container that are
suitable for installation and Construction on the operator , and the
container that must place inside it must be the engine starting
equipmentin accordance with the conditions and requirements ofthe
National Union of electricity works Contractors (American) according
to the Industrial Control standards of the containers with kind4 and kind
12 , the container must have openings for the pipes (for ducts) suited to
connect the container with The external steel pipes system . as for each
engine , all the starting equipment must contain circuit
breaker composed of tripolar main line , from the automatic shutdown
type, placed in Shapedcover as well as on the starting equipment for
the reflexinciting engine with mechanical bond,the guide indicators
lights,case testing key, control unit of momentary contact type with two
Compression switches . The main buffer breaker must be possible
operating from container's outside.
Themagnetic reverse
starting equipment must assure the under voltage mean and protection
against thermal overload in all three phases, the overload equipment
must be of type that be returned to zero position manually'' and have
return keys for the zero position operates externally form container's
outside. Each unit of two units with two Compression switches must
have one Compression switch written on it "opening" and the other
switch written on it "closing" and with the possibility of operating them
from the container's outside. The Compression switches units are
connected with the starting equipment that related to each of them so
that the engine runs when only one switch is pressed and stops working
when switch unlocks... Along with this, the engine must not run when

both two switches are pressed together''at the same time. The case
testing Switch must be from the Permanent- connect type and run from
the containers outside. The magnetic starting equipment must have
estimated abilitiesequals and not less than the engine ability, and have
secondary Contactwritten on it "normally opened"the other written on it
"normally closed"on both files of the opening and closing. The control
equipment of starting engine must be suitable for run with voltage 400
volt and with three - phase current, and60pulse.Guidelightsgreen and red
color, the red colorindicates that the valve is open and the green
colorindicates that the valve is close. Thus, lights are installed on the
engine starting equipmentcontainer and on the Instrument panel that
located in control room. The control equipment are according to the
latest applicable standards of the National Union of Electrical works
Contractors(American)unless otherwise noted here. Full information on
control equipment and starting the enginewith indicator chartof the
electrical connections must be provided for the approval of the
Engineer.
D. The Compression switches (Press) for the Instrument panel:
The control unit ofmomentary contact type must be provided withtwo
Compression switches (two Presses)Similar to switches that are installed
onthe engine starting equipmentcontainer to install it onthe
Instrument panel inthe controlroom tofacilitate the operating from this
panel. The valve must be possible operating from remote main control room
by wirelesscommunication system and telecontrolaccording what is stated
in Chapter eighteen.
15-7 tests:
15-7-1 test of factory:
The contractor must provide factory's certificateaboutthe hydrostatic pressure
testandfunctional test andnon- wastetestaccording toDIN 50049/ 3.1 A for all
valve types used intheassistive primary and secondary pipes network.
All control valves must test by check, Safety valves and all valves with
diameter more than 600 mm in theworkshop and in presence of the
Engineer.
15-7-2 test of site:
Test in the site must include the Leakage and pressuretest on the pipes
network station when it is combined. Water should be used in tests andthe
contractor shall submit what accept and serve of keys, horizontalstruts,
Supporting struts, instrument, and other tools that are requestedfor these
tests.
The Leakage and pressuretest must consists firstlyofrising the water
pressure to pressure equals 50% abovethe design pressure. The test pressure
must remain at that pressure for at least 4 hours. If the part subjected to

testdoes not achieve fulfilling the requirements,the Contractor, at his own


expense, shoulddetermine the leakage places and repair them,and remove
and replace the damaged pipes ,jointsCouplings ,fittings (joints), repair
themand re-test as it is appropriate .The Contractor shall be responsible for
the lack of maximum permeability of pipeline, as part of thetest
requirements stated herein above.
15-7-3 Casing and lining with epoxy for the inside and outside of station's
pipes:
15-7-3-1 general:
Casing (facing)epoxy must agree with AWWA C 213 and be resistant to
long-termfor the water-borne (water transmitted over) pipes.
Casing (facing)Workshopis placedunder factory conditions.Method of Sticking
being followedby fusion.All the preparatory works and coating process are
appliedwhether by brush or spraying device (machine gun) by clever workers,
with accurate method, andunder an appropriate supervision. Therefore, and any
evidence of the lack of a good work such as the appearance of brush- sparkedor
raster pimples or creases is sufficient to reject the work of these pipes.
Throughout theworkflowmust take every precaution to protect the work of
dustin addition to providing clean dust caps.The entire adjacent surface must be
protected fromdamage and spots and flyingpainting spray.Any paint for interior
and exterior surfacesshould not be done during the presence ofthe wet weather
or weather with excessive moisture or the surface is not dry appropriately.
15-7-3-2Type and quality of materials
Epoxy resin must be suitable for the transfer of drinking water (well water).
Epoxy can be consisted of two components, namely resin and tonicmaterial and
it must be free from solvents.Casing (facing) system must be of suitable type
for Sticking by fusion.The use of black tar epoxy will not be
accepted.Contractor must specify in his tender or his display all the
characteristics of the resin, which intends to use,also provides certification of
laboratories approved by the Engineer.The test results must correspond with
thewater temperature until52degrees centigrade.
In addition to that,an independent expert must approve on the validity ofCasing
(facing) system before starting the placement of Casing or liningcoat.
15-7-3-3 placing a layer of (facing) Lining:
A. Makefacing
A layer of Lining must be placed in the workshop and under factory conditions.
Contractor must prove under report the qualification of the procedures that the
facing will be done in accordance with the specification requirements.
B. Prepare the surface
All slag,scattered welding and unwanted materials must be removed by
scrapersor brushes, and toughcorrosionis removed by hammer so that the
corrosion can remove completely during the cleaning process by the
compressed sand.Fats and oils must be removed by using authorized solvents.
Fats and oilsand other soluble sludge must be cleaned by using approved
chemical and suitable solventsbefore cleaning by machine.If the alkaline or

acidic solutions are used, the treated areasmust be cleaned from detergents and
deactivated by appropriate and approveddetergents. The approved and nonserious detergents must be used only.

==423==
After such preparations, surfaces are cleaned by the sand that is pressed to the
degree that is required in the specifications of the resin supplier and also as
approved by the engineer.
Equipment and materials that are used in cleaning the pipes surface should be
of a type that is approved by the engineer. Coating should be made
immediately after the cleaning.
C) Coating:
Coating layer should be put by skilled workers according to the instructions
and specifications of the manufacturer company.
The material of coating should be handed over, stored, mixed, lightened and
used exactly according to the specifications of the manufacturer company, or as
been guided from the assigned representative of the manufacturer company.
The material of coating should be used for achieving a thin layer treated by
thickness by no less than 400 Micron.
All the beveled surfaces, joints and the connection areas should be protected
from the coating material by using a proper tape.
However, any coating material fall on such areas and the beveled surfaces,
should be completely removed immediately by using a clean cloth wet by a
dissolvent material.
15.7.3.4. The basic data of the hydraulic calculations that should be achieved to
the knowledge of the contractor:
A. The contractor should get all the necessary information before starting
analyzing the wave pressure.
B. The pipe Data
The used material: The steel pipes material of the main pumping pipe is taken
of diameter by 900mm.
Quality: The pipes quality should be suitable to bear operating pressure from
25 to 100 Bar.
Thickness properties: The thickness proportion should be proportionate with
the proportion of the actual lining with cement.
- Proportion of the pipe roughness: 0.1 mm.
The contractor should be informed of all the required information and data that
are related to the material and type of the pipe that is chosen and approved by
the owner.
C. Pumps positions, distances, heights:
The positions of the pumps and valves for the Buzakha pumping station are
stated on the designs that are attached with the tender documents.
The existing pumping station pumps in a pipeline of diameter by 700mm and
the suggested pipeline that is by 900mm.
D. The technical data of the pumps of the existing pumping station
- (4+1) pump: of many speeds up to 1780 rpm that are controlled by VSD.
- Drainage 310 L/S
- Lifting 610m
- efficiency 83%

- The technical data of the protection equipment against the wave pressure
of the existing pipeline by 700 mm.
- (2) Tanks of capacity by 37.5 m3.
- (2) Air pressure (1+1) in which capacity of each one is 105m3/hr.
15.7.3.5. Supports:
Unless otherwise is provided in the tender documents, it will not be put; any
detailed design for implementing the pipes supports.
Anyhow, the contractor should meet the following requirements as minimum;
moreover, the engineer can set additional requirements.
- Pipes should be properly supported to avoid the excess in sagging, vibrations
and the loads on the device which these pipes are connected with.
- Distances between the supports should depend on the diameter, thickness and
weight of the elements that constitute the pipes networks.
- Hangers and supports should be properly set.
- In the pipes of the external diameter to 405.4mm (16 inch), the seats should
be replaced by supports of saddle-shape to avoid the risks of distorting the
pipes.
- Elements that are welded on the pipes (Ex: angles, the lifting lug, etc.) should
be of the same materials that the pipes are made of.
- Pipes supports should be designed in which it should not interfere in the
displacement that is resulting from the extension.
When it is necessary, it should be used; the cylinders, springs, equal loads or
any other tool that guarantee transporting the pipes freely.
On the other hand, the supports that constitute points should be fixing and
completely integrated with the pipes in which keep such supports at its places.
For this purpose, the lifting lugs should be welded on the pipes here and there
around the shackle before the cold tensile for avoiding any sliding.
The fixing points should also be tightly connected with its fixing points
(columns, beams, etc.). Contractor should be sure that the load at these points is
within the allowable limits.
In all the cases, the supports should be kept as simple as possible without any
unnecessary pieces. It should also largely benefit from the weld considering the
construction facilities that should not be neglected.
Insulating the supports that are in the concrete or the brick walls is not allowed.
In this case, it should be used; a group that constitutes of the bars and the wall
plates that cover a space of the walls suitable for carrying the allowable unit.
It should be avoided; extending the supports in the columns and also at any
other place other than the equal structure of the reinforced concrete beams,
unless otherwise is not agreed upon with the engineer who will ask the
contractor, at that time, to provide the necessary fixing bores.
In the opposite case, such structural elements should be tied.
All the necessary should be made for fixing such supports on the metal
pieces/parts of the buildings by skilled plumber. As seat, such metal
pieces/parts should be punched only after the engineers approval.

The metal parts/pieces are allowed to be punched for fixing the supports, and it
should also be implemented by using a power drill. It is forbidden using
oxygen flame cutting for punching the supports for the installation processes.
If the engineer does not allow punching, the supports should be fixed by the
shackles or the bends.
In case of using the many common supports, each pipe should be separately
fixed for enabling dismantling the pipes without dismantling its next pipes.
In the odd cases and after the engineers approval, a pipe may be connected
with another, if the last pipe (connected) does not cause large amount of the
extra stress and also does not interfere in the motion of the first pipe.
15.8. Flanges:
15.8.1. Work scope:
Such general requirements are in conformity with the flanges types such as the
sleeve weld, slope, neck-welded, screw and the blocked flanges that are made
of the carbonic steel or the stainless steel.
15.8.2. Work standards:
Design, manufacture, testing and examination are made according to the
requirements of the following standards (in its latest issues).
ANSI 16.5 Or
MISS SP 44 Or
API 605.
When the conditions require using flanges that are not included in the standards
mentioned above, it should be designed according to (ASME BOILER) and
also to (Pressure Vessel Code).
All the neck-welded flanges should be matching with the American Standard
Code Pressure Piping (Ex: when it is connected with high-resistant pipes
which are of thin wall, or the mechanical properties of the flanges are less than
such pipes that will be adapted.
15.8.3. Pressure and temperature rates:
All the flanges that are included in these specifications should be in conformity
with the pressure rates at the operation temperature.
15.8.4. Flanges surfaces:
Flanges should be provided with salient surfaces.
15.8.5. Materials:
A. Carbonic Steel:
Steel that is used should be of the good-weld carbonic steel and suitable for the
field weld with the equipment and the other pipes that are manufactured
according to the following standards:
ASTM A 53, ASTM A 106, API 5 L
API 5 LX Grade X 46, X 52, X 60
The chemical synthesis as specified in the analysis should be in conformity
with the following proportions:
Carbon: 0.22% maximum
Manganese : 1.5% maximum
Phosphorus: 0.04% maximum
Sulfur: 0.04% maximum

Silicon: 0.35 maximum


Carbon equation:
CE: C(%) < 6 + 0.45
For securing the weld of the neck-welded flanges boss transmission to the next
pipes works in satisfactory way, it should be used; high-flexibility flanges
sufficiently (in which it should not be less than 3/2 of the pipe minimum
flexibility limit)
All the neck-weld flanges that are required to be connected with the pipes
works and has equal flexibility extent or by more than 46000 inch square
should has guaranteed limit by no less than 36000 inch square.
Stainless steel:
The stainless steel should be matching with ASTM A 182 F 304. It should
also be suitable for welding it on the materials according to ASTM A 312 TP
304 and ASTM 358- gride 304.
15.8.6. Pressure tanks
15.8.6.1. Purpose:
Such specifications meet the main requirements that control the design,
industry and examining the inoperative containers.
Manufacturing and examination will be according to the code of ASME,
Eighteenth section, Part 1.
Codes and standards that are included in these specifications are inserted into
the table no. (1)
Table no. (1): ASME codes
Eighteenth section, pressure containers, first part
Fifth section, the weld validity
Radiographic testing, E94
15.8.6.2. Manufacturing Data:
The pressure containers are made only after the next documents are completed
and approved by the engineer.
- Making a detailed wave pressure analysis for the pipelines.
A. Designs:
Designs will at least include the following data:
- Materials (Chemical components, the mechanical power properties)
- Maximum of the allowable pressure
- Maximum of testing the pressure
- Dimensions (Diameter, length, etc. including the bearing ability).
- Welding for each type of the welds including the joints weld facto.
B. Report about industry and welding
This report will include at least the following data:
- The full specifications of the materials
- Forming with mentioning any temperature that the forming is made under it.
- Detailed specifications about the welding including the type, size, the grade
regarding the filling materials and Flux (Catalyst for melting the metals), the
welds peed, electrical properties and the number of welding).
- Temperature after forming and welding.
- Protection paint from the internal and external.

- Revising the dimensions.


15.8.6.3. Technical requirement and equipment:
1. Technical Requirements:
The following technical requirements regarding the installation will be
available in the pressure containers:
- Drinking water system.
- Pressed air system.
2. Equipment:
Containers will be equipped with the following equipment:
- Supports and legs provided with lockers.
- Bores and covers blade for the following installations:
- Pressure safety valve
- Air joint
- Holes for examination
- Pressure measure
- Containers will be provided with the lowering and lifting arrangements for
enabling the treatment at the site without damaging the insulated or painted
surfaces.
Branch of inlets, outlets and other joints as required.
15.8.6.4. Materials:
A. Materials properties will be chosen by the manufacturer board and
approved by the engineer.
B. The chemical components of the steel will not exceed the maximum of
the following percentages:
Carbon: 0.20
Silizium: 0.55
Manganese: 1.60
Phosphorus: 0.05
Sulfur: 0.05
C. The minimum of the mechanical properties for the steel will be:
- Power that me be tensile: 370 N/mm2
- Collecting point:240 N/mm2
D. Viscidity impact:
The average of three samples are tested at Zero will not be less than 35
Kp/Cm2 without a single value under 20 kpm/Cm2.
15.8.6.5. Design:
A. Design requirements:
Designing the pressure containers will be according to the ASME code, eighth
section.
B. Designing the loads:
Loading will be considered when designing the containers that will be
according to the ASME code, eighth section. It will also include the circular
cases and the building loads.
During building, starting or operating, all the loads that may be applied will be
considered at the same time including the winds loads or the earthquakes.

During the hydrostatic test, one third of the designed wind loading will be
considered an actual representation for the hydrostatic loading test.
C. The allowable stress:
The maximum of the stress for the tensile is as inserted in the table in ANSI-B
31.3.
A. Longitudinal stress:
The maximum of the allowable stress for the pressure will not exceed the
following:
1. Maximum of the allowable stress for the tensile.
2. The compressing power that is specified during the using measures and that
are mentioned in the ASME code, eighth section.
B. Tank support edge:
The allowable tensile and also the compressing power that the tank will
constitute according to will also be applied for the tank support edge.
C. The expected earthquake stress by insertion with the stress resulting
from another loading will be limited by the following values:
1. The tensile stress will not exceed the power it gets from the material
regarding the temperature that is specified in the design. It will not also exceed
time-and-a-half of the maximum of the allowable tensile stress.
2. The pressure stress will not exceed the maximum of the allowable
compressing power.
D. Tank thickness
A. Containers will be designed according to the hydrostatic test with the water
in the tank during the operation mode. In this case, the maximum of the
membrane stress in the tank will not exceed 90% of the minimum extent of the
specified power that is obtained from the steel. It will not also exceed 100% of
the minimum of the power that is obtained from the Austenite iron or the nonferrous materials.
The suitable efficiency factor of the joints weld will be used in: the integrated
insulation, weld cover or additional thickness will be made for increasing the
thickness that is required for the power. It will be considered effective only
when calculating the hydrostatic stress test.
The maximum of the container inclination for all the loads, except the
earthquake will not exceed 100/H in which (H) is the length total.
B. The minimum of the allowable oxidization will be as follows:
For the containers that are made of the carbonic steel or mixed materials, the
allowable minimum of the oxidization is 13mm.
Containers that are made of the middle steel alloys or the aluminum alloys, the
allowable minimum of the oxidization is 8mm.
E. Manufacturing
Manufacturing will be according to the ASME code, the eighth section. The
additional requirements were included in this item.
F. Examination and Testing:
Examination will be made according to the ASME code, the eighth section.
The additional requirements were included in this item.
G. Pressure Test:

A. Hydrostatic Test:
The hydrostatic test will be implemented by using the water. Each pressure
container will subject to the hydrostatic pressure test to the manufacturer board
knowledge.
The hydrostatic test will take 6 hours as minimum, while the pressure test
should not be less than time-and-a-half of the design pressure.
B. All the tests should be made according to the ASME code, eighth
section.
C. Protection against corrosion
Flows of the pressure tanks should be inside lines of the resin material. For the
drinking water station, tanks will be painted from the inside and outside by zinc
and it will also be painted from the outside by painting as specified by the
manufacturer board and as approved by the engineer.
Systems of protection against oxidization and corrosion, as necessary, will be
specified by the manufacturer company and approved by the engineer.
D. Marks
It will be installed on each pressure container; a steel board that at least
contains the following data:
- The factory name
- production date
- Nominal capability
- Pressure operation
- Pressure test
- Weight of the empty container
- Weigh of the container filled with water
- The internal diameter
- Height
15.9. Protection system against the surging pressure:
Based on the design standards, the operation pattern and the longitudinal sector
of the main transmission lines that are included in the pumping station, the
contractor should specify the needs and the type of the necessary protection
equipment against the surging pressure for the pumping station in the different
operation patterns and under the hard situation of the power failure. It should
be provided; a shadow building for containing this equipment (if necessary).
The surging pressure analysis should be made according to the least technology
that uses the computer techniques.
The power and capacity of the suggested equipment should be enough for
bearing the exciter stresses during the surging pressure.
The surging tanks should be made, if necessary, and tested according to the
standards of ASTM/ASME and the code of the special practices in the pressure
tanks.
The equipment location should be within the limits of the pumping station as
stated on the charts of the general site.
15.9.1. Standards of the allowable noise:

The allowable noise that the workers may expose to is stated in the decibel (A)
format and the sound pressure level of the independent high extent (L). Neither
the decibel (A) level, nor the high extent levels should be exceeded.

Exposure to The
Noise
Allowable
Level
Decibel (A)
Place where 90
the workers
exposure to
noise
Control
70
room
and
offices

The Acoustic Pressure Level at the Noise


Extent
Frequency(Hz)
62.5 125 250 500 1000 2000 8000
100 90
95
85
85
85
85

85

80

75

70

70

70

70

The allowable level in the living rooms is 55 Decibel (A), while in the full
surroundings of the pumping station or the limits of the station location should
not exceed 55 Decibel (A).
When more than a tool is running near to similar tool, the allowable sound
level should be decreased by rate:
Two units
2 Decibel
Three units
3 Decibel
Four units
3 Decibel
Five units
4 Decibel
Six units
4 Decibel
Seven units
5 Decibel
Eight units
5 Decibel
15.9.2. Documents
The following data for each equipment should be provided by the contractor:
- The high extent and the total acoustic power level (LP) in which including the
guide index with the suggested acoustic treatment and without it.
- The details of the suggested methods for treating the noise in which include
the data of decreasing the noise, the impact on the tools performance, etc.
15.9.3. Test measures for specifying the noise levels:
15.9.3.1. Test Requirements:
The device of measuring the voice level should be accurate according to DIN
45 633. It is supplied by the contractor.
The gauge of the measure devices is as recommended by the manufacturer
company. It is made before and after testing each system (device) makes noise.
The
observer
should
attend
all
the
tests.
The whole area that is around each test point should be surveyed by the

microphone for being sure that the acoustic pressure level represents the direct
near area.
Measures should be taken in some of the positions that are at equal distances
from each other. Such measure is taken in half of a circle that its center is the
noise focus.
The microphone is put at height by 1.5 meter above the ground and at distance
by 1.5 meter away from the walls in the minimum.
When it is found that the difference in the measure data around noise center is
higher than 5 Decibel, it should be taken; more measures in positions within the
area of the high noise levels for specifying the direction pivot more accurately.
15.9.3.2. Test Environments:
The measure devices are put during the tests in a way in which the air currents,
vibrations, the magnetic or electrical field and also the other odd factors that
may make change in the readings of the measure devices are avoided.
For finding the opposite noise of a specific piece of the equipment, it should be
considered the following:
- The noise level should be measured in the surrounding area while the
equipment is off.
- If the noise levels in the surroundings for each extent equal (10) Decibel or
more under the test levels, it is not necessary making corrections for the test
data.
- If the noise levels in the surroundings are between 3 and 10 Decibel under the
test levels, the corrections should be made.
- If the difference between the noise level in the surroundings and the test level
is less than 3 Decibel, the measure will not represent the noise. Hence, it will
not be accepted.
Readings should be taken at the first while the voice device works on the slow
speed. The visible average value of decibel (A) and the value of the frequency
should be recorded.
Hence, readings are noticed while the voice device works on the high speed. If
the time changes were larger than 5 decibel, the minimum and maximum
readings that are on the measure (A) and (C) should be recorded.
15.9.3.3. Tests Reports:
Before the experimental operation, the contractor prepares full report about the
test of the noise in the station during its work.
It is required testing the noise of the each device, if only the certified levels
were not available. In this case, the contractor provides the correctional
measure according to the engineers approval.
15.10. Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC):
15.10.1. General:
It includes planning, designing, supplying, installing, testing and the
experimental operation for the HVAC system through local air conditioners
that are installed inside covered containers located outside the building
(Packaged air Conditioners).
Designing HVAC should be according to the following standards:

-ASHRAE- American soci of Heating Refrigerating and Air conditioning


Engineers.
-AMCA- Air Moving and Conditioning Association.
-ANSI- American National Standards Institute.
- ARI- Air conditioning and Refrigeration institute.
-ASTM- American Society for Testing and Materials.
-NEMA- National Electrical Manufacturers Associatio.
-NFPA- National Fire Protection Association.
- SMACNA- Steel Metal Air Conditioning Contractors National Association.
15.10.2. Designing standards:
Buildings of the comprehensive village water project at Hail will be partly
provided with ventilation equipment and the air conditioning. Knowing, the
designing standards are the following climate conditions:
- During the summer period = 44C dry and relative humidity equal 35%
- During the winter period = 4C and the mercury storage in the temperature
scale is dry in which it should be expected heavy sand storms, it should be
provided; special measure devices for treating the air.
The rooms conditions should be according to the following table:
Fans. General:
Contractor is responsible for checking the values of resisting the air flow for
each of the equipment based on the provided equipment. In addition, providing
fans that are able to provide the required air amount when it works with the
actual total system resistance.
Fans should be tested according to the requirements of BS 848, also it should
be tested for securing the rate of the air size flow and the acoustic power level
that are specified in the contract documents.
Fans should be made according to the design that is completely developed. It
should also be able to bear pressures and stresses that are generated during the
continuous operation with the chosen load.
Fans should be installed by using the bolts, nuts and flanges, while all the
casting loading surfaces of the bolts heads and flanges are soft.
The hook retainers of the fans and engines should be provided with means that
forbid the hooks from rotation when the nuts are tensile.
The installations of the vibration resistance and the materials which its weight
is more than 20Kg should be provided with lugs-nails (for lifting) or other
lifting equipment that is manufactured as required.
All the columns and blades of the fan including the centrifugal fans of the pivot
flow and the mixed flow should be statically and dynamically weight.
All the fans that are of the pushing blades should be statically and dynamically
wright, if the diameter of the pushing blade equal 750mm or larger. The limits
of the vibration are according to the British standards 4675, the first part.
He fan bearings should be of a suitable type for the loads that are support
pivotal and half-diameter and also suitable for the installation position of the
fan.
The bearings covers should be cleaned in which it may be replaced without the
need to re-weight; moreover, protecting it from the dust. When it is provided

with points for oiling/ lubricating, it is designed in a way that prevent it damage
by the extra lubrication.
For the systems of oiling, the bearing cover should be provided with a tank that
is suitable for the oil. It should also contain filling block which should be
sealed against the oil infiltration and anti-dust.
Systems other than the complete loss should contain drain plug that is could be
easily reached to. All the means of oiling/lubricating the bearings should be at a
place that is could be easily maintained at.
15.10.3. Centrifugal Fans:
Unless otherwise is stated, the centrifugal fans that consume more than 7.5 K at
the fan column should be of the type that has wing blades to the back which
have complete ventilation alternator by no less than 0.75.
Fans covers should be manufactured in which allow pulling the turbine after
installing the fan. Fans other than that in the air treatment units, it should be
provided with outlet joints of flanges and inlet joints unless otherwise is
mentioned.
Regardless the negative pressures that are more than 500 Pascal, the inlet joints
should have flanges.
It should be put; a drain point blocked the key at the lower point in the fans
covers. The fans covers should be provided with the connecting plates that
could be dismantled and which should contain anti-air blocks manufactured as
required.
The measures of the connecting plates with limit in which the process of
cleaning and maintaining the turbine are easily made.
Turbines are made of the flexible steel or the aluminum alloy. It should also be
of a structure that is certified, riveted, welded or other, and have strengthening
crossing and cover for protecting the pivot.
15.10.4. The pivotal flow fans:
Covers of the pivotal flow fans should be made of the flexible steel or the
aluminum alloy; moreover, it should be strengthened and provided with tensile,
as necessary, for avoiding the noise and vibration.
The installation legs should be provided, as necessary, for tying it with the
screw nails on seat or the supports.
The outlet and inlet paths should be ended in flanges to facilitate the
dismantling. The fans that are installed inside the conditioner paths, the fan
cover length should be larger than the mutual length of the turbine (turbines)
and the electrical engine (engines). The electrical joints to the engines are
passing through an outlet connecting box that is fixed on the cover.
Impellers should be made of the steel, aluminum or plastic. Blades are fixed on
the hub, or the blades and hub are formed in one piece. The hub should be fixed
on the fan column by a key. Blades are of air streamline sector with laminar
flow. Its step may be replaced when it is shown.
Fans of the pivotal flow should be installed on a ring tire or Diaphram plate as
stated. The impellers should be made of the flexible steel, aluminum or plastic.
Blades are fixed on the hub, or the blades and hub are informed of one piece.

Fans that are used in the ceiling suction units should meet the requirements that
are suitable for the previous items which are related to the fans generally and
special types in the fans. The protective metal covers and the seats are made of
materials that are resistant to the weather conditions and the sunrays, also
suitable for the fan position.
The cover is also resistant for the weather conditions in a way that facilitate
installing it on the buildings structure.
It should be provided; an entrance for the sufficient reach to the electrical
feeding terminal and the oiling/lubricating points. This is made by the
protective metal covers that have hinged or through another way as suitable.
It should be provided; Backdraft damper and protective barriers for against
entering the birds. It is made of a window which it is hole does not exceed
25mm as an integral part with the unit.
15.10.5. Air filters. General:
The filters should be complete with the strong fixing tires that are made as
required and that should not also be distorted when it is under work. All the
filters should be distributed in which facilitate the cleaning, dismantle,
removing and re-installing.
The sealed blocks are installed for reducing the least extent of the air
infiltration around the filters, knowing that it should not be reduced; the
effective of the sealed blocks by the periodical dismantle and re-installing the
filters.
15.10.6. Works of the air conditioning paths:
Works of the air conditioning works should be matching with the following
least issues regarding warming, ventilation, the air conditioning with the
additions or the required adjustments in these specifications or at any other
place in the contract documents:
SMACNA low velocity Duct Standarde
Roughness and the internal obstructions of the air flow (other than the draft
dampers, separators, the fans blades, etc.) will not be accepted in the works of
the air conditioning paths that are made of plate materials.
Also, the sharp terminals or the sharp angles on the external side of the air
conditioning paths works, the connection pieces and the supports will not be
accepted.
When using the other fixing units is unpractical, the screw self-bolts may be
used under the engineers approval.
It should be provided; the weather resistant protection at each point that the air
conditioning path channel penetrate a ceiling or external wall.
Joints of the air conditioning path between the independent parts of the air
handing/treatment group, and also the joints between any installations of the air
conditioning paths works should be made by angular flanged joints.
It should be installed; flexible joints on the joints of the fan outlet and inlet and
at any other place on the air conditioning paths work which it is stated.
Joints should have the same the cross-sector contest of the fan outlet, inlet or
apart of the air conditioning path. The connections pivots of the flexible joints
should be co-axial.

15.10.7. Dampers:
Each function, damper type and also the general requirements of the structure
should be made according to the specification of the HVAC works DW/141,
unless otherwise is mentioned.
Dampers that are manually and machinery operated should have method that
shows the blades position from the outside. The manual-operation blades
should contain a device that shows the position of all the set blades after the
final gauge. It should be marked by a mark that could not be removed at the
adjustment and setting device.
The fire dampers should be put in a position and it should also be made of type
in which facilitate the releasing process (Locking mode) and the re-setting
(opening) for the test purposes.
15.10.8. The terminal devices of the air releasing holes:
A test is made for estimating the capability of the air releasing holes, and also
defining the terms that are used like these devices according to the British
standards 4773, parts (1) and (2).
The measure of all the air releasing holes should be fixed on the stated
dimensions, and it should also be suitable for the size flow rate of the air, air
spread and estimating the required noise.
==441==
Aluminum should be the material of manufacture. All the items should be
protected against corrosion, and supplied after finishing.
The external surrounding terminals should be provided for the air releasing
holes with positive anti-infiltration insulation, except what is installed on the
works of the uncovered air conditioning paths.
15.10.9. Each grille cover and the Registr device:
Each grille cover and the Registr device should have two groups of the
adjustable blades separately; one is horizontal and the other is vertical.
In addition, each registr device should be provided with air flow regulator that
is of the multi opposed-direction blades type unless otherwise is mentioned.
All the blades and the air flow regulators should be adjustable from the side of
the grille cover or the registr device.
It should be provided; one group of the tools/ equipment for the grille covers
and the register devices that varies between (1) to (10), while two groups for
(11) to (24), and three groups for (25) and above. Each grille cover of the
suction air may have either one group of the blades, the vertical or horizontal
sharp bends, grille or as stated.
In addition, each registr of the suction air should be provided with air flow
regulator. It should also be of the multiple opposite-directions type that may be
operated from the side of the registr device.
15.10.10. Diffusers:
Diffusers should be made of the aluminum, while such diffusers that are
installed on the ceilings should have anti-smoke frames. PAN diffusers may be
provided, unless if they were of the conic type.

Each diffuser should be provided with air flow regulator. When connecting the
diffuser directly with short air conditioning path of straight length that is less
than or equal two diameters, it should be used; equilizing deflector.
15.10.11. Air outlet and inlet holes:
Unless otherwise is mentioned, the grating grilled covers that are installed on
the external walls at the air outlet and inlet should be of the anti-sand type
(sand catcher).
The contractor should supply and fix a barrier of the galvanized grilled from
the neck-shape grilles of diameter by 20mm, wire of diameter by at least 2mm
and completed with a frame of the galvanized steel bars that have fixing lugs or
the flatten iron that is installed on the internal surface of the hole.
15.10.12. Protective:
Protective should be in conformity with the recommendations of the British
standards 5304. It is installed at all the air outlet uncovered holes and the
suction from the fans, and also all the shapes of the uncovered power
transmission systems including the couplers that are run by belts.
Protective should be used and installed for preventing reaching to the risk parts
of the devices. The protection equipping and structure should include strength
and solidity. It should not be available dismantling any protective or the
connecting plate without using a tool.
In the fans, protective should be made of the fans manufacturer company or
under its approval. It should also be made of galvanized steel wire.
In the means of running by belts, the protective should be made of galvanized
steel wire in which its diameter should be by no less than 2.5 mm that is
installed on a strong galvanized steel bar or on an angular frame.
The grills measure and /or the protection position should be prevent entering
the fingers and toughing it for any danger part inside the protective.
The alternative structure of the protective may be made of the galvanized plates
which its thickness is no less than 0.8 mm and strengthened as necessary in
which suits the strong container.
The examination holes that could be dismantled and installed should be
installed in the protective for a allowing taking the readings of the speed meter
(Tachometer) for both of the rotation column and the operated one, and also for
testing the belt tensile extent.
The protective measures should be considered including the dimensions,
positions of the examination holes and the limits of the engine stay position.
15.10.3. Fans running pulleys:
The fans that are run by belts should be provided with suitable pulleys for
continuing the used running.
Pulleys may use separated thin collars or any certified type for running a fan to
30 Kilowatt. Pulleys are fixed on the fan column by a key. Reaching to the
keys should be easy for enabling pulling, fixing and installing it accurately.
When using the keys without ribbed heads, it should be punched and screwed
from the inside for installing the withdraw nail on it.
15.10.14. Painting and putting the identifiable marks:

The visible works of the air conditioning path (including that is existing inside
the station rooms) should be painted in which a down paint layer should be
coated and no less than two final paint layers also.
The surfaces that absorb the painting, it should also be painted by foundation
paint layer, knowing that all the paints should be in conformity with the
surfaces that it will be painted on.
The paint color (or the paints colors) should be according to the engineers
instructions and they are chosen from the group that is included in BS 4800.
The distribution services should be of regular colors and also provided with
symbols for the definition purposes.
The ID Coding of the air conditioning paths works including the thermal
insulation should be in conformity with HVAC specification DW/141.
The main color and the Calour Coding of the pipes works including the thermal
insulation should be according to BS 1710.
The non-insulated pipes works, also the painted thermal insulation or the
unpainted should all be marked by lines which its width is at least by 25mm, or
by colorful triangles that are put at specific distances between each one and the
other. It is colored at the site for allowing and facilitating knowing the services,
especially which are next to the equipment positions at the services crosses and
the wall penetration cases.
In addition to the painting lines and the colorful triangles, all the pipes works
and the air conditioning paths works in the station rooms and the services area;
whether insulated or not, should be marked in a clear and readable way, and
also white or black triangles for stating the type, service, direction and flow of
the liquid.
Services are stating as follows:
Feeding air: S
Back air: R
Clear air: FA
Suction air: E.
15.10.15. Vibration-preventive means:
All the dynamic machines should be insulated from the buildings structure by
the vibration preventives and/or the vibration prevention means that are
particularly designed for the required purpose and chosen to be suitable for the
machines.
When using the vibration preventive materials that are of the elastic plates, the
contractor should supply the materials and then he will be responsible for its
right positions.
All the other vibration insulation should be supplied and installed by the
contractor. Transmission of the insulation preventives and the vibration
prevention materials should not exceed 0.2
For fans and the air distribution systems, the flexible joints should be installed
for reducing to the least of the vibration transmission.
It should be cared; choosing and installing the equipment and tools for being
sure that the noise level in the served spaces in any next buildings and within
the station rooms does not exceed the accepted maximum noise level.

In the services spaces, because of the equipment and tools, the noise level
should be in conformity with the recommended standards that are mentioned in
the guide (IHVE Guide 1970, Book A, Table A 1.11), unless otherwise is
stated.
15.10.16. The automatic control devices. General:
The control devices are of the electronic slices (cards) type that has the
integrated circuits.
All the items of the control tools, within any system and among any systems,
are in conformity with the tools that are controlled.
The position of the control tools items should always be easily reachable for
the maintenance and adjusting purposes without obstructions.
Anyhow, when installing the items of the control tools normally at positions
that are easily reachable within filled areas, the control devices should be
provided with means that obstruct abusing it.
The control system should be designed in which if the electricity power is
interrupted or any other negative incidental matter happened in the operation
conditions, the options that are in the system obstruct any delays without
aggravating the critical conditions
15.10.17. Control devices:
Generally, the control devices should be equipped with the electric plugs that
are suitable for the flatten installation or on the seat plate in the control and
observation plates.
The suitable wave for each subsequence stage and also the dead part between
each subsequence stage should be adjustable in the control device. The
separated guide lamps that are in the face of the control device should show the
outlet signals mode individually and also the position of each device that is
controlled. The lamps flame should be suitable for the signals and the tools that
are controlled. Each electric switch of an outlet stage should be able to choose
any of the direct effect or the opposite one for each outlet stage.
15.10.8. The weather-resistant external independent air conditioning units:
15.10.18.1. General:
The conditioner that is of the type which is installed on the surface should be
designed, built, estimated it power and tested according to ARI 210 and 360
and ASSI Z 21.47.
Units should have capabilities that meet all the stated and specified design
conditions. The unit that is of the independent type which is collected in the
factory cooling or cooling and heating should feed one area, and also suitable
for installing outside the buildings.
The conditioners group should constitute of cooling compressor or more of the
electrical engines, cooling coils , condensers, fans, filters, heat coils, control
wires joints and the pipes in which all are collected in the factory in a container
that is weather resistant and installed on a seat of the structural iron. It is also
ready for connecting in the site with the accessories and the air conditioning
paths. The conditioner group unit should be strong enough and equipped in
which allow handing it over by the lifting lever.

The unit is provided with remote-control board, the surface moldings, sloping
flattening for flashing the water and air transmission box.
15.10.18.2. Performance rates:
The cooling capacity of the unit should meet the requirements of both of the
sensible temperature and the stated total temperature. When choosing the unit
measure, it should be put; the right variance for the sensible temperature to the
total temperature for meeting the required sensible cooling capacity.
Introductions should contain the choosing data from the catalog that consider
the proportion of the sensible temperature to the total temperature, cases of the
air that reach at the evaporator and that entering at the condenser.
15.10.18.3. Units Containers:
Containers are made of steel that its thickness is no less than (1) mm with
plates for the examination holes that could be dismantled, installed, and
completely resistant to the weather conditions for the external installation, and
also provided with ties and properly strengthened.
Plates and doors of the examination holes should be installed for examination
and reaching to all the internal parts. Container should be provided with
reinforced points of the supports that are used for installing the unit.
Joints should be anti-penetration (Water and air-proof). The steel plates that are
painted by zinc and galvanized by submersion at the hot (of fixing and strong
coherence) should be made according to ASTM A 527 in which its commercial
weight is G 90. This is followed by up painting layer of the certified epoxy.
Units that feed the one area should be equipped in which withdraw the air
through the filter, heating and cooling paths. The air may be blown or
withdrawn through the heating paths.
15.10.18.4. Compressors:
Compressors are of the sealing type that is in conformity with the standards of
(ARI 520) with the minimum of the equipment and degraded attachments of
these standards.
The compressor speed should not exceed 1750 round/minute; this is for the
compressors which its capacity exceed 70 Kilowatt. They are provided with a
cylinder unloading for reducing the automatic capacity by at least 50%; this is
for the capacity which its capacity exceed 35 Kilowatt. Knowing that the
compressors should start without loads.
If the compressors were standard for the manufacturer company, it may be
provided two compressors or more (but not more than four compressors)
instead of the individual compressor of the cylinder unloading.
In this case, it should be achieved; reducing the capacity by subsequent
operation for the compressors or by using both of the two methods. Each
compressor is provided with an independent cooling circuit.
If the compressors were parallel installed, it should be provided by no less than
two independent cooling circuits. Each compressor should have devices to
protect it from the short cycling, at every time the compressors are stop by the
security devices.
A pump dawn cycle of the non-cycling start type is installed for each
compressor of capacity by 35Kilowatt and more. They are also provided with

vibration preventives, while the units are provided with the hot phase silencer
for reducing the noise from the two pulses.
15.10.18.5. The compressor engine and the engine start-up device:
The compressor engine should be suitable for the electric power properties and
matching with NEMA MG2; moreover, it should be of fixing speed, and of the
squirrel-cage inductive type, sealing, low launch current, high-torque type and
that is provided with start-up device of the magnetic type that is directly
connected with container of general purposes.
The compressor is run by belt of (V) shape cross-section. It may also be run
through direct joint by flexible coupler. However, the flexible couplers are not
required on the sealed units. The running belts should be of (V) shape sector
and designed in which it should not be less than 150% of the operational engine
capability. The flexible couplers should not require any oiling/lubricating.
15.10.18.6. Cooling idler circuits:
The full circuit of the cooling idler should be free from the humidity, vacuum
of air and filled with the cooling idler and oil in the factory. Knowing, filling
with oil that is made in the factory should be of the full quantity that is
necessary for operation.
15.10.18.7. Condensers that are cooled by air:
Condensers that are cooled by water should be put inside the unit cover and
consist of the coils, fans and the electric engine. The temperature of the full
cooling materials should not exceed 75C.
It is possible using the condenser that get cool by the air for storing the cooling
materials (liquid) instead of transmitting it to the evaporator. If the capacity of
the condenser storage was by more than 20% of the completely full system, the
condenser should be provided with a start-up control unit that allows starting
operating the condenser regardless the low surrounding temperatures. Such unit
should work independently from the low temperature of the system, every time
the minimum surrounding temperature was less than the designing withdraw
temperature of the evaporator coil.
The condensers coils should be of the type that has extended flatten fins. Such
pipes are not welded and made of the copper and also the. Such pipes are not
welded and made of the copper and also the fins are made of the copper.
15.10.18.8. The condensation coils of the multi compressors:
It should be provided; an independent condenser to cool the air for each
compressor existing in the multi compressors equipment. If the compressors
were parallel installed, it should be provided; no less than two independent
circuits.
It may also be used; joint cover, if each coil is provide with independent
control devices for operating the fans of the coil; each one individually. All the
coils should be provided with sub cooler.
The condensation coils should be of the type that has extended flatten fins and
pipes. Such pipes are not welded and made of the copper with copper fins.
Fins are welded or machinery fixed on the pipes and installed in metal cover.
The air coil should be chosen under the water for finding if there was any
infiltration. After testing, the coils are dried for removing the humidity, and

blocks are also put for preventing the odd materials. Coils are vacuumed of air
and tightly blocked in the factory.
Fans should be of the centrifugal type or the pivotal push as more suitable for
using. Fans should be directly connected with the engine column, or indirectly
connected with the engine through running belt of (V) shape-sector. It should
be provided with grating pulley could be set and adjusted. Fans should be
dynamically and statically balanced.
Engines should be matching with NEMA MG2, while the engine starters are in
conformity with NEMA ICS. Engines that are completely surrounding by cover
and that are existing inside a container should be fully protected against the
weather.
The engine starter are of the magnetic type that is directly connected with a
container of general purposes or weather-resistant. The thermal protection
should be of the manual or automatic type that of returning to the starting
mode.
15.10.18.9. Control devices with condensers:
A control device should be provided in the sufficient pressure to guarantee the
condensation temperature for the system proper operation; this is at all the
surroundings temperature until Zero C.
- Air size control device:
When the pressure of the cooling liquid drain gets lower, the volume control
damper should be equal for setting the air flow on the condensation coil.
It may be provided in the fan engine, a control device of various speeds and
constituting of circuit-integrated electronic card instead of the volume damper;
this is for controlling the air flow on the coil.
It is possible providing the condensers that are of multi fans to the control
device in the fan cycle for setting the round for a fan of the two, two of fans of
three or four of five fans as responding for the external temperature.
Control should be set to minimum by 35 C to the condensation temperature of
the full cooling material (liquid).
15.10.18.10. Drainage baths:
The drainage baths should be installed under the cooling coil group. It should
be of enough size for containing all the condensing water that leave the coil at
the highest announced nominal speed.
The bath should have at least one drainage joint at low point in the drainage
bath itself.
15.10.18.11. Insulation:
Insulation should be supplied of thickness and condensation enough for
preventing forming the water condensation on the unit cover from the air inlet
at the coils to the air outlet in the unit, including such structure angles that are
exposure to the air current.
Insulation should meet the requirements of the standard (NFPA 90A).In
addition, it should be protected against the wear and exfoliation with the air
currents impact.

Bath of collecting the condensing water should be insulated by waterproof


insulation of enough thickness for preventing forming the condensation water
on the external surface in the surrounding conditions that will be faced.
15.10.18.12. Evaporates fans:
Evaporates fans should be of the type that is curved to the front or the
centrifugal type that is sloped to the back. It is particularly designed to be
suitable for the operation pressure. Fans should be provided with the adjustable
engine installation seat that has locker for fixing the seat in the suitable
position.
Fans should have adjustable pitch pulleys. Such pulleys are chosen at the
approximate middle point of the adjustable extent. The fans columns should not
pass by its first critical speed, when the unit reaches to the estimative rate of the
rounds/minute numbers. The fans units should have sealing bearings that is
permanent oiling/lubricating ball or cylinder.
The fans groups should be dynamically and statically balanced inside the fan
cover and the final group. The fans engines should be in conformity with the
standards of NEMA MG, while the engine starters with the standards of
NEMA ICSI. Engines are of the type that is fully put inside container. For the
engine starters, it should be of the magnetic type that is directly connected and
that of general purposes container and weather conditions resistant.
15.10.18.13. Coils groups:
All the cooling and heating coils should be put inside joint or independent
cover as required. The coil group should be designed in which allow
dismantling the coils and to have silencers that prevent passing the air from
around the coils.
The cooling coils groups should have baths for containing the condensing
water, and also drainage joints of sufficient measure for getting rid of the
condensation water on the coils.
Cover and the drainage bath should be insulated as specified above. When
installing the coils of re-heating, it should be made the measures for the
synchronizing humidity removal and re-heating at the announced cooling
maximum nominal speed.
Cooling and heating coils should be matching with the standards of ARI 410,
Heating and Electric Coil.
15.10.18.14. Filters boxes:
The filters boxes should be provided with; either doors of hinged or plates
could be dismantled and installed. The filters boxes should have shelves for the
flatten multi patterns filters and the angular patterns.
15.10.18.15. Mixture Box:
The mixture boxes should be of normal measure that is suits the main unit. It
should contain edged holes of equal measures in which each hole has a
measure for treating the full air treatment.
Holes should be provided with dampers that are of the opposite-edges types.
The dampers columns should also be connected together with continuous
connection bar. In addition, the dampers are prepared for the manual or

automatic operation in which when one of them start locking the opening mode
that the other one starts opening the locking mode that it is currently in.
15.10.18.16. Control System:
It should be provided; full control system inside locked container as required
for the safe and suitable operation for each unit including the switches of the
low and high pressure cutting, heating/cooling thermostat with heat-off-cool
switch and operation-to-fan switches that are installed on the automatic fixings
at the temperature of the thermostat.
The other control devices including the engine starters and the security devices
should be installed inside the container. All its joints are of extended wires in
the factory.
15.10.18.17. Control devices of the automatic temperature:
Control devices of the automatic temperatures including the materials, control
tools, installation and the operation subsequent should be according to ASHRE
Standard Section 15900 Control and Instrumentation.
15.10.18.18. The electrical heating coils:
The electrical coils should be matching with the requirements of UL 1096.
Heater should be of the fins type. The properties of the electric power are by
Kilowatt, while the number of the circuits as stated.
Both of the air flow switches and the thermal cutter of the manual override
should be provided for locking the electric power of the coils in case of
interrupting the air flow.

==453==

The sixteenth chapter


The installation and electrical equipment
16-1 The general requires of the design and manufacture of electrical systems.
16-1-1 The work scope
16-1-2 The standards
16-1-3 the environmental circumstances:
16-1-4 The system specifications:
16-1-5 the requirements of the design and implements:
16-1-6 The work limits:
16-1-7 The paint:
16-1-8 to store once the arrival:
16-1-9 The schemes and files:
16-2 The electrical keys group with the medium voltage:
16-2-1 The work scope:
16-2-2 the standards:
16-2-3 The work circumstances:
16-2-4 The equipment specifications:
16-2-2 the test:
16-2-2 the test:
16-4-3 the specifications of the work:
16-4-4 the evaluative designed data:
16-4-5 the specifications of the system:
16-4-6 the design and structure:
16-4-6-1 the general design:
16-4-7 the properties of the equipment:
16-4-8 the installation instructions
16-4-9 the test
16-4-9 the test
16-5 the equipment of the continues current
16-5-1 the work scope
16-5-2 the standard
16-5-3 the operating circumstances
16-5-4 the bases of the design
16-5-6 the design and the structure:
16-5-7 the fixation
16-5-8 the test:
16-5-8-1 the examination and test in the factory
16-5-8-2 the tests of the quality
16-5-8-3 the testes in the site
16-5-9 the accessories
16-6 the prevention system of the power cut.
16-6-1 the work scope
16-6 the prevention system of the power cut.

16-6-1 the work scope


16-6 the prevention system of the power cut.
16-6-1 the work scope
16-6 the prevention system of the power cut.
16-6-1 the work scope
16-6-2 the standards:
16-6-3 the operating circumstances
16-6-4 the evaluative data of the design:
16-6-4 the evaluative data of the design:
16-6-5-1 the operating
16.6.6. Designing and Manufacturing:
16.6.6.1. Transformer
16.6.6.2. Voltage stabilizer
16.6.6.3. Transformation device
16.6.6.4. The distribution box of the current-interruption preventive
16.6.7. Fixing
16.6.8. Test
16.6.8.1. Examination and test at the factory
16.6.8.2. Quality tests
16.6.8.3. Tests at the site
16.6.9. Accessories
16.7. The electrical installations for the buildings
16.7.1. Work Scope
16.7.2. Standards
16.7.3. Operation conditions
16.7.4. Designing virtual data
16.7.5. Work limit
16.7.6. Installations description
16.7.7. Lightening levels
16.7.8. Lightening types
16.7.9. Installations types
16.7.10. Designing and the materials
16.7.10.1. Cables and wires
16.7.10.2. Pipes
16.7.10.3. Jacks
16.7.10.4. Switches, buttons, the terminal boxes
16.7.10.5. Housing distributions
16.7.10.6. Fire-resistant walls
16.7.11. Protection systems
16.7.12. Light protection
16.7.13. Telephone system
16.7.14. The air system
16.7.5. Doors system
16.7.16. Group of the telephones tools
16.7.17. Test
16.7.18. Accessories

16.7.19. Specifying the installations


16.8. The external lightening
16.8.1. Field
16.8.2. Standards
16.8.3. Operation Conditions
16.8.4. Design rates data
16.8.5. Tasks and Building
16.8.5.1. Lightening systems
16.8.5. Tasks and Building
16.8.5.1. Lightening systems
16.8.5. Tasks and Building
16.8.5.1. Lightening systems
16.8.5.4. Cables and the ground
16.8.6. Installations and connection
16.8.7. Test
16.8.8. Accessories
16.9. Cables and their expansion
16.9.1. Field
16.9.2. Standards
16.9.2. Standards
16.9.4. Designing requirements
16.9.5. Preparation for the cables expansion
16.9.5.1. Transportation and discharge
16.9.5.2. General Requirements
16.9.6. Cables trenches
16.9.6.1. The trench depth
16.9.6.2. Bed and Coverage
16.9.6.3. Distances between the cables in the trench:
16.9.7. The pipes path
16.9.7.1. Wall cross
16.10.7.2. Another crossings
16.9.8. Cables Fixing
16.9.8.1. Number and the individuals
16.9.8.2. Cables pulling
16.9.8.3. Extending the cables in the buildings:
16.9.8.4. Cables and its marks
16.9.8.5. Connection boxes:
16.9.8.6. Supports and installation
16.9.9. Tests and examination
16.10. Grounding
16.10.1. Work scope
16.10.2. Standards
16.10.3. The soil conditions
16.10.4. Designing requirements
16.10.5. Materials and building
16.10.5.1. The ground materials

16.10.5.2. The ground network:


16.10.5.3. Extending the ground network
16.10.5.4. The ground paths air
16.10.5.5. The ground system of the substations complex:
16.10.5.6. The power expenditures
16.10.5.7. The cables pipes and the cables
16.10.5.8. Transformers
16.10.5.9. Establishing the pipelines
16.10.5.10. Buildings and the steel construction for the metal blocks.
16.10.5.11. The lightening protection
16.10.5.12. Marks
16.10.5.13. The work achievement:
16.10.6. Test
16.11. Fire alarm system
16.11.1. The work scope
16.11.2. The system description
16.11.3. The building and design requirements
16.11.3.1. General requirements
13.11.3.1.1. Codes and standards
16.11.3.1.2. Installation
16.11.3.1.3. Electric power feeding
16.11.4. The components description
16.11.4.1. Fire alarm board
16.11.4.2. The observation sub-board
16.11.4.3. The smoke detectors
16.11.4.3.1. Function
16.11.4.3.2. Construction
16.11.4.4. The control switches of the fire alarm
16.11.4.5. The fire alarm horn
16.11.4.6. The external signal treatment
16.11.5. Work limits
16.11.6. Tests
16.12. The electric engines, Starting-up and the system of the speed organizer
16.12.1. Work scope
16.12.2. Standards
16.12.3. Operation conditions
16.12.4. The engine specifications:
16.12.5. The specified design data
16.12.6. Starting-up and the speed setting system
16.12.6.1. Transformers
16.12.7. Design and construction
16.12.7.1. Cooling method
16.12.7.2. The constructer styles
16.12.7.3. Vibration
16.12.7.5. Protection
16.12.7.6. The dimensions specifications

16.12.7.7. Frame and Cover


16.12.7.7. The column
16.12.7.8. Holders
16.12.7.9. Insulation
16.12.7.10. The additional devices and the measure tools
16.12.7.11. The terminal boxes
16.12.7.12. The local control box
16.12.7.13. The boards of the estimative values
16.12.7.14. Painting works
16.12.8. Test
16.12.8.1. Examination and test in the factory
16.12.8.2. Tests at the site
16.12.9. Accessories
16.13.1. Work scope
16.13.2. Standards
16.13.3. The operation conditions
16.13.4. The specifications of the equipment
16.13.4.4. Constructer requirements
16.14. Test
16.14.1. Examination and test inside the factory
16.14.2. Quality tests
16.14.3. Testing in the site
16.14.4. Accessories
16.15. Revision
16.15.1. Work scope
16.15.2. Operation conditions
16.15.3. Standards

==458==
The sixteenth chapter
The installation and electrical equipment
16-1 The general requires of the design and manufacture of electrical

systems.
16-1-1 The work scope

This section covers the general requires that is related to the design and
manufacture of electrical systems of the project.
16-1-2 The standards

The work that relates to the electrical ability system should be planned, and its
manufacture and installation should be made, according to the following such,
the most modern systems, standards, the regulatory laws and regulations:
If there are contradictions between the specification of tender, and the
regulatory standards, laws and regulations, the best is the specification of
tender:
The recommendation
IEC (International Electrotechnical commission)
The regulatory regulations
BS - (the British standards)
The regulatory regulations
VDE (Verbond Deutcher Elektrotechniker e.v)
DIN the groups of systems and laws
(Deutch Institute For Normung)
"The public data of the nitration of the electrical ability for the major energy
consumers"
Further, all other laws of the union electrical Saudi company (SCICO),
according to the required electrical ability for nutrition systems, and to the
requires to interfere with SCICO equipment.
16-1-3 the environmental circumstances:

The equipment of the nutrition systems of the electrical ability for the
continuous operation of should be designed and manufactured by the full load,
and it will be made in the following climatic and environmental conditions.
The environmental circumstances may be classification as follows:
(458)
The external circumstances:

The ambient temperature


maximum+46 Celsius degree

The relative humidity


30 45 %

The altitude (Aero)


900

1000 m

The internal circumstances:


It has been taken into consideration that the internal chamber should be in
general air conditioning or ventilation. The ambient temperature of the
chamber subjects to the chamber classification. Anyway, if there is technical
failure in the air conditioning or ventilation system, the equipment of nutrition
of electrical ability should be suitable for the good word which is under the
national circumstances.
The equipment of nutrition of electrical ability should be designed especially as
specified in the detailed specifications for the internal areas which have hard
environmental circumstances, such water jet and hard climate.
The equipment and supplied materials of the external installation should have
good isolation and additional strength which is opposite the climate that is
holding salts, sands and sandstorms.
16-1-4 The system specifications:

The general specifications of the nutrition system of electrical ability and


contract limits are built in the schemes.
16-1-4-1 The levels of effort (voltage):-The nutrition net with the voltage (power) and the overhead lines "LADY
STICK".
3X 13,8 K.F
The levels of effort (voltage) the

operation of the station:


The converter of the pump nutrition: 13,8 K.F to 1 K.F, 3 FAZ, 60 hertz.
The converter of the pump nutrition: 13,8 K.F to 220\380 K.F, 3 FAZ,
60 hertz.
16-1-4-2 the protection against the electrical shocks:
All equipment and electrical installations is saved against the electrical
shock, if there is natural operation or failure condition, in according with
standards, such 0101 IEC, VDE 0100 AND "VDE, or similar and
certified standards.
The production against the electrical is achieved by automatic lock for
the nutrition current, if there is any damage.
(459)
The installations which have 1000 V should be protected. This protection will
be achieved by the usage of balanced connector and protective connector. The
balanced connector and protective connector will be connected together in the
board of law voltage. The installations which have 1000 V should be protected

through the usage of balanced connector and protective separated connector. .


The installations which have more than 1000 V, it will have only the protective
grounding connector.
If there is a damage of separating between living part of the current and the
connected part of the uncovered current, it is necessary to keep that, there isn't
any effort, which is more than the conventional voltage"50 V", touches any
part of the installation for safety.
16-1-4-3 The mechanical protection:
It is very important to use the protection type of DIN 40 050 or IP55 or its
equivalent at least, if there is equipment of external installation, equipment of
internal installation in the building, and water jet. It is necessary to request
protection type of IP 67 or its equivalent, in according with DIN 40 050, if
there is the equipment which is in cannulas (pipes), cables pipes, or passages.
16-1-4-4 extinction of the radio interference:
The extinction of the radio interference should be for all equipment and devices
which belong to level N, in according with VDE 0875 or its equivalent.
16-1-5 the requirements of the design and implements:

The specified and dependent requirements in the detailed specifications and the
followings points are generally applicable to all equipment and the components
of the nutrition system of electrical ability.
The nutrition systems of the electrical ability and its various compounds should
be designed, engineered, manufactured and installed, In order to be able to
work under the climatic and environmental circumstances and to bear
continuously the conventional currant. Further, to bear the currents outage of
the maximal protective short circle and the following currants of the short
circle which belong to the thermic and mechanical voltage. It will be without
any damage, disintegration, dangerous rise in the temperature.
Finally, all equipment and devices which are part of the nutrition system of the
electrical ability designed through the usage of the most modern technics with
good quality.
The components of the nutrition of electrical ability should be designed to live
minimum 50 years, when they work with the evaluative data under the
prevalent circumstance in the installation area.
(460)
Regardless of the considerations which are derived from the current design, the
electrical equipment such, converters, the boards of the law and medium
voltage, connectors, cables, etc, they should be calculate. Further, it will
contain available additional ability that its quantity is 20%.

16-1-5-1 The electrical extensions:


The circle of internal electrical extensions in the various electrical boards,
cables and control stores, which is part of the nutrition system of the electrical
ability, should be made by the copper connectors which have only one heart
that is separated by PVC.
The required minimum cross section is in according with the following points:

The circle of the electrical ability which


is in conformity with the evaluative currant and the minimum voltage
drop.
4mm- the measurement circles,

The secondary boards and the control


panel. 4mm.
2,5 mm the circles of reference and advertising. 2, 5 mm for the
dependent levels voltage which, the following colors should be used in
the connectors (joints) which are separated by PVC.

red, yellow, blue,

380\220 V, alternating current


black for the balanced one.
220 V, continuous currant

gray, white.
24 V, continuous currant

orange, white.

Grounding

green.
16-1-5-2 the general cables and connectors (the rods assembly):
A.

For requirements of materials, cables


manufacturing, cables extension and general connectors
connecting, please refer to the relevant specifications chapters.
The cross section of general cables and connectors (the rods assembly)
should be calculated in accordance with allowable maximum values of
the voltage drop, the currant quantities and the reducing factors
(correction).
Anything isn't defined otherwise that mentioned above, its carrying
capacity of the currants is as the following points:

The cables, which supply the


converters, have carrying capacity of the currant that is equal to the
evaluative currant of the connector.
The cables, which supply the general
connecters system, have carrying capacity of the currant that is equal to
the maximum request for the protective currant on the general
connectors (rods assembly) themselves.

The cables, which supply the general


connecters system and are separated into connected sections in the circle
sections, have carrying capacity of currant that bears the maximum
request of current for every general section of the connector.
(461)

The cables, which supply engines, have


carrying capacity of currant that is equal to the evaluative currant for the
engine.
All other cables, which aren't
mentioned above, have carrying capacity of currant that is equal to the
maximum request to the current.
The cables size, which is assigned for the voltage above 1000 V, should
be designed to bear the effects of the extra heat which is resulted from
short circles, during the specified period for outage of the circles
sections, which is in the electrical nutrition side of this cables. When the
extra heat is calculated, which is mentioned above, the maximum
currant of the short circle should be taken into account.

B.

The bearer cables sections should not


be less than the following values:
The low voltage cables
2,5mm
The control cables
1,5mm
The lighting circles cables
2,5mm
The medium voltage cable
2.5mm
C. The factors, which reduce the side section of the power cable,
should be calculated according to the extension areas, and that
isn't less than the following values:
To continue the full progress of loading
the numbers of multicore cables, which are more than 2, or the single
nucleus cables, which, have three phases in one steam 0,8
the numbers of multicore cables, which are more than 4, or the single
nucleus cables, which, have three phases in one steam 0,7
the temperature of the surrounding ground isn't more than 30 C
0,83
The available voltage of the engines ends, during the startup, should be
ensured the startup or re-acceleration in any case albeit full loadingwithout harming.
The maximum voltage drops are about 10% km gm ml in the cables, the
general connectors (rods assembly) and the converters of nutrition
engines. But, the engines, which will be re-accelerated, they may be
separated into secondary groups, which will be re-accelerated in
alternate period.
(462)

16-1-5-3 The undefined equipment:

All equipment and compounds, which aren't defined separately in the detailed
specifications and are a part of the electrical system, should be manufactured in
accordance with the regulated laws and regulations, which are mentioned in
these specifications.
16-1-5-4 The measurement devices:
All measurement devises and the necessary pointers of control and the
supervision of the equipment of electrical nutrition ability (power) such,
electrical pointers, pressure key, temperature factors, temperature key, level
key, etc., should be matched with the mentioned requirements in the relevant
and applied specifications.
16-1-5-5 The reference circles:
The external circles that are between the panels and national equipment, which
are installed in the site and are connected with panels and stores in the
buildings, further the reference circles that are between the electrical key panels
and the small panels in the buildings, all these circles should be supplied with
the continuous currant 220 V.
The internal advertising circles and all circles of reference lambs should be
supplied with electrical continuous currant 24 V.
16-1-5-6 The cards and labels:
The definable and writing data, which is on the gradated and discoid
measurements, should be in Arabic and English languages.
The metric system should be used in all right measurements. Further, all
modules and compounds in the booths should be clearly marked with clear
marks, which don't cancel and to be in accordance with the schemes.
The panels, which hold name, evaluative ability, defined card that belongs to
equipment, electrical keys panels, stores and small panels, should resist the
weather factors, to be long-lasting, to be seen clearly, and to be the writing on it
in both Arabic and English languages.
16-1-5-7 The dangerous sites:
All electrical equipment, its compounds and its installations, which is located
in dangerous sites, should be in accordance with the applied required
measurements. It's necessary to use the equipment that is explosion-proof.
16-1-5-8 The interference:
During, the stage of final design and implement, it is necessary to be careful to
avoid all negative effects of the interference.
(463)

The possible interference sources include the following points, but they don't
limited to that:

The lines of the airy high voltage (overhead), and especially the net 230
K.V and all connected compounds.
The stages
The contractor should provide all needed provisions and the counter
procedures.
The interference should be limited, in accordance with the laws of
CCITT, systems of DIN 57 228 or other similar certificated standards.
The contractor should increase the necessary accounts, which subject to
the engineer approval.

16-1-6 The work limits:

Unless otherwise mentioned in the detailed specifications, the work


limits of the equipment of electrical nutrition ability, control and
supervision should be like that, the connecting ends of the various
electrical keys panels, stores, small panels or can that connects the ends
to equipment.
The works of cables and grounding in the side, its private connectors to
all electrical equipment and the equipment of supervision and control in
the systems, are a part of the nutrition net of electrical ability.
16-1-7 The paint:

According to the mentioned requirements in the applied standard, all


equipment and devices, which are a part of the nutrition nets of
electrical ability such, electrical keys panels, short panels, stores,
engines, steel structures, etc. should be implemented in accordance
with the mentioned requirements in the applied standards.
The final paint color of equipment should be confirmed after the final
design and the engineer's approval.
All surfaces are half shine, and they are consistent with the general
architectural design.
The painting layer should be resistant enough, in order to bear the
transport, assembly and maintain processes without any damage out of
the ordinary. It is preferred ti use the painting layers that are
nonflammable.
When the installation processes in the site cause the removal of painting
and the uncovering of metal such, the punching and riddling processes,
in order to enter cables or pipes, these places should be protected. They
should be painted with protective paint which is similar to the original
paint.

Any machines or devices, and shining surfaces that aren't painted (such,
the columns of engines and valves, etc) should be protected from the
erosion by suitable materials, before the installation.
The contractor should be careful to avoid making any damage in the
electrical keys panels, small panel and stores, during the progresses of
experimental installation and operation.
(464)
The contractor repairs any marks or scratches, and damages in the painted
surfaces of all small panels, stores and equipment.
The reform process of the painting works should be made to return equipment
to the original case before the damage.
16-1-8 to store once the arrival:

When the equipment reaches to the site, it should be stored immediately, until
the installation time.
The electrical keys panels, small panels, stores, and the other sensitive
equipment should be stored in dry, closed and dust-free chamber.
The equipment, which belongs to the external usage such, converter ability
(power), cables, etc, should be stored in suitable, external and walled area.
It is prevented to uncover any equipment from its original cover, after the
storage process.
The defined cards of the data should be clear without any treatment. It is very
necessary to follow strictly the storage conditions.
16-1-9 The schemes and files:

The contractor should provide the mentioned schemes and files hereunder for
all system groups; partial unites of the separated parties of the system and the
equipment.

The general schemes.


The external dimensions schemes for equipment and mechanical
schemes.
Schemes for reprinting (Deposition Drawing)
The schemes of the single voltage.
The schemes of the electrical connectors and the connecting ends.
The material and equipment panels.
The accounting schedules, the schedules of the advices and equipment
specifications data, graphs, schedules, etc.
The installation scheme, which belongs to the electrical compounds of
the buildings.
The general falls and schemes of the cables.

The cross-section of the cable path.


The general schemes for the grounding.
The cables lists
The test program, metallic panels, test files, test and acceptance
certifications.
(465)

The equipment and operation booklets.


The schemes, in according with the implement.
Further, all schemes and necessary files, in respect of quality, efficiency of
works achievement and the engineer approval for the design.
16-2 The electrical keys group with the medium voltage:
16-2-1 The work scope:

This part covers the technical requirements, which belong to the material,
manufacture and test of the electrical keys group that have medium voltage.
This requirement will be used in the project.
16-2-2 the standards:

The electrical keys group should be manufacture in according with the standard
such, VDE 0 670 IEC 56 BS 3659, BS 116
16-2-3 The work circumstances:

The electrical keys groups should be suitable for the continuous operation, in
case of full load and hard environmental and weather circumstances, according
to the predefined.
The electrical keys groups should be installed in the medium voltage chambers
in the building of offices, control, services and the secondary stations of the
medium voltage.
16-2-4 The equipment specifications:

The various components of the main and secondary circles are able to bear the
evaluative currants without unnatural temperature raise, during the continuous
operation.
The used equipment should be matched with the following defined
requirements:
16-2-4-1 The general connectors (assembly rods):

The general connectors (assembly rods) are chosen, in according with


the electrical requirements.
The cross-section of the general connectors (assembly rods) should be in
the full panel. It is modified in according with the installation and
operation circumstances.

It is necessary to take into account generally that, the public connectors


(assembly rods) in the short circle case, may exposure to the electrical
and mechanical stresses and high temperatures.
The public connectors (assembly rods) made of electric copper, which
have high con conductivity.
(466)

In order to avoid the displacement, this is a result from expansion or the


vibrations and thrusts transmission from the electrical keys to the
connections and the public connectors (assembly rods).
1-2-4-2 The contactors (the electrical catchers):

The contactors' -the electrical catchers- triple phase requests is in a


vacuum site or site that is full of a separated material SF6. That's
depends on the available type.
The contactors should be prepared with the following:

A group of three cutters, which have high cutting ability.


Electric control which is supplied with voltage 220 V form the
continuous currant, in order to open and lock the operations.
To connect 6 helpful and auxiliary connectors, which are some closed
and some opened in the normal case, to the ends of the department.
The electrical position indicator.
The open and lock button.
These contactors (electrical catchers) should have secured operating
system, which is equal to minimum 30 times in per hour.
The contactors group (electrical catchers) should be with the
accompanying cutters, in order to avoid correctly all damages (including
law current).
16-2-4-3 The circles cutters:

The circles cutters should be used for all sections of the electrical panel
such, the mentioned supply lines, supply lines of the engines and supply
lines of the convertors and public connecting connector (assembly rod).
All electrical cutters, which have triple phase, in a vacuum site or site
that is full of the separated material SF6, which is ductile type.
It's operating and cutting hours should be equal to the designed and
evaluative data at least.
(467)

The circles cutters should be supplied with the following:

Electrical control functions, when the any of the contactors (electrical


catchers) close, the device, which prevents the pumping and electrical
device, which returns it to its primary position.
Mechanical Operating system for the emergency.
Separating file.

To connect 6 auxiliary helpful requests, which is some opened and some


closed, to the department ends in the normal case.
The references of the mechanical situation.
The reference lambs.
The open and lock bottom.
The necessary meshing system, in order to avoid the incorrect operating.
The control voltage is 229 V, during the connecting current.
Helpful voltage for the engines is about 220
V, from the alternate
currant.
16-2-4-4 The nonconductors

This equipment should be made from SF6, and it is suitable to bear the short
circle currants, in accordance with the evaluative design data.
These nonconductors should be triple phase and they are accompanying with:
Manual operating buckler, which includes the necessary operating
column and the operating booklets.
To connect 3 auxiliary and helpful requests, which some closed and
some opened to the ends.
The necessary locks for the meshing systems.
The grounding should be supplied as it is required.
16-2-4-5 the voltage convertors:

The voltage converters, which are connected with incoming circles, should be
in containers that store in the incoming supply departments. If we take the
structure of these converters, they may be installed on the ductile part of the
circle cutter.

The connected voltage converters should be installed to the public


connectors (assembly rods) in the metering departments.
The voltage converters should be dry nonconductor.
(468)

- The voltage converters should be protected by fuses which are placed in the
side of the main coils.
- The voltage converters should have single phase, which is used for
measurement and protection.
- The measurement converters should have exact closing property on the side
of the secondary coils.
The specifications convertors are such the following:

The evaluative turnout 15, 30, 50, 100 volt amber, in according with the
requirements.
The evaluative voltage factor is 1, 2 for the continuous tense, and it is 1,
5 for 30 second.

The accuracy class:


The counters
0.2. m10
The measurement 1.0 M5
The protection
5 P, 10
The voltage converters and the SCIKCO protection should be designed, in
according with the SCIKCO specifications.

16-2-4-6 the currant converters:


The currant converters are dry nonconductors.
The measurement conductors should have closing property on the side of the
secondary coils.
The currant converters should be able to bear the dynamic and thermal stresses
of the maximum expected short circles currants. These specifications don't
apply to the complex currant converters on the supply circles of the engines.
The currant converters specifications are the following points:

the main evaluative currant the standard values


the secondary evaluative currant 1 or 5 amber
the evaluative turnout
30 or 60 V.A
The accuracy class and the overload currant factor.
The counter
0.2. M10
(469)

The measurement 5P, 10


The currant converters of counters and SCICO protection should be designed,
in according with the incoming requirements in the SCICO specifications.
16-2-4-7 The main and secondary protection stages:
The main and secondary protection stages are installed on the panel, and they
are in the law voltage sections of the electrical keys group.
The main protection stage should be static and electromechanical type.
Further, it has references, which are FLANG, in order to clear the
situation and the damage.
To provide the facilities, in order to allow test the stages without full
lock (to make tests during the service).
The secondary protection stages should be electromechanical type.
Anyway, its ability shouldn't be less than 5 amber, and its braking ability
shouldn't be less than 5 amber (220 V, alternate currant, capacity factor 1-0, 3),
and 1.5 amber (220 V, continuous currant with provoking load).
The stages should be suitable for the continental climate and to be dust-proof.
16-2-4-8 the secondary equipment:

a. The measurement equipment:


The measurement and recording equipment should be
foursquare and flat. The counters should be salient (for
measurement proposes) or to be installed flatly.
b. The amber measurement counters and volt
measurement counters:
They should be electromechanical type for the alternate
currant and to be permanent magnet for the continuous
currant. The measurement amber counters, which are
installed on supply lines, should have scales, which aren't
long and miniature on its ends.
The measurement volt counters, which are less than 500
V, are suitable for the direct connection to the line.
But the measurement volt counters, which are more than
500 V, should be connected by the voltage converters,
which have voltage on the secondary ends of the converted
coils that are equal to 100 V.
(470)
If it isn't otherwise required, the recording devices should be direct writing
type. They have automatic charging with synchronous engine, and their
charging period isn't less than 24 hrs. Further, the paper s speed should be 30
mm/hr.
D. the counters:
The following counters types should be used, if there aren't requirements (the
electricity department):
The balanced system of triple phases:
tow counters (single phase)
Or a counter (triple phases)
The single phase system: a counter (triple phases)
The unbalanced triple system:
three counters(single phase)
The triple phase system of the triple cables for the measurement
purposes:
a counter (triple phase)
The counters should be prepared by the maximum request reference.
E. The separators:
The separators should be capable for the handing, during the filtration in the
voltage circumstances.
F. The buttons:
The colors of the buttons are as the following:
The emergency buttons for the locking and close:
red.
The buttons for the work beginning: black.
The off buttons are on the left side, and the on button on the right side.
G. The signs:
The place of mechanical and electrical cutters should be clear (with lambs), and
the place of the contactors (the electrical catchers) are cleared by lambs only.

The fowling colors should be used:


Closed contactor or cutter: lamb /red light
Open contactor or cutter: lamb /green light
Separated cutter
:
lamb /White light
Emergency or warning
:
white lamb, which is
used for machines and marhal, which make red flag sign.
(471)
If the separation isn't made by the processes of the fast-acting protection, it is
should be clear by external visual sign or white lambs, which made flag sign.
The sign should be manual, in order to be returned to the initial position (zero).
H. The issue of the external signs and measurements:
The measurements values, such the mentioned supply voltage, frequency and
the supply line of the engines or the external supply currant, should be
connected to the ends connection of the counters in additional way. That's for
the external notice. Further all necessary voltage and currant values of the
protection purposes (differential protection, etc) should be connected to the
connection ends which belong to the counters.
All situation references and damage and off references of the equipment, which
belongs to the electrical keys group, should be connected. Further, they should
be connected to the national references and the suitable connection ends, in
order to issue remote references (requires without voltage).
I. the changing / alternation:
If a circle cutter links two parts in the public connectors (assembly rods), it is
necessary to take into account to provide remote or manual alternation system.
The normal operating of the electrical keys group should have medium voltage,
open partial link cutter and closed cutters on the incoming supply line.
It is not allowed to operate the both parallel supply lines and link mechanism,
between the two parts of the closed partial link cutter.
If there is damage in incoming supply line (voltage drop), voltage converter or
other damages, which aren't dangerous to the electrical keys groups, the
referential cutter of the supply circle is unpowered. Further, the partial link
section, which have disarranged medium voltage, is able to change and
alternate to the arranged supply line, and that will be done when the partial link
cutter is closed.
The off order of the partial link cutter (assembly rod) may be issued from the
electrical keys group remotely or nationally. That's according to the
remote/national selection key situation which is installed on the references
panel, which belongs to the public connection damage (assembly rods), lack of
closing (the improvisation), and closing. P. (472). It should be used to clear the
data on the panels and to issue the remote signs. The change and alternation
progress should be possible with only the sign of the public connector damage/
the assembly rod and imperfect closing (no improvisation). The implement of
change and alternation progress is prevented by turning off the circle cutter of
the extra currant or the dangerous damage of the electrical keys group. The
burning process is necessary, in order to return to the natural situation, after the
damage of the electrical ability is repaired manually from the electrical keys

panel. The signs issue of the no remote alternation and alternate damage should
be included in the international statement and the external usage.
16-2-5 the design and implement:
The keys group is type with metallic cover in the factory, is free without
supply, is self-pivot and is ductile.
The electrical design is in according with the typical single-line schemes.
The electrical keys group set consists of many of units of the electrical keys
groups. Every unit is prepared for defined service, such incoming supply line,
the external supply line, the supply line of the engine, the partial link
mechanism of the public connector (assembly rods), etc.
Generally the units should be consisted of the following separated parties:
The public connector section (assembly rods).
The cables connection section.
The law voltage equipment section.
The section, which contains the public connectors (assembly rods), should be
contain constant requisites from the supply side of the ductile part, then they
connect to the public connectors (assembly rods).
Mainly, the ductile part should have the device of separation, operating
equipment, sign massages, and the main, secondary and moveable circle
requirements.
(473)
The voltage section should have the secondary circle connectors, connection
ends, the constant part of connecting buttons, stages, measurement devices and
the standards, if they are available.
Further, the small panels should have grounding circle, which connects all
metallic, movable and fixed pates on the floor.
Every electrical keys group unit should be designed, in order to be fixed on the
floor without any supporter.
The future expansion of the two parts of the electrical keys group unit should
be addition of new and possible sections.
16-2-6 the test:

16-2-6-1 the examination and test in the factory:


The tests are made in the factory in according with related specification and
standards.
The electrical keys groups units, which are collected in the factory, should be
collected fully, before they are shipped. In order to ensure their structure and
effective work for the response to the external control advices, the right
transmission of the signs to the internal circles, the right connection to the
measurement circles.
16-2-6-2 the tests of types:
If the contractor doesn't submit a copy of the certified type test, the type and
check texts shouldn't be made.

When the contractor suggests initial model of equipment, which doesn't subject
to any test type, he should mention that in his offer.
16-2-6-3 the tests in the site:
After the installation and connection of the electrical keys group to the external
resources is finished, the contractor should make the tests, which were made in
the factory and site again.
16-2-7 the accessories:
It is necessary to import the full electrical keys groups and all necessary
installation accessories (such, the screws, pins of fixing and the main planks).
Moreover, it is necessary to provide all needed accessories, in order to operate
and maintain the electrical keys groups for every group, and the following is
the minimum required accessories:
(1) A set of the private equipment, in order to operate and maintain the
electrical keys group.
(474)
- The high voltage tongs.
- The electrometer of the high voltage.
- A set of doors keys and stores locks (Cubicles)
- Magnetic labels are written on it "high voltage - be careful - dangerous",
with enough numbers of this labels.
16-3 the ability converters (the power):
16-3-1 the work scope:
This part covers the technical requirements of the material and,
manufacture and test of the power converters, which are used for the
project.
16-3-2 the standards:
The manufacture of the power converters should be in according with the
standards of 296 and 76 IEC.
16-3-3 the operating circumstances:
The ability converter (power) should be suitable for the continual operating
with the full load, and under the environmental and weather circumstances.
The ability converter (power) should be suitable for the installation in the
outdoors (a type for the external usage).
16-3-4 the evaluative designed data:
The following is the evaluative specifications for the ability converters
(power):
16-3-4-1 the ability converters with medium voltage 13.8 K.V:
A converter has oily insulation, triple phases, separated coils and full end,
in order to choose the suitable voltage on the load.
The high service voltage (the main voltage)
The maximum rise of the allowed voltage on the main branch is 1.1 x the
nominal voltage of the continual operating, in according with the medium
voltage net 3x13.8 K.V.
The low service voltage ( the secondary voltage):
3x1 K.V for the pump
Or 3x 0.4 K.V for service

The frequency:
60 hertz.
(475)
The evaluative voltage (the power):
The evaluative voltage (the power) should be in according with the scheme
which is mentioned in the contract documents.
The resistance percentage:
Uk = 10%
16-3-4-2 The voltage (power) converters of the medium voltage 4, 16 K.F
There are triple phases converters oily with two separated coils, device to
change the number of turns and separated converted from the net.
The high service voltage (the main voltage):
3x4, 16
K.V
The biggest rise voltage on the main branch is 1.1 x the nominal voltage of the
continuous operating.
The low service voltage (the secondary voltage):
3x400\231 V
The frequency:
60 hertz
The voltage power
1000 K.V ambere
The resistance percentage:
Uk = 6%
16-3-5 the design and the structure
The converter tank should be made of steel sheets which are in according with
the required thickness. All welding connectors should be free from any
stresses; they should bear the possible thrusts without any damage, during the
short circle.
The tank walls should be enhanced by strengthening parts of building steel for
the public durability. The tank should have enough resistance, in order to bear
the mechanical thrusts without any damage, during the transport and
mobilization progress of the oil. This process is made by the deflation.
(476)
The connectors should be resistant to the weather factors and hot oil. They
should be designed carefully, in order to prevent water infiltration, during the
operating circumstances.
Anyway, they should be supplied to work for continual 5 years. The screws and
the installed mechanical pins is the only one which, is applied as installed units
(fixatives).
After they are assembled, the screws should be protected by the painting.
16-3-5-1 the cooling way:
The defined converter in these specifications should have dual cooling. During
the natural turn process, the cooling liquid should be oily and mental. The
cooling mediator, which touches to the external cooling system, is the air in the
natural turn, in addition to the forced air turn.
The symbol of cooling ONAF\ONAN

It is preferred that, the converter, which is defined in the specification 16-3-4-2,


have natural cooling with the mental oil, air and the symbol of cooling ONAN.
16-3-5-2 The insulation:
The converter coils and the advice, which change the branch, should have
regular insulation. Further, its insulation percentages and the quantity of the
test voltage should be proportional to the various voltage quantities in the nets
that they will be connected to.
The insulation oil should be proportional to the regulations. It prevents mud
accumulation. So, only the mental oil will be used.
16-3-5-3 the mechanisms of the infiltration change with the load:
The ability connectors (13, 8 K.V) should be provided with the mechanisms of
the infiltration change with the load, which are a part of the convertor. They are
put on the equality point of the coil, which has star connection on the side of
the high voltage of converters.
The evaluative specification:
The range of the full filtration
+- 10 %
The maximum excess of the voltage
1.25%
The available disparity to the scope of the evaluative voltage filtration
+- 0.3%
16-3-5-4 the change mechanisms of the currant if it doesnt connected to
the supply source.
The ability converters (4.16 K.V) should be provided with change
mechanisms of the currant that aren't connected to the supply source (the
net).
The infiltration range: 0, -+2.5 -+5% of the evaluative voltage.
16-3-5-5 the connection ends which have Galb:
The connection ends which have Galb should prevent the oil infiltration
for the immersed converters in any temperature. Further, they should
have property of public maintain and repair and change without the
dismounting of the cover.
16-3-5-6 the measurement devices:
the protection and monitoring advices should be installed to ensure good
and safe operating for the converters.
All references, alarm devices and the locking and stop requests are
suitable for the alternate currant 220 V +-10%.
16-3-6 the test:
16-3-6-1 the tests in the factory:
These tests should be made in the factory. Further, the contractor shall
be fully responsible for these tests.
The admission tests shall be made in the factory, in according with
contained requirements on the regulations.
16-3-6-2 the tests of type:
The contactor should offer certification and clear the test results of the
type tests, which are made for the same type of the converters. The type
tests should have the test of noise level.

These tests should not be made to the equipment, which is a part of the
providing, unless it is otherwise noted.
If the contactor suggested initial typical piece from the equipment or a
material, which isn't subject to a test, that should be mentioned clearly in
the tender.
16-3-6-3 the tests of the site:
The following test should be made again in the site:
The test of the electrical insulation with the service frequency.
The standards of the thermal control devices (thermostat) the counter of
the heat measurement.
(478)
The results of the tests are recorded in the confirmation and proofing models of
the tests.
These records and the models, that their data are proportional to the results of
the tests, should be sent to the engineer.
If the resulted aren't acceptable, the contractor adjusts or changes all importing
or a part of it, until the equipment becomes acceptable.
16-3-7 the accessories:

The conductors should be imported with the first bag, which include their
necessary accessories for the installation, the operating and the maintenance.
Auxiliary oil for the operating period and the optional operating.
Keys set for the doors and locks.
One set for the operating and maintenance equipment.

16-4-1 the work scope:

This part covers the technical requirements of the materials and, manufacture
and test of the electrical keys panels and distribution panels, which have low
voltage and shall be used in the project.
16-4-2 the standards:
The low voltage panels are manufactured in according to the regulated laws
and regulations, which are mentioned in the specifications.
16-4-3 the specifications of the work:

The low voltage panels should be suitable for the continuous operating. That's
shall be according with the designed data and the defined environmental and
weather circumstances in the specifications.
16-4-4 the evaluative designed data:

The low voltage panels are designed for the following evaluating
specifications:
The evaluative operating voltage 3x400\231V

A system has 4 cables and equality point is grounded directly.


The voltage of the insulation
1 K.V
(479)
- The frequency
60 hertz
- The periodic short circle currant:
The main distribution keys panels. 150
K . Ambere
The secondary distribution keys panels. 85 K . Ambere
The secondary distribution 45 K . Ambere
The mechanical protection:
The main and secondary distribution keys panel. In service: 40 IP
The secondary distribution keys panel
in service: 10 IP
The secondary distribution keys panel
internal: 40 IP
The secondary distribution keys panel
external: 55 IP
16-4-5 the specifications of the system:

The required electrical keys panel, which has low voltage, may be classified to
the following formative system:
The main and secondary distributional keys system(MDB-SDB):
It should be designed as electrical keys panels that are covered by metal. It is
classified by breaks and berries and installed in the factory. It has free stop,
which don't need support, so it is stand-alone. It is prepared mainly with ductile
units or movable units on the forward face. Its doors have joints on the
backward side.
The secondary distributional keys panels (SD):
They are covered by mental; they are classified by dividers and barriers; they
are installed in the factory; they are cavernous in the wall; they have fixed
installation equipment and forward doors with joints.
(480)
==481==
16-4-6 the design and structure:
16-4-6-1 the general design:

The electrical design of the low voltage panels, according to the defined
analogous single voltage schemes, which belong to the supply of electrical
power.
The low voltage panels should be designed, so as to, that the auxiliary places
are about 15 % at least of the full designed electrical keys panel. Further, that's
applicable to the terminal connection links in the ductile parts and the terminal
connection links in the secondary panels of the classification. The stores or
containers of the auxiliary electrical keys panels should be prepared by public
main and secondary connectors (assembly rods), the terminal connection link,
grommets and blocked covering sheets.

The separated stores, which belong to the electrical keys panels, should be
separated by dividers of metallic sheets. But the area of the pubic connecter
(assembly rods) should be divided from store to other one by using of the arc
barriers. The stores of the electrical keys panels, which have an area between
the efficient circle cutter or the entry by the squeeze, which is between the
efficient circle cutter or the cutter of the entry unit by squeeze and the section
of the cable connection, should be divided by barrier of restorative sheets.
It is necessary to provide enough vent of pressure, in the case of electrical arch.
But, the heat gases shouldn't be unfroze forward (operating side).
It is necessary to increase the ventilation cracks in the upper surface, in order to
explore that there is burned PVC or other burnings at early time as much as
possible.
The inside of the containers and panels, which have low voltage, should be
protected against the concentration of the humidity by electrical heat factors
that are in side these containers and panels.
The cables and the electrical fittings:
The connectors of electrical ability cables and the natural control from the
cables room or from the distribution of cables and fittings in the panels should
be implemented, and it is necessary to use the technic of the cables installation.
It is necessary to achieve the requirements of the connectors of the cables on
the various parallelisms by allowing simple and safe connection to the cables.
The electrical fittings, which belong to the control, should be transferors,
insulated connectors by PVC and they have cross-section that is 2.5mm2 at
least.
(481)
Generally, the electrical fittings of the currant converters and the measurement
circles (wires) have cross-section that is 4 mm2 at least. The terminal ends of
the currant converters are prepared by the bridges of the short circle.
Further, the terminal ends of the electrical ability cables (power) should be
suitable for the cross-sections of the using cables.
The grounding:
All parts, which carry electrically (they are uncovered together) should be
connected in the grounding circle, which is connected with public grounding
connector to the electrical panels.
The uncovered coopery grounding connector should be installed in a group of
the electrical keys panels. This connector should be connected to the grounding
system, which belongs to public station in two places by the terminal ends of
the connection.
All pieces and containers parts, which are connected to the public grounding
connector by twisted coppery wires that are covered by tin and link screws and
the brads, should be connected. The doors should be connected to the container
by coppery twisted wires that are covered by tin.
The marks :
The marks and colors of the public connectors (assembly rods) should be are
applicable to the standards of the specifications department and Saudi standards
SASO.

The devices marks should be clear. They are put above or under these advices,
and they are in according with the schemes of the electrical fittings.
The various factions of every department should be clear on the front and the
back also by using labels that are written by drilling.
The painting works:
The paining works are according to these specifications.
The work limit:
The works limit, which belongs to the low voltage panels that are included
below, clear only the systems limits and it doesn't clear the contract limits.
The main distributional panel, the secondary distributional panel and the
secondary distribution
The low voltage connecting ends of the incoming supply lines.
(482)
- The connecting ends of the controlling voltage.
- The terminal links of the outside supply cables of the consumers release
external signs.
16-4-6-2 the main and secondary distributional panels (SDB, MDB):
Generally the electrical keys panel is structured as the following:
It is put in metallic containers that have back door, joints, ductile mutual
departments and department that have forward joints.
Public connectors (assembly rods) in the upper part of the panel.
The public connector of the grounding and equality in the lower part.
The ability and control cables (power) are connected on the back side by
private ways and distribution ways, or on the forward side in the private
cables departments.
Public vertical distributional connectors are specified to the movable full
departments that are ductile on the back side. Further, they are isolated
and insulated from the spaces of the cables connection.
The partial barriers in the upper part on the forward face are installed in
constant way by doors that have joints for the departments.
The ductile departments:

The various ductile departments should contain the following equipment at


least, and that's in according with their usage and function:

Forward steel tin for the electrical keys, button, references and lambs for
reference (if they are available).
Structure for the contactors (the electrical catchers), stages, the currant
converters and the helpful circle cutters (if they are available).
Pilot rods and rollers for the installation process by squeeze or the
disconnection process by captivation.
The touching system by squeeze to the ability circle.
The touching system by squeeze to the control circle.

The touching system by grounding squeeze ensures that the electricity


shall be continuous as long as the ductile part isn't disconnected fully.
Electricity key has arm on the forward tin for the electrical and
mechanical engagement of the ductile part.
(483)

- The sculptured data panel is on the forward tin, and the number of the
divider (the box) is in according with the single voltage schemes and the
electrical fittings.
- The ductile parts should be suitable for the following operating situations:
The service situation: the ductile part is ready for the specified
work.
The test situation: the ability circles are off, and the control and
aide circles are on.
The separated situation: all circles are off, but the ductile part still
linked mechanically to the electrically keys panel with insulated
distance.
Disconnected situation: the ductile part is outside of the store.
Every situation should be defined clearly by marks system that is put on the
rods for example.
In the case of the alternation from service situation to another one, It necessary
to turn off (stop) the electricity automatically (electrical key with arm) .
These bearer rods and the suitable system should be suitable for the entry
process by squeeze and the disconnection process by captivation without any
difficulty. That's occurred by using constant and installed handle on the
forward sheet.
The holder rods (ways) are provided by fender that prevents the falling of the
ductile part.
16-4-6-3 the secondary distributional panels (SD) (internal):
Generally, the distributional panels should be structured as the following:

They are put in metallic container that have door with joints on the
forward side.
Public connectors (assembly rods) on the upper part of the panel.
Public grounding equality connecters in the lower part.
The terminal links for connecting of the ability (power) and control
cable in the lower part.
The ways of installation for the internal electrical fittings.
Equipment is installed in constant way, it is installed on the frames and
retaining sheets.
The operating and monitory devices, such the electrical keys, buttons
and the measurement devices that are installed on the forward doors.

The flexible wires that are protected by flexible ways from the constant
part to the forward doors.
16-4-6-4 the secondary distributional panels (SD) (external):

(484)
The public requirements of the structure are as the following:
System is put in container with insulated material and size of department
that is combinable.
Forward diaphanous covers with fast locking device.
Departments of distribution cables with terminal ends on the lower side.
Public departments of the connectors (assembly rods) on the upper side.
The operating and supervision equipment is easy to get on the forward
side without recovering the main covers.
The equipment is installed on the retaining steel sheets, which are
installed in according with the functions units in the various containers.
The insulation should be heat-resistant and against the oil, wax, metallic acids
and saline solutions. Furthermore, it should extinguish automatically if there is
a burn.

16-4-7 the properties of the equipment:

The various factors of the main and secondary circles are able to bear the
evaluative voltage in the continuous operating without unnatural high
temperature.
16-4-7-1 the public connectors (the assembly rods):

To test the public connectors (assembly rods) in according to the


electrical requirements.
The cross-section of the public connectors (assembly rods) has a
constant size in the full panel.
The public connectors should be made of electrical copper that transfer
the electricity well.
It is necessary to specially take care about that, when the public
connectors undergo the electrodynamic strains and the high
temperatures cases, in the case of the occurrence of the short circle.
16-4-7-2 the cutters of circle:
The required low voltage circle cutters may be classified to two types:
An airy circle cutter
It should be triple ductile poles with engine. The circle cutters, which
are used for 800amber, are airy circle cutters. The ductile airy circle
cutters are used for 1600amber.

The evaluations of the strength of the circles cutters are in according to


requirements.
(485)
- Its manufactures and the quality of its parts are equal to the evaluative
designed data at least.
- The circle cutters are prepared by the following at least with the
automation of the liberation of the operating currant and the automation
of the liberation of the currant rise.

A/C time over current release


A/C time over current ground release
The automation of the liberation in the low voltage.
The mechanical operating system.
6 touches at least, those are open/close types.
Engine operator
The references of the mechanical site
The control voltage is 220V , "continuous currant"
The helpful voltage of the engine is 200V, "continuous currant"
The circle cutter is included by formed cover:
The circle cutter should be that type, which is fixed by the link brad, have
jointed automation, and is fast cuter and connector. It has the locking
properties, which are inversely proportional to the time. Furthermore, it has
free liberation automation in the case of high bear or the short circle. The
locking unit is available to change, adjust and fix.
All circle cutters should have thermal compensation according to the
surrounding temperatures (46c). So the cutter can bear the full evaluative
currant of the regular locking proprieties in the full surround of the temperature
that is from 50c to 46c.
16-4-7-3 the contactors (the electrical catchers):
The contactors should be airy (air break) and triple poles.
The evaluations of the touches strength are according to the
requirements.
It is prepared by heat stages, in order to protect from the increased
currant.
There are 4 touches which are open/ close type at least.
The operating voltage of the contactor coil is 220V, "continues currant"
16-4-7-4 the barriers:
(486)
It is necessary to use the natural cartridge from the squeezed and spiral type, in
the case of the barriers of the secondary supply line, the barriers of the main

supply line, the barriers which have cutting capacity that using for the low
voltage and the other supply circles.
If there aren't bear and voltage circumstances, the barriers should be easy in
the dealing.
16-4-7-5 the currant converters:
The currant converters are dry insulated type.
The currant converters are able to bear the thermal dynamic strains, which are
result from the maximum expected short circle currant during one minuet. This
description is followed for the converters of the currant on the supply lines of
the engine.
The properties of the currant converters are as the following:
The evaluative main currant
the main values
The evaluative secondary currant (1) amber
The evaluative result
15, 30 or 60V.A
The accuracy level and the rise factor in the currant
The measurements
1, m5
The protection 10p , 10
16-4-7-6 the buttons and the electrical keys:

The buttons colors are as the follows:


The emergency buttons for locking and extinguish (red)
The buttons for the operating and burning (black)
The off buttons are on the left side, and the on buttons are on the right side.
The electrical keys of the main supply circles are triple poles, and they are able
to cut the supply line with the bear.
The electrical keys of the voltage standards should have 7 situations. But the
single pole with the tow situations of the burning is used for the electrical keys
of the control circle.
16-4-7-7 the helpful stages (secondary):
(487)
These stages are from the electrical mechanical style.
The helpful touches are able to transfer the maximum expected currant, any
way their capacity aren't less than 5 amber, and their cutting capacity aren't less
than 5 amber- 220V of the alternate currant with factor ,3 1.
Further, the protective, such the low voltage stages, should be static, electrical,
mechanical type.

The operating voltage of the converters coils 200V, "continues currant"


16-4-7-8 the measurement counters of the amber and the measurement
counters of the voltage:
These measurement counters are electromagnetic type for the alternate currant,
and they are constant magnetic type for the direct currant. But the complex
measurement counters of amber on the supply lines of the engines, haven't
longitudinal standards (right) which are reduced in their ends.
The counters of the voltage measurement are designed, in order to connect
directly with the barriers by the line.
16-4-7-9 the reference lamb:
The following evidential lambs should be used for the various supply lines:
The supply circles cutters:
Close cutter red lamb
Open cutter green lamb
Isolated cutter
White flash lamb
The supply line of the engine:
Close container
(Circle engine)
Open container

green lamb
red lamb

The locking

white flash lamb

Valve which is work by engine:


Close valve

red lamb

Open valve

white flash lamb

Locking valve

white flash lamb

Public supply line with contactor (supply line which is controlled from afar)
(488)
Close contactor (catcher)

green lamb

Open contactor (catcher)

red lamb

16-4-7-10 to send the references to remote external areas:

All evidential references if the site which belong to the circles cutter, supply
lines, the emergency devices of the protective stages, national and treatment
references, which connect to the terminal connection ends, should be suitable
for sending signs to the remote areas ( touches are free from currant). That's in
according with the requirements of the monitory and control system which
mentioned in the eighteenth chapter).
Furthermore, all secondary touches (helpful), which have open situation
usually in the automatic circle cutters, which belong to the control voltage,
should be connected serially, and be connected to the terminal connection ends
for the external usage.
16-4-7-11 the automatic change
The main distributional panel (M.D.B) and the secondary distributional panel
are designed, in order to contain two groups of public connector in every part
in the panel.
Every part of the public connector of the main distributional panel is supplied
by the service converter that is in the site. The ability of the production for
every suitable converter is suitable for bears supply, which are connected on
every part of the public connector. The partial supplier of the public connector
of the secondary distributional panel should have size which ensures the supply
for every part of the public connector with one supplier.
The automatic change of the main distributional panel (MDB)
The natural operating should be by two close supply lines and open partial
linking cutters of the public connector. Furthermore, it is not allowed to be
operated the electrical keys panels by link cuter between the two parts of the
public connector and two supply lines.
The supply circle cutter and the partial link circle cutter of the public connector
should be prepared by automatic changing device.
In the case of the locking of the electrical ability by one supplier, the supply
circle cutter, which is connected to the process, should be opened firstly. Then
the partial link cutter of the public connector is closed. The both system should
be supplied by one supplier.
(489)
After the electrical current returns (the lamb turns on, so it is ready to return to
the natural work), the reoperation of the return of the natural work should be
manual by a separated button.
To install electrical operating key, which have situations of the automatic
change / locking. In the case of the failure of a reference lambs, the change
shall be expected "the change failure" and "the change operating", it should be
connected to auxiliary shebl to the ends, in order to the external signs.

The automatic change to the secondary distributional panel (SDB)


The natural operating should have two close supply lines and open partial link
cutters of the public connector in the secondary distributional panel. But, the
parallel operating of the supply lines and the close link cutters shall be not
allowed.
The cutter of the emergency dynamo circle and the contactors should be open
during the natural operating.
If the electrical ability, which has one supplier, is locked, the supply circle
cutter, which is connected to the process, should be open firstly. Then, the
partial link cutter of the public connector shall be close. Further, the both of
two systems should be supplied by one supplier. Furthermore, the elegancy
dynamic isn't in the operating position.
After, the electric current returns, the return progress of the natural work shall
be automatic.
If the electrical ability is failed fully, the supply circle cutters and the partial
link cutters of the public connectors shall be open, and they began to make an
order to the emergency generator. After the emergency generator (EMG)
operates for a period, the contractors and the circle cutter of the generator shall
be closed by an order from the electronic emergency generator (EMG).
After the electrical current returns, the return of the operating to the natural
work shall be implemented automatic in conjunction with the net of (Emg).
Then the circle cutter of (Emg) and the contactors shall be opened, and the
supply circle cutter shall be closed by an order from the electronic (Emg).
The following control equipment should be provided for the automatic change
process:

One operating key for the situations of change/locking


One selected operating key to provide (Emg) by situations od
"automatic emergency providing SDB-B/SDB-A"
one reference lamb " failure of the change"
(490)
The references of "failure of change" and "operating of change" should
be connected additionally to the ends, in order to send the signs to
outside.

Generally, the automatic change


The change from supply tube to another one, shall be available only in the case
of the low voltage, the failure of the supply converter and the other failures
generally, that's a danger for the key panels during the change process. Without
any terms, the change shall occur, when the circle, which prevents the voltage
rise, will damage.

16-4-8 the installation instructions

The keys panels SDB and MBD are fixed, in order to allow enough crosses
behind the tanks, which are for the examining connector and the operating in
easy way, even if there is a pulled part or many parts in separated situation.
The minimum level of the distance:
The back part of the key panel is remote from the wall 0, 8 inch
The forward part of the key panel is remote from the wall and the other stores 2
inch.
The distributional panels SD are fixed in the same way of SDB and MDB or be
fixed directly on the wall in the distance of 10cm at least. It is necessary to take
care of the separation deference of the building and rooms.
16-4-9 the test

The examination and test in the factory


The devices of the keys panels shall be subject to the eligibility test in the
factor in according with the agreed standards.
If they are applicable to IEC and VDE, the following routine tests and
examinations shall be made:

The voltage tests for the electrical frequency.


The voltage tests for the auxiliary circles.
To check the integrity of the mechanical operating.
To check the integrity of the electrical auxiliary advices.
To check the wires.
To check the ability of change.
The full examination.
(491)

The test of the quality


If the importer submitted the proved certifications, which contain the results of
the quality tests, the quality and sureness tests according to the standards VDE
and IEC shall not be made.
When the importer offers advices that don't subject to tests, he should mention
that in his offer specifically.
The test in the site
After the keys panels are installed and connected to the external sources, the
tests, which are made in the factor, shall be repeated in the site by the importer.
Furthermore, the importer shall implement the following:

The necessary adjustment processes for the operating stages.

To check the operating quality of all stages (to check all installations, in
order to ensure that they in the right position. the test of the equipment
examination will affirm this sureness by the importer)
To check all links (tap bolts, terminal stations etc.)
The testing certificates, which have importer's sign, should be prepared, in
order to facilitate the completion of the tests.

These testing certificates shall be received to the company/ the responsible


engineer.
16-4-10 the accessories

The keys panels should be prepared by the necessary accessories for the
installation (tap bolts, brads, base sheets etc.).
Furthermore, the necessary accessories of every key panels for the operating
and maintain should be prepared by the following at least:

A base of specified equipment for operating and maintenance of the


keys panels equipment
Base key for the box doors and locks
Enough magnetic defined marks for the maintenance.

16-5 the equipment of the continues current


16-5-1 the work scope

These specifications cover the technical requirements for (manufacture


materials- test), the batteries of continues currant store and the used continues
current equipment in the project.
(492)
16-5-2 the standard

The continuous current equipment should be manufacture in according with the


mentioned specifications and standards in the term 16-1-2 in this chapter.
16-5-3 the operating circumstances

The systems of the providing ability of the continuous current should be


suitable for the continuous operating by full converters, under the
environmental and weather circumstances, in according with the defined
specification.
The continuous current equipment shall be installed in the electrical service
building and the management. The batteries of the continuous current store
shall be installed in independent batteries room that is next to the room of the
charging of the batteries.

16-5-4 the bases of the design

The continuous current equipment should be as the following evaluative


specifications:
The component
The internal voltage

3x330/220V -+ 10%

The frequency

60HZ

The produced voltage of the supreme continuous current


1 220

V DC +-

The evaluative produced current/ permutable


0-100%, +-2%
The voltage of charge

1.35-1.75 V/CELL

The efficiency for the full load

85%, <

The modulus of the load ability

0.9-1.0

The produced energy is suitable for:


The continuous charge of the battery and the distribution of the load that
is connected to the continuous current
After the discharge of the full charging, the recharging of the full ability
of the battery will take 9 hours, and the providing is in conjunction with
the load of the continuous currant.
The continuous charging of the battery, the providing with the
continuous current load, the auxiliary providing in order not to cutout
the distribution of the load for the second station system, in the case of
the second system failure.
20% auxiliary ability.
The battery:

Fixed nickel cadmium battery


The battery capacity shall be designed to ensure the constant power for 5 hours
for the users of the single system in the defined evaluations, in the case of the
failure of the component or the internal voltage.
(463)
The battery capacity and the power of the component will be the evaluative
continuous currant.
It will contain 20% of the auxiliary ability.
The data of the system and load distribution

The evaluative volt is 220V "continuous current"

The stability of the volt during the individual operating +-10%


The volt during the maximum operating of the fast charging +10% of
the evaluative voltage
The rest Undulate current without batterymaximum
+5%
of
the
evaluative voltage
16-5-5 the specifications of the system:

The continuous current devices of the electrical service buildings consist of (2)
continuous current systems, the first one for the bazakha station (a), and the
second one is for the station system of (balance + ha'el city), but the
parallelism between these systems will not be.
The continuous current devices of the single system contain mainly the
following:
Main component
Component of terminal cell
Main and terminal cell and key of the device change
Battery with main cells and terminal cells
Electrical fusion unit and battery fusses
Distributional unit of the continuous current
The adjuster system and the battery will be installed parallel in the ready mode.
The operating of the component without battery will be available.
The continuous current devices are a part of the continuous current station and
the system of the non-cutout of the supply current. They are designed in order
to ensure the good and accepted operating for this important supply power
system.
For the system of the non-cutout of the current, please, look at the term 16-6
16-5-6 the design and the structure:

The electrical designs of the continuous current devices will be in according


with the requirements of the station. The distributional unit will be designed; it
will have 10% at least as auxiliary places from the full prepared unit.
(494)
16-5-6-1 the adjuster
The adjuster is distributed to two units, the first one to charge the main cells
and the electrical consuming of the continuous current in the parallel auxiliary
process, and the second one to charge the terminal cells, if the produced
voltage and the main adjuster is less than 99V in the limited current scope.
The both of units of the adjuster have the same manufacture principle, it shall
be from:

Enter converter net have triple phases 380/200V with separated coils.

Accurate getting bridge B-6 to adjust the current and the voltage. The
filters will define the components of the product.
The adjuster should have two separated output parties: one for the user
of the continuous current and another one for the battery.
A shunt to measure the current and to adjust the voltage measurement at
the battery ends. The adjuster should be able to charge the empty battery
during 9 hours, and its ability shall be 100%. Further, it shall provide the
full load of the continuous current and 20% as auxiliary ability.
The adjuster should be prepared by equipment of voltage net
supervision. In the case of locking, the adjuster keys are at 15% of the
enter voltage, and in the case of operating, the adjuster keys at 10% of
the enter voltage. the adjuster should be installed on oblate painted steel
tanks , which have central doors on the forward, and it's advices should
be installed steadily.
The forward doors of the adjuster tanks, will be contain all necessary
equipment of the supervision and control, in order to adjust the adjuster,
such ammeter, voltammeter, the optional keys, reference lamb... etc. the
electronic departments should be in the lower department of the tanks.
The connectors of the cable shall be on the lower side to issue the
references to the external places. The warning devices (the adjust failure
and low voltage of the continuous current) shall be connected to the
terminal station of the voltage organizer by auxiliary wires. Look at the
device of the automatic cell change.
16-5-6-2 the battery
It stores the electrical power for the electrical supply system in the
continuous current; it consists of the stored cadmium nickel for the
charging. The battery consists of cells of caved strips that are installed
on oblate steel boxes.
(495)

All cells should be transfer in series. The accumulator shall be separated to


main and terminal cells. The battery shall be installed on double woody surface
that has chemical resistance, on suitable bearer for the type and size of the
accumulator. The woody shelf will contain the circles panels for every cell.
16-5-6-3 the change device of the main and terminal cell automatically:
The key cell should keep the consumed voltage at 220V +- 10%
The change device should be provided with electronic voltage organizer, which
has the following functions:

The main voltage cell is less than 99V


*the change to the terminal cells station

- The advanced voltage is less than 97V (the warning device)


- The advanced voltage is less than 95V

The operating and locking of the warning device

The automatic cell changes device shall be suitable to change the full load from
the main cell station to the terminal cell station without any confusion of the
load or failure of the circles.
The electronic triple or double valves are used in the change advice during the
continuous operating, in order to avoid the voltages, because of the Simi
connectors.
The cell key and the voltage supervisor are installed in separated tin. The tin's
size and specifications is similar to the tin that the adjuster is installed in.
This tin shall contain the counter of the battery cell or the double valve, in
order to define the consumed volt.
16-5-6-4 the connectors
To connect the adjuster to the battery by the shortest way, it is necessary to
provide with metallic liner between the battery charger room and the battery
room.
(496)
The metallic liner is made of material that is similar to (PVC), which is
separated be cooper coils.
The sides of the battery should be protected from the corrosion.
It is necessary to make welding on the two sides, in order to fix the connection
cables, the cables should be made of twisted cooper, and all adjusters and
connectors should be fixed and welded in its ends.
The horizontal section of the cables shall be designed, taking into account to
the reduction of the volte between the charging, discharging, and power failure
in any circle.
16-5-6-5 the fuses of the battery:
The metallic liner and the room, that the battery is installed in it, should be
provided with fuses of battery. The battery should have fuses for the connectors
of the main and terminal sell. The box of fuses should have diaphanous cover.
16-5-6-6 the distribution box of the continuous current

It is to provide the continuous current, that's occurred by a steel box, which has
all the necessary devices, such the required circle cutters, contractors, fuses,
relays, etc for the electrical power.
The box will be similar to the adjuster box in the size and the structure.
16-5-7 the fixation

The battery of the both of stations shall be fixed in a single room of battery.
The bearers of the battery shall be installed, provided that there are enough
distances between he bearers and the wall for examination and maintain.
The minimum level of theses distances:
From bearer of battery to another one
1inch
From bearer of battery to wall
1inch
The bearers should be installed close to the wall in the room of battery
charging. The adjuster, the alternation device and the distributional boxes shall
be installed in the room that is next to the battery room.
The close bond of this specialization is the result of the terminal stations of the
distributional room of the continuous current.
All internal wires, the connectors between the adjuster and the converters unit,
the distributional room and the battery, should contain all these specifications.
16-5-8 the test:
16-5-8-1 the examination and test in the factory

The distributional devices and the adjuster will be tested by typical tests in the
factory, in order to be consistent to the typical standards.
(497)
At least, the following examination and tests shall be occurred:

The volt tests for the auxiliary circles.


The tests of the electrical and mechanical functions.
To ensure that the helpful devices are safe.
To check the wires.
To check the ability of the alternation
The full examination.
The tests of the full load for 24 hours.

16-5-8-2 the tests of the quality

The tests of the quality and examination according to the standards of I.E.C or
VDE shall not be made, if the importer submits approved copy of the results of
these testes.

If the importer suggested advices that aren't subject to tests ever, he should
mention that definitely in his offer.
16-5-8-3 the testes in the site

After the full installation of the continuous current advices, and the charging
and connection of the external sources, the devices shall be chosen during the
continuous operating and in all cases of confusion.
When the battery will be charged in the first time, it will have a private file.
It is necessary to define the charging and discharging time.
All tests of the site shall be written in afile by the importer.
The certifications of the site tests shall be prepared and signed by the importer,
in order to facilitate the test progress.
These tests shall be delivered to the company/the specialized engineer.
16-5-9 the accessories

The continuous current devices shall be provided with all required accessories
of the installation and operation in every station. These accessories shall
contain at least the following:
Brads and the materials of cells connection
Guide panels with numbers of cells
Potash solution for the first packing and the tests of the operating.
(498)
Distilled water for the first packing and the tests of the operating.
Funnels, glass, the equipment of the measures for the water and solution.
The thermometer the level meter.
The devices of the first charging
A private number for the operating and maintain.
Auxiliary fuses for the batteries and the adjuster.
Protective means for safe treatment of the chemicals and clothes,
protective glass and gloves.
Guide panel have the technical data, battery equipment, maintain and
instructions in every battery room.

16-6 the prevention system of the power cut.


16-6-1 the work scope

This property covers the technical requirements of the materials, products and
the tests of the prevention system of the power cut in the project.

16-6-2 the standards:

The devices of the prevention of the power cut shall be manufactured, in order
to be consistent to the standards, regulars and the systems that are mentioned in
the term 16-1-2.
16-6-3 the operating circumstances

The devices of the prevention of the power cut shall be suitable for the
continuous operating system during the full load and in the weather and
environmental circumstances according to the defined points in the term 16-12.
The devices of the prevention of the power cut shall be installed in the charging
battery room for the electrical services building and the management building.
16-6-4 the evaluative data of the design:

The prevention system of the power cut shall be designed according to the
following evaluative characters:
The internal volt 220 volt "continuous current"
The bear ability

+- 15%

The external volt

220 volt

The external frequency

60hrtz +- 0.5%

The bear of the static volt

<- +- 1%

The constant of dynamic volt


(499)
During the load alternation 50-10-10%<- +-10%
The evaluative electrical ability is suitable to provide all loads that is
connectors to the distributional systems, and to prevent the power cut for the
both of the stations.
The efficiency during the full load

>- 80%

The efficiency during the load 40%

>- 75%

The modulus of the current load


advantages of the system

0.9.0.116-6-5

16-6-5the

The system prevention of the supply power failure for the communication
devices, the telemetric devices or any other devices shall be in according with
the industrial requirements of the devices, with regard to (the performance, the
evaluation volt.. etc.).

The prevention system of the power cut, which is in the electrical service
building or any another place, consists of two system, in order to prevent the
power cut. One of them for the bazakha station, and the other is for the
(balance + ha'el city) station.
The parallel operating between the both of the systems is available. The
prevention systems of the power cut for the control center shall be operated
continuously in parallel way.
Mainly, the prevention systems of the power cut for the single station.
static converter
volt fixative
static alternation device
distributional box to prevent the power cut
If the converter fails, or the internal continuous current volt of the converter
defaults, the load of outage blocker shall work to the converter automatically.
The system of outage blocker is provided with the design of the continuous
current devices and all specifications, which are in according with the
continuous current system, in order to ensure the safe operating for the system.
16-6-5-1 the operating

The prevention system of the power cut for the single station system shall be
naturally loaded to the connector that the distributional transporters of the
blocker outage are connected to it, so they don't work together.
The converters are loaded synchronously, in order to supply the net, in
addition to their synchronization together.
(500)

==501==
The transformer should be equipped with a voltage-monitoring device to
measure the voltage that is entered to the direct current that starts by
transforming to the sub-transformer, if the voltage of the direct current was less
than 15%.
Transformer will contain a synchronizing device in which the two devices will
be synchronized in the two substations to guarantee the parallel running.
If the side-transformer failed or the transformation switch does not work,
transformation will be automatically done to the second substation that has no
malfunctions. Transformation to the regular nutrition will be manually done by
a separated button
16.6.6. Designing and Manufacturing:

The electrical designing for the current-interruption prevention system will be


made according to the system requirements. Distribution rooms will be
designed with considering making a reserve place by no less than 15% of the
unit total area. Painting the distribution rooms will be made according to the
standard specifications. Designing and manufacturing the transformer, the
current stabilizer and the distribution rooms will be according the rooms of the
direct current devices.
16.6.6.1. Transformer

A static transformer consists of sine wave filter and the individual crystal
semiconductors for controlling and organizing the circuit. Transformer will be
installed inside boxes that are made of the steel and coated with axial doors
from the front and permanent installation for the machines.
The front doors will contain all the necessary monitoring and control machines.
The transformer and the switch of transformation and control: Ammeter,
voltmeters, an options switch (chosen), signal lamp, running, operating switch,
etc.
The electronic part should be manufactured in the form of frames that are
united with the assistant program of the imprint cards.
The terminal tapes will be installed in the lower part of the room and
connecting the wire will be from the bottom. The external signals of the alarm
and the signals of "The transformer failure", "Transformation-switch failure",
"The operating-switch failure", "Failure of the current-interruption prevention
system" will be connected by additional wires with the terminal substation
The transformer will be equipped with a direct current voltage monitoring
device which starts transformation to the sub-transformer, if the voltage was
less than 15%.
The transformer will contain a synchronizing machine for the network
nutrition, and also for nutrition both of the transformers substations systems to
guarantee working in a parallel way.

16.6.6.2. Voltage stabilizer

Magnetic voltage stabilizer with a voltage stabilizer transformer to vanish any


frequencies or changes in the voltage regarding elevation or landing
A special filter is put at the stabilizer end will be connected.
Stabilizer will be fixed in a special metal box that is made from the covered
steel and have the same size and specifications of the transformer room.
A special care should be taken for the noise and vibrations regarding the
transformer.
16.6.6.3. Transformation device

A transformer with an electronic valve that is filled with the mono-gas for the
automatic transformation and preventing the disturbance from the transformer
to the voltage stabilizer and from the current-interruption prevention system at
Al-Bazakha substation to the substation of (Tuwaren + Ha'il).
The transformation time will be according to the requirements of the main
substation and the control system to guarantee that there is no any disturbance
in the operation.
The transformation device will be united with the transformer and the
distribution box. Regarding the manual transformation, it will be provided with
the operation switch.
16.6.6.4. The distribution box of the current-interruption preventive

It is for providing with the current-interruption preventive through box that


contain all the devices as circuit dividers fuses, conductors, relays, etc. ..... )
(
The box will have the same size and specifications of the rectifier box.
The current-interruption preventive should be divided to two groups:
- Consumers who need direct current
- Consumers who may stop, if the network and emergency current failed
The second group of the consumers, there is a locking device that may predict
of the current-interruption, if the substation current was completely failed at
approximate time about 15 minutes. Transformation again for all the
consumers after the current is get back will be done automatically.
16.6.7. Fixing

The adjoining limit of this specification is resulting from the terminal


substations of the current-interruption preventive room, all the internal wires,
joints between the transformers, the transformation unit, the distribution box
and the direct current tools; all should be included in these specifications.
16.6.8. Test
16.6.8.1. Examination and test at the factory

The distribution devices and the transformer will subject to the standard tests of
knowing the manufacturing direction in order to match it with the standards.
For matching with the standards of VDE or I.E.C., the following routine tests
and examinations should be made:

- Functional test for the transformer and stabilizer and transformation test under
the load. For completing these tests, it should be provided with, the main
rectifier according to the section (16-5)
- The full load test for 24 hours
- Volt tests for the assistant circuits
- Assertion of the mechanical operation safety
- Assertion of the safety of the assistant electrical devices
- Assertion of the wires
- Assertion of convertibility
- The integrated examination
16.6.8.2. Quality tests

Assertion and quality tests according to the standards of VDE or I.E.C will not
be made, if the supplier provided a certified copy of the results of these tests.
When the supplier suggest devices that did not subject before to any tests, he
should mention this specifically in his presentation
16.6.8.3. Tests at the site

After the full installation to the current-interruption prevention devices, the


direct current devices and connecting to the external sources, devices will be
tested during the continuous operation and in all the distributed cases. All the
tests that are made at the site should be written in a record in the contractor's
knowledge.
Certificates of the tests that are made at the site will be prepared and signed in
the contractor's knowledge to facilitate completing the tests.
Tests certificates are delivered to the concerning engineer/company.
16.6.9. Accessories

The current-interruption system for every substation will be provided with all
the accessories that are necessary for installation and operation. These
accessories will include as minimum:
- Nails and bolts for installation
- Special tools for operation and maintenance
- Reserve fuses for the transformer
16.7. The electrical installations for the buildings
16.7.1. Work Scope

This option covers the technical requirements for the materials, workshops and
testing for the electrical installations of the buildings that will be implemented
in this project.
The electrical installations of the buildings include all the installations of
lightening, jacks and the assistant equipments.
All the technical facilities for operating the pipes are not included
For the work limit between the electrical installations and the system of
nutrition the electrical capacity for the substation, view another section.

16.7.2. Standards

Materials of the electrical installations for the buildings will be manufactured


according to the standards, organizational regulations and rules that are
mentioned in these specifications.
16.7.3. Operation conditions

The electrical installations should be suitable for the full-load operation under
the climatic and environmental conditions that are specified in the paragraph
(16-1-3).
16.7.4. Designing virtual data

The electrical installations for the buildings should be designed according to


the following virtual characteristics:
Lightening: 220V, Alternating current
Emergency: 220V, Alternating current
Outlets lightening, 220V, direct current
Jacks: 380/220V, Alternating current
Assistant devices, 380/220V, Alternating current
Frequency: 60Hz
16.7.5. Work limit

The work limit that is mentioned below will specify only the systems limits not
the contract limits.
For the coordination and interference between the electrical installations and
the nutrition sources of the electrical capacity such as the distribution rooms
and the assistant devices like the air conditioners, etc., the reference and the
detailed specifications will be considered.
16.7.6. Installations description

The electrical installations for the buildings consist of (in unlimited way) the
following main parts:
Lightening:
Lightening installations for the internal rooms and the buildings include the
flashlights, all the necessary switches, buttons, the terminal boxes and the
assistant installations.
For all the entries doors of the buildings and all the paths of the technical
buildings, a lightening system will be installed on the buildings from the
outside.
Lightening of each room should be separated regarding the lock/unlock
switches, multiplier and dimmer for the lightening grade according to the
nature of the room using. In addition, paths should be equipped with the
pressing buttons and control switches.
Lightening the street, the court and fence are not part of these specifications.
Departure and emergency lightening
The different lightening circuits should be divided to three lightening systems
according to the trimester systems of the sub-distributions.

- The normal lightening:


It is provided from the normal distribution system.
- The emergency lightening:
It is provided from the emergency distribution system.
- Lightening the departure path
It is provided from direct current distributor system.
If the power of the substation network failed and the diesel generator was on,
only the emergency lightening will work.
The chart of the emergency lightening should be in conformity with the
engineer's approval. Only the necessary and important lightening circuits will
stay on.
Lightening the departure path will be according to the automatic system. There
is no a separated transformation switch, and this system will be on, if the
network power had completely failed. Switches should be put near to the exit
doors and all the vital points.
Departure and emergency lightening will be fixed only in the substation
buildings, not in the condominium.
Jacks
Installing all the jacks in the buildings including the terminal boxes and the
assistant installations
Enough numbers of the jacks will be installed according to the engineers'
instructions.
Jacks of the three terminals are installed only at the technical buildings.
It is not allowed installing more than (6) jacks in the same circuit. Jacks of the
three terminals should have separated common circuits.
Circuits of the jacks should be divided to two circuits; for the normal nutrition
and the emergency.
Jacks of the nutrition and emergency will be installed in which it doesn't
exceed 10% of the installed jacks total.
The additional devices
Installation for all the assistant devices including the terminal boxes and all the
assistant installations
- Hand dryer
- Fans
- Air conditioner
- Electric heaters
And all the other electrical expenditures that are necessary for the electrical
installations. The air conditioners will be connected only from the normal
system.
16.7.7. Lightening levels

Lightening should meet the required levels and that specified in the schedule
according to the standards of Illuminating Engineering Society (IES).
All the fixed lightening will give light similar to the morning light.
Lightening sources will be luminous lamps, fluorescent lamps, high-pressure
sodium, mercury lamps will all give a continuous lightening.

The flashlights that are used will be anti-radio interference.


It is preferable using the fluorescent flashlights of (65 or 40 Watt) at the
buildings except the buildings of the pumping substations.
The main flashlights will be equipped with lamps of (250 Watt).
Lightening-flow will be equipped from lamps of (250 or 400 Watt).
Flashlights will be equipped with lamps of (40 or 60 Watt) as using.
The level of flashlights and planning the lightening in the different rooms
should guarantee flowing fine lightening as request and using in the room.
16.7.8. Lightening types

The following lightening types will cover all the requirements of the designing
and building regarding the lightening and according to the use:
- The First Type:
Rooms of the high requirements, regarding the designing of the flashlights and
the lightening quality for these rooms, flashlights are controlled by the selected
in terms of increasing or decreasing the lightening level for only the fluorescent
lamps and the bulbs.
The indirect lightening may be used in the rooms by the flashlights that are
exist in the artificial roofing building (the dangled). Designing and color will
be in harmony with the room facilities.
Protection
- Reflector flashlights and the network: 20EB
- Reflector flashlight and shiny cover: 40EB
- The Second Type:
For the offices, paths, services rooms (Washing rooms, toilets, bathrooms),
food rooms, the private room and the condominiums
For these rooms, the fluorescent lamps are the only used, while lamps with
selector (decrease increase the lightening level) and luminous flashlights for
the private rooms.
Rooms that have lightening in the roofing, colors and designing will be
according to the room facilities.
Protection
- For offices, paths, etc. 20EB, 40EB
- The moisture and washing rooms
Toilets, bathrooms, etc. 54 EB
- The Third Type
For the technical rooms in general; buildings, the cellar and the pumps rooms
For these rooms, Flashlights with fluorescent lamps are only used.
Flashlights in general are installed directly with the roofing or by a chain. Only
the standard types will be used
Protection 54EB
The Fourth Type
For the buildings under the different environmental conditions and the private
use. Regarding the external flashlights on the buildings, flashlights in general
are installed directly on the roofing or by chain or holder. Only the standard
types will be used.

Protection 55EB
- The Fifth Type
For the buildings of the high-roofing like the building of the pumping
substation.
For these buildings, the high main flashlights with lamps of (250 Watt) are
used. Holders will be used for fixing the flashlights.
Protection 54 EB
16.7.9. Installations types

In general, the installations in the different buildings and rooms may be divided
to three different types of the installations.
- The First Type The Permanent Installations
For the non-technical rooms generally, installations will be fixed on the walls,
poles and the pipes. Pipes system that contains all the wires should be buried in
the walls. The terminal boxes, jacks and switches should be at the wall level
and have no protrusions.
Switches and jacks should be matching with the room designing. Only the
pipes that should be installed in a parallel vertical and horizontal position with
the walls.
If there were many pipes that should be put at the same direction, they should
be put parallel altogether. The lightening installations of the concrete roofing
and the surface wires, they may be put in the roofing gypsum without pipes.
Regarding the rooms that have artificial gypsum, the lightening installations
may be put top of the roofing, but only cables that are used for such purpose
not the wires.
In the external walls, private pipes of the type (PVC) are used. Such pipes
contain the lightening installations, jacks, telephones and the other devices.
The integrated installation should be extended before the gypsum and painting
works. Wires withdrawal should be inside the pipes.
For the telephone and fax systems, it is necessary installing additional pipes
with the electrical installations.
- The Second Type The surface installations
Generally, for the technical rooms that of the gypsum walls ()
All the requirements of the lightening installations will be installed on the
surface. Only the cables of the protection pipes that will be used.
For more than five parallel cables, the buried pipes will be used. Embedment
and protection pipes will be put in parallel vertical and horizontal position with
the wall. For installing the protection pipes, it will be used, fast-installation
pipes. For the telephone system, additional pipes will be installed.
- The Third Type Installation on the humidity-resistant surfaces:
Generally, for the technical rooms that have different environmental conditions
such as, storage cellar, pumping substation and the battery rooms.
Designing and implementation will be as that of the second type, but all the
equipments such as switches, jacks and the terminal boxes will be treated
against the humidity.
Protection 55EB

Installations for the battery rooms will be of additional resistance against the
possible bad weather.
16.7.10. Designing and the materials
16.7.10.1. Cables and wires

Cables and wires of the installations in the buildings should be, in general,
installations of insulating (PVC). The internal wires should be made of the
copper.
The minimum size of the internal wires for the connectors will be 2.5 mm.
Colors of the wires and cables will be according to the standards (SASO).
Regarding the color of the emergency lightening, it will be of different color
and it should be extended in different pipes.
Circuits of the normal installations and emergency will not be worked with the
same cables.
16.7.10.2. Pipes

Pipes for the surface installations:


- Flexible galvanized steel with its accessories
- Pipes and the fixing works:
Flexible pipes of (PVC) with its accessories
For the telephone and fax systems, it is necessary making additional pipes and
withdrawing the wires. For the buildings and the condominiums, additional
pipes will be put for the antennae system that will be installed.
16.7.10.3. Jacks

It will be used, two types of the jacks


- One terminal + ground + protection connector 16 Ampere, 250V
- 3 terminals + ground + protection connector 16 and 32 Ampere, 220/380 V
According to the installations type regarding the fixing or the surface
installation, designing regarding being it normal or humidity-resistant with a
cover, will be determined.
For all the jacks especially that of the three terminals, the main jack will use the
couple-jacks.
It will be installed, sufficient number of the jacks according to the engineer's
instructions. The jacks that of the three terminals should be installed only in the
technical buildings.
16.7.10.4. Switches, buttons, the terminal boxes

Regarding such devices, only the standard types will be used according to the
installation type; buried or surface, normal designing or anti-humidity.
Generally, it is valued by 10 Ampere, 250V.
16.7.10.5. Housing distributions

Housing distributions of the buildings will be used in the condominiums, also


in the substations buildings that have ground and first floor. It may be used also

in the buildings that have no ground floors and sub-distributions and could not
be supplied from the sub-distributions because of the very long distance.
==511==
Housing-distributions should be fixed internally or superficially according to
the installations type. It will include all the devices such as the automatic
dividers of the circuit, current inactivity switches, the relays, connectors, etc. of
what is necessary to the electric installations.
The different devices will be fixed by fast-installation bars. It should be
provided with the terminal tapes for the exit and entering circuits.
16.7.10.6. Fire-resistant walls

Cables will pass through fire-resistant walls and such walls will be built and
secured in a way that guarantees its resistance to the fire according to the
followed instructions
16.7.11. Protection systems

The electrical installations for the buildings will be made according to the
requirements of the protection systems, when any failure happens to the
current.
The necessary grounding network regarding the safe functions and the
protection system will be used when the current is failed. The condominiums
are part of these specifications. The electrical installations will be made
through digging the ground in particular distances regarding the walls and
buildings foundations that will be connected with the copper tapes.
For the substations buildings, the grounding system will be used.
16.7.12. Light protection

All the buildings including the condominiums and the wells sites will be
protected against the lightning and the electrostatic discharge by the light
protection systems.
The light protection for the buildings will include, with no minimum, the
following:
- The copper terminals will be put at about 10-15 meter around the surface
building and connected with copper tapes
- Connecting with the ground in each corner of the building corners and
inspection joint that is connected with its ground terminal.
The ground terminal that is buried in the ground will be installed at particular
distances from the walls foundations
- Connecting the light protection with the ground protection system
- The air systems should be connected with the light protection system.
- All the steel parts on the surface will be connected with the ground system.
16.7.13. Telephone system

For all the buildings including the condominiums, a suitable telephone system
will be connected for the external and internal usage by central unit.

Designing and building the system should be matching with the standards of
(MOPTT)
The required numbers of the telephone holes will be installed according to the
engineer's instructions.
16.7.14. The air system

Air system will be properly installed for all the buildings in the condominium
for the reception at the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, the national television and
the radio programs.
Designing and building the mast should be according to the local reception
conditions to guarantee the reception quality for all the programs.
The air jacks and radio will be of the united type and will be installed in the
telephone rooms, living rooms, parlors, clubs rooms regarding the different
buildings.
The necessary antenna reinforcements should be installed near to the air mast,
connections of nutrition by the electric current are all part of the electrical
installations.
16.7.5. Doors system

The entrances doors of the substation area will be provided with electrical
engine that works with the system of the doors intercom.
Doors system may be operated from the main control room and it will be
provided with control switch from the facilities doors too.
16.7.16. Group of the telephones tools

A group of normal telephones will be used for the housing buildings in which
such tools could be installed on the walls or on the offices. It works with
switches system; signal switch for backup or transfer the call. A group of
digital telephones of the technical building will be supplied according to the
number that is agreed upon with the engineer.
Such telephones will contain screen, memory, attractive designs that are
matching with the central and have higher abilities other that of the normal
telephones mentioned above. The place that the telephones will be put at
should be according to the engineer's instructions at the site.
16.7.17. Test

After installing all the equipments and the building installations, it should be
made functional tests for each building separately.
For all the buildings, it should be prepared a test for the lightening level
according to the standard values, regarding the different rooms.
The test results should be put in a report that is signed in the contractor's
knowledge, while the tests certificates will be delivered to the
company/engineer.

16.7.18. Accessories

An amount of the additional flashlights, lamps, fluorescent lamps, jacks,


switches, fuses, etc. will be supplied to each substation and each condominium.
It should be ready for operation and tested during the project period.
Special tools and equipments will be supplied for measuring the lightening
levels in addition to all the necessary accessories for the installation and
maintenance regarding the buildings installations.
16.7.19. Specifying the installations

Lightening levels, lightening and the installations types that are specialized for
all the buildings and the rooms of the project are all arranged in the attached
schedules.
In case of making any changes in the room naming for using the lightening
level, lightening and the installations types of the similar rooms will be used.
Building
Room
Lightening Lightening Installation
Level (LX) Type
Type
150, Level Fourth
3
Building
(1)
Fifth
of
the
300, Level
pumping
(2)
substation
Cables
50
Third
3
trench
SEC Room 200
Third
2
The room 200
Third
2
of the low
and
medium
voltage
Emergency 200
Third
2
generator
room
200
Third
2
Buildings Batteries
of services chargers
room
and
Batteries
200
Fourth
3
control
room
The control 200,
Third
2
room in the Level (1)
substation
500,
First
1
Level (2)
Offices
500
Second
1
Paths
100
Second
1
Washing
100
Second
1
room
Bathrooms 100
Second
1

Toilets
Entrance
-

Isolation
Valves
Room
Telephone Tools
Rooms
Court
Entrance
Hall
Conference
room
Kitchen
Clothing
room
Family
The
room
Housing
Toilets and
Buildings Bathrooms
Bedroom
Stairway
Television
and sitting
room
Club
Food room

100
200

Second
Fourth
Fourth

1
3
3

200

Third

50
50
150
150

Fourth
Fourth
Second
Second

3
3
1
1

300
150

Second
Second

1
1

300

Second

100

Second

150
150
150

Second
Second
Second

1
1
1

300
150

Second
Second

1
1

16.8. The external lightening


16.8.1. Field

These specifications cover the necessary technical requirements for the external
lightening through the assembly areas of the substations and the wells sites.
16.8.2. Standards

All the external lightening installations and its equipments will be


manufactured in which it should be in conformity with the standards, rules and
regulations that are mentioned in these specifications
16.8.3. Operation Conditions

The external lightening will be suitable for the continuous operation with all
the specified design rates and under all the climates and environmental
conditions that are mentioned in these specifications.

16.8.4. Design rates data

Voltage of the electric current nutrition


Nutrition voltage by the electrical drops 3x380/220
Frequency: 60Hz
Lightening Levels
The assembly area of the substations and the wells sites: EAVA= 30 LX
Roads: EAV= 12-15 LX
Parking areas: EAVA= 10 LX
Fence: EAVA= 5-10 LX
Similarity of the lightening levels
Substations area: g2= 1:3
Roads: g2= 1:6
Parking areas: g2= 1:6
Fences: g2= 1:5
The similarity of the lightening levels (g2) means the proportion between the
lowest lightening level and the average of the measured horizontal lightening
level regarding the area ()
16.8.5. Tasks and Building
16.8.5.1. Lightening systems

The external lightening system will be divided for four sections of the different
lightening systems.
A. The lightening of the substation assembly area
For the purpose of operation and maintenance for all the devices of the
substations in the open air such as the pumping substations and the others
systems, lightening will be installed on the top of the ground with leaving
distances for the future use.
The lightening columns of the shining light that are provided with flashlights
(H.P.S) will be used.
The maximum of the horizontal lightening level will be near to the equipments
that should be controlled and operated (public boards, transformers area, etc.).
The different circuits will be feed for lightening the substations assembly area
from the sub-distribution panel that is in the box substation.
B. Roads and parking
Lightening all the services paths, the traffic and the parking (Does not include
the unpaved places).
Lightening columns of the shining light that are provided with flashlights of
(H.P.S) will be used.
The maximum of the horizontal lightening level will be at the middle of the
roads and areas.
The different circuits of the roads, traffic and the parking, will all be feed with
the electric current from the sub-distribution boards in the box substations.
C. Fence Lightening
For lightening all the adjoining fences of the substations assembly area, it will
be used lightening columns and flashlights of the (H.P.S) type. Columns should

be installed inside the fence in which the distance between each column and the
other is 5 meter. Flashlights should be directed to the fence.
The different circuits for lightening the fence will be feed with the electric
current from the sub-distribution boards in the box substations.
16.8.5.2. Lightening columns

The different lightening systems will use shine lightening columns that of the
same type and building.
- Lightening columns of flashlights in its building
- The column height is 8 meter, while the inclination of the flashlight is 10
- A pipe of the galvanized steel with a grade diameter
- Fuse and terminal box with cover door in the bottom of the column
The internal expansions from the terminal box to the flashlight
A pipe for protecting the external and internal cables through a concrete seat
Lightening columns of the shining flashlights for lightening the substations
assembly area
- Flashlights in which 4 flashlights at least are installed on it
- The column height is about 15 meter
- Lightening-flow by a program
- A pipe of the galvanized steel with a grade diameter
-The column is provided with fuse and terminal box at the bottom of the
column
- The external expansions from the terminal box to the flashlights
- Protection pipe for the external and internal wires through a concrete seat
- Permanent metal scale for the light-flow that is protected by iron network
16.8.5.3. Lightening requirements

The lightening requirements are used for a lot of the systems and it will be of
the standard types with the same design and building.
- Flashlights
- One-unit flashlight with reflectors and glassy cover
- Fog lamps (H.P.S), 250 Watt
- Condenser and balance machines
- Mechanical protection by at least I.P 54
Dazzling flashlights
- Lightening adjustable dazzling flashlights with reflectors and glassy cover
- Fog lamps (H.P.S), 250 and 400 Watt
- Condenser and balance machines
- Mechanical protection by at least I.P 54
The normal and dazzling flashlights will have a special protection against
damage in cases if the sandstorms and the storms generally.
16.8.5.4. Cables and the ground

Cables that are used for the external lightening system will be according to the
section (16-10)

The differential type will be XLPE/PVC 4, terminals with minimum cross-part


6 mm2.
The cross part should be defined according to the current capacity and the
voltage drop.
There should be a separated ground connection for the lightening columns that
are connected with the ground network.
16.8.6. Installations and connection

Digging for making trench for the cables and digging the foundation for the
external lightening will all be coordinated with the digging for fixing the cables
and ground.
Regarding the cables expansion and the trench work, view the section of (1610)
Installing the lightening columns and the flashlights including the concrete
seats are part of these specifications. Depth and building of the concrete seats
should be according to the nature of the place that it would be made at.
Connecting the lightening columns with the nutrition cables should be
implemented in an alternative circuit to guarantee distributing fixing load for
all the stages.
The external lightening systems should be divided to many different circuits.
The lightening circuit should be easily locked and unlocked from the control
panel that is in the box substation. The lightening systems should be equipped
with an automatic selector switch (manual).
Automatic:
The automatic switch is lock/unlock automatic switch with photocell and timer.
Manual:
The manual switch is lock/unlock manual switch for the different lightening
circuits. The lightening columns should be provided with separated lock/unlock
switch.
16.8.7. Test

After the installation of the external lightening systems, all the electrical
installations will be tested.
The horizontal lightening levels should be examined under the contractor
knowledge and in the presence of the company/engineer.
The tests results of measuring the lightening levels will be inserted into a report
under the contractors' knowledge.
16.8.8. Accessories

- Tools for the maintenance


- Reserve fuses, lamps and flashlights should be supplied in sufficient number
in order to be put under the test and operation.

16.9. Cables and their expansion


16.9.1. Field

These specifications cover the technical requirements of the cables and


expanding them regarding the low and high voltage. Consequently, the control
cables, connections and signal cables and the required connections for the
cables substation of the project.
16.9.2. Standards

Cables and expanding them should be in conformity with the rules and
regulations that are mentioned in the section (16.1.2.). The instructions of the
cables manufacturing board should be followed.
16.9.3. Conditions of expanding the cables

Cables should be expanded:


- Directly buried
- Inside the cables channels and buildings in the places of the cables
- In the cables pipes
- In the cables pipes on the walls by shackles
Cables should be resistant for the climate conditions that are mentioned in the
section (16.1.3.), also it should be of its full-burden and anti-damage by the oil.
Cables should be anti-salinity and anti-insects.
16.9.4. Designing requirements

The cross part of the electric current cables, control, measurement units,
connection and the joints should be according to the current capacity of the
continuous used current. The maximum voltage drop is allowed considering the
suitable lowering factors according to the conditions of its expansion and
operation.
The allowable continuous connection temperature for the installed power
cables (XLPE) will be 90.
The different types of the cables should be designed to increase the mechanical
protection
The power cables 13.8KV
Medium voltage cables of one-terminal for connecting respectively 18/30 KV
with standard connector of the copper, network, connector (XPLE), seminetwork, metal network and cover (PVC)
Power cables 1KV
Medium voltage cables of one-terminal for connecting respectively with
standard connector of the copper. Its manufacturing nature is similar to the
cables of 13.8 KV.
Power Cables 380/220
The electric current cables 380/220 V for connecting respectively 0.6/1 KV
will have 2, 3 or 4 of the copper standard connectors, color according to the
code, installations of (XLPE), isolated elastic terminal, cover of (PVC). The
minimum of the cross-part 380/220 V. The electric power cables will be 2.5
mm2.

Signal and control cables


The signal and control cables that hold the frequent and direct current and
signals will be multi-terminals with copper connector. The installation colors
will be according to (PVC) or the code, elastic external layer, protected isolated
copper connector and general cover (PVC)
The minimum of the cross regarding the signal and control cables will be 1.5
mm2.
==521==
Cables of the connection and measurement tools
The used cables that have signals and circuits will be according to the data that
are specified regarding the devices that they are connected with. It should be
tested according to the instructions of the manufacturing board according to the
requirements of the suitable specifications.
In general, cables are made of copper connector of multi-terminals (PVC) in
which the copper is protected for the purposes of the mechanical protection. IF
it was necessary, special electrical and magnetic networks will be used. The
minimum of the cross will be 1.5 mm2, while for the connections cables and
telephones of Sico will be 0.8 mm1.
Connectors
Connectors will be made of the pure electrolyte copper, with a cross part, and
making the enough measurements to fit the specified designing data regarding
the load, the temperature and the mechanical voltage of the short circuits.
Connectors should be arranged in the system of three-terminals. It will be
generally isolated and covered. The colors of the covers should be according to
the standards of (SASO).
Fixing the connectors should be tight.
Connectors should be installed on suitable channels that are covered with the
iron or similar material, provided that the mechanical protection should be at
least IP65.
It will be provided with the thermal expansion ability.
It will be provided, devices for the connection and other tools under the thermal
expansion ability.
16.9.5. Preparation for the cables expansion
16.9.5.1. Transportation and discharge

All the cables should be charged and transported in cylinders of proper size and
length by 500 m for each cylinder. Only the smallest pieces of the cables that
may be approved regarding the short connections requirements.
Cylinders should be lifted by the wenches or the loader. Discharging the cables
cylinders should be completely and accurately made
The guide marks that are on the cylinders should be followed during the
discharge by the loaders. The load of such loaders should not exceed 1:4.
Cylinders are secured by rope, lifting cover and hoists.

The empty cables cylinders should be stored in a proper place at the central
store. It is re-transported to the manufacturing board at the contractor's
expense.
16.9.5.2. General Requirements

The contractor is responsible for estimating and supplying the amounts in the
different types and sizes of the cables.
Each section of the cables is measured and cut in one length. If it was necessary
linking the cables or connecting them with each other, it should be made under
the engineer's approval.
All the terminals of the cables should be protected against the humidity until
starting the connection works.
It will be supplied, additional cables of lengths that are suitable for the
connections works of the different cables and equipments.
16.9.6. Cables trenches
16.9.6.1. The trench depth

Digging will be made immediately inside the ground. Paths that the cables are
passing through should be wide enough. The depth of the digging will be 90
cm as minimum for extending one cable layer, also it should be soft, flattened,
free from the stones, roots and pipes.
The trench should be deep enough to contain the multi-layers of the cables; one
above another. Accordingly, the top cables will be at the level of 60 cm under
the ground except for crossing the cables paths or the pipelines under the
ground that will be done only after getting the engineer's approval. These
points should be specially protected and referred to in the building charts
The contractor is responsible for collecting the information about the cables
that are buried underground and the pipelines where the crossing is made. In
this case, digging will be manual.
16.9.6.2. Bed and Coverage

The trench bottom will be covered with a layer of soft sand by 10 cm in which
its is thickness 10cm without stone. After putting the cables, it will be covered
with an additional layer of the same sand by thickness 10 cm.
In the last sand layer, concrete will be cast to completely cover the trench.
It will be covered with protective layer by 5 cm of the soft sand without stone,
considering scattering the soft sand and flattening the layers as possible.
The wastes that resulting from the digging are transported according to the
engineer's instructions and the main conditions regarding the digging works
and transporting the wastes.
All the cables that connect from the ground to the devices should be protected
by steel pipes that are put at distance by 60 cm underground and 60 cm on the
ground. After finishing the connection works, such pipes should be covered
with a water-resistant layer.
The cables' pipes should have an additional protection by a warning tape that is
put by distance 30 cm above the protection layer. It should be printed on the

tape, "Attention, cable" in English and Arabic. On the other hand, the cables'
pipes that are larger than 0.5, an additional warning tape will be put by distance
30 cm.
16.9.6.3. Distances between the cables in the trench:

When putting many cables in the trench, the following distances should be
considered:
The cable type, the specified distance, the connection and measure devices are
not necessary. The control cables beside the control cables or the low voltage
cables are not necessary. The low voltage cables beside the low voltage cables
in which the diameter of the cable is 7 cm minimum. The high voltage cables
beside the high voltage cables are 15 cm interfacial distances that are separated
by the bricks in a vertical position, or 30 cm without the bricks. Separating the
pipes and crossings
Separating the path
- Between the high voltage paths and the low, it should be put a bricks barrier
along the path.
The specified distance between the cables is 15 cm.
- Between the high voltage paths or between the low voltage paths and the
connections pipes, it should be put bricks barriers along the path.
- The specified distance between the first connection cables and the cables of
the other paths is 30 cm.
- If possible, the low voltage paths are put between the high voltage paths and
the telephone paths or the path of the measure cable.
- The paths of the cables that are passing through the same trench as pipes, will
have minimum distance by 30 cm. In all the sites that are related to the
maintenance and reform such as the valves' poles, it should be left a suitable
distance for passing through without touching any of the existing cables.
Crossing and extending many layers
- If the cables or the central paths were crossed, cables are put in many layer;
one above the other, and it should be separated by concrete or sand plates of
distance by 10 cm.
When crossing with the cables paths, pipelines or its equivalent, cables should
be put inside a solid pipe that is made of the flexible (PVC) with the maximum
bending arm. Protections will exceed the cross by distance 1 meter from the
two sides.
- If the cables were extended in many layers, the high voltage cables should be
in the lower layer.
16.9.7. The pipes path
16.9.7.1. Wall cross

The cables paths from the buildings to the ground pipes will be fixed on the
external wall of the buildings and sloped to the outside to avoid the water
penetration

The terminals of such pipes and the reserve pipes will be isolated with the
polyurethane or any similar material. Such isolation should be completely
water-proofing
16.10.7.2. Another crossings

The protection pipes that are used for the crossings of the cables, pipes, walls,
road, etc., will be made from the solid (PVC) of diameter by no less than 100
meter. The thickness of the wall should be no less than 4 mm, with high
resistance to the sunrays, the ultraviolet and the conditions of the environment
temperatures.
The materials should keep its mechanical properties for at least 50 years.
The length of the pipe will be nearly 6 meter. Connection will be made by
couple-connections.
16.9.8. Cables Fixing
16.9.8.1. Number and the individuals

Contractor will provide the labors that are necessary for transporting the
cylinders, also for the dismantle works and fixing the cables. If the cables were
in different places, every teamwork will be permanently supervised by a
qualified person who is responsible for all the works that are implemented
according to the specified specifications
The unskilled workers will be employed in the works of transporting the cables
and the materials before starting the work.
Contractor will provide all the necessary equipments and tools in the sufficient
amounts such as the elevators and the machine of extending the cables. Also, if
necessary, elevators and dynamometer for making the soil borings' tests and the
cables' handles.
16.9.8.2. Cables pulling

When putting the cylinders on the elevators, the guide shaft will determine the
contrary direction. After removing the protection boards, the cables will be
examined for finding the visual defects.
When the cables are dismantled, cylinders should be manually moved to avoid
any stress for the cables.
The small cables, it may be used without elevators beside the trench cables,
then putting it in the trench.
The ground cables pulling is avoided in all the cases
When pulling the cables specially when the pipes are necessary; this is
considered a special case, as each individual length will be extended in the
same direction means that the terminal (E) meets the terminal (A) from the next
length. Wires that have the same color may be connected without passing
through pipes.
Cables will be supported by a circular cable that is put in distance varies
between 3-4 inch at the curve corner of the circular cable and according to the
maximum extent of the bending.

The holds of the cables terminals will be fixed and there will be a rope that is
fixed on these holds. It is not allowed pulling from the cables' ends.
The actual stress will be controlled by a dynamometer that is fixed on the rope.
If there were insufficient numbers of the circular cables, cable will be held in
the assistants' knowledge in a distance varies between 6-4 m.
Before pulling the cables inside the cables' pipe, the free roads of the pipes
should be examined, this is may be only when pulling on the straight
substations. Even in the case of fixing the circular corners, each pulling point
should be observed by the inspector.
In the beginning and end of the wires' pipes, the cable should not touch the pipe
edges. The edges should be rolled or making a suitable support from the
cardboard or the jute bags.
The insulated bitumen should be put in a pervasive way down the cables. Holes
should be blocked to avoid the sand penetration.
Before and behind the cables' pipes, cables should be put in zigzag way for
balancing the cables stability inside the trenches.
Before connecting the cables to the engine of the connection boxes, the closed
circuits should be fixed on the cables before leaving the ground.
The diameter that is specified for the pipes may be only used until 80%. Hence,
the diameters of the cables should be arithmetical added.
When pulling the cables, only the cables of the one-type that are pulled; this
means the cables of the high voltage, low voltage, connections, measures and
the cables of control.
The allowable maximum radius of the bending for the different types of the
cables should be strictly considered.
16.9.8.3. Extending the cables in the buildings:

Cables will be extended in the cables' cellar, that is easily could be reached to,
on its paths. It is allowed putting only one cable layer inside each path. The
system of the cables path is connected with the ground by a ground system for
each 20 meter.
All the sharp edges that may harm the workers or the cables should be covered
or isolated.
In special cases, when there are few number of the cables, they will be fixed by
shackles of the minus type or its equivalent. When putting the cables, the
distances among them will be horizontal.
The unsupported cables: 20 x the external diameter
The supported cables: 30 35 x the external diameter of the cable
Anyhow, the maximum distance will be 80 cm.
When the cables are vertically put, they should be extended to 15 meter
according to the latitude of the cable and the shackle type.
When the cables are passing through the fire-resistance walls, the wallinsulated layer should be put after fixing the cables according to the rules of the
protection against fire.

Cables of the individual terminal should be protected from moving through the
short circuits forces by the (PVC), wood or any type of the cables that are
carried on the cables paths.
The conditions of the ground and couple-ground circuits should be considered.
16.9.8.4. Cables and its marks

Cables should be marked when it is entered or ejected by index marks in all the
points and every 20 meter along the cables' path. Such marks should be made
of high-resistance plastic.
These tapes will be illustrated to the cables' numbers according to the cables'
list.
Cables' marks should be directly put above the cables' path by every 20 m
along the path at all the changes of the directions, pipes and passing the road.
Cables' paths should be defined.
16.9.8.5. Connection boxes:

Connection boxes will be used to connect the control of the individual, signal
and the measure cables by public contracted cables. Also, for connecting the
different local devices
The connection boxes that are for the purpose of the external and internal use
will be of the same structure that is made of steel plate with a blade and circular
structure on the cover. Covers should be protected by a packing to make the
boxes resistant to the air changes
Holes that are made for passing the cables through, will be worked only on the
below side of the boxes and it will be used, the cables' warps.
Boxes and the internal terminal tape will be measured to guarantee the quality
and competence of the connection cable by reserve minimum 20% in the
cables' warps and the terminals.
The separated connection boxes should be used for the different types of the
cables (Power cables, control, signal, measure), also for the different voltage
levels. The connection boxes should be marked according to its use.
16.9.8.6. Supports and installation

All the assistant installations and supports that are necessary for installing the
cables on the devices, engines, transformers, the terminal substations, the
supports of the connection boxes, etc. should be made of the galvanized iron.
16.9.9. Tests and examination

All the tests and the measure works for the cables should be in conformity with
its rules and regulations.
All the trenches of the cables and its paths should be examined and approved in
the engineer's knowledge before starting the works of extending the cables,
after the extension and before the filling
After finishing the works of extending the cables and before starting the works
of connecting the cables, contractor should make the following tests:

- The continuity test: by using the limited direct current device for all cables of
the control signals and the measure
- The test of the installation for all the power cables 0.6/1 KV (Connectors, the
ground connectors) by an engine of power by 1000 Volt
The minimum of reading (The Meggar) for the disconnected cables is 100
Mega ohms.
- The potential direct current test for each 18/30 KV and 3.5/6 KV (Connectors
and ground connectors).
Before making the tests, contractor should illustrate the suggestions,
measurements and the true parameters of the voltage tests temperatures, to the
engineer.
All the tests' reports should be signed by the contractor then giving it to the
engineer immediately after finishing all the test works
If the test results were unaccepted, the engineer should be immediately
informed
16.10. Grounding
16.10.1. Work scope

This specialization covers the technical requirements of the materials, the


installations of the grounding system and the lightening protection system as a
part of feeding by the project electric current.
16.10.2. Standards

Completing the works and supplying the materials will be matching with the
standards, rules and regulations that are mentioned in the section (1-1).
16.10.3. The soil conditions

The ground network system will be installed in different types of the soil
according to the location of the substation and the well. Before designing and
installing the ground network, it should be known, the actual conditions of the
soil; whether for the substation or the well, by using soil-resistant measures.
16.10.4. Designing requirements

The ground system of the substation and the wells' locations is a part of the
protection system for the feeding by the electric current, tools and the
observance and control system.
Contractor will measure the soil resistance at the area of the substations
assembly and the wells' location. He will also calculate the distances that are
required for the connectors, the total length of the ground materials and the
crossing substation. It will be considered the maximum wrong of the ground
current, keeping the connection and operating the voltage with unlimited
responsibilities.
Calculation will be provided to the engineer for the approval.
All the resistances that are extended in the ground regarding the ground
network should vary between 0.5 to 1.0 ohm.

When connecting the voltage for any part of the installations, it should be kept
a value that does not exceed the maximum value of the voltage regarding the
safety by 50 V.
The ground network will be connected by the cathode protection system, if
necessary. The ground network of the isolation valve room will be connected
also by the cathode protection system from the main line.
16.10.5. Materials and building
16.10.5.1. The ground materials

The ground network consists of copper connection cables by maximum extent


for the sections that are specified below according to its use.
The main ground mat of a copper connection cable that of the confined
normal type by 120 mm2.
The ground electric poles of the steel that is painted by copper of length
30 and diameter by 15-20 mm.
The connections of the metal structures for the buildings, a copper
connection cable of the confined normal type by 120 mm2.
The connections of the high voltage units devices, the medium voltage
dashboard, the transformers of the high and low voltage, a copper
connection cable of the intermittent normal type or copper straight tape
by 120 mm2.
The connections of the low voltage dashboards, the low voltage engines,
dashboards, the electronic loges for the supervision and control, a
copper connection cable of the confined normal type by 50 mm2.
For the ground installations in the concrete foundations or the concrete
tiles, tapes of the galvanized iron are used by maximum 30 x 3.5 mm.
16.10.5.2. The ground network:

All the parts and installations should be safely connected in all the metal
pipelines that are underground, also it should work in a rate up to 20 meter.
The many connections of the ground connectors will be put above the ground
on carriers (The ground connection points).
Extending the copper bars and the individual connections will be allowed down
the ground by using the Thermite (Mixture of the aluminum and the iron oxide
powder) of the connections.
All the connections of the copper connectors on the devices will be made by
connectors of the pressing type and screw bolts (by at least 10m), also tap bolts.
All the precautions should be taken to avoid any chemical reaction.
The connector among the copper and the metal parts should be protected by a
special method. It should be implemented only on the main ground connectors,
not in the ground.
16.10.5.3. Extending the ground network

The ground network should be buried by at least 50 cm down the final extent
from the natural ground.

It is allowed the public extending for the ground and the cables in the same
trench. They should be put beside the cables' pipes and surrounded by mixed
materials (without sand); a prior sand bed is necessary for extending the cables.
The places of the rocky grounds, the ground lines should be put in a bed of
mixed ground materials. When necessary, lines may be washed by the water
and mud.
A sufficient number of the ground bars will be installed to reduce the effect of
the resistance fro the ground. They will also be transported to the ground and
connected with the main ground line by the thermite weld
Connecting the ground to the internal devices of the buildings will be made
through extending copper connectors inside the cables' pipes through the
cables' paths, directly inside the walls. They are fixed by shackles, or directly
passed through a concrete casting before it is completely solidified. The
extending method depends on the nature and locations of the devices.
16.10.5.4. The ground paths air

In the paths from the ground to the air, all the connectors should be protected
by steel by 60 cm down and 60 cm above the ground. It should be coated with
the insulated bitumen or its equivalent.
==531==
16.10.5.5. The ground system of the substations complex:

The general ground system consists of a basic ground line, the ground bars and
different connecting devices.
The ground networks of the foreign systems SCECOS (The ground network of
the terminal installation) will be connected with the ground system of the
substations complex by maximum two detachable connecting points.
The ground system of all the internal substations generally, the low, medium
and high voltage units will be connected, also the devices, control, all the
equipment and its facilities, all the related steel building, fences, loges and the
ground connectors.
For all the connection systems (remote-control and communications and all its
facilities, it will be made; a separated ground network with enough crosssubstations to avoid the disturbance.
Such ground network will be connected with the general ground network on
separated connecting points.
16.10.5.6. The power expenditures

All the engines, generators, the valves operators, fans and the other power
expenditures should be connected with the ground network by the ground
terminals of its electricity feeding cables. In addition, The cover of the power
expenditure or any steel seat, will be connected with the ground network by a
separated connector.

16.10.5.7. The cables pipes and the cables

In each cables pipe, the protection connector of the cables should be connected.
When using the metal pipes, it should be connected with the pipe cover also.
The cables of the medium voltage should be connected with its flattened
supported wires and the gear counter of the terminal box of the devices and the
dashboard.
The high-tensile cables of the transformers and the feeding cables should be
connected from the two terminals with the ground system. The metal protective
of the electric current, control and the equipment cables should also be
connected with the ground.
16.10.5.8. Transformers

The electric power transformer should be connected with its steel tanks.
Also, the transportation bars and the steel seat should be connected with the
ground network that is matching with it.
The neutral connection or the transformers star point of the ground network
subject to the general ground system of the variable levels and voltage.
16.10.5.9. Establishing the pipelines

Installing the pipelines on metal blocks does not need any joints related to the
ground system.
16.10.5.10. Buildings and the steel construction for the metal blocks.

All the reinforcement for all the bases should be connected well.
At distance by 1 meter around all the building foundations, it will be extended;
a ground connector in the closed circuit by depth 0.5 at least. The reinforced
foundations should be connected at each 50 meter on this metal tape.
The circuit should be connected with the substations complex, the ground
system and the lightening protection system.
The metal blocks for any type of the pipes bridges types, buildings or the
structural blocks should be connected at each 15-25 meter with the ground
system.
The steel structures should be weld or tied together in a particular way to
guarantee the connection quality.
16.10.5.11. The lightening protection

The lightening protection system should be connected with the ground system
on separated connection points.
16.10.5.12. Marks

All the ground connection points should be marked by the sealed numbers.
These numbers should be recorded in the constructer designs.
All the ground connections will be marked by the ground mark.
16.10.5.13. The work achievement:

The contractor will guarantee:

Using the materials that are most suitable for the performance, the good
constructer, the full achievement of the work and the jobs that are suitable for
all the devices and installments and the corrosion protection under the normal
operation conditions.
16.10.6. Test

After finishing the ground system, it will be made; measures for determining
the ground resistance.
Results and the measure sites should be guided from the charts. The test reports
and the charts should be provided to the engineer.
Company/engineer will be entitled to attend the measures that are mentioned
above.
16.11. Fire alarm system
16.11.1. The work scope

Such specification covers the main design and the requirements of building the
fire alarm system in order to provide the substations pumping complex of the
project with it.
16.11.2. The system description

The pumps complex will be provided with an automatic fire alarm system to
guarantee the early notice for the fire breaking out, the self-guidance on all the
circuits, automatic throwing for the water splash system and suitable control in
the fans and air conditioners system.
The fire alarm system consists of, at least, the following equipment:
- Fire alarm board (Full electronic, multi-patterns and divided into areas)
- Additional fire alarm board built in the control substation
- Smoke detectors of the ion type inside the buildings and the cables channels
- Fire alarm switch at the open area
- Fire alarm horn
16.11.3. The building and design requirements
16.11.3.1. General requirements
13.11.3.1.1. Codes and standards

In addition to the electric codes and the standards of the other specifications,
the fire alarm system will be according to the standards of National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA), and the civil defense of the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia.
16.11.3.1.2. Installation

Equipment will be generally matching with the environmental conditions of the


sites where the installation will be made. It will be made; special measurements
for the smoke detectors installations in the air holes and the cellar, as the air
speed that may happen equals about 3m/second.

In general, distinguishing the individual and chosen alarm is required for all the
rooms.
The choosing indication for each purpose will be preferable for the pump units
at the pumping substations.
It is preferable installing the smoke detectors on the ceiling.
All the rooms that have suspended ceiling are provided with smoke detectors
that are installed at the distance between the main and suspended ceiling.
The place of the detectors should guarantee working well. The invisible
detectors should be provided with an external signal lamp.
After the fire is broken out, all the air fans will be immediately closed through
a signal from the fire alarm board.
Installation and extending the cables will be made according to the
specifications; consequently, fixing the channels properly is within these
specifications.
16.11.3.1.3. Electric power feeding

The electric power of the firealarm system should be fee from a system of 220
V, alternating current that has the property of the current interruption
prevention.
Accordingly, the fire alarm board should be equipped with self-support system
for the internal feeding with the electric current that consists of a battery and
loading substation.
16.11.4. The components description
16.11.4.1. Fire alarm board

In accordance with the requirements of the high performance and flexibility,


the fire alarm boards will be made of a special constructer considering that the
extension limit should not be less than 20%
Hence, each smoke detector will have a circuit switch that will work as a
special receiver for the unit.
The individual detectors or the circuits of the detectors will have the circuit
lock system to guarantee the continuity of finding the errors for all the circuits.
The external wires of the detectors circuits and the joints signals should be
made of a general terminal tape.
The fire alarm board should at least contain the following main equipment:
- The receiving unit of measure with the alarm lamp, the switches of reoperating the alarm and the alarm test process, etc. The alarm signals will be
stored until re-operating it.
- Individual control and the engine of the measure units relays that achieve all
the necessary internal functions and provide with all the signals for the external
processes and showing on the down screen board.
- A delays observation unit to find and show any delay such as the ground
delay, the current interruption, a delay in the signal lines circuit, etc. It will be
provided with; general delays signals include all the delays standards of the
signal circuits and the electric current feeding units

- The relays that do not have a local stop/run joint will be equipped by in the
fire alarm boards to implement the lock functions such as the fans and signal
lock.
- The electric power feeding unit with the battery accumulator NiCd, load
substation that automatically be controlled, control tools, the delays indicators,
etc.
As previously mentioned in the system description item, the alarm boards will
be designed in which it will be connected with a proper board has a special
show for all the circuit detectors. Also, a general re-operation switch that
allows re-operating the optical and audio alarm signals.
In addition to the optical alarm indicators, it will be provided with; optical
signals system through the alarm board inside the control room and outside the
administrative building.
16.11.4.2. The observation sub-board

The observation sub-board of the fire alarm is a part that is integrated with the
control substation board. It consists of signal lamps for each alarm circuit and
the general alarm re-operation switch. Because of the importance of the subboard, it will be directly connected with the main board.
16.11.4.3. The smoke detectors
16.11.4.3.1. Function
Proper ion smoke detectors guarantee the early notice for any breaking out of
the fire.
It basically consists of two ions rooms with an assistant electronic unit. When
there is any invisible or visible smoke, it will make disturbance between the
measure and the special comparison room of the detector, which exceeds the
disturbance value in which make an alarm signal.
16.11.4.3.2. Construction
The ion detector will allow choosing three sensitive values for setting it
according to the specified requirements and its positions.
For facilitating the maintenance for the detectors, it will be designed with solid
plugs and jacks that are installed on the detectors units.
For facilitating the observation for the functions, quickly notice and knowing
the signals that the detectors receive, it will be provided with a signal lamp.
In the case of the invisible detectors, external signal units should be equipped.
Such signals should be properly put in a visible place.
16.11.4.4. The control switches of the fire alarm
It consists of a proper box that has proper glassy windows on the front door. In
case of operating the switch, it will be locked in case of the pressing position
until re-operating in the knowledge of the maintenance workers. The glassy
windows should be easily replaced.

It is required proper wires for the wireless observance through the reception
unit.
16.11.4.5. The fire alarm horn
It should be provided; additional signal horns on the fire alarm board, the
additional observance board and in the yard at the anti-fire place.
The audio alarm signals will give a huge sound.
It will be provided also; internal alarm horns that are its sound level may be
adjusted. The external horns will be of (A) 11dB.
16.11.4.6. The external signal treatment
It will be provided; the treatment for all the external signals by two connection
methods without returning to the ground or any other position.
Except any of this, the additional observance board may be provided with a fire
alarm board.
It will be provided with at least all the following signals for the external
treatment:
- The single alarm signals of the control substation board.
- Signals for the automatic throwing for the water splash system of the control
board in the water.
- Signals for controlling the fans and the air conditioners.
- Signals for distinguishing the external sound.
16.11.5. Work limits
Supplying and installing all the equipment and systems including the full
cables extension, the connection boxes, wires and preparing for the operation.
16.11.6. Tests
All the components and the equipment that will be supplied, should subject to
the test individually and be set at the factory workshops according to the
specified technical requirements, insurance and the standards before the charge.
For the equipment and devices, it will be made a plan for the equipment and be
provided in the substation. Such plan should at least contain the marks and
numbers, the technical data and the individual results of the tests that have been
made.
16.12. The electric engines, Starting-up and the system of the
speed organizer
16.12.1. Work scope
These specifications cover all the technical requirements of the manufacture,
testing the engines and the speed setting system that is used in the project.

16.12.2. Standards
The electric engines and the other equipment will be manufactured in which it
should be matching with the standards, rules and the systems that are
mentioned regarding the specifications.
16.12.3. Operation conditions
The electric engines will be suitable for the internal work, installations in the
free air, the equipment of the speed setting and starting-up will be suitable for
the internal installations.
16.12.4. The engine specifications:
The electric engines that are stated in these specifications will include main
pumps, secondary pumps, compressors, fans, etc.
The engines that give power larger than or equal 0.75 Kilowatt will generally
have 3 terminals with the same speed type, squirrel cage rotors.
The engines that will be used as engines for the central main pumps will have 3
terminals, the squirrel cage rotors and speed organizer
The engines of the main pump should be equipped with speed organizer with
organization rate by 65 100%.
16.12.5. The specified design data
As follows, the specified specifications for the electric engines and the
necessary equipment. The other additional data that are related to the engines
types should be provided to the contractor in a format of the technical data
schedule.
The electric voltage rate:
The low voltage 3 x 380 V, 60Hz.
The medium voltage 3 x 4160 V, 60Hz.
The control voltage 220 V, direct current.
The speed rate:
The best synchronizing speed should be 1200 1800 R.P.M (4 or 6 columns).
The other synchronizing speed should be used only when it is necessary, while
the best synchronizing speed of the main pump engines is 1800 R.P.M (4
columns) so, the fixed speed rate is 1800 R.P.M or less.
The results estimation:
Estimating the results should be equal to the torque of the equipment speed
rotation considering the ability of increasing the load when it is necessary. The
result of the required estimation from the main engine to the pump is about 2
MW.
Engines should be able to work all the time by the maximum of the load rate
and according to the following voltage and the frequency proportions:
10% is the voltage rate of the engines of the low voltage.
5% - 10% is the voltage rate of the pump main engines.
5% is the frequency rate.
The cooler that is used for the small engines should be suitable for the
surrounding air and the maximum surrounding temperature that equals 46C.

The rotation torque:


The rotation torque of the engines should be suitable for the connected control
devices. Such standardized engines should be able to work under a huge load
and the rotation torque should be equal to speed.
Operating the pump should be safe in which guarantee the temporal speed of
the engine that results from the network delay for a short time and impact on
the project work. Hence, the engines delay is not valid when the voltage is
more than 0.7 unit, in this case, the maximum of the voltage rotation torque
that equals 0.7 unit should be at least equal to the normal rotation torque of the
engine.
The main pump engines for operating the horizontal pumps should have extra
centrifugal ability. The torque of the pumps rotation has a function of an equal
part to the speed, because the rotation torque load indicates to the pump
properties that are mentioned in the pumps mechanical specifications.
The rotation direction:
The rotation direction of the engines should be according to the following
equipment requirements:
The engines of the main pump: anti-clockwise rotation.
Other engines: clockwise rotation
These directions should be checked.
The noise level:
The noise level should be limited to guarantee an accepted level of the sound
for the operation workers as stated in the mechanical specifications. The
factory should exert all possible efforts to reduce the sound level.
The power factor:
The power factor of the main pump engines should not be less than 0.9 during
the full load and 0.85 during the half of this load.
Efficiency:
The efficiency of the small engines should not be less than 0.85, while the
efficiency of the pump main engines gets decrease by 0.79 at the estimated
result.
16.12.6. Starting-up and the speed setting system
There should be a starting-up system for the engines in which it should not
exceed the electric current proportion when starting the operation by more than
6.5-fold of the current rate.
The starting-up and speed systems of the main pumps engines should include a
connection transformer to guarantee a quit operation starting-up with a control
system for the speed. Such system should contain the following:
- Transmission transformer
- A transformer unit that includes the following main components:
* Protection from the extra-voltage
* Current transformer
* Side line fuses
* Side transformers for the engine
* The direct current connecting the reactors

Such system should be completely installed in the control room of the engine in
the building of the electric services.
16.12.6.1. Transformers
The transformers should be of the type that consists of three terminals and cast
by the resin that decrease the voltage by 4.16 KV to the desired voltage. Such
transformer will be of the internal type and will automatically cool the air.
The contractor chooses the data of the transformers according to the necessary
requirements of the technical system.
16.12.6.2. The transformer unit:The transformer unit should be of the multiplicity standard and of the electronic
type; moreover, it should has a microscopic digital treatment program with a
closed ring that control the generator frequency by a computer side
transformation and fixed current.
All the electronic elements should be installed o printed circular cards. The
system should also be suitable for fixing the squirrel cage rotors an enable
choosing a system of safe margins that should be at least 15% more than the
maximum of the calculated real values.
The control and setting system in the substation will be the responsible for
determining the starting point in the speed setting system and the other orders
of the start-up and lock.
If any errors or defects happened to the system, it should be firstly kept the
speed of the unit as it was before. It should be alarming that it is necessary
stopping the engine and transformer together.
In case of decreasing the voltage of the network, the unit should be kept
operated without any interference, as long as the speed did not decreased from
the specified limit.
If there was any defect, in the circuits of the engine and its units, that may be
danger for the pump equipment, the engine and transformer should be
immediately locked and the transformer should be electrically locked.
Cabins:
The tools and equipment should be fixed in the metal cabins that are
manufactured in the factory and have the ability of movement, as it is not
connected with what around it. Such cabins have front-doors with hinges.
The power and control wires plug out of the wires part under the cabins, while
the terminals are in the bottom of the cabins.
It should be installed; pipes that the cables and wires are put in before
distributing it.
The measure equipment:
==541==
All the necessary measure equipment should be fixes; whether such equipment
was related to the control, observance or sending the signals on the front-doors
that of the hangs for the cabins, specially its cabins.

Such cabins should be provided with lists that are put on the top of the cabins
and include the details of any delay or defect may happen to the system. in
anticipation of the emergency cases, a central pressing switch to lock and stop
the system should be installed.
There should be the following measure equipment that include alarms and
signals and adding it to the other local indications that are connected with the
wires to the terminals for the external use:
- Speed measures
- Alarm transformer
- Unavailable transformer
- Points of setting the speed from the unit boards
- The real value for setting the speed
16.12.7. Design and construction
16.12.7.1. Cooling method
The surrounding air is the real cooler of the small engine, while the cooler that
is used for cooling the engines of the main pumps is the water.
The air and water that are used for cooling will be put in the cover of the
engine in addition to the ventilation devices fixed there.
The cool water is prepared then the engine is provided with it through the
external cool hole. The air and water cooler should contain reserve capacity by
20%.
The engine and pump should be provided with external oiling and cooling
system. The holders of the small engine should be of self-cool type (Lubricate
for the life extension).
16.12.7.2. The constructer styles
The style of the constructer and the collecting arrangements should be
matching with (DIN 45.950), and its equivalent.
The small engines should be of the following types (B-3, B-5, V-1, V-3).
The engines of the main pumps will be of the horizontal type B-3.
16.12.7.3. Vibration
Designing and building the engines will be in a way that guarantees the
minimum of the allowable vibration.
Vibrations of the engines will be tested before and after collecting them and
after installation and operation also.
Such tests will be made with the estimated frequency and voltage. All the
necessary measures are taken for the test during the operation period without
load. It is also taken after enough time from the operation to g et sure of being
it in conformity with the specifications.
It should be abide by; the specified values and all the agreed mechanical
specifications.

16.12.7.5. Protection
The mechanical protection against the dust and water will be at least IP-55 for
the main engines of the pumps. While IP-55 for the small engines.
16.12.7.6. The dimensions specifications
All the engines that are of the same type and consequently connected should be
replaceable to guarantee the ability of replacing the engines. All the dimensions
of the devices should be standardized.
16.12.7.7. Frame and Cover
The frame and cover of the engine should be equipped with the following:
- Fixed devices to guarantee coordinating the engine unit.
- Lifting terminals for the engines that are heavier that 90Kgm.
- Ground terminal (For the main pumps in which each terminal is fixed on each
side of the engine sides).
- Drainage hole for draining the condensed water.
16.12.7.7. The column
The dimensions and constructer of the engine column should be standardized.
The side column of the main pumps engine will be suitable for the solid
coupling connection and according to the requirements of the pump factory.
16.12.7.8. Holders
A cylinder or round holder is installed with the lubrication for the small
engines to extent its life.
The holders of the main pumps engines should be of the good type and
provided with the oil pressure in addition to oil rings in anticipation of the
emergency cases in case of delaying the used oiling system.
The oiling system will be general for the engines and pumps as stated in the
mechanical specifications.
The allowable time for working without the oil system is only 30 minutes.
Holders will be of long-life to be valid for working for 100000 hours.
Precaution should be taken to avoid the circular currents in the holders.
During the holders transmission, there should be a lock device for its
rotational part.
16.12.7.9. Insulation
A general insulation of the type (F) will be used and by maximum thermal use
for the devices. It should be matching with the type (B).
16.12.7.10. The additional devices and the measure tools
The engine units of the main pumps will be equipped with at least the
following measures and observance tools:
The engine:
6 pieces: resistance thermostat PT-100, 2 terminals with low protection factor

2 pieces: resistance thermostat PT-100 to bear the temperature A, B.


2 pieces: resistance thermostat PT-100, to cool the air before and after cooling
the air/water.
1 piece: reserve heater, 220 V of alternating current
3 pieces: star current transformers for protection
The oil system:
2 pieces: an indicator for the oil pressure before loading.
2 pieces: flow-measure
2 pieces: level-measure
Cooling system:
1 piece: control valve for setting the temperature
2 pieces: the temperature indications
16.12.7.11. The terminal boxes
There will be main terminal boxes with the standard specifications that are
installed in all the engines in which allow connecting the insulated dry wires
(XLPE) with each other. Such boxes should not be filled with any insulating
materials.
The internal level of the terminal boxes will be accurately measured to
guarantee providing enough distance, when the cables are connected with the
terminals. Also, there will be enough distance allows making a coverage for the
connector terminals.
In addition, a ground terminal will be installed in the terminal box for
connecting the cables. In the opposite side of the main terminal box of the main
pumps engines, another terminal box of the current transformers will also be
installed to protect against the ground delays.
It should be installed; a central terminal standard box to connect all the
observance devices and with the additional devices of the main pumps engines.
Such box is fixed on the main terminal box side with providing all what is
necessary such as wires and the packing of the external cables.
The internal cables that connect the measure box and the different measure
tools will be put in wires pipes of special protection.
The terminal boxes should be manufactured at least from metal materials with
mechanical protection IP55.
16.12.7.12. The local control box
Each main pump engine will be provided with local control box that is
equipped with switches (on/off/emergency/remote-control) in which it is
connected with the main control substation by wires.
16.12.7.13. The boards of the estimative values
Such boards will be made of metal that is anti- rust and corrosion. Also, the
instructions that are written on it should be hardly deleted or removed and
unchangeable or non-replaceable. Such information are printed and fixed on a

part in the frame that could not be separated in which it should be easily read
and seen. Such list has all the data of the full system. Beside such board, it
should be fixed another board of the same material that the data of the oiling
system is written on it.
16.12.7.14. Painting works
All the surfaces that will be painted should be sanded before the paint. It should
be put firstly; a protective paint of good condensation in the inside.
Fire resistance is preferable or the paint should be at least flame resistance.
All the works of the painting and coverage will be implemented according to
its specifications or the high quality guarantee. It will subject to the engineers
approval.
16.12.8. Test
16.12.8.1. Examination and test in the factory
The following tests will be implemented synchronically for each engine:
- Measuring the direct current resistance for the static engines
- Measuring the insulating resistance for the static engines
- Measuring the load and non-load of the electric current
- Measuring the voltage and power using fixed rotor.
- Measuring the start-up current in the partial voltage.
- Measuring the high voltage.
- Testing the centrifugal
- Checking the vibration
- Reading the curve of the non-loading, rubbing and the iron corrosion.
- Reading the curve of the circuits failure and estimating the loss in the
circuits failure.
- Estimating the efficiency.
- The following tests and measures will be implemented on a sample of the
speed and start-up organizing system that will be completely collected with the
matching engine. Tests will fully cover the organizing rate:
- Efficiency
- The electric current voltage
- The electricity consuming
- The disturbance factors
- All the results of the tests will be inserted into a report in the contractors
knowledge.
16.12.8.2. Tests at the site
The following tests will be made for the engines in the normal conditions at the
site:
- Test of temperature rise in the cases of the extra-load and without load.
- Examining the temperature of the cooling air.
- Reading the operation current curve.
- Examining the efficiency.

- Checking the power factor.


- Checking the noise level.
- Checking the vibration.
The results of all these tests of each engine will be inserted individually in a
special report in the contractors knowledge.
The following tests and measures will be made in the site for the system of the
start-up and speed setting after connecting all the external sources:
- Checking the efficiency and the power factor in the cases of the full load and
the speed rates
- Full functional test
- Checking the current/ the voltage curve in the case of starting-up and
organizing the operation.
- Checking the noise level.
- Checking the disturbance factors.
All the results of the tests will be inserted in a report in the contractors
knowledge.
16.12.9. Accessories
The engine will be fully provided with all the necessary accessories for the
installation such as:
- Hook retainers
- Connecting switches
- Devices for the balance
The system of the speed setting and start-up will be provided with the
following accessories:
- Reserve fuses
- Reserve ternary electronic valve.
- Reserve double valves
- Nails for fixing and installation
- Connecting switches
- In addition, it will be provided; all the necessary accessories for operating and
maintaining the engines and the speed setting system.
16.13. The filling substation 4.16/0.4 KV
16.13.1. Work scope
This part covers the technical requirements regarding the materials, the
manufacturing methods and the tests for the filing external substations by
4.16/0.4 KV using the distribution boards in the project.
16.13.2. Standards
The filling substations will be manufactured to be matching with the standards,
rules and systems that are mentioned in the section (16.1.).

16.13.3. The operation conditions


The filling substation will be suitable for the continuous operation; moreover,
the designing for the operation will be under the environmental and climate
conditions that are specified in the section (16.1.).
16.13.4. The specifications of the equipment
The filling substation will have a full content that is fixed on a collected
integrated seat in the factory, completely closed. It is also made of a strong
constructer that is against the weather fluctuations and has the ability to be put
in any position; on a concrete seat or its equvalient.
The substation will contain: MV switch (The unit of the main ring),
transformer, low voltage switch and dashboard.
The substation will be suitable for the continuous work under all the
conditions, the usual load rate and under the direct sun temperature. The
temperature of the substation may reach to 70 degree.
Finishing
The final finish of the substation and the final coloring will be approved by the
engineer. All the electrified parts will be attached in the rooms that could be
tightly locked which will be insulated to achieve the maximum of the safety.
By installing all the necessary accessories for these rooms, it will be
completely ready to receive the wires that are coming from the down part.
16.13.4.1. The main circular unit will be fixed in the wires boxes and the
suitable fillings that make it suitable to receive the coming wires. Also, the
coupled-wires will be connected by fixed sleeves that will have holes of two
flanges allow compensating for the variance that may happen to it during the
manufacturing and installation.
The circular main unit will take the operation position in front of the unit. The
fuses will be easily withdrawn by the direct withdrawal from this position for
the purpose of replacement.
The plug of the fuse will be tightly locked to prevent opening it if the fuse was
not closed in the ground position.
The switches mechanism will be of the independent manual type and have the
property of the fast-cut. The operation speed should be independent from the
operator.
The fuses switch will be a latch and it will automatically work once the fuses
are on. In case of firing the valve, all the three terminals of the fuse will be
fired and the unit will be locked for not operating the fuses switches again,
unless the fuses of the delays were replaced. Also, it is provided with a switch
(R.M.U) of the SF6 type.
16.13.4.2. The transformer of the content comparison will have the following
specifications, considering the surrounding temperature is 46C:
The estimated KVA: as stated
The voltage rate: 4160 initial volt
400/230 secondary volt
The coils joints: initial, secondary wires triple delta, starting with a neutral
point, insulating from the external ground.

Terminals/frequency: three terminals/ 60Hz


The circuit lock MV +5% to -5% in 2.5% operation.
The connecting method: externally, the circuit closes the switch of the tape
changing with an indication board other facilities for locking in any operation
system.
Symbol (The format of the mark) Dyn11
The resistance degree of the alternating current: 4%
The noise level: less than 48 DB
The allowable temperature: 45 degree that are measured by rising the resistance
Cooling: natural oil of the onan type to give the full result under the
temperature of 46 degree.
Installation: Lifting tools, slope seat, ground terminal, thermostat, connection
board and pressure release disk.
It is not required reading the oil temperature continually. Anyhow, there is a
condition for using the thermostat only in the necessary cases through installing
a hole for the thermostat that has a cover against the weather conditions and
that should be easily removed.
There will be a longitudinal part to prevent the transformer faulting and resist
the pressure during the normal work.
There will be an indicator for measuring the oil level. Such indicator will be
made of the glassy oil to allow vision through it and it is installed on the same
transformer side.
16.13.4.3. The dashboard of the low voltage is a separated metal room with
doors that may be closed. It will contain:
- Manual triple column, main air current interruption circuit that of the fixed
type, 500 V. It should have a suitable ability to resist the faulting. The current
capacity should not be less than that is available in the short circuits of the
substations, transformer, and magnetic thermal protection and against the
ground delays.
- Ammeter device with a selected switch and current transformer. The ammeter
will be provided with the maximum of the required reading.
- Voltammeter with a selected switch and protection fuse.
- All the sub- current crosses will be of the circular type with a metering level
by 46 degree to operate the magnetic coils.
- One-terminal jack hole with a top plug and fluorescent lamp by 12 Watt. It
should be installed; an integrated battery/emergency transformer with
cut/connecting switch to allow lightening the emergency lamp. It is installed
beside the dashboard of the high and low voltage. The wires will be previously
equipped in the factory.
The substation of the street and area lightening will be equipped with the
following:
Light electric control:
The control circuits of the low voltage that is responsible for lightening the
street and signal will be provided with triple connecting switch that will be of
light electric control. It should also be provided with additional functions for
maintenance.

The electric light cell will be fixed on a column of height by 3 meter and it is
fixed on the top of the substation.
The Chronological:
The temporal should be suitable for operation without stop in case of the
current interruption for at least 500 hours.
16.13.4.4. Constructer requirements
The contractor should agree with a factory that is successful in manufacturing
the details of the filling substations that are related to the necessary civil works
which should be completely suitable for the equipment. Also, all the measures
and details should be examined and revised before casting the concrete and it
should be approved by the engineer. Only the contractor who will be
responsible for providing the materials, starting the construction in the right
position for the concrete seat and connecting with the wires pipes and then
implementing the installation.
Extending the cables also and connecting to the filling substation including the
work of the feeing cables terminals of the medium voltage.
Contractor will install the substation unit above the concrete seat using the
suitable lifting tools to guarantee keeping the devices from any damage. When
putting the substation in the true position, it should be fixed well then testing
before and after connecting the out and coming wires.
16.14. Test
16.14.1. Examination and test inside the factory
Testing will be made inside the factory according to the specified standards and
specifications.
The units of the substation will be fully collected in the factory before loading
and transmitting it to be sure of the manufacturing safety and the operation
efficiency. Also, for checking the responding of the external control devices
and guarantee the true transmission for the signals and connecting it to the
external electric circuits. In addition, guarantee the good connection of the
measure electric circuits.
16.14.2. Quality tests
The quality tests will not be made, unless the contractor provides an approved
copy states the results of these tests.
If the contractor did not provide an initial sample of the equipment that did not
subject to quality tests before, he should announce this in his tender.
16.14.3. Testing in the site
The same tests that have been made in the factory and that are previously
mentioned should be made in the site in the contractors knowledge before the
constructer and connecting the substation with the external sources.

16.14.4. Accessories
The substation will be equipped with all the necessary accessories for the
installation works (screw nails, nails, and seat). In addition, all the accessories
that are necessary for operation and maintenance regarding the substations will
be provided to each substation and it will consists of at least:
- (1) group of the equipment for the operation and maintenance.
- High voltage fuses
- Switches crew for the rooms doors and lockers
- Oil for putting it during the operation and testing the operation period.
16.15. Revision
16.15.1. Work scope
This revision covers all the technical requirements for the design and materials,
manufacturing and tests for the high-voltage equipment by 13.85 KV of the top
lines and that will be used in the project.
==551==
It will be built; top lines by 13.8 KV along the field of the well and it will be
matching with the standards of (SCECO). All the materials that are used should
be approved by (SCECO) and the contractor, while the contractor will be
responsible for getting all the approvals from (SCECO) during the installation
period.
16.15.2. Operation conditions
The equipment of the high voltage (SF6) and the top lines by 13.8 KV will be
suitable for the continuous operating in the case of the full loading and under
all the environmental and the climatic conditions as specified in the section
(16.1.).
The equipment of (SF6) will be externally installed in the transformation yard.
It will also be suitable to bear the hot, moisture and salty weather.
16.15.3. Standards
All the equipment will be manufactured in which it should be matching with
the local standards of (SCECO) beside all the other additional requirements, if
they were mentioned in another place regarding the different departments of
the project specifications.
All the connections of the network (SCECO) will be implemented according to
the standard specifications of (SCECO)
-32-SMSS-3
-32-SMSS-6
-32-SMSS-1
The standard technical specification of the voltage that is by 115 KV
Regarding the top lines, the following specifications of (SCECO) will be
followed.

The specifications (SCECO) of distributing the top lines:


D2,D3,D4D10,D13,D14,D16
D17,D18,D19,D22,D27,D28,D33
D34,D41 AND D42

The seventeenth chapter


Telecommunications/Telemetering
17.1. General:
17.2. System Configuration:
17.3. Functional Requirements:
17.3.1. Control Requirements:
17.3.2. Sending the signals to the remote control/telemetering:
17.3.3. Discovering the leakage:
17.3.4. Telemetering requirements:
17.4. System description
17.4.1. System work

The seventeenth chapter


Telecommunication/Telemetering
17.1. General:

Telecommunication and telemetering systems secure the control functions,


collecting the data of the well field, the ground tank and treatment by the
chlorine, the pipelines of Buzakha, pumping substations and the water tanks of
the top point including the contours of the Buzakha tank and a lot of the
assistant systems including the vocal communications.
Sending the control signals and data between the main control substation that
are located at the control and administration building in the works complex of
the water well field, pumping substations and the tanks of the top point at
Buzakha, all should be made through installing the optical fibers cable and the
communications equipment at all these positions. The vocal communication
between theses substations and connecting it with the networks of the mail,
telegraph and the telephone should be made through the same means (The
optical fibers cable/ the control equipment).
The optical fibers cables should be installed along the water pipelines path.
The work scope that is included under the contract is as follows:
The contractor supplies and installs the telecommunication/ telemetering
systems in the well field, lock cock and others which need control and
observance.
17.2. System Configuration:
The full general form of the system as follows:
17.2.1. There are (15) of well pumps at the well field. The devices are provided
at each well head of the wells to measure the flow, the well water level,
pressure, the pump performance and the equipment conditions.
The Remote Terminal Units (R.T.U) that are at each well head do the functions
of the communications, control and collecting the data.
Connection, from each remote terminal unit that is at the well field to the main
control substation that is at the administration building of the water well field
works complex, is made through the tie lines that has optical fibers.
17.2.2. The main line of collecting water discharge the water to a ground tank
that is at the works complex of the water well field. The pumps of the main
pipelines drain the water from the ground tank, and then pump it towards the
tank of the top point at Buzakha.
17.3. The functional requirements:
17.3.1. The control requirements:
17.3.1.1. The operation statuses of the well pumps
The following statuses are the operation statuses of the well pumps from the
Scada system:

The system of the central automatic status


1. Starting the operation automatically to the well pumps at the low level of the
water in the ground tank at the works complex of the water well field.
2. Automatic stop for the well pumps at the high level of the water in the
ground tank at the works complex of the water well field.
3. Automatic stop for the well pumps at the low level of the water in the well.
(This item has the advantage over than no. (1) above).
4. Automatic stop for the well pump when the flow decreases other than the
current value of the well natural drainage.
5. If any leakage happened, the alarm signal goes on and the pump is stopped.
The system of the central manual status
In this case, the operator run the well pump using the information and the
ability of observance/control that are provided by the Scada computers.
However, it takes its decision itself.
17.3.2. Sending the signals to the remote control/ telemetering
17.3.2.1. The well pumps (Experimental for 15 wells)
- The flow rate from the well head
- The total size of the water that is pumped from the well head
- The water level of the well head
- The available pump
- The running/working pump
- The stopped pump
- The pump in a release status (alarm)
- The power factor, voltage, the pump current.
- The drainage/discharge pressure, the temperature
- The electric power steam: operator, off, the battery voltage and the electric
charge position.
- The air conditioner unit (alarm)
- Electric power feeding (Delayed)
- The room of the telemetering equipment (The high temperature)
- The transformer alarm
- The telemetering equipment (Status/alarm)
- The hours of the pump running
All the mentioned signals above are sent from different sites to the main
control substation for observing and showing the signals, recording the data,
recording, etc. The order signals are sent from the main substation to the
different substations/sites for the control functions.
This regulation is an initial one. The contractor should make the final
regulation that is related to sending all the data/ the order signals that are
necessary to completely achieve a central system. He is also responsible for
finding the final number of the equipment such as the control valves, engines,
the central conditioner equipment, the fire alarm boards and the other attached
different devices.

Regarding all the Throttling valves, the continuous signal of the valve status is
sent to the main control substation that is at the works complex of the water
well field.
Any discovering/catching for alarm from any of the devices such as the
counters of the flow measure, the temperature, pressure, the level measure
devices, etc. are all also sent to the main control substation.
At each table/control panel at the pumping substations, the contractor secure
the guide lamps of the main pumps that are related to the pumping substation as
follows:
The unit Available
The unit On
The unit Delayed
17.3.3. Discovering the leakage
The abilities of discovering the leakage of the flow measure system is able to
find the leakages in the pipeline that are resulting from the cracks in the
pipeline which are of size less than the critical size of the cracks. This allows
finding the small leakages that happens because of the cracked pipelines before
the damaged failure happens to the pipe because of the cracks aggravation.
The leakages calculations based on the calculation of the size balance,
considering the temperature and pressure, not only based on the difference of
the two processes of the flow measure.
The calculations are provided in which the ability of the system is shown
through finding the leakages from the pipeline cracks before it reach to the
critical size.
The system remotely determines the location where the leakage happens at
quickly at any part of the pipeline pars.
17.3.4. Telemetering requirements:
- A remote terminal unit that is exist at each pump of the wells pumps secure
all the data of the well field.
- The remote terminal unit of the well field connects with the host computer
system that is at the main control center using the communication system of the
optical fibers.
- Connections, along the pipelines from the main control substation to the water
tanks of the top point, are secured through a cable of the optical fibers by four
(4) cores with single mode and directly buried in the grounds core. The
communications lines are secured from the Ministries of Telegraph, Mail and
Telephone at the works complex through using the communications.
Equipment, data and voice are all transported all the sites.
- Redundancy is secured in which it does not cause delay in any active
component or any cable lost the control functions at the pipelines and through
the telemetering.

17.4. The system description


17.4.1. The system work
Each well head is provided with the main equipment of the optical fibers. The
main substation has redundancy system, reception devices and the electric
power feeding that working through the hot reserve mode.
It automatically transfers to the reserve equipment, when finding the alarm in
the connector system. The equipment of the main substation is able to work
under the continuous operation mode with working the sending and reception
devices synchronously during sending the data.
Hence, according to the configuration that is stated above, the remote terminal
unit is only operated for the necessary period of the reply message. After that,
the main substation delete the new remote terminal unit and the related sending
device is activated, etc.
Accordingly, the contractor considers that the information regulation of the
remote control/ telemetering that will be sent from the wellhead to the main
substation as the minimum/the initial regulation. Hence, completing the
regulation in which the system could be operated in a central-manual mode or
central-automatic mode securely.
Discovering the leakage in the well head or the main assembly line is also
made through the same mean and sent to the main substation.
The colorful visible display unit shows the full display at the place that that
alarms happen at with stating also the change of the mode signals and all the
other events.
These indications allow the operator to choose more of the detailed displays.
The colorful prints, records, the alarm boards and the representative boards,
that are used regarding the remote control/ telemetering for the pipelines and as
mentioned in the previous paragraphs, are also used for the data of the
wellhead, the mode signals, alarms and the other measures.
The eighteenth chapter
The well pumps
18.1. General:
18.2. Definitions:
18.3. The virtual/design age:
18.4. Castings:
18.5. Forgings:
18.6. The plates of the estimative capacity, the names plates and the
identification cards:
18.7. Analyzing the water that will be pumped:
18.8. Corrosion obstruction:
18.9. The external protection:
18.10. Nuts and bolts, studs, flanges:
18.11. Spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment:
18.12. Extension/ Electric power feeding:

18.13. The electric power for building/ implementing and tests:


18.14. The temporal storage, protection and filling:
18.15. Guarantees of the good performance:
18.16. Tests at the manufacturing company workshop:
18.17. Tests of the workshop on the vertical pipes
18.18. Tests of the workshop on the pumps:
18.19. Tests of the workshop on the engines:
18.20. Tests of the workshop on the electric equipment:
18.21. Tests certificates:
18.22. Defects/ delays in the workshop tests:
18.23. Tests at the site:
18.24. Tests when completing the achievement:
18.25. The submerged pumps
18.25.1. Performance and the general requirements:
18.25.2. The submerged pumps:
18.25.3. The pumps installations:
18.26. Electrical Installations:
18.26.1. General:
18.26.2. Compartments:
18.26.3. The electrical switches of the high voltage:
18.26.4. Transformers:
18.26.5. The operator start-up cubicle:
18.26.6. Control Gear Cubicle:
18.26.7. The other electrical specifications:
The eighteenth chapter
The wells pumps
18.1. General:
The pump of any well at the well field is of the full submerged type.
All the types of the engines and pumps that are supplied for the contract should
be of one type in which it should be supplied and manufactured by the same
manufacturing companies. All the new pieces should be replaceable among the
groups of the pumps and engines.
18.2. Definitions:
The following vocabularies and terminologies has the meanings that are
specified for them, unless other that is provided in the context.
1. Pump means all the pumping equipment within the final location of the
well including the surface plate unit (Flatness), drainage/discharge bend, the
engine and all the necessary requirements.
2. The pump body/spear means the fixed part of the pump that exists between
the inlet and the connection point at the vertical pipe.
3. Impeller indicates to such part of the rotational group that gives the power
to the liquid that is pumped.

4. Shaft indicates to such part of the pump that each impeller base on, and
that is operated from the operation engine.
5. Column pipe indicates to the vertical pipe or (The pipes that are vertically
connected or separated end to end) that supports and carries the pump spear
from the surface plate unit.
6. Surface plate unit indicates to such part of the pump that the vertical pipe
hangs from and includes the drainage/discharge bend.
7. Static head means the difference in the level such as the difference
between the level of the free surface liquid at the ground tanks of the wells
field and the level of the free surface at the well and multiplied by the liquid
specific gravity.
8. Velocity head means the kinetic energy of the liquid mass unit.
==561==
9. Loss of the internal friction means the power of each liquid mass that
transfers to heat between the water entrance to the pump and the hole of the
water exit from the surface plate unit.
10. Loss of the external friction means the power of each liquid mass that
transfers to heat between the surface plate unit and he terminal end of the well
compressor pipes network that is mentioned under the contract.
11. Total head means the pressure that the pump gives to the liquid which is
the extract of the static and speed compressors and the cases of the external
friction loss.
12. Bowl efficiency means the proportion of the power that is given to the
liquid between the entrance and exit holes of the pump spear and the
mechanical power on the rotation column. It is referred as percentage.
13. Engine efficiency means the power proportion that comes to the rotation
column and the power that comes to the engine. It is referred as percentage.
14. General/total efficiency means the power proportion that the pump gives
to the liquid and the power rate that comes to the operation unit. It is referred as
percentage.
18.3. The virtual/design age:
The pump is designed in which needs the minimum extent of the maintenance
and the routine maintenance as possible, also maintaining it does not need the
services of such high-skill elements.
When using the materials and the components of the pump to meet the design
requirements, the contractor should carefully consider the water properties that
lead to corrosion which impact on the pump. He should also coordinate with
the ministry for the analysis before choosing the pumps.
18.4. Castings:
The castings body is homogenous and free from the non-metal materials and
the other harming defects. All the castings surfaces that did not made by the

machine, should be soft and carefully flattened to remove all the salient that are
resulting from the casting process.
The castings that are exposed to the hydraulic pressure are tested by pressing to
the fold of the maximum pressure. When any of the tests are finished, a
certified copy of the test reports is provided to the engineer.
The minor defects, that its depth does not exceed 2.5% of the total thickness of
the metal and do not impact on the casting competence and strength, may be
maintained by using certified weld techniques and methods.
The engineer is informed about the defects that are more than the stated limit.
No weld for the purpose of maintaining such big defects will be made without
the prior approval.
If removing the metal for the purpose of maintenance will reduce the voltage
resistance of the casting horizontal sector by more than 25% or such extent in
which the calculated voltage of the remaining metal exceed the allowable
voltage by more than 25%, then this casting piece may be rejected.
Castings that are maintained by the weld for that they have big defects, its
voltage should be decreased after such welding.
Contractor make the non-destructive tests on any casting piece that has defects
could not be estimated, or for being sure that the welding that made for the
purpose of maintenance were achieved well.
18.5. Forgings:
All the castings that bear the big voltages are made according to standard
specifications that are provided to the engineer for approving it before starting
work.
Each forgoing piece is treated by the heat to release it from the remaining
voltages. The manufacturer name and the details of the suggested treatment by
heat are provided to the engineer, while the contractor tests each forgoing by
the non-destructive methods to find any defects/cracks.
18.6. The plates of the estimative capacity, the names plates and
the identification cards:
The name plate and the estimative capacity plate is fixed on each
secondary/assistant main piece of the pump at a prominent position and they
should be made of a resistant material t the weather conditions. The name of
the manufactured company, the pump type and its serial number, the details of
the load and bearing that the pump piece designed to work according to and the
charts that the engineer may ask for are all engraved or written on the plates.
It should be tightly fixed on all the operation devices and the indications, or
marking the data of its function and the best method of using it. The details of
the suggested engraved writings are provided to the engineer for approving it
before manufacturing any identification card.
Such plates of the names and the estimative capacity and the functional names
are all made of a material that is humidity non-absorbent, also it should be
approved by the engineer. Its writings and texts should be either engraved or
painted by a fixed color that could not be deleted, or a glassy plastic material of

writings that are properly colored and engraved on its back side.
Items/materials like valves should have what stat the rotation direction to show
the lock and open mode.
The identification labels and plates are made of materials that do not help
spreading the flame. Such labels and plates are fixed by in-corrodible and nonerodible nuts. The plates of the names should be written in Arabic and English.
18.7. Analyzing the water that will be pumped:
One of the following order that are related to the initial information that the
bidder/contractor should be sure of, is attached with the Attach (A) of the
specifications of this section:
1. The properties of the well as suggested by the employer regarding the well
contract.
2. Analyzing the well water for a well that is near to the project location.
The contractor should coordinate with the ministry regarding the properties of
the well and analyzing its water before choosing the pumps.
18.8. Corrosion obstruction:
The contractor obstruct the corrosion that resulting from the very closeness of
the metals that are not matching with each other. The metals that are not
matching and resulting from touching with each other are insulated from each
other by using the separators, sleeves, etc.
In addition, the fixing pieces that may cause transmitter/connector are insulated
through the same method. The metals that are not matching and in direct touch
with each other are chosen in which the difference of the voltage between them
in the electromechanical chain less than 500 millivolt.
Choosing the contact is made in which the difference in the voltage between
them in the electromechanical chain should be less than 500 millivolt. The
contractor clearly states on the charts; the details of the insulation between the
metals that are not matching.
The resistance of the in-corrodible steel to the corrosion should not be less than
such resistance that the steel guarantee which the proportion of the chrome in it
is 18%, while the nickel is 10%.
18.9. The external protection
The external protection of the components that will be installed within the well
will be able to sustain under the abrasion during installing and dismantle the
equipment.
The layers of the finishing are accurately put according to the instructions of
the manufacturer company. Each paint layer has shadowy gradation different
from what precede it to facilitate the examination. All the materials are
obtained from a certified factory and they are supplied to the site in plates or
barrels that should be stamped by sound stamp (not dismantled) that is related
only to the plates and clearly stated on it; the expiry date.
The engineer is entitled to ask for providing him with plates that state the
samples of the actual paint that will be used for the purposes of test and

examination. The paint does not be coated on the dry and clean surfaces unless
under the surrounding temperature that does not exceed 93 C.
Any covering or paint, including the preparatory layers that will be used from
the inside through contacting with the water for consuming, should be proper
and valid to be used in the drinking water usages. The national council for
water should have a regulation includes the approved materials and it will test
the samples that are provided and which they are given 3 months as grace for it.
2. The external protection of the pipes and the equipment pieces/ fixings that
are above the ground are put through two stages as follows:
At the manufacturing company
A. Flattening for removing all the rough and sharp edges and the other defects
by using the tools that are manually work.
B. Treatment by the sand blast according to the British specifications (BS 4232
1967), the second type, provided that the capacity of the surface does not
exceed 0.1 mm.
C. During the four (4) hours of what mentioned in the paragraph (B) above, a
preparatory paint, of the epoxy that is treated by polyamide and that rich of
zinc, contains a dry membrane (Film) which the zinc proportion in it is by no
less than 90% in which gives a membrane thickness by 80 Micron in the
minimum.
At the site
A. All the finishing that are made in the factory are completely cleaned to
remove all the dismantled materials, dust, rust, lubricate, oil and the other odd
materials through wiping by solvent solution and using the electric wire brush
or the other approved methods according to what satisfy the engineer.
B. During (24) hours of what mentioned above, all the defects that are exist in
the paint that is made in the factory are maintained by one coating of a treated
preparatory layer that is treated by polyamide and free from zinc to give a
membrane thickness by 80 Micron in the minimum.
C. The previous finishing layer is completely cleaned and during (4) hours, one
preparatory paint layer of the iron oxide that is coated with the epoxy which is
treated by polyamide and free from zinc is put in which gives a dry membrane
thickness by no less that 80 Micron in the minimum.
3. The external protection of the buried pipes, the installations
pieces/equipment and valves are provided through two stages as follows:
A. In the factory of the manufacturing company
A. Like the secondary paragraph (2) A (A), (B) and (C)
B. In the site
The previous finishing layer is completely cleaned and during (4) hours, a
glassy paint layer is put and followed by a full paint layer which is covered by
the glassy fibers or similar covering on the parts / pieces of the main pipe in
addition to an additional paint layer of the epoxy coal tar that is treated by
polyamide in which gives a membrane thickness by no less than 3 mm above
the matted parts.

When the installation is completed, all the damaged paint works,


nuts, retaining bolts, etc. are maintained by two paint layers of the
epoxy coal tar that is treated by polyamide.
The prominent vertical parts of the valves that are buried in the ground are
painted in the way that is stated above.
4. The internal protection of the pipes at the well head is provided through two
stages as follows:
A. In the factory of the manufacturing company
A. Flattening for removing all the rough and sharp edges and the other defects
by using the tools that are manually worked.
B. Treatment by the sand blasting according to the British specifications (BS
4232 1967), the second type, provided that the capacity of the surface does
not exceed 0.1 mm.
C. During 4 hours of what mentioned in the item (B) above, a preparatory paint
of the epoxy that is treated by polyamide and free from zinc in which gives a
membrane thickness by 80 Micron in the minimum.
D. The previous finishing layer is completely cleaned. During (2) hours, one
preparatory glassy paint layer of the coal tar is put. Then a second paint layer
is put as stated for the first paint layer in which gives dry membrane thickness
by no less than 300 Micron. The epoxy content should not be less than 40%of
the dry cover weight (FILM).
B. In the site
All the damaged pain works are maintained by using the wire brush and
cleaning with putting two paint layers of coal tar / epoxy as stated in the
paragraph (D) above.
5. The works of the pipe networks that is buried in the concrete
Each material is cleaned and treated by the dilute sulfuric acid or the
hydrochloric. This is followed by washing with water and treating by the
phosphoric acid. After that, each material is completely washed, heated and
submerged in the melted zinc then painted by the brush in which the paint
regularly covers all the metal surfaces.
The weight of the paint by zinc should not be less than 0.6 Kg/m2 of the
painted surface. The full of the galvanization process should be made according
to the British specifications BS.729.
6. Painting by enamel that is fixed by heat
When it is determined painting by the enamel that is fixed by heat, the pain
layer is put according to the specifications of C.P. 2008 (1966), items 506 (9)
and 507 (10).

18.10. Nuts and bolts, studs, flanges:


Unless otherwise is determined, nuts, bolts and flanges that will be used for the
pumps should be matching with the requirements that are stated in the British
specifications (BS 4190), while the nuts and bolts of the pressing pieces should
be of the best type of the glaze steel and automatically treated in the leg, the
down of the head and nut. The bolts should be of enough length in which one
screw thin appears through the nut during the full tensile case.
The bolts that are tightly turned should easily pass in the widen holes that it
enter in, while its screw part has a diameter that does not damage because of
the tensile and entering. It should be provided by marks that are put in a
prominent place on it to guarantee the true collection in the site. The flanges,
lockers and the measurements that prevent the vibration are provided under the
engineers approval when it is necessary.
When the corrosion danger is found, the bolts and studs are designed in which
the maximum stress does not exceed the half of the yield stress in all the
conditions. All the bolts, nuts and screws that subject to frequent adjustments
or dismantle for the maintenance should be made of the steel that is incorrodible and painted by nickel.
18.11. Spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment:
Before achieving the works or part of it, the contractor supply and store the
spare parts according to the recommendations of the manufacturing company
and in which be sufficient for five (5) years; this is subject to the employers
approval. Two groups of the tools, equipment and the maintenance tools are
supplied after the employers approval.
18.12. Extension/ Electric power feeding:
The pump is designed in which it works through the electric power that is
distributed to the substations that are in the well field or around it. The electric
power is distributed from such substations (Transformation substations) by the
estimative voltage that is 1 KV/60Hz with the three-phase feeding.
The pump is designed to work continually within the voltage field; whether
increased or decreased by 10% of the estimative voltage and decreased by 10%
of the estimative frequent for limited periods. This is without making extraheight in the temperature.
18.13. The electric power for building/ implementing and tests:
The contractor make his special measurements to provide the electric power
feeding for implementing and testing the works and also making the test when
achieving the pump. He is responsible for providing such feeding.
18.14. The temporal storage, protection and filling:
A. Filling:
The pump is protected enough and filled in which reaches to the site sound and
not damaged. The protection method and filling should be proper for sustaining

under the conditions that it may be exposed to during shipping and supplying to
the site. This is should be proper in which the filling is proper to bear the long
periods of the storage in the outside. It is prohibited that the one box of
shipping or the one charge include materials of a pump that is wanted to be
used in more than one part of the works.
All the materials of the pump are clearly marked to state its type like the filling
regulation that is put in each box or charge of shipping. It is protected by a
cover that is resistant to the weather conditions. The filling regulation should
be in conformity with the charge invoice or the commercial invoice that is
accompanied by full index of the cards organizer and the other paper works.
All the boxes and charges of shipping have clear marks, that are water-resistant
and could not be deleted, state the weight, the place of centering the load and
the place of hanging the lifting and tensile belt. It should also be provided with
marks that identify the filling regulations.
The glaze surfaces and the surfaces that are corrosion-resistant are protected by
using the rust-resistant varnish, the lubricate that of a high melt degree or its
equivalent. It is supplied with the pump; sufficient amount of the proper
solvent to remove such protection material.
All the flanges and mating surfaces are protected by wood plate or its
equivalent. The bolts that are used in fixing such template are not of the bolts,
screws, etc. that are a part of the final installations.
The engines are protected enough against the deterioration during transporting
it to the site and inside the site. The proper steps are particularly taken for
protecting the engine and the surfaces of the starters column from the
corrosion. This is either by proper treatment to the surfaces, or if this was not
possible, the engines may be charged with each other (Starters or the rotor
parts) with a proper humidity-absorbent material. Such materials should be
stamped inside protective plastic containers that are put inside filling boxes
stand on holders that are shocks-absorbent to obstruct damaging the bearings or
the windings during the transportation.
If such devices will be transported while they are fully installed, the movement
of the rotors is fixed by wedges that are put within the starters to double the
bearings protection.
2. Storage:
The pumps are stored at the site in roofed or uncovered depositories as proper.
They should be put at safe complex and there security to guard them. Unless
otherwise is approved, cables, electric switches and the control devices are
stored in depositories of lockers that are resistant to the weather conditions and
with good ventilation.
Pumps, (including the spare parts) that are not stored inside the charges or the
shipping boxes that are resistant to the weather conditions, are protected by the
covers that are resistant to the weather conditions to avoid harming it because
of the weather conditions. The additional protection is secured, when
necessary, against the machinery damages.

Pumps and engines may need to be stored in the site for long-term periods;
co